This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project to make the world's books discoverable online. It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the publisher to a library and finally to you. Usage guidelines Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. We also ask that you: + Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for personal, non-commercial purposes. + Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. + Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. + Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. About Google Book Search Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web at |http : //books . google . com/ ^ ESP A k i 1 ^ EficaJa d£? ií6.ooo.oíH -"^ r Til Digitized by Google i METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER. AMERICAN ORIGINAL EDITION. SPANISH CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR BY CHARLES MARQÜARD SAÜER. THOROUGHLY REVISED AND ENLARGED BY FERNANDO DE ARTEABA, HON. M. A.. TAYLORIAN TEACHER OF SPANISH IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD SEVENTH EDITION 1904. JULIUS GROOS SCHOENHOP BOOK COMPANY HEIDELBERG. BOSTON. Digitized by VaOOQlC 7 / HaRVARü ' JNlVERSnv LISRAkY y The method of Gaspey-Otto-Sauer is my own private property, having been acquired by parchase from the authors. The text-books made after this method are incessantly improved. All rights, especially the right of making new editions, and the right of translation for all languages, are reserved. Imitations and fraudulent impressions will be prosecuted according to law. I am thankful for any communications relating to these matters. Heidelberg. «Trillus Oro OS* Digitized by VjOOQIC Preface to the First Edition. The so-called Conversation method, uniting at once theory and practice, has met with the greatest success in Germany as well as in England, America, and France. Hitherto, more than twelve grammars, based on this method, have been published, and some of them, m>. — the ^^Englische Conversations-GrammatiJc" by Dr. Gaspey, the ^'Franeosische Conversations-GrammatiJc," and the ^^German Conversation-Grammar" by Dr. Emil Otto — have passed through 14 double editions, a result which plainly shows the value of the new method. My Italian Grammars, for English, French, and German pupils, have likewise been successful, and my new Spanish Grammar for Germans was so well received both by the critic and the public, that I have ventured to produce a Spanish Grammar for the use of English students. Without entering into particulars as to the method, which is sufficiently known in England and America, I beg leave to state, that this book is no translation of my Spanish Grammar for Germans, but a work adapted to the genius of the English language. The gramma- tical part is based on the best German works hitherto published on the ^^Grammaire espagnole" by Gildo, the "Gramática castellana" by D. Giró y Boma, Valencia 1852, and on the 12th edition of the excellent Grammar by D. Andres Bello, Madrid 1878. Besides these works. Digitized by VaOOQlC IV Preface. Salva has been carefully consulted. The Reading Exer- cises of the Second Part were selected from specimens of' the best Spanish authors given in the collection of FigueraSy Barcelona 1857. The arrangement of the grammatical materials is the same as in the other Conversation-Grammars. The alphabetical register of the irregular verbs has been placed at the end of the Second Part, as the pupil might easily be misled were it to follow the First Part, which is succeeded by an alphabetical hst of the verbs with double participles. Finally, I have to return my best thanks to Dr. Gaspey, who kindly revised the English text, and to Dr. von Frantzius, who attended to the Spanish. Toeplitz-Schoenau. C. M. Sauer. Preface to the Present Edition. The publication of the present volume is due to the wish of the well-known firm Jalins Groos to pro- vide a Spanish Grammar which should satisfy the growing requirements of the student of modern lan- guages. It is a revised Edition of the excellent Spanish Oonyersation-Grammar by Charles Marquard Sauer, into which many alterations and modifications have been introduced. The principal changes which may be noted are as follows: In Part I: Lesson 6th. Classification and Tabu- lation of the Augmentatives and Diminutives. Lesson 15th. Distinction between Possessive Ad- jectives and Possessive Pronouns. Digitized by VaOOQlC Preface. V Lessons 19 th. Fuller treatment of the theory go- verning the Position of the Adjective. Lesson 22 nd. Detailed explanation of the Euphonic basis of the apparent irregularities in certain verbs. Lesson 27 th. Discussion of the proper application of the Spanish Passive Voice, and of the restrictions to be observed in employing it. Lessons 35 th to 40 th. Recasting of the classification of the Irregular Verbs. Lesson 41st. A new section upon the Present Participle. In Part II: Introductory chapter. Insertion of the grammatical rules on accentuation laid down by the Spanish Academy. Lesson 3rd. Treatment of ^^o'' and of the Article in idiomatic phrases. Lesson 5 th. The use of the degrees of comparison in association with Verbs and Adverbs. These are the most important innovations, but it should be pointed out that the entire scheme of the explanatory exposition has been co-ordinated and revised, and that the Exercises and Translations have been correspondingly altered and enlarged. Further, a large amount of new material has been introduced into the Reading Exercises in order to give the student a glimpse into the geography, the history, and the manners and customs of Spain and South America. Some characteristic specimens of poetry and prose illustrative of the literature of the country, especially in its modern phases, are given both in the body of the work and in the two special chapters with which it concludes. It has seemed unnecessary in the present Edition to add a Vocabulary to the second as well as to the Digitized by VaOOQlC VI Preface. first Part. The student who has mastered the contents of the Grammar ought to be in a position to reap the advantages which may be obtained by consulting a complete dictionary. With regard to the use of the Vocabularies of Part I., inserted at the end of the volume, it should be observed that each irregular verb is accompanied by a reference to the page on which it is conjugated, and that the interpretation assigned to each word has been necessarily limited to the meaning or meanings in which it is found in the Beading Exercises or Traducciones. Taylor Institution, Oxford, Sept. 30th, 1903. Fernando de Arteaga y Pereira. Digitized by VaOOQlC VII Contents. First Part. Page Phonology. — The Alphabet 1 The Alphabet 1 Pronunciation 2 General Remarks on the Accent 5 Capital Letters 5 Separation of Words 6 On the Signs of Punctuation 7 1. Lesson. Lección primera. The Article 8 2. » Lección segunda. The Plural of Substantives . 11 3. » Lección tercera. The Substantives in connection with the Prepositions 14 4. » Lección cuarta. Prepositions 19 5. » Lección quinta. The Substantive without the Article 23 6. » Lección sexta. Augmentatives and Diminutives 26 7. » Lección séptima. Proper Names 28 8. » Lección octava. The Auxiliary Verb Jffaber, to have • 32 9. » Lección novena. Tener^ to have^ to hold . . 35 10. » Lección diez. Exercises 37 11. » Lección once. The Auxiliary Verb Ser, to be 40 12. » Lección doce. Estar ^ to be 43 13. » Lección trece. Exercises 45 14. » Lección catorce. Determinative Adjectives . . 48 1. Demonstrative Adjectives 48 2. Interrogative Adjectives 49 15. » Lección quince. Possessives 51 1. Possessive Adjectives 52 2. Possessive Pronouns 55 16. » Lección dieciséis. Numerals 56 1. Cardinal Numbers 56 17. » Lección diecisiete. Numerals 62 2. Ordinal Numbers. — Fractionals. — Mul- tiplicatives 62 18. » Lección dieciocho. Numerals 67 3. Indefinite Numerals 67 19. » Lección diecinueve. The Adjective 71 Digitized by VjOOQIC VIII Contents. Page 20. Lesson* Lección veinte. Degrees of Comparison ... 77 21. » Lección veintiuna. The Regular Verb .... 82 Reading Exercise: — Geografia de España . 90 22. » Lección veintidós. Euphonic Changes in Certain Verbs 91 Reading Exercise:— Cantares 94 23. » Lección veintitrés. Personal Pronouns .... 94 Reading Exercise : — (rco^ra/ta de España (Continuación) 97 24. » Lección veinticuatro. Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 98 Reading Exercise:— Cantare» 104 25. » Lección veinticinco. Demonstrative and Inter- rogative Pronouns 104 Reading Exercise: — Geografia de España (Continuación) 107 26. » Lección veintiséis. Possessive and Relative Pro- nouns 108 Reading Exercise : — Cantares 112 27. » Lección veintisiete. The Passive Voice .... 112 Neuter Verbs 116 Reading Exercise:— (reo^ra/ía de España (Continuación) 119 28. » Lección veintiocho. Pronominal or Reflective Verbs 119 Reading Exercise:— ios Padres y los Hijos 124 29. » Lección veintinueve. Impersonal Verbs .... 125 Reading Exercise: — G^eo^rra/ta de España (Conclusión) 128 30. » Lección treinta. Adverbs 129 Reading Exercise:— Xos Hijos y los Padres 133 31. » Lección treinta y una. The Adverbs continued 133 Reading Exercise: — La Opinion 139 32. » Lección treinta y dos. Prepositions 139 Reading Exercise: — El traidor despreciado . 142 33. » Lección treinta y tres. Conjunctions 142 Reading Exercise:- Canción de la Primavera 145 34. » Lección treinta y cuatro. Interjections .... 146 Reading Exercise:— í^sjoa^a. — Diversidad de lenguas 146 35. » Lección treinta y cinco, The Irregular Verbs . 147 First Class. Models: alentar, encender , adquirir 148 Reading Exercise: — España. — Diversidad de costumbres 153 36. » Lección treinta y seis. The Irregular Verbs continued 1^3 Second Class. Models: acordar, morder, Jugar 1-53 Reading Exercise: — Al caer de la tarde . . 158 Digitized by vaOOQlC Contents. IX Page 37. Lesson. Lección treinta y siete. The Irregular Verbs continued 159 Third Class. Models: nacer ^ crecer, co- nocer, lucir 159 conducir 160 Fourth Class. Model: pedir 163 Heading Exercise: — Diversidad de las Pro- vincias de España 166 38. » Lección treinta y ocho. The Irregular Verbs continued 166 Fifth Class. Model: sentir 167 Sixth Class. Models: huir, argüir , . . 168 Reading Exercise: — Diversidad de las Pro- vincias de España (Continuación) ... 171 39. » Ljccción treinta y nueve. Verbs entirely irregu- lar or with irregularities otherwise not classified 172 Models: andar j asir, caber 172 caer, oir, dar, decir 173 Reading Exercise: — Diversidad de las Pro- vincias de España (Continuación) . . . 176 40. » Lección cuarenta. The entirely irregular Verbs continued 176 Models: dormir 176 hacer, ir, morir, poder .... 177 poner, podrir, querer . . . . 178 saber, salir, valer, traer ... 179 venir, ver 180 Reading Exercise: — Diversidad de las Pro- vincias de España (Continuación) ... 182 41. » Lección cuarenta y una. The Participle ... 183 Present Participle 183 Past Participle 187 Alphabetical List of the Verbs with Double Participles 188 Alphabetical List of the Defective Verbs . 192 Reading Exercise:— Diversidad de las Pro- vincias de Es paña XConclusión) 193 Second Part. Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation 195 Orthography 195 Accentuation 199 The Signs of Punctuation 202 1. Lesson* The Gender of Substantives 204 Reading Exercise: — Descubrimiento de América 214 2. » The Plural of Substantives 215 Reading Exercise:— Descripción del Pais wie- jicano . . . • 219 Digitized by VaOOQlC X Contents. Page 3. Lesson* Use of the Article 220 Reading Exercise:— Descripción de la Ciudad de Méjico 232 4. » Possessives 232 Heading Exercise:— Descripción de la Plaza del Mercado de Méjico 236 5. » Degrees of Comparison with Verbs and Adverbs 237 Heading Exercise : — De las Biquezas del Perú 243 6. » Numerals 243 Indefinite Numerals 245 Heading Exercise: — De algunas Costumbres de los Incas 251 7. » Pronouns. — Personal Pronouns * 252 Heading Exercise: — De algunas Costumbres de los Incas (Continuación) 255 8. » Demonstratives. — Interrogative Pronouns . . 256 Demonstratives 256 Interrogative Pronouns 259 Heading Exercise :—^ranííe;?a y Decadencia de España 261 9. » Possessive and Helative Pronouns 262 Heading Exercise: — Grandeza y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 268 10. » Adverbs. — Their Position. — Affirmations and Negations 269 Peculiarities of certain adverbs 269 Position of the Adverbs 271 Affirmations and Negations 271 Heading Exercise: — Grandeza y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 274 11. » Prepositions. — Proper Prepositions (á, de, en, con) 275 Heading Exercise:— C?raw(íc;2:a y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 282 12. » The Prepositions continued (por, para) . . 282 Heading EyLetcise:— Grandeza y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 288 13. » Prepositions. — Conclusion (ante, contra^ desde, entre, Jiácia, hasta, según, sin, só, sobre, tra^) 289 Improper Prepositions 291 Heading Exercise:— Grandeza y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 294 14. » Use of Conjunctions 295 Connective Conjunctions 295 Disjunctive Coni unctions 296 Adversative Conjunctions 296 Conditional Conjunctions 298 Causal and Final Conjunctions 300 Subordinative Conjunctions 302 Heading Exercise:— 6r ran cierra y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 304 Digitized by VaOOQlC Contents. XI Page 15. Lesson. The Object of the Verb. — The Direct Object 305 Readmg Exerciae :— Grandeza y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 310 16. » Remarks on the Spanish Passive Voice and on some Spanish and English Verbs . . 311 Reading Exerci&Q:— Grandeza y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 317 17. » Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs 317 Reading Exercise:— GVande^ra y Decadencia de España (Continuación) 324 18. » The Moods 325 The Indicative Mood 325 The Subjunctive Mood 325 The Imperative Mood 828 Reading Exercise:— G'rand^áf a y Decadencia de España (Conclusión) 329 19. » The Use of the Tenses. — Sequence of Tenses 330 Use of the Tenses of the Indicative . . . 330 Reading Exercise: La Farsa de Avila . . . 336 20. » The Use of the Tenses. — Sequence of Tenses 337 The Tenses of the Indicative 337 The Tenses of the Subjunctive 338 Sequence of Tenses ^ 338 Reading Exercise: — A Don Pedro Fernandez de Castro 344 21. » The Infinitive Mood 345 The Absolute Infinitive 345 The Dependent Infinitive 346 Reading Exercise : —Lope Félix de Vega Carpió 350 22. » The Infinitive (Conclusión) 351 The Infinitive taking the place of an accessory sentence 351 Reading Exercise:— Bcíraí o del Duque de Wellington. ... • 353 23. » The Gerund 354 Reading Exercise: — Facia 359 24. » The Past Participle . . . . ' 360 Reading Exercise:— (Jarías de mi Sobrino . 367 JPúes€€í8. Oda Moral (Fray Luis de León) 368 Epístola Moral (Francisco de Bioja) 370 El Silencio (Ventura Buiz Aguilera) 375 La Duda (Gaspar Nuñez de Arce) 878 Consuelo Celestial (Argensola) 384 ^osa* Armas y Letras (Miguel de Cervantes) .... 385 El Castellano Viejo (Mariano José de Jjarra) . 389 Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs 398 Spanish-English Vocabulary 408 English-Spanish Vocabulary 417 Digitized by VjOOQIC Digitized by Google FIRST PART. Phonology. — The Alphabet. (Fonología. — El alfabeto.) § 1. The Alphabet. The Spanish Alphabet consists of 28 letters (rr not included), which are as follows: ChaiacteT. Name. Pronunciation. A, a, áh as a in áh. B, b, béh b bay. C, c, theh » th thanks. Ch, ch, tcheh » ch chain. D, d, déh » d day. E, e, éh e yellow. F, f, éffeh > f fellow. G, g, héh (guttural > sound, see § 2) ch loch. H, h, áhtchéh (is si- lent). I, i, ee » i fln. J, j, hohtah (gut- » tural sound). ch loch. K, k, káh k king. L, 1, elleh 1 lemon. LI, 11, ellieh » li punctilio. M, m, emmeh » m memory. N, n, énneh » n noble. % ñ. ennieh » gn mignonette. Spanish Cony.-Qrammar. ^1 Digitized by Google Character. 0. 0, P. P. Q. q. R, r, s, 8, T. t, u, u, V, V, X, X. Y, y. PronundatioD. in lost. P past. C cool. r red. 8 s^il. t tender, cool. b bay. X six. i index. Phonology. — The Alphabet. Name. oh as peh coo éhrreh ebsseb teb 00 béb ébkeece ee greeébgab [Greek ee] Z, z, tbébta » tb > thanks. N.B, — Of these letters a, e, i (y), o, u, are vowels, the others are consonants. K as well as W (doble v) occur only in a few foreign words, as Franklin , kilogramo, kilogram, Mámetro, kilometre, Westminster. § 2. Pronunciation, — Pronunciación. The pronunciation of the Spanish letters, as given above, is the nearest possible to the true Castilian one» but should be acquired viva voce from a native. The following are some remarks in connection with the special pronunciation of certain letters — i.e. : Towels. — Vocales, a is silent in the combinations gt^e, gui, que, qui; g in such cases losing its harsh, guttural sound: guerra^ war. queso, cheese. guitarra, guitar. química, chemistry. a after g, if not silent, requires a diaeresis: zaragüelles (Valentian) breeches. argüir, to argue. y by itself sounds like Spanish i (EngUsh e) ; before a vowel it is pronounced as y in year, año, you, usted; and at the end of a syllable forms a diphthong and sounds as y in hay, heno; boy, muchacho. y, and. ya, already. hay, there is. ^y^^j yesterday, hoy, to- day. .^. J?.— Though in no case is any diflFerence implied in regard to the quality of the vowel, Spanish vowels are short Digitized by VaOOQlC Phonology. — The Alphabet. 3 and passed over slightly, when not receiving any special stress or accent, such as o in hablo, I speak; long and pro- nounced with a pause and a depression of the voice when receiving — anywhere but at the end of a word — either the tonic or the written accent, as ó in hahldleSy he spoke to them; and acute and pronounced with a long pause and a raising of the voice when receiving either the tonic or the written accent at the end of a word, as ó in habló, he spoke. Diphthongs and Triphthongs. — Diptongos y triptongos. * Diphthongs are formed by the juxtaposition of two vowels {ae, ao, oa excepted). They are sounded as one syllable, and are indivisible in writing. Strong diphthongs (a) begin by a, e, o; weak diphthongs (b) with i, u; final i becomes y: (a) aire, air. seis, six. oigo, I hear. hay, there is. ley^ law. doy, I give. causa, cause. Ceuta, Ceuta. (b) gloria, glory. yegua, mare. cielo, sky. fuerm, strength. accionar, to act. muy, very. ^.jB.— Weak diphthongs may have their last vowel accented, which strong diphthongs may not: dio, he gave. cai fno diphthong), I fell. pié, foot. rei ^ » I laughed. fui, I went. oí > » I heard. Triphthongs are formed by the juxtaposition of three vowels i,e,, i, u of the weak diphthongs pre- ceding strong diphthongs ai, ei, which may then be accented. despreciáis, you despised. averigüéis, you may ascertain. agraviéis, you may ofFend. buey, ox. averiguáis, you ascertain. General Remark. The above combinations of vowels, however, do not always form a diphthong or triphthong, as may be seen by the following examples: pais, country. lei, I read. aunar, to unity. oí, I heard. tia, aunt. hiiir, to fly away. tio, uncle. acentúe, that I accentuate. fié, I confided. 1* Digitized by VaOOQlC 4 Phonology. — The Alphabet. averiguaríais, that you would ascertain. confiéis, that you may confide. continuéis, that you may continue. Consonants. — Consonantes. c acquires the hard sound of h before a, o, w, or a consonant, or at the end of a word: casa, house. actor, actor. cosa, thing. criado, servant. cuerda, rope. frac, evening-dress coat. N,B.—c is only doubled in such words as acción, action, lección, lesson (i.e., in the Latin combinations -dio), d is omitted in conversation in endings ado: un soldao (i.e., soldado), a soldier. están casaos (i.e., casados), they are married. g acquires the English sound of g in gall, gulf, guide before Oj o, u, ue, uij He, Hi, or a consonant, or at the end of a word: gato, cat. zaragüelles, breeches. digo, I say. argüir, to argue. gusano, worm. grano, grain. guerra, war. digno, worthy. águila, eagle. tagalog, Tagalog. q is only found in the combinations que, qui: buque, ship. quilla, keel. r is pronounced smoothly between two vowels, stronger in the combinations br, pr, cr, gr, dr, tr^ and at the end of words. At the beginning of words, as well as before consonants and after I9 n, 8, it has a trilling sound: héroe, hero. brazo, arm. retó, watch. hora, hour. prisa, hurry. razón, reason. crisis, crisis. hierba, grass. grano, grain. carta, letter. cuadro, picture. Ulrico, Ulric. otra, other. honradez, honesty. leer, to read. Israel, Israel. N.JB.—r is only doubled (rr) between two vowels when- ever not the smooth, but the trilling sound is to be produced: perro, dog. guerra, war. Digitized by VjOOQIC Phonology. — The Alphabet. 5 § 3. General Remarks on the Accent. — Obser- vaciones generales sobre el acento. (See Second Part, § 3.) Preliminary Remark. — The accentuation of Spanish words is always a pronotmced one; whilst, e.g. y in French the various syllables of the same word have almost a uniform accentuation, Spanish has (like English and German) one syllable which is the principal bearer of the accent. EuJe 1. Words terminating in vowels, also in w, 5, have the stress on the penultimate syllable, as: alguno^ accented: alguno; Granada, accented: Granada; continuo, accented: continuo. Bule 2. Words ending in consmants — n and $ excepted — or in j/ have the stress on the last syllable, as: reloj, accented: reloj; señor, accented: señor; ley, accented: ley. Bule S. Diphthongs ia, ie, to, also endings gua, güe, guo; cua, cue, cuo are always supposed to form one syllable; the stress, therefore, is \^A on \he penultimate^ thus: India, accented: india; nadie, accented: nadie; imperio, accented: imperio. An exception to Rule 3 is presented when the diphthong disappears, as in the verlal terminations in ia, as: tenia, tendría, and in other cases — i.e,: alegría, joy. frio, cold. continúo, I continue. Bule 4. Any deviation from the above general rules is indicated by the wHtten accent. Thus: Sócrates, Jesús, según, amé, etc. This accent is a sure guide to pronunciation. See further Part II., The Accent. § 4. Capital Letters. — Letras mayúsculas. In general these are used as in EngUsh; but the names of the months and days of the weeks, substan- tives and adjectives denoting nationality, etc., and the personal pronoun 1, yo, are written in small letters: el domingo, Sunday. tm inglés, an Englishman. julio, July. él y yo, he and I. Digitized by VjOOQIC 6 Phonology. — The Alphabet. § 5. The Separation of Words. — División de sílabas. 1. A simple consonant between two vowels always begins a syllable. Thus: a-legre; a-nU-go, etc. Note, — Ch, II, ñ are considered to be simple consonants, and are thus subject to the preceding rule. Thus: pU'Chero; mti-ñeca; o-Ua; ca-Uar, 2. If two consonants (rr excepted) come between two vowels, the first of these consonants closes the preceding syllable, and the second begins the following. Thus: pe^rro ; en^nohlecer ; ac-cidente ; aletar-gar ; adrhcrir, etc.* On the contrary, I and r, if preceded by another consonant (i.e., combinations like hi, br, cl, cr, pi, pr), are always given to the following syllable. Hence the separations are as follows: a-prieto; Jia-blar; a-clamación; enno-blecer, etc. N,B, —Exceptions : (a) Those combinations where 8 precedes Z or r, as: Í9~la; Is^aelj etc. (b) The combination tl in words beginning with at, as: at-leta; at-lante, etc. 3. Compound substantives do not follow the above rules. They should always be separated conformably to their components. Thus, desacordar is not separated desa- cordar but des-acordar, because acordar is the main component, whereas des is only a prefix, like the Eng- lish mis in misconception or dis in distrust. Further examples: ab-rogar (from rogar); a-delante (from delante); sub-arriendo (fr. arrendar). As, however, no word nor syllable may begin with s followed by another consonant, we are obliged to separate, in spite of etymology: ins-pirar; cos-tar; inS'tituir.** * H, though mute, is in such a case considered as a con- sonant. ** The Spanish language avoids so carefully at the beginning ., the mas- online and the feminine. There are two articles in Spanish as in English: the definite and the indefinite. The definite article for masculine substantives is elj for feminine substantives la. Examples: el padre, the father; la madre, the mother; el hijo, the son; la hija, the daughter; el sol- etado, the soldier; la abeja, the bee. Note,— A neuter gender, as, in German or Latin, does not exist in Spanish. If, however, an adjective, pronoun, or numeral is used as a substantive in a general sense, as: the good, the evil, (the) mine and thine, etc., where neither a per- son nor a thing, but the abstract idea is meant, the neuter article lo is used. This article has, of course, no plural. Examples: lo malo, the evil; lo hermoso, the beautiful j lo mio, mine (i.e., my property); lo tuyo, thine, etc. But: el mio, mine (i.e., brother, friend, etc.); el tuyo, thine {i.e., dog, etc.). Yet we must observe that whenever the meaning is not quite abstract, the article el should be used. Thus, el mal means a bad thing, while lo malo means the evil, in the ab- stract sense ; el bien is a good thing, something good, whereas lo bueno means the good in general. The indefinite article for masculine substantives is nn^ for feminine una. Their plurals unos^ unas^ mean several, any, some, a few, etc. Examples: \m padre, a father; una, madre, a mother; unos animales, some animals; anas iglesias, some churches. Digitized by VaOOQlC The Article. 9 Note,— Ab we stated in § 6, there is no apostrophe in Spanish. Therefore the final vowel of the article is never apostrophised as in French or Italian. The only change which the article undergoes for the sake of euphony is the following: JÍMÍe.— Before feminine substantives in the singular, beginning with a or ha, accented on the first syllable, la is replaced by el, and una by un. Thus; el are, the bird (for la ave); el agua, the water (for la agua); el alma^ the soul (for la alma); un águila, an eagle; un harpa, a harp. This rule holds good only in the singular, or when the word is not preceded by an ad- jective. Thus, las águilas, the eagles; una Mmida ave, a timid bird. If, however, the stress is laid on any other syllable than the first, the feminine article is used, as: la abeja, the bee; una amiga, a friend (f.). j In the following list of words the genders are indicated by I», (mase.) and /*. (fem.). Words. Padre, father. ave f., \ b" d madre, mother. pájaro m., / ^^ ' niño m., child. amigo m., friend. libro m., book. hermano, brother. balcón m., balcony. tía, aunt. caballo m., horse. puerta f., door. espejo m., looking-glass. pan m., bread. sombrero m., hat. pluma f., pen. árbol m., tree. portero m., porter. cetro m., sceptre. rey, king. perro m., dog. mwa, queen. rejilla f., \ ^ ^¿^^ ¿qué? what? ventanillo m., / ^ °* ¿quien? who? vestido m., dress. no, no. huerto m., orchard. si, yes. jardín m., garden. mi, my. casa {., house. en, in. flor f., flower. y, and. fusil m., gun. en España, in Spain. 8. yo tengo, I have.* P. noso/ros(^-as>¿cwei»os, we have. tú tienes, thou hast. vosotros (-as) tenéis, you have. él tiene, he has. ellos tienen, they have (m.). ella tiene, she has. eZZas tienen, they have (f.). * If the verb **to have" is not an auxiliary— i.e., used with a past part., as : I have loved, we shall have found— but a prin- Digitized by vaOOQlC 4 10 Lesson 1. Beadlngr Exercise. 1. La casa tiene un balcón, y la puerta tiene un ven- tanillo. La casa tiene portero, pero no tiene jardín. Tiene* una casa. En España una casa tiene portero. — ¿Quién tiene el libro? Yo tengo el libro. Tú tienes un libro. ¿Tienes tú un libro**? Él tiene un espejo. Mi padre tiene una casa. Mi madre tiene el pan. El nifio tiene el espejo. El nifto tiene un espejo. Mi tía tiene una casa. Mi hermano tiene un perro. El rey tiene un cetro. Nosotros tenemos una flor en el jardín. ¿ Tenéis vosotros huerto ? Si, tenemos un huerto y un árbol en el huerto. ¿Tenéis vosotros una flor? Yo tengo el vestido. ¿ Tiene ella un vestido ? Ella tiene un perro. El nifio tiene un hermano y una tía. El rey tiene un águila. Traducción, 2. I have the book. I have a book. Thou*** hast the dress. Hast thou a dog? Hast thou a looking-glass? He has the hat. My father has the bird. Has she a house? Has he the bread ? We have a hat. Have we a gun ? You have the book. They (m,) have a garden. Have they (f.) a horse? Have they (m.) a gun? The child has a book. The queen has a brother. My aunt has a bird. My brother has a dog. My mother has a pen. Conversación, ¿Qué tiene la casa? La casa tiene balcón y portero. ¿Qué tiene la puerta? La puerta tiene un ventanillp. ¿Tenéis (vosotros) un libro? Sí, (nosotros) tenemos un libro. ¿Quién tiene el libro? El niño tiene el libro. ¿Tiene el hermano un fusil? Sí, el hermano tiene un fusil. ¿Tenéis (vosotros) el vestido? No, (nosotros) tenemos el som- brero. ¿Tiene V. una casa? Sí, tengo una casa; tiene jar- din. ¿Tiene (él) el pan? Sí, (él) tiene el pan. ¿Tiene ella jardín ó huerto? Tiene huerto, y en el huerto un árbol. ¿Tiene el hermano un amigo? Sí, el hermano tiene un amigo. cipal verb, as: I have (i.e., possess) a book; he had {i.e., he possessed) a friend, the Spaniards do not use haber, which is only an auxiliary, but tener; properly "to hold." Thus: "I have a book" should not be translated ^'he un libro," but: tengo un libro—i.e., I "hold" a book (in my possession). * The personal pronouns are usually omitted before the verb. We give them here in order to acquaint the pupil with these forms. ** See § 6, 1. *** Although the 2nd pers. sing, is rarely used in English, we give it here in order that the pupil may become accustomed to its use in Spanish. ^^^^ Digitized by vaOOQlC The Plural of Substantives. 11 Second Lesson. — Lección segunda. The Plural of Sabstantires. — Plural de los sustantivos. The following are the general rules for the for- mation of the plural in Spanish: 1. All nouns ending in a single unaccented vowel add s; thus: El padre (father) Fl, los padres, la madre (mother) las madres, la carta (letter) las cartas, el libro (book) los libros, la mano (hand) las manos, la metrópoli (capital) las metrópolis. JYbfe.— Nouns ending in é follow the same rule, as: el pié, the foot, los pies; el café, coffee; los cafés, coffee-houses. 2. Nouns ending in a consonant, in a*, i, or in «^j ^1 oy, form the plural by adding es: La flor (flower) PL las flores. el pan (bread) los panes. el mar (sea) los mares. el mes (month) Iqs meses, la civdad (town) las ciudades, el amor (love) los amores, el bote (boat) los botes, el bajá (pasha) los bajaes. el aleli (gillyflower) los álelies. él ay (only used as an los ayes, wailings. exclamation) el rey (king) los reyes, la ley (law) las leyes, el buey (ox) los bueyes, el convoy (convoy) los convoyes. N.B,—Los padres, the parents. Los reyes, the king and queen. Remarks. § 1. With nouns ending in z the a is changed into c in the plural, as: La voz (voice) PI. las voces. la paz (peace) las paces. * Except: el papá, la mamá, el sofá', pi. los papás^ las ma' más, los sofas. Digitized by VjOOQIC 12 Lesson 2. § 2. A great many words have no singular. We give those most in use: Las afueras, the outskirts. ¡os modales, the manners. los alrededores, the surround- las nupcias, the wedding, ings. las patillas, the whiskers. las andas, the];bier. los pertrechos, implements of los caleonciUos, the pants. war. las cercanías, the neighbour- las sobras, the refuse, hood. las tenazas, the tongs. las cosquillas, tickling. las tijeras, the scissors. las entrañas, the entrails. las tinieblas, darkness. las exequias, the funeral. los víveres, the victuals. § 3. Some words have a meaning in the singular, and an additional peculiar meaning in the plural: el agtui, the water PL las aguas, floods, medicinal waters. d anteojo, the telescope los anteojos, the spectacles. él bien, goodness los bienes, the property. la cadena, the chain las cadenas, the oppression. el celo, the zeal los celos, jealousy. el dia, the day los dias, the Saint's day. la expresión, the expression las expresiones, "kind re- gards." la gracia, the grace, favour las gracias, the thanks. la memoria, the memory ia^ wemonas, "kind regards." el valor, the valour, value los valores, the securities, funds. § 4. Some others, masculine in the singular, may include the feminine in the plural, as: El hijo (son) PL los hijos, children (but also sons). el hermano (brother) los hermanos, brother and sister (but also brothers). el padre (father) los padres, the parents (but also fathers). el rey (king) los reyes, kings (but also king and queen). (See Second Part: On the PlnraL) Note,—ThQ expressions: Good morning, good afternoon, good evening, good night, are always plural in Spanish; thus: Buenos dias, good morning 1 Buenos tardes, good afternoon I, good evening 1 Buenas noches, good night! Words. El cuchillo, the knife. la pluma, the pen. el médico, the physician. la ventana, the window. Digitized by VaOOQlC The Plural of Substantives. 13 el azúcar, the sugar. la tinta, the ink. d barquero, the boatman. el tintero, the inkstand. el castillo, the castle. el palacio, the palace. ei cuadro, the picture. rico, rich. caballero, gentleman, Mr., Sir. oiro,-rt, another (see 18th Less.). Señora, lady, Mrs., Madam. mucho, -a, mviah; sus, his, her. Señorita, Miss. its, their. la vela, the sail. dos, two; ¿re^, three; cuatro, el lápiz, the pencil. four; cinco, five. eZ reloj, the watch. Verb. To tenia, I had. g Tenia (yo) ? had I? ny.-Grammar. 8 Digitized by VaOOQlC 18 Lesson 3. Plural Nom. €íquélUi8 mujeres, those women. Gen. de aquéllas mujeres^ of those women« Dat. á aqueUas mujeres, to those women. Ac. arguellas mujeres, á arguellas mujeres, those women. Words. Bios, God. el pais, the country, land. Ü Criador, the Creator. la criatura, the creature. Ü mundo, the world. el criado, the footman, servant. el primo, the cousin (m.). el caballero, the gentleman. la prima, the cousin (f.). grande, great. él amigo, the friend (m.). pequeño, little, small, short. la ciudad, the town. hermoso, beautiful. él vecino, the neighbour. viejo, old. él niño, the child, boy. ama, (he, she) loves. él sueño, the sleep, dream. aman, (they) love. la muerte, (the) death. llama, calls. d árbol, the tree. ve, sees. e2 cwario, the room. pero, but. 7a chimenea, the fireplace. ¿cómo? how? Za reina, the queen. 5(m, are. quiere, he (she) likes. no, no, not. quieren, (they) like. e^, II . son, \ doce, twelve. está, f ' están, f ^^' Beading Exercise. 5. El Criador ama á las criaturas. El sueño es el hermano de la muerte. La prima es la amiga del primo. El vecino llama al criado. El rey es el padre del país. La reina ama al rey. Dios es el Criador del mundo. La casa tiene doce ventanas. [Yo] no veo (see) á los hombres. ¿Tenias tú los relojes? Inglaterra es pequefía, pero las ciudades del país son grandes. España es grande, pero las ciudades del país son pequeñas. En España los cuartos de las casas son pequeños y no tienen chimeneas. El caballero llama á los criados. Las mujeres aman á los niños. Estas casas pequeñas son her- mosas. El amigo del primo llama al miado del caballero. Los árboles del castillo son viejos. Las casas de la ciudad no son viejas. Traducción. 6. Those men love the friends of the cousin. The death of the king. The houses of the towns are large and old. The small country has large towns. The cousin (f.) loves the cousin (m.), but the cousin (m,) does not love (no — ) the cousin (f,). The gentleman calls the footman. The king loves the knights. Digitized by Google Prepositions. 19 and the knights love the king. The child of the neighbour is snaall. The windows of the house are large. The king is the founder of the small town. The knight had two cousins (f,) and three cousins (m,), Man is small, and the world is large. The woman loves the child. The children love the woman. The kings are the fathers of the countries. The foot- man calls the neighbours of the knight. The castles of the queen are old. The house of the footman is small. That man does not see* the child of this woman. Does he see** those women? The neighbour loves these men and those men. Conversacióu. ¿Es pequeño el pais? ¿Cómo son los cuartos? ¿Ve el primo á la prima? ¿Tuvieron los reyes el país? ¿Llama el vecino al niño? ¿ J. quién (whom) llama el ca- ballero? ¿Es pequeña la ciudad? ¿Tiene la reina dos castillos ? ¿Cuántas (how many) ven- tanas tiene la casa? ¿Tiene el vecino una casa? ¿Ve el caballero á este hom- bre? ¿Es grande el palacio? ¿No son hermosas estas flo- res? ¿Á quién ama la prima? No, es grande; pero las ciu- dades del pais son pequeñas. Son pequeños y no tienen chimenea. No, el primo no ve á la prima. Los reyes tuvieron la ciudad y el pais. No, el vecino llama al caballero. El caballero llama el criado. No, señor, la ciudad es grande. No, la reina tiene tres castillos y dos palacios. La casa tiene veinte (20) ven- tanas. El vecino tiene dos casas. El caballero ve á estas mu- jeres. El palacio es mvij(very) grande. Estos alelíes son muy hermosos. La prima quiere al primo y al hermano. Fourth Lesson. — Lección cuarta. Prepositions. — Preposiciones. Some prepositions appear almost in every sentence, and should therefore be learned at once. The Spanish prepositions govern no particular case— e.e.^ they are * Transí, not sees, ** Transí, sees he? Digitized by VjOOQIC 20 Lesson 4. simply placed before the nouu. — Full particulars of adverbial phrases formed with prepositions will be given in Lesson 32: On Prepositions. The prepositions most in use are the following: at at, to, in. liacia, towards. ante, before. h not it know. Digitized by VjOOQIC 24 Lesson 5. § 4. The above rules hold good in the nomina- tive and accusative cases only. If, however, the noun is governed by another word (substantive, verb, or ad- jective), de comes before it (as in English o/*, etc.). Ex.: A piece of bread, un pedazo de pan. A bottle of wine, una botella de vino. Full of sugar, lleno de azúcar. Laden with booty, cargado de presa. Worthy of confidence, digno de confianza. By this phrase with de, English compound substan- tives are rendered, as: The fencing-master, el maestro de esgrima; the slave-trade, el tráfico de esclavos. Ad- jectives denoting materials are expressed in the same way, as: a gold watch, un reloj de oro. § 5. Words denoting quantity require no pre- position after them ; thus : little cheese, poco queso; Uttle hope, poca esperanza; fewer books, mmos lihros; many times, muchas veces. (And not as in French, peu de livres; moins de fromage, etc.) § 6. If, however, quantity is expressed by a word preceded by the article, as: a little of this wine, etc., the preposition de should follow. Thus: Little bread, poco pan, but : A little of this bread, un poco de este pan. Words. La naranja, the orange. la tía, the aunt. el limdny the lemon, citron. el dinero, the money. la aceituna, the olive. vergonzoso, -a, shameful. el género, the kind, species. todo, -a, all, whole. el aceite, the oil. todos, -as, all (plural). el papel, the paper. visto, seen. el barco, the ship. produce, produces. el trigo, the corn. déme V., give me. la plata, the silver. me falta (or necesito), I want. el cobre, the copper. he, (I) have ; ha, he (she) has. el lino, the flax, linen. conoce V., you know. la carne, the meat. piensa, thinks. el jabón, the soap. estar pensando, to be thinking. el tio, the uncle. pero, but; que, than. Verb. Yo soy, I am. nosotros (-as) somos, we are. tú eres, thou art. vosotros (-as) sois, you are. él es, he is. ellos \ „^ ..^^ ^^^ ella es, she is. ellas f '^' ^^"^ ^^^' Digitized by V^OOQIC The Substantive 'without the Article. 25 N.B,—ThQ auxiliary do, does, etc., in questions is never translated into Spanish ; the corresponding verbal form of the principal verb being given instead— i.e. : What does Spain produce? ¿ Qué produce España ? Heading Exercise. 9. España produce vino, naranjas, limones, aceitunas y todo género de frutas. Déme V. papel, pluma y tinta. El pais tiene trigo, aceite, plata, cobre y lino. Me falta (I want, lit. it fails me) carne y agua. Este hombre no tiene pan. ¿ Tiene el primo unos libros? El hermano tiene agua y jabón. Las naranjas y limones son hermosas frutas. El niño no quiere las aceitunas. He visto árboles y flores, jardines y palacios. ¿Conoces al maestro de esgrima? Déme V. un pedazo de pan y una botella de vino. Tengo poca esperanza. El tío tiene menos dinero que la tía. He visto á mi fio muchas veces en casa de aquel hombre. Déme V. un poco de tinta y unas plumas. El primo tiene poca tinta, pero tiene muchas plumas. Este hombre no es digno de confianza. Me falta papel y tinta. Traducción. 10. I want some paper and ink, pens and pencils. Do you know the fencing-master? Slave-trade is shameful. We have little cheese, but we have much bread. Give me a little bread and a little cheese. This country has copper and silver, oranges, citrons, and olives. I have seen flowers and fruits. The uncle has no sugar, and the aunt has no coffee. I have not seen the king and the queen. This man has less cour- age than that man. What does Spain produce? Spain pro- duces all kinds of fruits. Do you know my uncle and my aunt? Give me a piece of meat and a bottle of beer. This ship is laden with sugar and coffee. This man always thinks (is always thinking) of (en) wine and beer, and this woman always thinks of dresses and flowers. Has the uncle fine pictures ? The aunt has some fine pictures, but the uncle has no pictures. ConTersación. ¿Qué Cw;Aa¿) produce España? España produce vino, naran- jas, limones y aceitunas. ¿Qué produce Alemania (Ger- Alemania produce vino, trigo many)^ y todo género de frutas. I Déme V. algunas plumas! No tengo plumas. ¿Qué tiene el país? El país tiene cobre y plata. ¿Tiene el primo unos libros? El primo tiene muchos libros y mucho papel. Digitized by VjOOQIC 26 Lesson 6. ¿ Quiere el nifio las aceitunas ? El nifio no quiere las aceitunas. ¿Qué ha visto el tío? Ha visto árboles y flores, jar- dines j palacios. ¿ Conoce V. al maestro de es- No conozco (I know) al maestro grima? de esgrima. I Déme V. un pedazo de pan! No tengo pan. ¿ Tiene el tío muchos cua- No tiene muchos cuadros, pero dros? tiene algunos. ¿Es digno de confianza ese No, señor, no lo es. hombre? ¿Qaó le falta al hermano? Le (him) falta (== he wants) tinta y papel. Sixth Lesson. — Lección sexta. Angmentatives and Dlminntives. — Ánmentativos y diminativos. The Spanish language, like the Italian, abounds in endings modifying the original meaning of the substan- tives as well as the adjectives, adverbs, etc., to which they are applied. Besides the idea of augmentation and diminution, these endings very often convey an accessory idea of tenderness or ugliness, love or contempt, praise or derision, etc. The shades which the original signifi- cation may thus acquire are so manifold that they are often utterly inexpressible in other languages, even by two or more adjectives. Thus the proper use of these endings offers great difficulties to the foreigner, and can only be properly learned in daily intercourse with Spaniards; the more so as they may not be used indifferently with every substantive or adjective. The most important of these endings are: For the Aagmentatives: 1. on, azo^ and ote for the masculine; ona, aza, and ota for the feminine. These endings express augmen- tation in general. Examples: Hombre, man; homhrón, tall man; mu¿er, woman; mujerona; perro, dog; perrazo, a big dog; libro, book; libróte, old book. Notes, — 1. Endings in on may be combined with azo. — 2. By the addition of ote the noun becomes masculine. Digitized by VjOOQIC Augmentatives and Diminutives. 27 Examples : Hombrón, hombronazo ; mtijerona, mujer&nor za; capa (i.)» (Spanish) cloak; capote (m.), large cloak. O&servaiio».— Frequently the termination azo does not imply augmentation, but simply the effect of the instrument denoted by the noun. Thus: el canon means the gun, can- non; el cañonazo^ the detonation of a cannon; el fusil, the gun; el fusilazo, the shot of a gun. 2. acho, acMn, and arrón. Over and above the idea of augmentation, these suggest an accessory idea of disproportion, clumsiness, and disdain. Examples: Término, word; terminacho, vulgar word; hombre, man; hombrachdn, a fat, big fellow; bobo, a silly man; bobarron, a stupid fool. For the Diminntives: 'ito, 'ico, 'illo. 'uelo, 'CitO, 'CiCO, 'Cillo, '^uelo, -ecito, -ecico. 'CCillo, -e^uelo, 'Cedto, 'cecico, 'Cecilio, 'Cemuelo with their feminines. Notes. — Ico (tea) and their derivatives are not truly Castilian, but local terminations used mostly in Aragón. Ito (ita) and their derivatives are the genuine Castilian endings, implying not so much diminution as youth, loveliness, fondness y etc. Thus: sewora, lady, Mrs. ; señorita, ííiss; señor, Mr., Sir ; señorito, young gentleman, Master, etc. ; mujer, wo- man; mujercita, nice young woman. Illo (ilia) expresses diminution and disdain, thus: hombre, man ; hombrecillo, little man (of no significance) : cosa, thing; cosiUa, a trifle. Uelo (uela) expresses the same in a very strong degree, as: mujerziiela, a vulgar little woman; aldehuela, insigni- ficant little village. The terminations acho and etón for augmentation, ete (eta), ejo, in (ino) for diminution, are less frequent and best learned by practice. Beadingr Exercise, 11.. Aquel hombrón que vá con aquel porrazo es un ri- cachón \ Es una mujerona con unos ojazos^ muy grandes y una vocecilla chillona*. La pobretona* no tiene dineros ^e dado mi capote* á aquel mocetón'^. Hemos oído® fusi- 1 very wealthy man. ^ large eyes. » little squeaky voice. * pobre, poor. » dinero, money. « capa, cloak. ^ mozo, boy. * oído, heard. Digitized by VjOOQIC 28 Lesson 7. lazos y cafionazos. La sefiorita. está con su perrito^ en la casa de Juanita. La pobrecita^*^ habla al sefiorito. Los pa- jarillos están en el nido^^. Ese torazo^^ come^^ heno^* y yerba ^*. En esa aldehuela^^ hay algunos gitanos^''. ¡Qué hermoso peceznelo!^^ El hidalgote^^ tuvo que vender (to sell) sus palacios y jardines. Las florecillas*® brotan (spring up) y las avecillas'^ cantan (sing) *^. Mi hermana tiene una saÚta** muy pequefiita^*, pero muy bon¡ta*^ El caballerito no quiere estudiar. Comió (He eats) un pedacito^* de un huevecillo^'^. Las manguitas^® del vestidillo son preciosas (beautiful). Las ovejitas^^ y los conejuelos*^ juegan*^ en el campo^^. El pobrecito nifio se cayó (fell)^ y se hizo dafio en las manecitas^^. » perro, dog. i® pobre, poor. " nido, nest. »« toro, bull. " come, eats, i* heno, hay. " yerba, grass. ** aldea, village. " gitano, gipsy. ^^ pez, fish. ^^ hidalgo, nobleman, knight. 20 flor, ñower. ^i ave, bird. 22 animal, animal. *« sala, drawing- room. 24 pequeño, little, small. 26 bonita, pretty. 2* pedazo, piece. 27 Jiuevo, egg. 28 manga, sleeve. 29 oveja, sheep, ^o conejo, rabbit. ** juegan, play (3rd pers. pi.). ^' campo, field. »3 la mano, hand. Seventh Lesson. — Lección séptima. ^ Proper Names. — Nombres propios. § 1. As in English, proper names of persons, towns, and coww^ne^ take no article, as: Car?05, Charles; Elvira, Madrid, etc. They are varied as in English: Carlos, Charles. Madrid, Madrid. de Carlos, of Charles. de Madrid, of Madrid. á Carlos, to Charles. á Madrid, to Madrid. España, Spain. de España, from Spain. d España, to Spain. Exceptions are: (a) Proper names quahfied by an adjective, as: el pobre Luís, poor Lewis ; la desdichada Elvira, (the) un- fortunate Elvira; la América meridional, South America. Frequently the proper name is followed by the adjective, as: Alejandro el Grande, Alexander the Great. The adjective Santo (San), saint, holy, before proper names never admits of the article, thus: San Pablo, St. Paul; Santa Teresa, St. Theresa. Also, a proper name takes the article when used as a common noun, thus: el Apolo de Belvedere, the Digitized by vaOOQlC Proper Names. 29 Apollo (statue) of Belvedere; el César de su siglo, the Csesar (i.e., the foremost general) of his century. In this signification, proper names may be used in the plural; as: los Césares son raros, men Uke CsBsar are rare, (b) The names of certain countries, provinces, towns, etc., as: El Brasil, Brazil. ZaJIfanc^a (a Spanish region). El Canadá, Canada. La Patagonia, Patagonia. El Cabo, The Cape. La Carolina (a Spanish town). El Perú, Peru. La Coruña, Corunna. El Havre, Havre. La Granja (a Spanish royal El Ferrol, Ferrol. residence). La Florida, Florida. Indifferent are: China, and la China, China. Persia, and la Persia, Persia. Africa, and el Africa, Africa. § 2. Names of mountains, volcanoes, rivers^ capes, and seas take the article, as: Los Pirineos, The Pyrenees. La Sierra Nevada, Nevada Ridge (Spain). El Ebro, The Ebro. El Duero, The Douro. El Vesubio, Mt. Vesuvius. El Machichaco, a cape (N. of Spain). El Cantábrico, The Bay of Biscay. El Mediterráneo, The Mediterranean. Indifferent are: Sierra Morena, and la Sierra Morena \ (^^^^^tains). Moncayo, and el Moncayo / Remarks. (a) The Saxon genitive — as: FredencT^s brother, etc. — cannot be imitated in Spanish, but must be rendered by means of the preposition de: Charleses hat, el sombrero de Carlos, (b) With proper names of countries and towns the pre- position in or at is rendered by en, and to by á; thus: in Spain, en España; in England, en Inglaterra; at (in) Paris, en Paris ; at Berlin, en Berlin, — To go to Paris, to France, to Spain: ir á Paris, á Francia, á España, Note. — After the verb salir, to set out, to depart, the pre- position para is required, thus: Salgo para Italia, I set out for Italy. — The verb entrar, to enter, takes en; thus: entrar en casa, en Italia, etc. Digitized by VjOOQIC 80 Lesson 7. (c) The preposition on in such cases as Stratford on Avon is translated by de; as: Aranda de Duero. Miranda de Ebro. Words. La provincia, the province. Cataluña, Catalonia. la seda, the silk. [very. la valentía, the valour, bra- numeroso, -a, numerous. Enrique, Henry. Guillermo, William. Viena, Vienna. Austria, Austria. Ñapóles, Naples. la capital, the capital, me- tropolis. la iglesia, the church. la capa, the (Spanish) cloak. (él) invierno, (the) winter. la navegación, the navigation. menos, less. He, I have. has, thou hast. ha, he (she, it) has. Don, Mr. Doña, Mrs., Miss. el siglo, the century. aqui está, here is. aqui están, here are. hoy, to-day. dedicado, -a, dedicated. célebre, \ famoso, -a, > famous. afamado, -a, J estimado, -a, esteemed. lleva, wears (said of gar- ments). se lleva, is worn. quiero, I want, I will. ir, to go. fueron, were (3rd pers. plur.). hemos, we have. habéis, you have. han, they have. Beading Exercise. 12. Aquí está la capa de Don Luis. En invierno la gente lleva capa en España. La capa se lleva mucho en Madrid. Madrid es la capital de España. Aqui están los guantes de Sofía. He visto el castillo del rey de Sajonia. Alejandro el Grande fué rey de Macedonia. Viena es la capital de Austria. ¿Dónde está el Señor Herrero? ¿Dónde están los niños del señor Herrero? París es una gran capital. María es la her- mana de Enrique. Guillermo es el primo de Carlos. Esta iglesia está dedicada á San Pablo y á Santa Teresa. He visto el Apolo de Belvedere y la Venus de Médicis. Don Pedro es el hermano de Doña Elvira. El Don Carlos es una célebre tragedia de Schiller. Aquí están los jardines y los palacios del rey. Napoleon fué el César de su siglo. Andalucía es una región de España. Los vinos de España y la seda de Italia son estimados. Quiero ir á España y á Italia. Los ejércitos españoles fueron siempre famosos por su (their) valentía. El ejército de Italia es menos numeroso que el ejército de Rusia. Salgo para América. Digitized by VjOOQIC Proper Names. Traducción. 13. Where is Lewis's hat? Here are Elvira's gloves. Have yon seen the castles of the Qaeen of Spain? Paris is the capital of France, and Madrid is the capital of Spain. Henry is William's brother, and Elvira is Mary's cousin. Hast thou seen William and Charles ? To whom (Á quiénes) are these churches dedicated? They are dedicated to St. Paul and to St. Ann (Ana). The King of Saxony and the Queen of Eng- land are in Paris. French wool and Spanish wines are cele- brated. Wilt thou go to France or te Italy? I will go to Spain, and te-morrow I set out for Madrid. The Spanish army is less numerous than the Italian army. Barcelona is a province of Catalonia. Have you read (leído) the tragedies of Schiller and the comedies (comedias) of Moliere? Italian silk is famous. The situation of England is very favourable to navigation. To-day we have seen William and Henry, Mary and Theresa. Here are Charles's books. (Mount) Vesuvius is near (cerca de) Naples. Spanish wool (lana) is much es- teemed. Conversación. ¿Dónde está el sombrero de D. (Don) Luis? ¿Qué ha viste el extranjero (foreiffner)^ ¿ Cómo se llama (is called) la capital de España? ¿Y cómo se llama la capital de Inglaterra? ¿Don Carlos es el hermano de Doña Ana? ¿Á quién está dedicada esa iglesia? ¿Cómo se llama aquella fa- mosa tragedia de Schiller? ¿Adonde (Whither^ where) quieres ir? ¿Dónde está el rey de Ingla- terra? ¡Mariana, trae (bring) la en- salada (salad)\ ¿Qué se dice del ejército es- pañol? Está sobre la mesa. Ha visto el palacio del rey y los jardines de la reina. La capital de España se llama Madrid. La capital de Inglaterra es Londres. No, señor, es su (her) primo. Está dedicada á San Pablo y á Santa María. Se titula Don Carlos, infante de España. Quiero ir á Italia y á Ingla- terra. Está en Windsor. ¡Aquí está, señor! Que fué siempre famoso por su valentía. Digitized by VjOOQIC 82 Lesson 8. Eighth Lesson. — Lección octava. The Auxiliary Verb Haber, to haye. — El yerbo auxiliar haber. Indicative Mood. Simple Tenses. Present (To) he, I have. (nosotros, nosotras) hemos (habernos)* we have. (tú) has, thou hast. (vosotros, vosotras) habéis, you have. (él, ella; V,) ha, he, she, has; (ellos, ellas; Y Y.) han, they you have. have; you (pi.) have. Imperfect. Había, I had. habíamos, we had. habías, thou hadst. habíais, you had. había, he had. habían, they had. Definite. Hube, I had. hubimos, we had. hubiste, thou hadst. hubisteis, you had. hubo, he had. hubieron, they had. Future. Habré, I shall have. habremos, we shall have. habrás, thou wilt have. habréis, you will have. habrá, he will have. habrán, they will have. Conditional Mood. Habría, I should have. habríamos, we should have. habrías, thou wouldst have. habríais, you would have. habría, he would have. habrían, they would have. Imperative Mood. Hé (tú), have (thou). Habed (vosotros), have (you). Past Participle. Habido, had. Compound Tenses. Compound Perfect. He \ I have j hemos\ we have \ has ¡habido, thou hast > had. habéis)habido, jou ha.Ye \hdLa. ha j he has j han | they have» * Almost obsolete. Digitized by VjOOQIC The Auxiliary Verb Haber, to have. 33 Pluperfect. HaUa \ g I had | habíamos] |* we had \ habías > g thou hadst ; had. habíais \ g you had > had. habia js^ be had ) habían ) o they had ) 2nd Pluperfect Hube \ ^ I had | hubimos \ g we had \ hubiste)^, thou hadst) had. ^w6¿s¿cis>g you had > had. hubo ]^ he had ) hubieron) S" they had) Compound Future, Habré \ f I shall ) , habremos \ ^ we shall ) , habrás >|t thou wilt } ?^T® habréis }^. you will } ^*T® habrá }F be will J ^^^' habrán }P they will! *^*^- Compound Conditional. Habría] I" I should \ , habríamos) ^ we should K habrías) |í thou wouldst) , , habríais ) |í you would >, ^T® ^&na js' be would ]^^^' habrían ) §^ theywouldj^^^- Gerund (Present Participle). Habiendo, having. Subjunctive Mood. Present Haya, I have. hayamos, we have. hayas, thou have. hayáis, you have. haya, he have. hayan, they have. Imperfect. Hubiese, that I had. hubiésemos, that we had. hubieses, that thou hadst. hubieseis, that you had. hubiese, that he had. hubiesen, that they had. Future. (Si) hubiere, *(if) I shall have. (Si) hubiéremos, we shall have. » hubieres, thou wilt have. » hubiereis, you will have. > hubiere, he will have. » Aw&^erew, they will have. Conditional. Hubiera, (that) I should have, hubiéramos, we should have. hubieras, thou wouldst have. hubierais, you would have. hubiera, he would have. hubieran, they would have. Compound Tenses. These are formed like those of the Indicative, by adding habido to the respective form of the simple tense, thus: Haya habido, that I have had. hubiese habido, that I bad bad. hubiere habido, that I shall have had. hubiera habido, that I should have had. Spanish CJonv.-Grammar. 3 Digitized by VaOOQlC 84 Lesson 8. Remarks. 1. The tenses of the Indicative Mood are the same as in the other Romance* languages; the Subjunctive Mood, how- ever, has two tenses peculiar to the Spanish language. Of their employment we shall speak when treating of the regular verb, and again in Less. 20, Part. IL These tenses are the Fu- ture and the CondUianal. For the present we merely state that the Conditional of the Indicative and that of the Sub- junctive differ but little in their signification, so that they may be used indiscriminately. Thus the sentence: He would have had friends, is either: Habria tenido amigos or hubiera tenido amigos. 2. In Conditional clauses the verb stands in the Imper- fect of the Subjunctive, whereas the verb of the principal sentence is put in the Conditional of the Indicative or of the Subjunctive; thus: If I had had money (conditional clause), I should have had friends (principal clause). Si huMese** tenido dinero habria tenido amigos, or » » » » hubiera » » 3. For the Future of the Subjunctive see Part IL, On the Use of Tenses. 4. Like ser (to be) the verb haber is a true auxiliary — i.e., it only forms the compound tenses of other verbs, as: ha sido, he has been; hubo amado, he had loved. If, on the contrary, "to have" is a principal verb— i.e., if it governs an direct and signifies to possess, as : I have a house = I possess a house— it must always be rendered by tener (pro- perly "to hold"), thus: I have money, is not transí, he dinero, but luengo dinero. B.eh&á friends, is » » hubo amigos, » Tuvo amigos. For this reason, the Imperative of haber is no longer used in conversation. 5. In the signification of the English "there is," "there are" (and the French il y a), haber is still a principal verb^ but only in the 3rd person of the singular; hay in some cases is replaced by ha, as ha mucho que no le he visto, it is a long time since I have seen him. * i.e., of Latin (Roman) origin— wx?., French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Provencal, etc. ** We may also employ the Conditional of the Subjunctive after si (if), as: si hubiera, if I had, but we must use the same tense in the following principal sentence, or the Conditional of the Indicative : Si hubiera tenido dinero, haibria tenido amigos. » » » » , hubiera » » Digitized by VjOOQIC Tenefj to have, to hold. 85 Hay* hombres, there are men. hahia * » were men. hubo » » were men. habrá » > will be men. habría » > would be men. Only in this signification the compound tenses with the participle habido are admissible, as: " Habrá habido hombres, there will have been men. 6. Haber de with the Infinitive corresponds to "must," "shall," etc., as: He de pagarle, I must (shall) pay him. Tener que has the same signification, as: Tengo que Tiablar con ü, I must speak with him (lit. I have to speak, etc.). 7. The polite mode of addressing a person (the English you) introduces a pecuHiar word : Vuestra merced (your Grace) which always requires the third person singular of the verb. The full form of this word is no longer used, it having been replaced by usted — in writing, F. — Usted is the common mode of addressing all persons, without distinction of rank, provided they are not relations of the speaker. The Spaniard addresses even a beggar in V. The plural form ustedes (accented ustedes), a contraction from vuestras mercedes, short- ened Yds. or VV., is used in addressing several persons. The verb is then in the third person plural. Thus: Have you ? is translated: ¿Tiene V.? /pron. tiene uste(d)]. Had you? ¿Tuvo v.? Shall you (plur.) have? ¿Tendrán Yds,? (pron. tendrán ustedes). Near relations commonly address each other in tú (thou), without totally excluding V,, as: (tú) Puedes decir^ meló, you may tell it me (speaking to a brother). (As the verb haber offers too little material for Reading £xercise and Translation, we at once pass on to the verb tener, which however is no auxiliary, but a principal verb.) Ninth Lesson. — Lección novena. Tener, to have, to hold. Indicative. Present, Tengo, I have (hold). tenemos, we have (hold). tienes, thou hast. tenéis, you have. tiene, he has. tienen, they have. * In the compound tense (Compound Perfect), however, ha (and not hay) habido, there has been (there was). 8* Digitized by VaOOQlC 86 Lesson 9. Imperfect. Tenia, I had (held). teníamos, we had (held). tenias, thou hadst. teníais, you had. tenia, he had. tenían, they had. Definite, Tuve, I had (held). tuvimos, we had (held), ¿tiria^e, thou hadst. tuvisteis, you had. ¿t«t;o, he had. tuvieron, they had. Future, Tendré, I shall have (hold). tendremos, we shall have. tendrás, thou wilt have. tendréis, you will have. tendrá, he will have. ¿cwdrán, they will have. Conditional. Tendría, I should have (hold), tendríamos, we should have. tendrías, thou wouldst have. tendríais, you would have, fcnilria, he would have. tendrían, they would have. Imperative. Ten, have (thou). Tened, have (you). Participle. Tenido, had (held). . Compound Tenses, Compound Perfect, He \ I have j hemos\ we have | has > tenido, thou hast > had. ^aí>á¿5| tenido, you have ;had. ^a I he has ) ^an j they have J Fluptrfect, Había \ S" I had \ habíamos \ ^ we had | habías ) |. th. hadst ; had. habíais > |. you had > had. había ) §" he had | habían ¡S' they had) 2nd Pluperfect. Hube I ^ I had | hubimos \ S" we had \ hubiste)^ th. hadst /had.' ^tt6is¿eis>|. you had >had. hubo ) ^ he had ) huibieron ) §" they had ) Compound Future, Habré \^ I shall 1 , ' habremos]"^ we shall 1 1,-_^ habrás }| thou wilt l^^d ^<^^réis >|. you will )^J^ "' ] ' habrán J Compound Conditional, i i Ihave ^cib^ici'^os , g. th. wouldst > , T habríais / 1. you would > . , S' he would J ^^^' habHan J I' they wouldj ^^^' Digitized by VjOOQIC habrá }^ he will ) ^^^' habrán ¡^ they will)^*^- Compound Conditional, Habría ) §• I should 1 , habríamos) ^ we should K Exercises. 37 Gerund. Teniendo, having (holding). Subjunctive. Present. Tenga, I have. tengamos, we have. tengas, thou have. tengáis, you have. tenga, he have. tengan, they have. Imperfect. Tuviese, that I had. tuviésemos, that we had. tuvieses, that thou hadst. tuvieseis, that you had. tuviese, that he had. tuviesen, that they had. Future. (Si) Tuviere, if I shall have. (si) tuviéremos,iíyíeshsllhd,ye, > tuvieres, if thou wilt have. » tuviereis, if you will have. > tuviere, if he will have. » tuviesen, if they will have. Conditional. Ti«t;iera, that I should 1 ^ ¿tivíáramo^, that we should have. tuvieras, that thou wouldst \ % tuvierais, that you would have. tuviera, that he would J ® iwwcraw, that they would have. Compound Tenses. These are formed, as in the Indicative mood, by adding tenido to the respective simple tenses of haber. Thus : Compound Perfect : Haya tenido, I have had. Pluperfect: Hubiese tenido, that I had had. Compound Future : HuMere tenido, that (if) I shall have had. Compound Conditional: Hubiera tenido, that I should have had. N.B. — The Participle, if used with haber, is always in- variable; if with tener, it is not. Thus: ella había amado, she had loved; ellos han tenido, they have had; las casas que he tenido, the houses (which) I have had. — But: tengo leídos muchos libros (or Uidas muchas cartas), I have already read many books (letters). Tenth Lesson. — Lección diez. Exercises. — Ejercicios. Words. Xa rigwe^a, (the) riches, wealth, el protector, the protector. la pobreza, (the) poverty. la pérdida, the loss. el influjo, \ ^ i^fl^^^^^ el ánimo, the courage. la influencia, f ^"""«"v^. ^i f^tedo, the fear. Digitized by Google S8 Lesson 10. la Exposición, the Exhibition, amado, loved. eldesdichadOtthennhd^ppjmtkn, logrado, got, obtained. el ¡holgazán, the idler. enviado, sent. el hambre (f.), (the) hunger. pagado, paid. la sed, (the) thirst. recibido, received. la libertad, (the) liberty, free- perdió, he (she) lost. dom. debe, he (she) owes. la mercancía, the merchandise, sabido, learned. d principe, the prince. poco, -a, a little. la gana, a mind (to do some- más, more. thing); the appetite. pero, but. Za nación, the nation. g por qué . . .^, why ? ; porgue be- l^odccwio, \ g^ff..^^ cause. Beading Exercise. 14. ¿Hay dinero en esa bolsa? ¿Hubo hombres en el jardín? Habrá muchas flores en los jardines de la Exposición. La ri- queza y la pobreza tienen un gran influjo sobre los hombres. Tuve protectores, pero los (them) he perdido. Hemos sufrido grandes pérdidas. ¡Tened ánimo! ¡No tengáis miedo! Habría menos desdichados, si hubiese menos holgazanes. ¿Tiene V. dinero? ¿Tienen Yds. hambre ó sed? ¿Ha amado Y. á ese hombre? El capitán no habría logrado su libertad, si no hubiese tenido grandes protectores. Le habría enviado á V. más mercancías, si Y. me (me) hubiese pagado. (Él) no me ha pagado el dinero que (which) me debe (owes). Cuando (él) hubo recibido su (his) dinero, lo (it) perdió. No he re- cibido las mercancías que Y. me ha enviado. Habiendo sabido por mi criado que el capitán está aquí, le (him) he enviado todos sus libros. El desdichado no tendrá protectores. ¿Ha visto Y. los castillos del rey? Los niños de nuestro tío ten- drán papel y plumas, tinta y lápices. Los hermanos de nuestro jardinero han sufrido una gran pérdida. ¿Por qué tuvo Y. miedo? Ha* habido muchos criados en el palacio del príncipe. El holgazán no tiene jamás gana de trabajar. El señor N. tendría más dinero, si hubiese tenido gana de traba- jar. La libertad tiene un gran influjo sobre las naciones. El general quiere que Y. no tenga miedo. Ha de pagar Y. el dinero que (Y.) perdió. Tendré que hablar con Y. Tradnccióu. 15. 1. This man had great riches. What have you to tell me (decirme)*^ The footman was always thirsty (tr. had always thirst). Riches (sing,) will always have a great in- fluence on (the) men. Are there any large towns in this * See page 35**. Digitized by VjOOQIC Exercises. 89 country? There (have always been) were always men who (que) had no mind to work. I will not (have you lose heart) that you have (suhj, pres,) fear*. I ha^á to speak to you yesterday. We should have many friends if we had more money. I have lost the protectors whom (que) I had. The unhappy man has always had poor friends. Had you much money in the purse which you have lost ? The prince would have obtained his liberty had he had more protectors. Why have you not sent me (me precedes the verb) the merchandise (pi.)? I had no mind to speak with (á) the prince. 2. The idle man is hungry (tr. has h.), but he will not work. Are you hungry or Üiirsty (tr. have you h. or th.)? Mast you pay the money which the footman has lost? These nations have sustained** great losses. There are men who love (the) liberty more than (the) riches (sing.). Why have you not loved this man? These nations had always good (buenos) princes. The prince had two castles and three palaces in (the) town. Do you know (sahe V.) how many (cuánto, -a) provinces Spain has? Has Mr. Figueredo many books? He has more books than my father and my cousin (m.), I had already (ya begins the sentence) paid (for) these goods yesterday. Thou wilt have the money to-morrow. He had had unfortunate friends. Conversación. ¿ Quién ha tenido dinero? El comerciante ha tenido mu- cho dinero? ¿Tiene el criado hambre ó No tiene hambre, pero tiene sed? siempre sed. ¿Hay flores en ese jardín? Hay en ól flores y árboles. ¿ Qué tiene un gran influjo La riqueza y la pobreza tienen sobre los hombres? un gran influjo sobre los hombres. ¿Que tendrá la señorita El- Tendrá un hermoso espejo vira? (looTdng-glass). ¿Cuántas horas (hours) tiene El día tiene veinticuatro horas. el día? ¿Tiene V. que hablar con mi No, señor, tengo que hablar hermano? con V. ¿Por qué no tiene amigos el Porque no tiene dinero. desdichado ? ¿Tuvo muchos palacios el Tuvo dos palacios y muchos principe? jardines. * For the convenience of the beginner the English text is occasionally modified, so that a literal translation may be good Spanish. ** Transí, suffered. Digitized by VjOOQIC 40 Lesson 11. i Por qué no me ba pagado V. ? ¿Ha sabido V. que mi padre ba sufrido una pérdida? ¿Ha visto V. las mercancías? Porque no be tenido dinero. No, sefior, no lo be sabido. No las be visto. Eleventh Lesson. — Lección once. The Auxiliary Verb Ser, to be. — El verbo auxiliar ser^ to be. Indicative. Present, (nosotros) somos, we are. (vosotros) sois, you are. (ellos) son, they are. Imperfect. éramos, we were. erais, you were. eran, they were. Definite. fuimos, we were. fuisteis, you were. fueron, they were. Future. seremos, we shall be. seréis, you will be. serán, they will be. Conditional. seriamos, we should be. seríais, you would be. serían, thej would be. Imperative. sed, be (you). Participle. Sido, been. Compound Tenses. Compound Perfect. He sido, I havo been. hemos sido, we have been. has sido, thou hast been. habéis sido, you have been. ha sido, he has been. han sido, they have been. (Yo) sop, I am. ' (tú) eres, thou art. (él) es, he is. Era, I was. eras, thou wast. era, he was. Fui, I was. fuiste, thou wast. fué, he was. Seré, 1 shall be. serás, thou wilt be. será, he will be. Seria, I should be. serias, thou wouldst be. seria, he would be. Sé, be (thou). Digitized by VjOOQIC The Auxiliary Verb 5er, to be. 41 Pluperfect. Había sido, I bad been. hdbiamos sido, we bad been. Mbias sido, tboti badst been, habíais sido, you bad been. Mhia sido, be had been. habían sido, they had been. 3nd Pluperfect Htibe sido, I had been. hubimos sido, we had been. hubiste Hdo, thou hadst been, hubisteis sido, you had been. hubo, sido, he had been. hubieron sido, they had been. Compound Future. Habré sido, I shall | , habremos sido, we shall j , habrás sido, thou wilt}, habréis sido, you will >i^^^ habrá sido, he will ) ^^^' habrán sido, they will) ^®®'^- Compound Conditional. Habría sido, I should j, ^^riamosstdo, we should!. habrías sido, th. wouldst; ?*^® habríais sido, you wo'il<^rv>f!J^ Ju¿bría sido, he would j habrían sido, they would) ^ Gerund. Siendo, being. Subjunctive. Present. Sea, I be. seamos, we be. seas, thou be. 5eíí¿5, you be. sea, he be. sean, they be. Jmjjer/cci. Fuese, I were. fuésemos, we were. fueses, thou wert. fueseis, you were. /mcsc, he were. fuesen, they were. Fuere, (if) I shall be. fuéremos, (if) we shall be. fueres, > thou wilt be. fuereis, > you will be. /were, > he will be. fueren, » they will be. Conditional. Fuera, that I should be. fuéramos, that we should be. fueras, that thou wouldst be. fuerais, that you would be. /«era, that he would be. fueran, th&t they would be. Compound Tenses. Like those of the Indicative Mood, the compound tenses of the Subjunctive are formed by adding the Participle sido to the respective forms of the Subjunctive of haber, thus : Digitized by VaOOQlC 42 Lesson 11. Haya sido, I have been. Hubiese sido, that I had been. Hubiere sido, if I shall have been. Hubiera sido, that I should have been. Remarks. 1. Ser is used with nouns, adjectives, etc., in order to express a permanent state of existence of the sabject, as: Ser hombre, to be a man; ser general, to be a general; ser bueno, malo, to be good, bad, etc. Here the qualities attri- buted to the subject appear as characteristic and, as it were, inseparable from it. Such qualities are size, dignity, ncUionaJ- ity, office, occupation, etc. Thus: Ese señor es juez, francés, general, pintor, alto, bajo^ etc. This gentleman is a judge, a Frenchman, a general, a painter, tall, short, etc. 2. On the contrary, estar is used when the attribute appears merely accidental, or if a dwelling in any place what- ever is to be expressed. Thus: Está cansado, he is tired. No está en casa, he is not at home. Some examples will show the difference between the two verbs: Ese hombre es bueno, malo, this man is good, bad. Ese hombre está bueno*, malo, this man is well, un- well (in good gealth, in bad health), etc. In the first example, the quality is a characteristic and permanent one; in the second, it is accidental and transient. Esta puerta es alta, this door is high (i.6., the quality is permanent). Esta puerta está cerrada, this door is shut (i.e., in this moment, but it might be open). The pupil should carefully compare the following sentences : El señor N. es muy docto, Mr. N. is a very learned man. Estamos prontos, we are ready. Es librero, he is a bookseller. Estoy contento, I am satisfied. Somos fuertes, cuerdos, we are strong, prudent. Estar en el paseo, en el café, en el campo, to be on the promenade**, at the coffee-house, in the country. Ser rey, to be king. * Estar bien means also: to be at ease. ** el paseo—i.e., the avenue, park, public gardens, quay, place or street where the townspeople usually take their walk. Digitized by VaOOQlC Estar^ to be. 43 Es sabio, rico, etc., he is wise, rich, etc. Ya estamos aqui, now we are here. Bon Fulano es de Paris, Mr. N. is from Paris. 3. Sometimes ser and estar may be coupled with the same word, as: 8er enamorado, to be of an amorous disposition. Estar enamorado, to be in love. But here, again, in the first example the quality is a characteristic mark of the person; in the second, however, it is merely accidental and transitory. 4. The Passive voice of the verb is always formed with ser, as: Ser amado, to be loved. The compound tenses do not differ from the English: He sido amado, I have been loved. (See the Passive Voice,) 5. The adjectives atento, attentive; contento, satisfied; libre, free; enfadado, angry, are commonly used with estar. 6. Very often estar with the Gerund is an equivalent for to be with the present participle, as : Estoy buscando á mi hermano, I am looking for my brother. Estaba leyendo un libro, I was reading a book. Twelfth Lesson. — Lección doce. Estar, to toe*. Indicative. Present Jfj I am. estamos, we are. ^9tás, thou art. estáis, you are. wW, he is. están, they are. Imperfect. Estaba, I was. estábamos, we were. ^abas, thou wast. estabais, you were. estaba, he was. estaban, they were. Definite. Estuve, I was. estuvimos, we were. tuviste, thou wast. estuvisteis, you were. estuvo, he was. estuvieron, they were. * We need not add that estar (like tener) is no auxiliary, *^^t a principal verb. Digitized by VaOOQlC 44 Lesson 12. Future. Estaré, I shall be. estaremos, we shall be. estarás, thou wilt be. estaréis, you will be. estará, he will be. estarán, they will be. Conditional. Estaría, I should be. estaríamos, we should be. estarías, thou wouldst be. estaríais, you would be. estaría, he would be. estarían, they would be. Imperative. Está, be (thou). estad, be (you). Participle. Estado, been. Compound Tenses. Compound Perfect. He estado, I have been. hemos estado, we have been. has estado, thou hast been. habéis estado, you have been. ha estado, he has been. han estado, they have been. Pluperfect. Había \ I had | ^ habíamos) 8 we had | hÍ habíais ||* you had [been. haUa ] he had J ? habían \P they had j 2nd Pluperfect. Hube I I had . | ^ hubimos | S we bad 1 hubiste \ estado, th. hadst > * hubisteis \ S* you had \ been. hubo J he had J? hubieron]^ they had J Compound Future. Habré \ I shall ) , habremos ) S we shall ] , habrás \ estado, th. wilt ^^^® ^aftrew |" you will ?*J® ^aftrá J he will J ^®'*- habrán \f they will J *^®®^- Compound Conditional. Habría estado, I should have habríamos estado, we should etc. been. etc. have been. Gerund. Estando, being. Subjunctive. Present. Esté, I be. estemos, we be. estés, thou be. estéis, you be. esté, he be. estén, they be. Digitized by VjOOQIC Exercises. -45 Imperfect. Estuviese, I were. estuviésemos, we were. estuvieses, thou wert. estuvieseis, you were. estuviese, he were. estuviesen, they were. Future. Estuviere, ' (that) I shall be. estuviéremos, (that) we shall be. estuvieres, (that) thou wilt be. estuviereis, (that) you will be. estuviere, (that) he will be. estuvieren, (that) they will be. Conditional. Estuniera, that I should be. estuviéramos, thB,t we síhonláhe, es^wwra^, that thou wouldst be. estuvierais, that you would be. estuviera, that he would be. estuvieran, that they would be. Compound Tenses, Like those of the Indicative Mood, they are formed by joining the Participle estado to the Subjunctive of haber ^ as: Haya estado, (that) I have been. hubiese estado, that I had been. hubiere estado, that I shall have been. hubiera estado, that I should have been. Bule, — The past participle, used with haber, is al- ways invariable, as in EngHsh; thus: ÉH ha estado, he has been. eUa ha estado, she has been (and not estada), eUo8 han estado, they (m,) have been (and not estados). ellas han estado, they (f,) have been (and not estadas). Thirteenth Lesson. — Lección trece. Exercises. — Ejercicios. Words. El deseo, the wish, desire. el viaje, the journey. ia manera, the manner. el extranjero, the foreign coun- ^ sueño, the dream. try; al extranjero, abroad. ^ cosa, the thing. el bebedero, the trough, bird's ^ situación, the situation. trough. el heredero, the heir. la cruz, the cross. ^ precio, the price. el pájaro, the bird. el ceibal juicio, the good sense, la virtud, the virtue. ^ error, the mistake. el reina, the kingdom. h piedra, the stone. la aldea, the village. ^l duque, the duke. eí concierto, the concert. Digitized by VjOOQIC 46 Lesson 13. la viuda, the widow. adornar, to adoro. d edificio, the building, edifice, mirar, to look at. la plaza, the square. conquistar, to conquer. el baile, the ball. alcanzar, to obtain, to get. la compañía, the company. vivir, to live, to dwell. la prosperidad, the happiness, muerto, died (Past, p.), dead. prosperity. tarde, late. lastimoso, -a, sorry, sad. lejos, far. precioso, -a, precious. j?or desgracia, unfortunately. enfadado, -a, cross. a^wi, here. cierto, -a, certain. de paso, for the time being, colmado, -a, filled. actually. favorable, favourable. en medio, in the middle, amidst. Reading Exercise. 16. El deseo de alcanzar fama es activo en muchos hombres. El suefio no es más que una fantasía (fantasy). Mi situación es muy lastimosa, no obstante de ser* yo un heredero rico. Las mercancías inglesas son de precios moderados. Y. no está en su cabal juicio. V. estuvo en un error. ¿Estará V. en casa mañana? Esta cruz de oro estaba adornada de muchas piedras preciosas. El duque y la duquesa están aquí de paso en su viaje al extranjero. Los niños- tendrán de cuatro á cinco años. Estoy mirando (looking) si (whether) el bebedero del pájaro tiene agua. Doña Julia está muy enfadada hoy. Por desgracia es cierto que el hijo de la pobre viuda ha muerto. ¿Qué edificio es aquel que está en medio de la plaza? ¿Estuvieron Vds. ayer en el baile? No hubo baile ayer. Sería muy hermoso este viaje, si no hiciese tanto calor (were not so hot). El duque ha estado en su palacio, y la duquesa estuvo en el extranjero. La vida es un sueño. Los niños no están en su cabal juicio. Mi padre quiere que yo esto en casa todo el día. Es una cosa deliciosa vivir en compañía de un amigo. La casa de su amigo de F.** está muy lejos de la ciudad. ¡Quiera (would to) Dios que sus años de V. sean colmados de toda (all) prosperidad! Las plazas fuertes de todo el reino están conquistadas. Traducción. 17. Where are you*"^? Were you at home yesterday? No, sir, I was not at home. I was at the concert. The cross of the duchess was (set) adorned with precious stones. A poet * no obstante de ser, although I am. In English, the Infini- tive following no obstante should be rendered by the respective tense of the verb. ** you when printed in italics is always V. — For Your, see the Note on page 48. Digitized by VaOOQlC Exercises. 47 says (dice): (the) Error is (the) life. The duke and the dnchess are travelling {tr, on a journey) abroad. In the middle of the square there is a large palace and a beautiful garden. The building is very for from the village (la aldea). Where was (Def,) the son of the widow? The trough of the bird is without water. (The) Fortune is a precious thing; but (the) virtue is more (más) precious. Your cousin (m,) is very cross to-day. unfortunately it is certain that the emperor has died. There were ten precious stones on the cross. The prices of (the) English goods are very moderate. Your brother (Su hermano de F.) has been greatly mistaken (transí, in a great mistake). Why are you not* satisfied with (con) your situ- ation? I wish you to be (tr, I wish that you be) at home at 12 o'clock (á las doce). If you were in Madrid» your si- tuation would be more favourable. Were you not at the con- cert yesterday? I should have been at home if your brother had come (venido). It is already (ya) somewhat (algo) late; why did you not come at ten o'clock (á las diee)l This man has always been very happy (feliz); notwithstand- ing (sin embargo) he is not satisfied with his (su) situation. I was just reading a book, when (cuando) my brother came (vino). What are you looking for? I am looking {tr. searching) for my hat. Conversación. ¿Dónde está el duque? Está en el palacio de la duquesa. ¿Qué deseo es activo en los El deseo de alcanzar fama y hombres? riqueza. ¿Qué es el sueño? El suefio es una cosa fantástica. ¿Por qué se lastima (compíatn) Porque mi situación es muy V.? lastimosa. ¿ Cómo son los precios de esos Son muy (very) moderados. géneros (commodities)'^ ¿ Estuvo V. ayer en su casa ? No, señor, estuve en casa de mi primo. ¿De qué (With what) estaba Estaba adornada de muchas adornada la cruz del obispo piedras preciosas. (bishop) 'i ¿ Qué edad es la de V.? (or tiene Tengo treinta años (lam . . . V?) — (How old are you ?) old), ' ¿Qué estás leyendo? Estoy leyendo el Don Quijote. ¿Está V. buscando su som- No, señora, estoy buscando brero? mis guantes. ¿Quién ha muerto? El hijo de la pobre viuda ha muerto. * In Spanish, the meaning of a verb is rendered negative by prefixing fto to it, as : I do not think, (Yo) no pienso. Digitized by VaOOQlC 48 I^esson 14. ¿No puede (^Canno^^V. decirme El edificio que e$tá en medio (tell me) qué (what) edificio de la plaza es el Tribunal es aquel? Real (royáí). ¿Qué quiere su padre de V.?* Quiere que esté hoy en casa hasta la tarde. ¿Cómo está su padre de V.? Está un poco indispuesto (un- well). Fourteenth Lesson. — Lección catorce. DetermlnatiTe Adyectiyes. — Ádjectíyos deter- minantes. !• BemonstratiTe Adjectiyes. — Adjectiros demostratiyos. They are; Sing. Plur. JStoíe**, esta, esto, this estos, estas, these. Bse, esa, eso, that esos, esas, those. Aquel, aquélla, aquéllo, that aquellos, aquellas, those. Demonstratives are considered to be Pronouns when employed zvithout a substantive. When employed with a substantive, they are Adjectives. § 1. These demonstratives diflfer as follows. Este refers to anything which is near the speaker, and ese to anything which is near the person addressed. Thus este sombrero means this hat (near me), whereas ese sambrero means this or that hat (near you). Aquel, on the contrary, refers to a person or a thing distant from the speaker as well as from the person addressed to. Again esta ciudad is the town where the speaker or writer lives; esa ciudad means the town in which the person to whom I write or speak Hves — i.e., your, town'; aquélla ciudad is neither my town nor yours, but another place remote from both. § 2. The forms esto (this), eso, and aquello are neuter (like the article lo\ and difíer in the same way. They may never be. coupled with a substantive. Ex.: ¿Le has hablado de eso? Have you spoken to him of it? (of that, thereof etc.) * Your (polite mode) is expressed el . . . de V. (the ... of you), or more elegantly su . . . de V. (your ... of you). (See the following Lesson.) ** JDe este, de esta, de esto were formerly contracted into deste, desta, desto. This practice is now obsolete. Digitized by VjOOQIC Determinative Adjectives. 49 § 3. JEZ mistifio, la misma, lo mismo^ the same. This demonstrative takes the definite article as well as the indefinite. Preceded by un, it corresponds to the English similar or like; thus: El mismo árbol, the same tree. Del mismo árbol, of the same tree, etc. Un mismo uniforme, a similar (the like) uniform. Mismo may also be joined to este, ese, and aqud, and then means the very same, or this very . . ., as: Este mismo hombre, the identical man. io mismo is neuter and means the same thing. 2. Interrogative Adjectives. § 4. ¿ Qué? what? which? is invariable as to ier and number; and its sense is more general than that of ¿cuál? thus: , ¿Qué hombre? What man? ¿ Qué culpa tengo ? What is my fanlt ? i.e., in what does my. fanlt consist? ¿Qué libro tiene Y,? Which book have you got? Qué is also exclamativo, as: / Qué hombre ! What a man I If followed by an adjective, tan (so, so much) or más, most (utmost) should be added, as: / Qué mujer tan, hermosa ! What a beautiful woman I / Qué casa más alta! What a high house! N.B,— Indirect interrogative sentences are also intro- duced by qué, as: No sabemos qué pasajeros han llegado. We do not know which passengers have arrived. Preguntaba qué noticias traía el vapor, I was asking what news the steamer brought. § 5. The interrogative and exclam^itive qué, when joined to the Accusative of a person, does not, like the relative pronoun que (see Lesson 26), admit of the pre- position á; thus: ¿ Qué hombre ha visto V, ? Which man have you seen? and not: ¿A qué hombre ha visto V,? § 6. ¿Cuál? ¿Qué? what? which?; ¿cuál? which? what? (plur. ¿cuáles?) are invariable only as to gender, Spanish Conv. -Grammar. * Digitized by vaOOQlC 50 Lesson 14. and used to specify or distinguish between two or more persons or things : ¿Cuál hombre? which man? what man? ¿Cuál mujer? which woman? PI. ¿ Cuáles hombres ? ¿ Cuáles mujeres ? which men ? which women? Words. La carta, the letter. majestuosOy -a, majestic. ü muchacho, the boy. pesado, -a, heavy. la callé, the street. natural, native, born in. la arquitectura, the architec- alto, -a, high. tore. primorosamente, first rate, la iglesia, the church. very well. el nombre, the name. hablo, I speak. la tienda, the shop. habla, he (she) speaks. la señora, the lady. mire F. , look! (3rd Sing. el lujo, the magnificence. Imper.) la carga, the burden, weight, se llama, is named. el oficial, the officer. comprado, bought. (H cuarto, the room. hecho, done, made. el color, the colour. cómo, how. á^-i^vii "»'•»«••'• dos, two. Beading Exercise. 18. Este hombre. Aquellas cartas. Esa mujer. Ese muchacho, i Qué calle tan hermosa! Ese {or aquel) teatro es muy grande. Esta casa no es grande. La arquitectura de aquella {pr esa) iglesia es majestuosa. iMire V. estos árboles! Aquellas dos señoras son extranjeras; son cantantes (singers). Esta señora es natural de Madrid (es madrileña), ¿Cómo se llama este café? ¡Qué lujo en esta casa! lOh qué carga tan pesada! ¿Está bueno su amigo de Y. en esa ciudad? ¿Tiene V. el mismo libro que tengo yo? Aquellos oficiales tenían un mismo uniforme. He visto á las mismas señoras que usted ha visto. ¿Qué deseo tiene su hermano de V.? ¿Cuál hombre estuvo en mi cuarto ? No hablo de este hombre sino (but) de aquel. El mismo color. Las mismas personas. El hijo de aquel hombre es muy pequeño. He comprado las mismas plumas en la tienda de aquel mismo hombre. Hemos leído los mismos libros, Tradnccién. 19. This man is rich. That boy is poor. Those women were in my room. Have you seen that theatre? This church has a majestic architecture. What splendour in this palace! What [a] rich man! In your (§ 1) city there was (hubo) Digitized by VjOOQIC PossesBÍves. 51 a merchant who (gue) had the same name. These two officers have the same uniform. This gentleman is called (has the name of) Charles, and that lady is called Elvira. Do jou speak of these gentlemen or of those ? Many flowers have the same colour. What [aj maní What [a] beautiful woman! These boys were at (the) church. I have seen the same persons. These gentlemen are natives of Paris, and those ladies of Madrid. The trees before your house are very high. This burden is very heavy. What is the name of that boy (tr. How calls himself that boy) ? Do you speak of this gentleman or of that lady? CoDTersación* ?Cómo se llama este mu- Se llama Celedonio. chacho ? ¿T cómo se llaman esos hom- No sé como se llaman. bres? ¿Es grande ese teatro? Si, señora, es muy grande. ¿Cómo es la arquitectura de (ja arquitectura de aquella aquella iglesia? iglesia es majestuosa. ¿No es madrileña esta señora? ¡Perdone V.! (1 beg your par- don O Esta señora es natural de Paris (or ftcí^er parisiense.) ¿Conoce V. esta flor? Si, es una rosa. ¿Y aquella? Es un tulipán. ¿Son cantantes esas señoras? No son cantantes, pero bailan (they dance) primorosamente. ¿ Cómo estaban vestidos aque- Tenían todos un mismo uni- llos oficiales? forme. ¿ Qué hombre ha visto V. ? He visto al padre de este mu- chacho. ¿Qué ha hecho V. esta ma- He escrito una carta. ñaña? Fifteenth Lesson. — Lección qnince. Possessiyes. — Posesiyos. Possessives may be either adjectives (when imme- diately preceding or following a noun or its equivalent), or pronouns (when by themselves, whether preceded or not by an article). Compare: ¡Hija mía! my daughter. Sus libros, his books. And ¿De quién es hija? — Mia, Whose daughter is she? — Mine. ¿ Qué libros son ? — Los míos. Which books are they? — Mine. 4* Digitized by vaOOQlC 62 Lesson 15. In any case Possessires are treated as adjectives as to inflection and agreement, though in Spanish they agree with the possessed object, not with the possessor. 1. Possessire adjeetiyeg* They assume two forms: (a) Complete form (which follows): Sing, Plur. mio, nda, my 1 ^ mios, mias, my ^ tuyo, tuya, thy ferring to onl possess tuyos, tuyas, thy o 3 1 his i .. suyo, suya, ) her / ^ ^ ^' 1 its suyos, suyas, ) her f ring to tno bject posi ) your J your (&«< S 3 nuestro, niAestra, our P'O nuestros, nuestras, our vuestro, vuestra, your s vuestros, vuestras, your i- i* \ their suyo, suya, ¡ ^^^^ J- suyos, suyas, } ^^^^ . s Í i (b) Apocopate form (which precedes): Sing, Plur, mi, my ^ mis, my ? tu, thy s* tus, thy of «.At]'» sus, her } '^^ your to only ssesse your 11 nuestro, nuestra, our nuestros, nuestras, our s ^ vuestro, vuestra, your vuestros, vuestras, your Ir su \ ^^^" ^' i your j (el) vuestro, (la) vuestra, (lo) vuestro, yours ^.,.;, (el) suyo, (7a) suya, (lo) suyo. ■§. ■ or or or theirs § , . (el) de ellos, (la) de ellos. (lo) de ellos. yours. 1: ..■: (el) de ellas, (la) de ellas. (lo) de ellas. (él) de VV., (la) de VV„ (lo) de YY„ ) J ;- .•;>:.. Digitized by V joogle 56 Lesson 16. mase, (los) mios, (los tuyos, (los) suyos, or (los) de él, (los) de ella, (los) de F., (los) nuestros, (los) vuestros, (los) suyos, or (los) de eUos, (los) de ellas, (los) de VV., N.B.—Eñch of the article : fem, (las) mías, mine (las) tuyas, thine (las) suyas, or (las) de él (las) de ella, (las) de Y., his hers its yours (las) nuestras, ours (las) vuestras, yours (Uls) suyas 1 theirs (yours. ^ a s- OQ 2 QD 9 or J- (las) de ellos (las) de ellas (las) de VV.,\ above forms may appear T?ithont the § ¿Qué libro es éste? — El mío. Which book is this? — Mine. ¿De quién es este libro? — Mío. Whose book is this? — Mine. Tradnccióu. Which hat have you got ? (¿ tiene F. ?) — Mine. No ; that is mine ; this is yours. He has lost his (neuter) and hers (neuter). That house is ours; those windows are mine. Whose gloves are these ? — Hers. I thought they (creía que) were yours. Sixteenth Lesson. — Lección dieciséis. Numerals. — Namerales. 1. Cardinal Numbers. — Numerales Cardinales. Uno (un), u/na, one. dos, two. tres, three. cuatro, four. cmco, five. seis, six. siete, seven. ocho, eight. nueve, nine. diee, ten. once, eleven. doce, twelve. trece, thirteen. catorce, fourteen. quince, fifteen. diez y seis or dieciséis, sixteen. diejs y siete or diecisiete, se- venteen. diez y ocho or dieciocho, eighteen. Digitized by VjOOQIC Cardinal Numbers. 57 diee y nueve or diecinueve^ trescientos, -as, \ oqq nineteen. trecientos, -as, f veinte, twenty. cuatrocientos, -as, 400. veinte y %mo* \ ^ ^ quinientos, -as, 500. (veintiuno), ] ^"^^^^y^^^- seiscientos, -as, 600. veinte y dos, twenty-two. setecientos, -as, 700. veinte y tres, twenty- three. ochocientos, -as, 800. veinte y cuatror, twenty-four. novecientos, -as, 900. treinta, thirty. mil, 1000. cuarenta, forty. mil uno, 1001. cincuenta, fifty. mil dos, 1002. sesenta, sixty. mU tres, 1003. setenta^ seventy. dos mil, 2000. ochenta, eighty. tres mil, 3000. noventa, ninety. [red. diez mil, 10,000. dentó (contract cien), a hund- cien mil, 100,000. ciento uno, 101. un millán (antic, un cuento)^ ciento dos, 102. 1,000,000. doscienios, doscientas, \ oaq dodentos, decientas, f 1. Uno, either by itself or in its, compounds vein- tiuno, treinta y uno, etc., drops the o when imme- diately followed by a substantive or its adjective, or the numerals ciento, mil, millón; thus: un cabaUo, a horse; un buen caballo, a good horse; un miUón de pesetas, 1,000,000 pesetas. 2. Before mil (1000) and dento (100) un is never used, provided no misconception may arise by omitting it. Thus, one thousand one hundred and eleven is trans- lated mil ciento once; but, cuatrocientos y un mil 401,000, because cuatrocientos mil (without tm) is 400,000. 3. Ciento drops the last syllable (-to) when immedi- ately before a substantive or an adjective, and hkewise before mil and millón, as: a hundred men, den hombres, a hundred thousand, cien mil; but ciento ocho, 108. The English expressions: eleven hundred, twelve hund- red, etc., must be rendered by mil ciento [one thousand one hundred], etc. Ex.: mil ochocientos (-as), eighteen hundred. 4. C&w^o in the j>iwraZ (two hundred, three hundred, etc.) is inflected like an adjective, taking s before a * In modern orthography, veinte is often written as one word with the following number, thus: veintiuno, 21; veintidós, 22; veintitrés, 23, etc. Digitized by VjOOQIC 58 Lesson 16. masculine and changing the final o into (is before a feminine noun, as: Doscientos hombres, 200 men; dos- cientas mujeres, 200 women; but cientos de hombres, cientos de mujeres, hundreds of men, hundreds of women. 5. Some before hundred and thousand is translated unos (-as), as: sojne hundred (thousand) dollars, unos cien (mil) pesos. 6. The days of the month (except "the first," él primero) are expressed by cardinal numbers, generally preceded by the article, as: the 25th, d veinte y dncó; the 18th of January, ^el diez y ocho de enero. The general question is: ¿^ cuántos estamos? what is the date of to-day? — We have the is translated estamos á: we have the 18th of January, estamos á diez y ocho de enero. The date of a letter is either given as in English, as: Madrid, May 4th, 1889, Madrid, á (cuatro) de mayo, 1889, or: Madrid, y mayo 4 (cuatro) de 1889 {lit. Madrid and May the 4th of 1889). Note.—TYíQ Spanish language sometimes prefers cardinal numbers where the English makes use of ordinals. The following may serve as examples: In his third year, á los' tres años de edad; on the ninth day, á los ntíeve dios. 7. The hours of the day are expressed by the article la, las, and the cardinal numbers. The English. clock is omitted. What is the time? or what time is it? is rendered in Spanish by ¿Qué hora es? Thus: One o'clock, Za* una (i.e. hora, hour). Two o'clock, las dos (i.e. horas, hours). ' Three o'clock, las tres, etc. At is á, as: at four o'clock, á las cuatro. Time between two consecutive hours is expressed thus: A quarter past one, la una y cuarto (= l^^). Half past one, la una y media (= IVa). A quarter to two, las dos menos cuarto (lit. : 2 o'clock less a quarter). N.B.—It will strike directly . . . is: e8tá(n) pa/ra dar la(8) . . ., or pronto dará(r¿) la(s) . . . .; it strikes . . . • The article is in the singular, because one o'clock meana one hour; with all the other hours the article should be plural. Digitized by VaOOQlC Cardinal Numbers. 59 is: da(n) la(8) .... and : it has just struck ... is: acaba(n) €le dar la(8) — Precisely at 5 o^ clock is: á las cinco en punto. Afternoon is la tarde, evening and night la noche. The early morning (before daybreak) is la ma^dru/- gada; the nnornir^ (also before midday), is la mañana. 8. The expressions: a quarter of a year, half a year, etc., are rendered either by un trimestre, un se- mestre, or b)»^ three months, six months, etc., as: tres meses (three months); seis meses (six months). Nueve meses (nine months), etc. Quince días is a fortnight; media hora^ half an hour. 9. The age of a person is commonly expressed by tener .... años, as : He is six years old, tiene seis años (he has six years). The question: Hoiv old are you? is therefore translated: ¿Cuántos años tiene V.? or also: ¿Qué edad tiene V.? (what age have you?). 10. Both is los dos, las dos, or ambos (f. ambas); or, though less frequently, ambos (-as) á dos, as: He visto á los dos (or ambos á dos) en el paseo, I have seen them both on the promenade. The most important collective numerals are: medio ciento, half a hundred. una centena Un par, a pair, a couple. una decena, ten. una docena, a dozen. una veintena, a score. una treintena, cuarentena, etc., thirty, forty (some thirty, forty, etc.). media docena, half a dozen, The names of the days and months are (un ciento, un [ a hundred, centenar, un í some hundred. centenal), ) un millar, a thousand, some thousand, etc. lAmes, Monday. martes, Tuesday. miércoles, Wednesday. jueves, Thursday. viernes, Friday. sábado, Saturday. domingo, Sunday. Enero, January. febtero, February. marzo, March. abril, April. mayo. May. junio, June. julio, July. agosto, August. setiembre, September. octubre, October. noviembre, November. diciembre, December. Words. El . alfonso, the alphonse (a el duro, the dollar (= 4 shill- ; gold coin). ings). Digitized by VjOOQIC 60 Lesson 16. dreálf the real (==2^2 pence). la peseta = 4 reals. el céntimo, the centime. el biUete de banco, the bank- note. la caja, the box. la caja de cerillas (de fósfo* ros), the box of matches. la caja de cigarros, the cigar- box. la cajetilla de cigarrillos, the packet of cigarettes. un fósforo (una cerilla), a match. un cigarro, \ . un puro, i ^ un cigarrillo (colloq. un pi- tillo), a cigarette. el tabaco, the tobacco. él estanco, the tobacconist-shop. el ternero, the calf. el cerdo, the pig. la revolución, the revolation. él mes, the month. la legim, the league. él contorno, the outskirts ; cir- camference. d arrabal, the suburb. el vecino, the neighbour; the inhabitant. la caUe, the street. d puente, the bridge. el farol, the (street-) lampi the lantern. la luna, the moon. la tierra, the earth. Júpiter, Jupiter. Mercurio, Mercury. Saturno, Saturn. Venus, Venus. d carnicero, the butcher. el buey, the ox. la fecha, the date. la capital, the capital. el zapato, the shoe. el gtmnte, the glove. el pañuelo, the handkerchief! América, America. varón, male. hembra, female. medio -a, half. fumar, to smoke. girar, to turn round. falleció, he (she) died. hace, makes, does. descubierto, -a, discovered. alrededor, round, round about. todavía, yet; no, .. todavía (or todavía no), not yet. ahora, now. Beading Exercise. 22. 1. El alfonso tiene cinco duros; el daro tiene cinco pe- setas; la peseta tiene cien céntimos. ¿Quiere V. cambiarme este laillete de banco? ¿Dónde hay un estanco? Déme V. una caja de cigarros. Media docena de cigarros. ¿Cuánto es ? Déme Y. tres cajetillas de cigarrillos. Una caja de cerillas. ¿Cuánto? ¿Fuma V.? ¿Quiere V. un cigarro? Aqui está la caja. Tome V. un cigarrillo. 2. ¿Sabe Y. qué hora es? No es todavía la una y media. Son las ocho y cuarto de la noche. Mi hermano murió á los tres años de edad. Mi padre tiene 71 años. ¿ Han dado ya las once ? ¿ Á cuántos estamos del mes ? Hoy es el día diez y siete de julio. Estamos á veinte y siete (veintisiete) de enero. 3. El carnicero ha comprado 35 bueyes, 42 vacas, 88 ter- neros y 76 cerdos. Saturno hace su revolución en 30 años; Digitized by vaOOQlC Cardinal Numbers. 61 Júpiter en 2 afios, la Tieri-a en 365 días y 6 horas; Venus en 225 días j Mercurio en 3 meses. La lana gira alrededor de la Tierra en 27 días, 7 horas y 43 minutos. Esta capital tiene 9 leguas de contorno, 18 arrabales, 1,500,000 vecinos, 2006 calles, 500,000 casas, 83 plazas, 26 hospitales, 15 puentes y 80,000 faroles. Están para dar las 10. He visto cien hombres"'. ¿Ha visto Y. á mis primos? Les he visto ayer á ambos en la calle. Traducción. 28* 1. My aunt had 7 children**, 6 boys and a girl. The girl is seventeen years old. How old are you ? I shall be twenty in March. My sister is 21 years old. When is your birth- day (cumpleaños)? My birthday is on the 11th (once) of Au- gust. To-day is Wednesday. Have we to-day the lOfch or the 11th of May? The 10th. I have 10 dollars and 4 pesetas. The butcher has bought 10 oxen, 37 pigs, and 17 calves. The city of Vienna has 1,201,000 inhabitants, 38 suburbs, and (is) 4 (Glerman) miles in circumference. Louis XVI., king of France, died in Paris on the 21st of January, 1793. It has struck 9 o'clock. We have bought 16 pairs of gloves and two dozen handkerchiefs (de — ). My brother was three months in Paris and half a year in Madrid. He came at 1 o'clock to-day. It is now 8 o'clock in the evening. He came (has come) at noon yesterday. 2. The Archduchess (archiduquesa) Sophia of Austria died in the third year of her age. The letter (bears) has the date : Vienna, the 8th of May, 1889. To-day we have the 23rd of April. Spain (España) has 17,500,000 inhabitants Ceie —;. This town had 301,000 inhabitants. Three hundred and eighty seven pesetas and 12 centimes. I have given to the lawyer (abogado) some hundred dollars. America was discovered in the year 1492. The day has 24 hours, the hour has 60 minutes. June has 30 days, October has 31 and February has 28 or 29 days. Conyersación. ¿Qué edad es la de V.? Tengo 41 años. ¿Y su padre de V.? Tiene ahora 76. ¿Cuándo falleció el rey Luis Murió (he died) el (á) 21 de XVI de Francia? enero de 1793. ¿Cuántos hijos tiene V,? Tengo 4 hijos; 3 niños y una niña. * The personal object in the Accusative, when preceded by a numeral, does not take á, ** As hijos means both sons and children^ the sex must be expressed by the addition of the words varón (male) and hembra female), as in the above sentence. Digitized by VjOOQIC 62 Lesson 17. ¿Qué ha comprado V.? ¿Á cuántos estamos hoy? ¿Ha recibido Y. una carta? ¿Han dado ya las doce? ¿Qué hora es? ¿Cuántos dias tiene el afio? ¿Cuántos dias tiene un mes? ¿Qué ha dado Y. al abogado? ¿En cuánto tiempo hace Sa- turno su revolución alre- dedor del sol (the sun)^ ¿Ha perdido Y. algo? He comprado una docena de guantes y un par de zapatos. Estamos á 18 de enero. Si, be recibido una carta de Cádiz, con fecha 9 de octubre de 1903. No, sefior; pero pronto darán. Acaban de dar las 9. Un afio tiene 365 dias 6 horas. Un mes tiene 30 ó 31 dias. He dado al abogado cien pesos. En treinta afios. He perdido 4 duros. Seventeenth Lesson. — Lección diecisiete. Numerals. — Numerales. 2. Ordiüal Numbers. — Fractionals. — Multiplicatives. Ordinales. — Fracciónales. — Multiplicativos. ^l primero A y^^ la pnmera, f él segundo, \ . , , la segunda, f ^^® ^®^^°^' el tercero, the third. el cuarto, the 4th. el quinto, the 5th. el sexto (sesto), the 6th. él séptimo I 4.1 ^ 74.t (el sétimo), f ^^"^ ^**^- el octavo, the 8th. el nono ) (el noveno),! el décimo, the lOth. el tmdécimo \ (él onceno), f él duodécimo, the 12th. el décima tercio*, the 13th. the 9th. the llth. el décima cuarto, the 14th. el décimo quinto, the 15th. el décimo sexto, the 16th. el décimo séptimo, the 17th. el décimo octavo, the 18th, el décimo nono, the 19th. el vigésimo, the 20 th. el mgésimo primo (primero), the 21st. el vigésimo segundo, the 22nd. el vigésimo tercio, the 23rd. el vigésimo cuarto, the 24tb. ?.,'7Sl;, }"■•«'"■• el cuadragésimo, the 40th. el quincuagésima I the 50th. (el cincuenteno), f el sexagésimo, the 60th. * The forms decimotercio, decimocuarto, etc., are becoming more generally used. Digitized by VjOOQIC Ordinal Numbers. 68 €Í septuagésimOf the 70tb. el quingentésimo, íYlq 500th. él octogésimo ] el sexcentésimo^ the 600th. (el octuagésimo), \ the 80th. el septingentésimo, the 700th. (él ochentésimo), } el octogentésimo \the800th d nonagésimo, the 90th. (el octingentésimo)^ f el centesimo, the lOOth. el nonagentésimo \ ^, 900th el centesimo primo (primero), (él nongentésimo),} the lOlst. el milésimo, the lOOOth. el centesimo segundo, the I02ná. el dosmilésimo, the 2000th. el ducentésimo \ .t^ oaa4.u ^^ penúltimo, the last but one. hi ">« 200th. a^imo^ \ d trecentésimo, the 300th. el postrero, f the last. el cuadringentésimo, the 400th. 2^ ote, — The numbers in brackets are less frequent. — Besides, there are a few archaic forms, as: el cuarenteno, the 40th. el setentésimo, \ ., • «q^i el cincuentésimo, the 50th. el setenteno, / el sesentesimo, \ ^ ^^ j el ochentésvmo, \ ^^ ^^^^ el sesenteno, f el ochenteno, f el noventésimo, \ ^ ^^^^ el noventeno, f The forms setuagésimo for septuagésimo, and octuagésimo for octogésimo are now obsolete. Observations. 1. The numerals primero, tercero, and postrero drop the final o before a substantive, with the exception of tercero in the legal phrase dentro de tercero día, within three days. Ex.: El primer dia, the first day. El tercer dia, the third day. Sometimes the feminine primera drops the final a, as: la primer alma, the first soul. If, however, primero is coupled by y or ó with another ordinal number, except tercero and postrero (last), the complete form should be used, as: El primero y el octavo libro, the first and the eighth book. But: El primer y el tercer libro, the first and the third book. 2. The forms deceno, onceno are becoming obsolete. 3. Proper names of princes take the ordinal num- bers without an article, as: Philip II., Felipe segundo, Ferdinand IV., Fernando cuarto. Digitized by VjOOQIC 64 Leaoon 17. N,B.—Wiih the names of the kings of ¿Jpotn and of Um popes, cardinal numbers are used np to the tenth, thus Isabel segunda, Carias in (tercero). Charles HI., but Alfonso X (diez), Alfonso doce. From the tenth upwards, both cardinal and ordiuEil numbers may be used. Thns we ma y sa y in- differently: Benedicto décimo cuarto. Pope Benedict AlV., and Benedicto catorce. Wúh the names of other foreign sover- eigns, ordinal numbers are used up to the tenth or eleventh, and then follow cardinal numbm. Thus Enrique cuarto, Henry IV. (of France); Luis once or undécimo, Louis XI.; Carlos doce, Charles XII. (of Sweden). But: Luis XIV (ca- torce), Louis XIV. 4. With some substantives, cardinal as well as ordinal numbers may be employed, but only beyond undécimo, the eleventh. In this case they should follow the substantive; thus: Chapter 15th, Capitulo décimo quinto or Capitulo quince. Page 20, Fagina veinte or vigésima. Fractionals are expressed by ordinal numbers, as in English: medio, -a, half* {la mitad, un séptimo \ ., the halO. (unasepHmaparle),}^^^"^^^^' un tercio \ un octavo \ . ... (una tercera parte \ a third. (una octava parte), f^^^^^ i.e., part), I un noveno \ . ., un cuarto \ ^ (una novena parte), f * '^^*^- (una cuarta parte), I ^ * un décimo \ í ih un quinto, a fifth (part). (una décima parte), f * *^^^*^- un sexto Í «¡^fu un centesimo, Vioo. (una sexta parte) ^ f ' un milésimo, Viooo. Note. Some feminine forms of fractional numbers are used in certain expressions only, as: una cuarta, i.e., vara, a quarter of an ell; una tercia de carne, a pound of meat. Prom ten upwards the fractional numbers are formed by add- ing the word avo (liter, fractional part) to the cardinal num- bers, which thereby undergo some orthographical alteration. The numbers ending in -ce change this syllable into z, as: ires onzavos, ^/n; ocho quinzavos, ®/i6. Uno is changed into unavo(s). Beyond V20, the termination avo is added to the last consonant, the word p (and) being written f, and the whole number contracted into one word. For the sake of greater clearness, all these forms are given below in their arithmetical order: * Without article. With the article, un medio, a half (subst.). Digitized by vaOOQlC Ordinal Numbers. $5 Vil un onzavo. . Vn un dozavo. Vit un trezavo. Vi4 un catorzavo. Vi 6 un quinzavo. Vis un dicieseisavo, ViT nn diecisieteavo. Vis un dieciochoavo. Vi9 un diecinueveavo. ^/so un veintavo. Vai un veintiunavo. ^/«a un veintidosavo. ^/as un veintitresavo. ^/a4 un veinticuatroavo. Vas un veinticincoavOy etc. '/ii dos onzavos. %2 dos dozavos. Vis dos trezavos. Vi 4 dos catorzavos. Vi 6 dos quinzavos, '/it dos dieciseisavos. ViT dos diecisieteavos. */i8 dos dieciochoavos. Vi» dos diecinueveavos, Vao dos veintavos, Vso un treintavo. Vio un cuarentavo» etc. un cienavo, Vi 00 ] un centavo, un centesimo. él triple, the triple, etc. un céntimo (in South America; un centavo) is Vioo of a peseta, franc, etc. The MtUUpUcatives are: Bmpky simple. triple, I triplOy -a, 1 threefold. tfiplice, J cuadruplo^ -a, fourfold. gifintuplo, -a, fivefold. séxtuplo, séptuplo, óctuplo, nóneuplo, décuplo, céntuplo, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9-, 10-, lOOfold, etc. The other multiplicatives are periphrased with . , . . freces (times) and a comparative or tanto following, as: Su pena es nueve veces mayor, his punishment is ninefold (nine times greater). Catorce veces tanto, fourteenfold. El diente, the tooth. la edad, the age. la elección, the choice, elec* tion. el maestro, the masten el mes, the month. la libra, the pound. la onza, the ounce. el kilogramo, the kilogramme. d azúcar, the sugar. Spanish Ck>ny.-Giammar. Words. el café, the cofPee, d té, the tea. la semana, the week. la vara, the (Spanish) yard. el paño, the cloth. el tomo, the volume. mudar, to change. llamado, called. sucedió, succeeded, followed. viene, comes. Digitized by VaOOQlC 66 Lesson 17. Beading Exereise. 24. El caballo (horse) mnda los dientes á los dos años y medio. Felipe Aagnsto faé el 429, Franciso I el 58p, Enri- que IV, llamado el Grande, el 70? rey de Francia. Carlos IV sucedió á Carlos III el 12 de agosto de 1788. ¿Sabe V. qué hora es? Todavía no es la una y media. Á los nueve días de 8u elección le sobrevino (surprised him) la muerte, que fué (which happened) el 23 de agosto, á los sesenta y cuatro afios de edad. Mi maestro de música viene cada (every) tres días. He comprado una docena de guantes. Déme V. (give me) la vigésima parte 0^ quincuagésima, la sexagésima y la centésima parte). Un mes es la duodécima parte del afio. Tome V. (take) siete veintavos y cuatro diecinueveavos. Enero es el primero, marzo el tercero, junio el sexto y di- ciembre el último mes del afio. Compre V. (buy) dos libras y media de café, una libra de té y dos libras y tres onzas de azúcar. Cincuenta es la mitad de ciento. Quince es el quin- tuplo de tres, y la décima parte de ciento cincuenta. Traducción. 25. A week is the 52nd part of a year. I was one year and a half at Paris, and two years and one month in Italy. Louis XVI. of France died (falleció) in Paris the 21st of January, 1793. My brother is the fourteenth and my sister the eleventh of the class. Does your music-master come every fourth day? No, he comes every other day (un dia si y otro no, lit. one day Yes and the other No). Take the 10th, the 30th, the 70th, and the 90th parts. I have bought 8^2 pounds of sugar and 2^/3 pounds of coflfee. Give me % and %. The first king of France, Pharamond (Faramundo), reigned (reinó) eight years. Louis XIV. of France died the 1st of Septem- ber, 1715, at the age of 77 years. I have bought 6% yards of this cloth. The Emperor Francis Joseph (José) of Austria was horn (nadó) at Vienna the 18th of August, 1830. When were you born ? (¿ nació V ?) I was born on the 6th of July, 1878. February is the second, April the fourth, May the fifth, July the seventh, August the eighth, September the ninth, October the tenth, and November the eleventh month of the year. I have read the 18th and the 14th chapter of the 2nd volume. A day is the seventh part of a week. Conyersacién. ¿Cuándo muda el caballo los Á los dos afios y medio de dientes? edad. ¿Cuándo murió el rey Luis Murió el 21 de enero de 1793. XVI de Francia? Digitized by VjOOQIC Indefinite Numerals. 67 ¿Qué lugar (place) tiene su Es el octavo ó el noveno de hermano de V. en el co- su clase, legio? ¿ Y su hermana de V. ? Creo (I bdieve, I think) que es la sexta. ¿En qué afio nació V.? Nací (I was bom) en el afio 1878. ¿En qué mes? En enero. ¿Qué dia? El 18. ¿De qué emperador habla V.? Hablo del emperador Francisco José de Austria. ¿Cuándo nació? Nació en Viena el 18 de agosto de 1830. ¿Qué ha comprado V.? He comprado ocho libras y media de azúcar y doce varas de tela (cloth), ¿Cuánto tiempo (how long) Afio y medio*. estuvo V. en París? ¿ No viene su maestro de V. No, señor, viene cada tres días, un dia si y otro no? Eighteenth Lesson. — Lección dieciocho. Numerals. — Numerales. 3. Indefiüite Numerals. — Numerales indefinidos. These words are pronouns when used without a substantive. With a substantive, however, they are adjectives. They are: Alguno, -a, plur. algunos j -as, any, anybody, somebody; pi. any, some. Alguien, any, anyone, anybody. Ninguno, -a; no, nobody, no one; none. Nadie, nobody. Cualquiera, pi. cualesquiera, whoever, whatever. Quienquiera, whoever. Unos, unas, some, any, a few. Uno Oa) y otro (-a), \ both, all. plur. unos (-as) y otros (-as), f ' Ni uno, not a single one. Ni él uno ni el otro, neither the one nor the other. Unos cuantos, unas cuantas, some, a few. * In the expressions one year (hour etc.), and a half, the indefinite article is usually omitted. Ex. : Hora y media, an hour and a half. Año y medio, a year and a half. 5* Digitized by VaOOQlC 68 Lesson 18. Otro, -a (plur. otros, -as), other, another, someone else; plur. ¡08 otros (las otras), the others. MismOj -a, plur. mismoSf -as, same. El mismo, la misma, the same. Cada (in combination), every. Cada uno (when alone), each. TodOy -a, all; plur. tochs, -as, all. todos los (todas las), all who . . .; every. Tal, such; plur. tales, such. Fulano, -a, ) ^ ^^^^ ^ ^^^ ^^ Zutano, -a, / Observations. 1. Cada, every, each, is used for both genders and numbers, and may be applied either to persons or things; as: Cada hombre, every man; coda semana, every week. With numerals in the plural, it corresponds to the English every followed by an ordinal number, as: Ckida cinco días, every fifth day ; coda dos pasos, every two steps. With uno it means everyone^ as: Cada uno de por sí, everyone for himself. 2. Alguien, any, anybody, anyone, is likewise used for both genders and numbers, but only of persons and affirmatively ov interrogatively, as: ¿Entra alguien? does anybody enter? Nobody is ninguno, -a (referring either to persons or things), or nadie (only of persons), as: Ninguno debe hablar, nobody shall speak. If ninguno or nadie follow the verb, the negation río shoujd precede it, as: Eso no es de, ninguna importancia, that is of no importance. 3. Cualquiera, whoever, whatever, stands for both genders (in reference either to persons or things); plur. cualesquiera. The final a is sometimes dropped, but the complete form is preferable. Thus any thing means cualquiera cosa or cualquier cosa; pi. cualesquiera libros or cucdesquier libros. A similar form is quienquiera, whoever; this pronoun being only used for persons and commonly followed by que, as: Quienquiera que lo diga, whoever says so (it). 4. Na^ie is the English nobody, and nada is nothing. Like ninguno, alguno, and ni uno ni otro (neither one nor the other), these pronouns admit of no negation be- Digitized by VjOOQIC Indefinite N ameráis. 69 fore the verb when preceding it, whereas the verb should be preceded by nOy if nadie and nada follow. Ex.: Nadie lo ha visto, nobody has seen it. Bat: JVo lo ha visto nadie, » » » ». JSÍada he dicho, I have said nothing. Bat: JSfo he dicho nada, » » » . 5. Alguno, -a, any, anybody, anyone, is used in both genders and numbers, and referring either to per- sons or things. In the plural it means several^ a few^ soine, etc. Like uno, it drops the final o before mascu- line nouns, as: Algún hombre, any man. Examples: alguna mujer, any woman; algunos hombres, several men; algunas mujeres, several women. With no and the verb preceding, it means nobody, not anybody, not anyone, etc., 2ñ: No he visto (á) alguno"^, I have seen nobody, I have not seen anyone. In this case it has the same signification as nadie, which may be used in its stead, provided it does not precede the verb. Thus: A nadie he visto, means: I have seen nobody; whereas: (Á) alguno he visto, means: I have seen somebody. Note.— On nadie with the signification anybody, some" body, etc., see second Part. 6. Fulano and zutano mean a certain, so and so, etc. in quite a vague sense; Fulano is sometimes joined by de tal (lit. of such), as : Fulano lo sabe, so and so knows it; el Señor don fulano de tal, Mr. So and So. Commonly they are used together, as: Fulano quiere á zutana, a certain gentleman (Mr. So and So) loves a certain lady (Miss So and So). 7. OtrOj 'tty other, is never used with the indefinite article un; thus: Another has said so. Otro (not un otro) lo ha dicho, I have another pen, tengo otra pluma* Words. El orgullo, the pride. la estampa, the engraving. la hora, the hour. el paseo, the public walk, la fuerza, the strength. promenade. el motivo, the reason. propio, -a, proper. la comida, the dinner, food. cierto, certain. * The preposition á is there frequently omitted for the sake of euphony, or when not emphatic. Digitized by VaOOQlC 70 Lesson 18. ir ^ á ver i ^ ^^^ ^°.* ^^ trabajar, to work. venir f * \ pay a visit. presumir de . , ., to overrate. quejarse, to complain. tener hambre, to be hungry. tratar con, to deal with, to tener sed, to be thirsty. treat. hecho, done, made. acertar, to succeed in. ahora, now. preguntar por, to ask for. junto, -a, together. lisonjear, to flatter. acaso, perhaps. Reading Exercise. 26. Nada lisonjea más el orgullo de los hombres que la con- fianza de los grandes. V. tiene algunos libros. No he visto á nadie en casa de mi amigo. ¿Ha venido alguno? Nadie ha venido. He visto á su hermano cada dia. Trabajamos todos juntos y cada uno de por si (by himself). El mismo hombre me ha dado el dinero. Yo mismo lo he hecho. Hasta ahora nadie ha venido. Nadie en esta ciudad conoce á mi hermano. Ninguno está cierto de la hora de su muerte. Ninguno debe (shall) presumir de sus propias fuerzas. Quien- quiera que lo diga, se equivoca (is mistaken). El uno decía (said) que sí (yes), el otro que no*. Cada seis meses tendré (I shall come) á verle á V. De todos los (those) que vratan conmigo (with me), ¿hay acaso uno (alguno) que tenga motivo de quejarse? Cualquiera cosa que él haga (may do), la hará mal (he will do it wrong); no puede (can) acertar en nada. Fulano y zutano han preguntado por V. Todos hablan de ello (it), como si fuera cierto. Cualquiera comida es buena para quien (him who) tiene hambre. Quienquiera que sea, ha hecho mal en decirlo (to say so), ¿ Tiene V. otro caballo ? Traducción. 27. I have no other book. He has given me nothing. We have some good books and some fine engravings. Nobody has done it (eso), I have not seen anything. Whoever says so (que — lo diga), is mistaken. I do not believe (creo) it. Charles has not done it, someone else (otro) Has done it. Has anybody asked for (por) me? No, sir, nobody has asked for you. I have seen the same lady. Everyone speaks (habla) for himself (si mismo). You (tú) have done it yourself. I do not know (conozco) anybody in this town. The one is hungry, the other is thirsty, but neither (of them) has money. I shall come every third day to call on yon. Does Mr. So and So live here? (¿ Vive aquí, ,,?) He who is hungry says that all food is good. Both have done it. I think that someone else has * After decir y "to say," the affirmative and negative particles si and no are pleonastically preceded by que. [Aa in French.] Digitized by VaOOQlC The Adjective. 71 done it. Give me (Déme V.) some books. Nobody knows (sabe) it, because (porque) I (did not tell anyone) have not told it to anybody. Oonyersación. ¿Quién (who) lo sabe? ¿Quién lo ha hecho? ¿Qué han dicho? ¿Cuándo vendrá V. á ver á' mi padre? ¿Ha venido alguien? ¿Á quién lo ha dicho V.? ¿Quién lo ho creído (believed)? ¿Ño es verdad? ¿Tiene V. otro sombrero? ¿Ha visto V. á alguno en el paseo ? ¿Quién ba visto á mi amo (master) ? ¿Ha visto V. á alguna de aquellas señoras? Nadie lo sabe. Ninguno lo ha hecho, or No lo ha hecho ninguno. El uno dijo que si, el otro que no. Vendré cada cinco días. Sí, señor; fulano y zutano han preguntado por V. Á nadie lo he dicho, usted mismo lo ha creído. No, señor; quienquiera que lo diga, falta á la verdad (tells a lie). No, señora, no tengo otro. No he visto á nadie. Nadie le ha visto. Á decir verdad (To speak the truth), no he visto á ninguna. Nineteenth Lesson. — Lección diecinueve. The Adjective. — Del adjetivo. Rule. — The Spanish Adjective agrees in gender and number with the word it qualifies. § 1. Adjectives ending in o change this vowel into a for the feminine, as: hermoso, beautiful, fern, hermosa, bueno, good, » buena. Note, — The very limited number of adjectives ending in -ete and -ote follow the same rule: as: regordete, short stout (man) — regordeta, aUote, very high — altota. § 2. Adjectives not ending in o, hence those ending in a consonant (I, w, r, s, ^), or in one of the vowels a, 6, ¿, have only one termination for both gen- ders. Ex.: Digitized by VjOOQIC 72 Lesson 19. un hambre cortés, a polite man. una mujer cortés, a polite woman. un hombre grave, a serious man. una materia grave, a serious matter. un oljeto haladi, a trivial olDJect. una cosa baladi, a trivial thing. Exceptions. Some words, being used both as substantives and adjectives, take a in the feminine in either capacity, as : holgazán, holgazana, idle and idler; mam^antón, maman- tona, sackling or nursling. Also adjectives denoting nationality, as: francés, French, fern, francesa, andaluz, Andalosian, » andaluza, alemán, German, » cUemana. inglés, English, » inglesa, etc. Those terminating in a, like persa^ Persian, are alike in both genders. § 3. Formation of the plural of the adjectives. All adjectives ending in an unaccented vowel form their plural by adding «, as: bueno, Plur. buenos, buena, » bu>enas, francesa, > francesas. Adjectives terminating in an accented vowel or in a consonant add e«, as: ruin, bad, wicked, plur. ruines, baladi, trifling, » baladies. español, Spanish, » españoles. ^oíe.— -The orthographical rule given in § 1, Less. 2, is also applied to adjectives, as: feliz, happy; plur. felices, etc. § 4. The adjectives alguno, ninguno, bueno, malOj as well as the numerals una, primero, tercero, postrero, lose the o before a masculine substantive in the singular; whilst grande drops its last syllable before any substantive in the singular either masculine or feminine. — Ciento, also, loses its last syllable before any plural ^see Less. 16, Cardinal Numbers). Thus: buen hombre for bueno hombre, mal caballero, » malo caballero, algún libro, > Digitized by Google The Adjective. 78 gran caballo^ ningún amigo, una gran casa, un gran caballo. Santo drops its last syllable before names of saints, and its abbreviation is S. S. Juan (San —), S^- John. S. Pedro (San -), S^- Peter. ^.^.— Before feminine noons, the omission of the last syllable is very rare, except with grande. Thus one had better say: la primera cosa, the first thing, than la primer cosa. With grande the apocopation* is rather arbitrary, and before substantives beginning with vowels the full form is preferable, as: grande alma (soul); grande hombre, great man; grande amigo. It may be observed that before the names Domingo, Tomás, Tomé, and Toribio the adj. santo does not drop the last syllable; thus: Santo Domingo, St. Dominions**. § 5. In reference to the position of the adjective, the following are the principal rules: 1. Adjectives as well as participles denoting a general quality, as attributed to all objects of the same kind, precede; whilst those denoting a special quality attributed to a certain object, foUow: La dulce miel, sweet honey. La blanca nieve, the white snow. Un pié pequeño, a small foot. Una mano blanca, a white hand, ^ote.-— However, whenever it is desirable to emphasize the quality of a certain understood object, the adjective pre- Movió el pequeño pié, she moved her small foot. Le alargó su blanca mano, she tended him her white hand. 2. Adjectives and participles used in a metaphorical meaning, as distinguished from their primary one, pre- cede, while the latter follow: homi>re bueno, good man. buen hombre, good fellow. cdbaUo grande, big horse. gran caballo, fine horse. niño pobre, a poor child. ¡pobre niño! poor child! * i.e., the omission of the final de. ** However: la isla de San-Tomas, the island of St. Thomas. The pupil is requested to remember the following "locus memo- rialis": Santo Tomás nunca estuvo en San- Tomas, St Thomas was never in St. Thomas. Digitized by VjOOQIC 74 Lesson 19. JV!B.— Consequently adjectives not susceptible of a meta- phorical meaning, such as those expressing nationality y or origin, scientific ideas or theories of any kind, quantity, number or division, follow: La nación española, the Spanish nation. La bandera inglesa, the British flag. Las fuerzas físicas, physical forces. Una linea recta, a straight line. La religión protestante, the Protestant religion. Muchos libros, many books. Dos billetes, two tickets. Media peseta, half a peseta. Note. — Adjectives denoting order may precede or follow: Vivo en el piso segundo (or en el segundo piso), I live on the second floor. Lea V, el primer capitulo (or el capitulo primero). Bead the first chapter. § 6. An adjective qualifyÍDg two substantives must be in the plural; thus: El amK) y él criado están contentos. The master and the servant are contented. El ama y la criada están contentas. The mistress and the servant-maid are contented. If the substantives are of different genders, the adjective is put in the plural masculine, provided the nouns denote persons or living beings. Thus : Los hombres y las mujeres fueron salvados. The men and women were saved. If, on the contrary, things are spoken of, the gender of the last substantive prevails, thus : Ojos y orejas abiertas^ eyes and ears open ; but: Orejas y ojos abiertos, ears and eyes open. § 7. A noun in the plural is followed by several adjectives in the singular, when each adjective would have, if alone, the noun in the singular: Las lenguas latina y griega. The Latin and the Greek languages. Los cantos tercero y cuarto. The third and fourth hymn. Words. La costumbre, the custom, el temor, the fear, manner. el vasallo, the vassal. Digitized by vaOOQlC The Adjective. 75 d orden, the order. casado, -a, married. la orden, the command. feo, -a, ugly. el discípulo, the pupil, scholar, cuantioso, -a, considerable. el autor, the author. vano, -a, vain. la suerte, the fate. • serio, -a, serious. la materia, the matter. alegre, merry. [gent. la canción, the song. trabajador, -a, laborious, dili- el alma (f.), the soul. desordenado, -a, disorderly. la injuria, the offence. hábil, able, clever. la hacienda, the estate, the célebre, famous, renowned. fortune. honrado, -a, honoured. d caudal, the capital, fund. sonoro, -a, sonorous. d difunto, the dead (man), the corrompen, they corrupt, they late .... taint. d pintor, the painter. fluctúan, they fluctuate. d perro, the dog. crió (3rd s. def.), (he) created. la hazaña, the heroic deed. mantiene, maintains. Burdeos, Bordeaux. perdona, pardons. glorioso, illustrious. estudia, studies. amable, amiable. aborrecido, detested, abhorred. Readingr Exercise. 28. Una mujer hermosa, virtuosa y rica se ha casado con un hombre feo, malo y pobre. Las malas compañías corrompen las buenas costumbres. Los hombres fluctúan siempre entre falsas esperanzas y vanos temores. Un hombre malo es siempre aborrecido. Un buen rey hace felices á sus vasallos. El primer hombre que Dios crió fué Adán, y la primera mujer fué Eva. Las españolas son serias y las francesas alegres y amables, lina mujer holgazana es siempre desordenada, pero una mujer trabajadora mantiene en orden su casa. El hábil maestro tiene discipulos aplicados. Miguel de Cervantes fué el célebre autor del D. Quijote de la Mancha. ¿Qué quiere V. hacer con esos objetos haladles? La suerte de un hombre es una materia muy grave. Las canciones andaluzas son muy boni- tas. Una grande alma perdona fácilmente (easily) una in- juria. El cTeatro Grande» de Burdeos es un gran teatro. Mi hermano estudia las lenguas francesa y alemana. Lope de Vega fué un gran poeta. San Pablo (Paul) y Santo Tomás han honrado la iglesia católica. Una mujer regordeta no es hermosa. ¡Tenga V. las orejas y los ojos abiertos! La hacienda y los caudales del difunto eran considerables. Traducción. 29. This man was poor, but virtuous. (A) bad company is a great evil (mal). False fears and vain hopes are the lot (d lote) of (the) man. Happy subjects love their king. Cervan- Digitized by VaOOQlC 76 Lesson 19. tes was a great writer (escritor) and Mnrillo a celebrated painter. The Germans are serious, and the French are merry. This idle girl has no (no —) order in her things. Polite people (tr. men) are very agreeable. A bad king is a misfortune lor his subjects. CsBsar (César) was a great man. You live (vive) in a large house. One must (8e d^he) admire (admirar) the good manners of these people. This gentleman has very amiable children (hijos). He studies (estudia) the history of the second civil (civu) war. The first, second, and tíiird chapters (capitulo) are good. Our house is large, but our garden is small. A serious man does not speak of such (tan) trifling things. One must (Se deben) admire the glorious deeds of this prince. Men and women are small in that country. The books and letters on the table (mesa) were open. I have at home (en casa) a big dog and a little cat (gcUo). The first man was a sinner (pecador). The Spanish and Italian languages are very melodious (transí, the languages Spanish [fem. sing.] and Italian [fem. sing.] are . . . .). Conversación. ¿Cómo es la casa? i Quién perdona fácilmente una injuria? ¿Qué lenguas estudia su her- mano de V.? ¿ Qué canciones son muy agra- dables? ¿Qué Santos han honrado la iglesia católica? ¿Qué sabe V. (do you know y can you) decirme (tell me) de Cervantes y Murillo? ¿ Come se deben tratar (must he treated) los asuntos (mat- ters) graves? ¿Cuál es la situación de ese hombre? ¿Qué traje (suit) llevaba ("wore) el joven (young many youth) ? ¿Qué sombrero tiene V.? ¿Qué causas (law-suits) de- fiende (defends) un abogado recto (honest)^ La casa es muy grande. Una grande alma. Estudia las lenguas francesa y alemana. Las canciones andaluzas. San Pablo y Santo Tomás. Cervantes fué el célebre autor del D. Quijote, y Murillo fué un gran pintor. Con ánimo (mind) sosegado (quiety calm). Su situación es muy lastimosa. Llevaba traje azul (blue) j sombrero negro (black). Tengo un sombrero inglés. Un abogado recto defiende siempre las causas justas. Digitized by VjOOQIC Degrees of CompariBon. 77 Twentieth Lesson, — Lección veinte. Degrees of Gomparlsom — Orados de comparación. § 1. The comparison of Spanish adjectives is some- what analogous to the English. The comparative degree of superiority is formed by the word más (more), and its superlative by el más^ fem. la más, neut. lo más (the most). Examples: Compar. Superl. hermoso, -a, más hermoso, -a, el más hermoso, \ the most beautiful ; more beautiful ; f. la más hermosa, | beautiful. The comparison of inferiority is effected in a simi- lar way by the adverb menos (less), as: Compar. Superl. poblado, -a, menos poblado, -a, el menos poblado, \ the least populous; less populous/ not i. lámenos poblada, f]^o]^\úoxiB. so populous; § 2. Again, there is an absolute superlative, by which a high degree is expressed. It is formed by the addition of the ending isimo for the masculine and isima for the feminine to the positive degree of the ad- jective, which then drops its final vowel, as: docto, learned; abs. superl. doctísimo, very learned. santo, holy; » » santísimo, very holy. Note,— Some adjectives undergo a slight alteration in the formation of the absolute superlative. These are: (a) Adjectives ending in -io, which drop the i when adding the ending -isimo; thus: amplio, wide, abs. superl. amplí9im>o. Except: agrio, sour; frio, cold; 3,ná pio, pious, which form agriisimOf friisimo, piisimo, (b) Adjectives in -ble, which adopt their Latin stem, as: amable (Lat. amaMlis)^ amiable, abs. superl. amabiUHm^o. (c) Those in 4ente and -ierto, which drop the i before e, as: ardiente, glowing — ardentisimo; cierto, certain — cer- tísimo. (d) And the following, which are directly derived from their corresponding Latin forms: acre, sharp — acérrimo. amigo, friendly — amicisimo (also amiguísimo). (mtiguOf old — antiquísimo. áspero, rough — aspérrimo, also asperísimo. Digitized by VjOOQIC 78 Lesson 20. henéficOy beneficent — beneficentísimo, benévolo, benevolent — henevolentisimo, bueno, good — bonísimo, célebre j famous — celebérrimo, fiel, faithful — fidelísimo, fuerte, strong — fortísimo, íntegro, upright — integérrimo. Ubre, free — libérrimo, magnífico, magnificent — magnifi^centísimo, mísero, miserable — misérrimo, munífico, liberal — munificentísimo, nuevo, new — novísimo, pobre, poor — paupérrimo, sagrado, hallowed — sacratísimo, salubre, healthy — salubérrimo, sabio, wise — sapientísimo, (e) Adjectives ending in -z, -co, and -go change these terminations into -cisimo, -quisimo, and -guisimo, thus : voraz, voracious, — voracísimo, most voracious; rico, rich — riquí- simo; vago, vague — vaguísimo. (f) Adjectives terminating in i, l,n,r — as: turquí, blue; paternal, paternal; ruin, wicked, bad; secular, secular — do ' take the ending -isimo. The absol, superl, of these adjectives is formed by placing the adverb mu¡/, very, before the positive; thus : muy paternal, etc. Note.— The absol, superl, of every adjective may be formed by placing muy before the positive. Thus: Verp faithful is fidelísimo or muy fiel; very learned, muy docto or doctísimo. § 3. The following adjectives, besides their ordinary regular comparison, have an irregular form for the com- parative of superiority and the superlatives: bueno, -a, good. malo, -a, bad. grande*"^, great. me^'or, better. peor, worse. mayor, greater. ? I mejor, the Li ^««*- el \ l^ypeor, the lo\ ^^^^*- ^^[maijor, the lo ( greatest. óptimo, -a* Wery (bonísimo, -a)] good. pésimo \ very (malísimo) ] bad. máximo Wery (grandísimo)) gredit. Almost absolete. When grande implies size, its degrees of comparison are regular. Digitized by VjOOQIC Degrees of Comparison. 79 pequeño, -a, little, small. alto, -a, bigb. lajo, -a, low. menor, less, smaller. superior, bigber. inferior, low- er, inferior. el \ menor, tbe la ) least, lo j smallest. en 7 I superior, J* j tbe bigbest. f I inferior, ^^j tbe lowest. mínimo \ very lit- (pequeñi- > tie, very simo^ I small. supremo, I inñmo \ very (bajisimo) f low. Adjectives and Adverbs. (poco, little, ;nténo5, less, few. los menos, leeL»t\poquisimo, very (people, etc.).! little. I mucho, más, more, los más, most muchísimo, very mucb. (people, etc.). | mucb. Note, — Tbe difference in tbe use of tbe double form of tbe tbe above adjectives and adverbs is as follows: Mejor and peor are more frequent tban más bueno and más malo. Mayor means greater, larger, more considerakle, and menor denotes tbe contrary of mayor. Besides, mayor signifies elder, and menor means younger, like tbe Latin major natu and minor natu, — Superior, supremo, and inferior, ínfimo denote by preference rank, sometimes also tbe situation of a place or a tbing. — Tbe regular abs. sup. grandísimo is more in use tban máximo, — Más and menos are adjectives and adverbs. Wben used as adjectives, tbey may, of course, take tbe definite article; tbus las más noches, most nigbts, etc. Lo más and lo menos are neuter, and mean the most, the least (for instance, lo menos que V. puede hacer, etc., tbe least you can do, etc.). § 4. Than, after a comparative, is translated in various ways — vi¿:: (a) By que, if ''than" is followed by a substantive, Si pronoun, or another adjective^ as: Tu primo es más rico que mi hermano. Your cousin is ricber tban my brotber. Tu primo es más rico que yo. Your cousin is ricber tban I. Use hombre es más desdichado que malo, Tbat man is more unbappy tban wicked. (b) By de lo que, if "than" is followed by a sent- ence, as: Digitized by VjOOQIC 80 Lesson 20. He is more clever than he seems (i.e., to be). Es más listo de lo que parece. (c) By de, if followed by a numeral, as: more than six. más de seis, § 5. As — ds = tan — como. Ex.: Tan elocuente como Cicerón. But if the comparison concerns quantity, number, etc., as — OS is expressed by tanto, -a — cuanto, -a or tanto, -a — coma, as: Tiene tanta hacienda cuanta (como) tenia su padre. He has as much wealth as his father had. Esta traducción tiene tantas faltas como las otras. This translation has as many faults as the others. Note.— It must be distinctly understood that tanto and cuanto are adjectives, and therefore agree with their respective substantives in gender and number, as in the above sentences. Instead of cuanto, -a, como is used if no verb follows, as in the second instance. With the verb following (see the fírst sentence, cuanta tenia su padre), cuanto is preferable, though coma is admissible, too. § 6. If an accessory sentence is introduced by ^Hhat,'' this conjunction is rendered by que, as: He has so many books that he cannot read them all. Tiene tantos libros que no los puede leer todos. Words. La firmeza, the firmness. dócil, docile, obedient. el capitán, the captain. cuerdo, -a, i reasonable, pru- la prudencia, the prudence. prudente, f dent. el valor, the bravery, valour, sabroso, -a, savoury, delicious. él obispo, the bishop. dulce, sweet. la isla, the island. bajo, -a, low. la almendra, the almond. sincero, -a, sincere. la cerveza, the beer. barato, -a, cheap. la noticia, the news. obrar, to work. el pariente, the relation. conozco, I know. floreciente, flourishing. vienen, they come. cansado, -a, tired. contar, to count, to number, valiente, brave. to tell (a story, etc.). Reading Exercise. 80« La rosa es hermosísima. Pedro está muy cansado. El padre és más prudente que el hijo. Este niño es menos dócil que prudente. El perro es tan fiel como valiente. Él no es Digitized by vaOOQlC Degrees of ComparÍBon. 81 tan cuerdo como su hermana. Yo no tengo tanto dinero, tanta ñrmeza y tantos amigos como V. El capitán obró con tanta prudencia como valor. La madre de mi amigo es la mujer más virtuosa que conozco. V. tiene un criado fidelísimo. Estamos aquí en un lugar salubérrimo. El piísimo obispo Fulano ha muerto. Mi reloj es mejor que el suyo, pero el (that) del doctor es el mejor de todos. Italia tiene buen vino, Francia lo * tiene mejor, pero España es la que tiene el mejor vino. Esta isla es más grande que aquella. Mi primo está en la clase superior, y mi hermano en la clase inferior. Las frutas más sabrosas se hallan en la baja Andalucía. Mi ve- cino es un hombre integérrimo. Galicia es un país friísimo. Las almendras son dulces, pero el azúcar es más dulce. Mi primo es el hombre más sincero del mundo, y mi prima es la mujer más hermosa de la ciudad. Esta cerveza es más cara que el vino, pero es malísima. Las pérdidas por (by) mar £on más considerables que por tierra. Las manufacturas inglesas son más baratas que las (those) que vienen de Francia. El comercio de Sevilla es menos floreciente que el (that) de Barcelona. Europa es la parte más pequeña del mundo, y Asia la más grande. Traducción. 81. This rose is prettier than that; it is the prettiest of all tny flowers. My father is very de old ; he is older than yours (el de usted). Mrs. (La Señora de) Muntafiola is very amiable ; sbe is the most amiable lady (that) I know. This news is quite certain (abs, sup,). Murillo was a very famous Spanish painter. That bishop was very beneficent ; now (ahora) he is very poor. Is your brother (su,..de V.) older or younger than you (usted)? He is taller than I, but he is younger. A very rich man is not always a very happy man. This fruit is more sweet than sour. This translation is more difficult than it seems. The captain was as brave as [he was] generous. He has so many relations that he cannot count them all. That is the richest man of the town. The island of Madeira is finer than the island of Majorca. Galicia is the coldest region of Spain, [it] is a very cold country. Are you in the upper or in the lower class? This wine is very bad; the beer is better. We were all very tired, but my sister was the most tired of all. Why are you (usted) not as obedient as your (su — de y,) brother? You would have been more prudent if you had been older (más viejo). Do you know a fruit which is more * SomCf referring to a preceding substantive, and followed by an adjective^ is rendered by the acciis. of the personal pro- fioun; thus: lo tiene mejor ^ has some better (i.e., \*ine). Spanish Cony.-Grammar. A t Digitized by VaOOQlC ' 82 LesBOD 21. delidoas than ibis? That book had as many mistakes as the other. God is the Supreme Being (Ser). Conrersaeión. ¿ Cómo fué el comercio de esta ciudad? ¿Eá fuerte su hermano de V. ? ¿Quién ha muerto ayer? ¿Cómo era el capitán? ¿Es pequeña esta casa? ¿ Tiene V. tantos criados como tenia su padre? ¿Es cierta esta noticia? ¿Es integro ese empleado (clerk) ? ¿Cómo es la almendra? ¿ Tiene V. buenas almendras ? ¿Quién era Murillo? ¿ Conoce V. á un hombre sin- cero? Fué muy floreciente. Si, es un hombre fortisimo. El piísimo obispo Fulano. Era tan valiente como sincero. Al contrario, es más grande de lo que parece. Tengo más. 8i, señor, es certísima. Es un empleado integérrimo. Es dulcísima, pero menos dulce que el azúcar. Las (see Exercise 30) tengo buenas, pero mi vecino es quien las tiene mejores. Murillo era un celebérrimo pin- tor español. Conozco á un hombre muy sincero, le conozco á V. Twenty-first Lesson. — Lección veintiuna. On the Regalar Verb. — Del verbo regalar. By the terminatiou of the Infinitive Mood we dis- tinguish three diflferent forms of conjugation— í;í^.: The first conjugation, with the Infinitive Mood end- ing in ar, as: amar, to love. The second conjugation, with the Infinitive ending in eVy as: comer y to eat. The ^Aird conjugation, terminating in ivj as: vivir ^ to live. ^os, we shall live. -iréis, you will live. —irán, they will live. Viviría, I should live. —irías, thou wouldst live. —iría, he would live. —iHamos, we should live. —iríais, you would live. — ir£an, they would live. Vive, live (thou)! í;¿i;<€í, live (you)! Fira F.*, live! (pol. form.) No vivas, do (thou) not live! No viváis, do (you) not live! No viva v., do not live! (pol. form.) Viva, I live. —€is, thou live. I — a, he live. * These forms are taken from the present of the Subjunctive Mood (see the following Note). ** The 3rd pers. sing, of the Pres. Subj. is of great impor- tance, because used with V., it replaces the Imperative of the polite form, thus: Ame V! (Do) love! Coma V.! (Do) eat! Viva Digitized by vaOOQlC On the Regular Verb. 85 —emos, we love. —HSf you love. —en, they love. Amase, if I loved. —ases, if thou lovedst. — «wc, if he loved. —asemos, if we loved. —aseis, if you loved. —€isen, if they loved. Amare, if I should love. —ares, if thou should st love. —are, if he should love. —aremos, if we should love. —areis, if you should love. —aren, if they should love. — amos, we eat. —ais, you eat. —an, they eat. Imperfect Comiese, if I ate. —ieses, if thou atest. — iese, if he ate. —iésemos, if we ate. — ieseis, if you ate —iesen, if they ate. Future. Comiere, if I should eat. —ieres, if thou shouldst eat. — iere, if he should eat. —iéremos, if we should eat. —iereis, if you should eat. —ieren, if they should eat. I —amos, we live. — ais, you live. I — an, they live. Fire or que ame F, The diflference between the affirmative and the interrogative forms, with which the so-called Imperative of the polite form is easily confounded, will be seen best in the following table: I. Conjug, You love, F. ama. Do you love? ¿Ama V.? Do love! ¡Ame F./ IL Conjug. You eat, F. come. Do you eat? ¿Come V/f Do eat / Coma F. / IIL Conjug. You live, F. vive. Do yoa live? ¿Vive V.? Do live! ¡Viva F./ Digitized by VjOOQIC 86 Lesson 21. Amara, if I loved. —aras, if thou lovedst. —ara, if he loved. — aramos f if we loved. — araiSj if you loved. —aran, if they loved. Amando, loving. Amado, loved. Conditional. Comiera, if I ate. —ieras, if thou atest. —iera, if he ate. —iératnos, if we ate. —ierais, if you ate. —ieran, if they ate. Viviera, if I lived. —ieras, if thou lived. —iera, if he lived. —ieramoSj if we lived. — ierais, if you lived. —ieran, if they lived. Gerund. I Comiendo, eating. | Viviendo, living. Participle. I Comido, eaten. | Vivido, lived. He \ has ) amadOy comido, vivido, ha } etc. Compound Tenses. Indicative. Compound Perfect, I have I thou hast /loved, eaten, lived, he has | etc. Había I Pluperfect I had loved, eaten, habías \ amado, comido, vivido, thou hadst/ lived había J etc. etc. 3nd Pluperfect. Hube amado, comido, vivido, 1 had loved, eaten, lived. etc. etc. Compound Future. Habré amado, comido, vivido, I shall have loved, eaten, lived. Compound Conditiona}, Habría amado, comido, vivido, I should have loved, eaten, lived. Subjunctive. Compound Perfect. Haya amado, comido, vivido, that I have loved, eaten, lived. Digitized by VjOOQIC On the Regular Verb. 87 Pluperfect Hubiese amado, comido, vivido, if I had loved, eaten, lived. Compound Future, Hubiere amado, comido, vi- if I shall have loved, eaten, vido, lived. Compound ConditionaL Hubiera amado, comido, vi- that I should have loved, vido, eaten, lived. By way of practice the pupil should conjugate the following regular verbs: After the First Conjugation. ^rre^Zar, to order, put in order, ilustrar, to illustrate. bajar, to descend. llegar, to arrive. mar, to create, breed. llevar, to carry, to wear. emplear, to apply. olvidar, to forget. engañar, to deceive. representar, to represent. fumar, to smoke. trabajar, to work. gastar, to spend. viajar, to travel. After the Second Conjugation. Aprender, to learn. emprender, to undertake. correr, to run. esconder, to conceal. conceder, to concede, grant. sorprender, to surprise. deber, to be obliged, to be vender, to sell, indebted to, to owe. After the Third Conjugation. Acudir, to hasten to. percibir, to penetrate, look exigir, to demand. recibir, to receive, [through. hundir, to sink (trans.). subir, to ascend. Remarks. Although the use of the tenses will be given in the Second Part, it is* desirable to give here a few hints on those tenses which offer the greatest difficulties to the be- ginner. 1. In Conditional clauses beginning with **if," the Spaniard uses the Imperfect of the Subjunctive or the Conditional of the same Mood, and the principal sentence follows (or pre- cedes) with the Conditional of the Indicative Mood, thus: Imperf, Subj. Cond. Suhj. Cond, Indie. 8i amases (or amaras) los buenos libros, serías más instruido. If you loved good books, you would be more learned. Digitized by VaOOQlC 88 Lesson 21. Condit Subj, Impf. Suhj. Si las riquezas hubieran (or hubiesen) podido saciar Condit Ind, mis deseos, las habría amado. If riches could have satisfied my wishes^ I should have loved them. 2. In exclamations expressing desire, etc., the Imperfect of the Subjunctive is used as well as the Conditional of the same mood, as: ¡Ojalá fuera (or fuese) eso asi! Would that it were so! 3. After to tell, to say, to think, and similar verbs, the Conditional of the Indicative is used, if the principal sentence is affirmative. If, on the conti*ary, the principal sentence is negative, interrogative, or expresses doubt, either the Conditional or the Imperfect of the Subjunctive should be employed in the accessory sentence, thus: He said (had said) that he would come. Cond. Ind, Deda (dijo) (hahia dicho) que vendHa* I did not think that they would overtake us. Cond. Subj. Impf. Suhj. No creía que nos alcanzaran or alcanzasen. 4. After the verbs "to be willing, to desire, to wish, to pretend," etc., the Conditional of the Indicative should never be used ; the Conditional of the Subjunctive or the Imperfect of the same Mood are employed, as: I wished he would come. Quería que viniera or viniese (but never vendría). 5. The Future of the Subjunctive refers to a FtUure or Imperative in the principal sentence, as: You will come if you can (properly : if you will be able to come). Vendrá V. si pudiere (or puede, pres.). This is commonly the case, if the accessory sentence is introduced by "he who," "that which," "all that," where in English, too, the Future might be used instead of the Pre- sent, as: Choose of these places that which pleases you best. Elija V. de estos puestos el que más le agradare (or agrade, pres. Subj.). Digitized by VjOOQIC On the Regular Verb. 89 Words. Los esttidioSf the studies. estudiar^ to study, el joven, the young man, creer, to believe, to think, youth. comprender, to understand. la escoba, the broom. meter, to put. la capa, the cloak. temer, to fear. el negodo, the business. ofender, to offend. el negociante, \ . , merchant l^**^***» to \Qzy^ (for), to set out, tl comerciante, t ' trabajar, to work. piadoso, -a, pious. llegar, to arrive. diligente, diligent. dííc^, said (past part). Reading Exercise. 82. ¿Que busca V.? Busco mi sombrero, y estos niños buscan sus libros. Amamos á nuestros padres (parents) y parientes (relations). Hablaba siempre de sus flores y pájaros. £se rey ama á su pueblo. Amaremos siempre á los que (those who) son virtuosos. Hablaré mañana al médico. Ha- blarla más de sus estudios, si fuese más diligente. ¿Cree Y. que nuestro vecino llegue hoy? Creo que llegará mañana. ¿Ha comprendido V. lo que he dicho? No lo he comprendido todo. La criada dejó la escoba en el cuai*to, cuando hubo acabado (done) de barrerlo (it). ¿Venderá V. sus perros? Venderé mis caballos, pero no venderé mis perros. Venderla su capa si se la comprasen (if they . .). Estos negociantes no venderían sus casas, si hubiesen hecho (done) mejores negocios. ¿Á quién ha vendido V. sus libros? ¿Cuándo par- tirá su padre de V. para Madrid? Partirá esta tarde. ¿Desde (since) cuándo vive V. en esta casa? Desde hace siete ú (inst. of ó, or; see the Conjunctions) ocho días. ¿Cuándo ha recibido V. el dinero? Recibí el dinero ayer. Traducción. 88. Will you (usted) look for (tr. search) my books and pens? I should look for them (los), if I had more time. We 2 always 1 speak for our friends. Shall you (V,) speak to the physician to-morrow? I should speak to the physician to-day, if he were here. The good king always loved his (su) people. Do you understand (Entiende Y.) the book which I have given (dado) you? I have understood all* very well (muy bien). The footman has put the hat on the table. If you (V.) were more diligent, you would speak more of your studies. God loves those who are pious and virtuous. My friend always spoke of his horses and dogs. I do not think that the Spanish merchant has (Subj.) yet (todavia) arrived. The young man * Everything. Digitized by VjOOQIC 90 Lesson 21. studied the whole day. I should leave ¡this afternoon if the weather were not so bad. Do you think (that) you will set out. to-day? I should set out at once (desde luego) if I had received my (el) money. We have been living for three months in this house. The footman has not swept the room to-day. CoDTerüaciÓD. ¿Quiere (to love^ like) V. á mi hermano? ¿Á quién ama Dios? ¿Qué buscaba su criado de V.? ¿Ha cogido (taken) V. mi cortaplumas (penknife)^ ¿Hablará V. hoy á aquel su- jeto (that man)l ¿Trabajará V. esta tarde? ¿ Por qué llora (crieSj weeps) este nifio? ¿Vive aquí su tío de V.? ¿ Cree V. que el criado llegue (see Lesson 22, 2) pronto (soon)'i ¿Qué ha vendido su amigo de V.? ¿Desde cuándo vive V. en esta calle? ¿Ha recibido V. una carta de Sevilla? ¿ Dónde viven las hijas de su amigo de V.? Le quiero mucho á su her- mano de V. Dios ama al que (him who) hace bien á los desdichados. Buscaba mi sombrero y mis guantes. No he cogido nada. Le (to him) he hablado ya (aireadla). No trabajaré, porque no tengo tiempo. Porque no tiene nada que (to) comer (eat). No, señor, vive en casa (at) de Don Casimiro Verguero (Mr, VJs), No creo que llegue hoy. Ha vendido sus caballos y sua perros. Desde hace año y medio. Aún (yet) no la he recibido. Viven en una quinta (country- Jwuse, cottage) muy lejos (far) de la ciudad. Reading Exercise. Geografía de España. Situación, clima, extensión, población. España tiene la misma longitud de las Islas Británicas, y la misma latitud del Norte de los Estados Unidos. Con- fina al N. con el Mar Cantábrico y Francia; al E. con el Mediterráneo; al S. con el Mediterráneo, el Estrecho de Gi- braltar y el Océano Atlántico, y al O. con Portugal y el At- lántico. — La Península. Ibérica está" enteramente rodeada de Digitized by VaOOQlC Euphonic Changes in Certain Verbs. 91 mar, excepto por la parte donde los Pirineos la separan de Francia. Su clima es vario ; en el Norte frío y nebuloso, en el Sud cálido, en el Centro frío ó cálido, según las estaciones; en general el clima es muy seco, por la destrucción de los bosques. La extensión superficial de Espafia es de 504 517 kiló- metros cuadrados, y la población de 18000000 de habitantes. Twenty-second Lesson^ — Lección vein- tidós. Euphonic Changes in Certain Yerbs. Certain classes of regular Verbs undergo various orthographical modifications in order to retain their pronunciation. These are as follow: 1. Verbs ending in -car^ as: tocar, to touch, change the c into qu before e; whilst those in -quiry as deHn- quir', to transgress, change qu into c before o, a; i.e.: Perf. Imper. toqué, toque V., (Do) touch, etc. etc. But: toco, tocos, etc. Subj. toque, toques, toque, etc. Ind. Pr. Imper. delinco, delinca V., etc. etc. Subj. delinca, delincas, delinca, etc. But: delinque, etc.; delinquí, etc. 2. Those in -gar as : pagar, to pay, insert u after g before e; whilst those in -guir, like distinguir, to dis- tinguish, change gu into ^before o, a; i.e.: Perf. Imper. Subj. pagué, pague Y., etc. etc. But: pago, pagas, etc. pague, pagues, pague, etc. Ind. Pres. Imper. Subj. distingo, distinga V., etc. etc. But: distingues, etc.; distinguí, etc. distinga, distingas, distinga, etc. Digitized by Google 92 Lesson 22. 3. Verbs in -zar, as : rezar, to pray, change s into c before e; verbs in -cer and -dr change c into » before a and o, ca, co, jra^ flfo; rezavy to pray, recé. rece, rece F. rece, rcccí, etc. vencer, esparcir, conocer, yacer, to conquer, to scatter. to know. to lie down. venzo, esparzo, conozco, yazgo, venza, esparza, conozca, yazga, etc. etc. etc. etc. 4. Verbs ending in -ger and -gir change g into J before a or o, as: escoger, to choose. dirigir, to direct. escojo, dirijo, escoja, dirija^ escojas, dirijas, escoja, dirija, etc. etc. 5. Verbs in -guar assume the diaeresis before e, é; while those in -güir lose the diaeresis before end- ings not having i with the stress or i: averiguar, to ascertain. argüir, to argue. averigüé, arguyo, averigüe, arguyes, averigües, arguye, averigüe, etc. etc. But: averiguo, etc.; argüí, etc. 6. O if diphthongised to ue assumes the form hue in oler, and the form ne if preceded by g: oler, to smell. avergonzarse, to be ashamed. huelo, me avergüenzo, hueles, te avergüenzas, huele, se avergüenza, etc. etc. 7. i unaccented between two vowels is converted into y, the same as i unaccented, initial, before a vowel: argüir, to argue. errar, to make a mistake. arguyo, yerro, arguyes, yerras, arguye, yerra, etc. etc. Digitized by VjOOQIC Euphonic Changes in Certain Verbs. 93 Words. El cuartOf the room. avergonzarse, to be ashamed. la sencillez, the simplicity. oler, to smell. el error, la falta, \ .y^ n i . olvidar, to forget. d defecto, J ' ignorar, not to be aware. el iw;o, luxury. entregar, to deliver, to give. el escritorio, \ the counting- padecer, to suffer. el despacho, J house, office. llegar, to arrive. escoger, to choose. escoger, to choose. la cuenta, the account. dirigir, to direct. él ahílelo, the grandfather. /mir, to flee, to fly (French :/wir). el periódico (or diario), the buscar, to search, to look for. newspaper. es preciso, it is necessary ; me creer, to believe. (lie, le) es preciso, I, (thou, pegar, to beat. he), etc., must, tocar, to touch. Reading Exercise. 3á. ¿ No le pegue usted al perro ? i No toque V. eso I ¿ Por- qué toca V. eso? Huyamos del lujo y busquemos la sencillez. Olvidamos nuestros defectos, creyendo que el mundo los ignora. Llegué ayer con su hermano de V. Huela V. esta rosa. Búsquele V., entregúele la cuenta, y que se la pague. ¿Por qué no paga V. lo que V. ha comprado? Mi abuelo está leyendo el periódico. ¡Huya V. la mala compañia y busque V. la buena! Escoja V. lo mejor. Averigüe V. donde tiene el despacho. ¡Cuanto padezco! Se avergüenza de que yo le conozca. TradncciÓD. 35. (Do) choose one of these rooms! Why did you beat my dog? I did not beat him Qe precedes the verb). What are you reading (use leer) ? I am reading the newspaper. The man who conquers his passions is prudent. Do not beat the poor boy. He has suffered much in (= during) his life*. Why don't you pay {transí. Why not pay yon) me (no me — ) ? Do pay him ! One must pay one's (sus) bills. Did you arrive (Bef.) from Paris? I attributed (use atribuir) his faults to bis bad company. Do not touch that, and do not argue. Do you want me (Quiere V, que) to ascertain it? Do not be ashamed, everybody (todo el mundo) makes a mistake (use errar). When you know him, you will like him (le querrá). He does not want me to (No quiere que le —) direct him. Smell these roses. Give it to him when he arrives (use the Mj.), * Lifetime. Digitized by VjOOQIC 94 Lesson 23. ¿Qué hace V.? ¿Qué creía su padre de V.? ¿Qué quiere V.? ¡Pagúeme V.I ¿Quién es prudente? ¿De qué se avergüenza V.? ¿Cuándo llegó V.? ConyersaeióD. Escojo lo mejor. Creía que estaba V. leyendo. Que V. le dirija. Como quiere V. que le pague si no me pagan. El hombre que vence (con- quers) sus pasiones. Me avergüenzo de que él no se avergüence. Llegué ayer. Reading Exereise. Cantares, Yo no sé lo que yo tengo, ni sé lo que me hace falta, que siempre espero una cosa, que no sé como se llama. (Ferrán, **La Soledad," XVIIL) Antes piensa y después habla, y después de haber hablado, vuelve á pensar lo que. has dicho, y verás si es bueno ó malo. (Ferrán, "La Soledad," XLI.) Twenty-tilird Lesson. — Lección Yeintitrés* Personal Pronouns.— Pronombres personales. Gonjunctive Personal Pronouns. 1st Person. Plur. Nosotros (nos), de nosotros, á nosotros, nos, Sing. Yo, I. de mí, of me. á mi, me, to me, me.* conmigo, with me. Sing, tú, thou. de ti, of thee. á ti, te, to thee, thee. contigo, with thee. con nosotros, 2nd Person. Plur, Vosotros, de vosotros, á vosotros, o8, con vosotros. Femin. Nosotras (nos), we. de nosotras, oí us. á nosotras, nos, to US, US. [us. con nosotras, with Femin, Vosotras (os), you. de vosotras, of you. á vosotras, os, to you, you. [you. con vosotras, with * As we stated (Lesson III.), the personal accusative is rendered in Spanish by the dative. Digitized by VaOOQlC Personal Pronouns. 95 3rd Person. (MascuUneJ Sing, Elf he. Plur, Ellos, they. de él, of him, de ellos, of them. á él, le, to him, him. áello8,les,ioihem,ihem. con él, with him. con ellos, with them. (Feminine.J Sing, Ella, she. Plur. Ellas, they. de ella, of her. de ellas, of them. á ella, le, lay to her, her. á ellas, lea, las, to them, them. con ella, with her. con ellas, with them. d^euter.) Sing, Ello, it. de ello, of it. á ello, lo, to it. con ello, with it. Polite Form of Address^ i.e., you (always in the third perami). For both genders. Sing, Usted (V,), Plur. Ustedes (V.V.). de usted (V.), de ustedes (V.V.). á usted (V.); substitute, á ustedes (V.V.); subst. loa, le, la. les, las. Reflective of Third Person (usted included). For both genders and numbers. Gen. de si, of himself, herself, itself, themselves. Dat. and \ á si, to himself, herself, itself, themselves. AccuB. I himself, herself, itself, themselves. Ablat. consigo, with himself (herself, itself, yourself, polite) ; themselves, yourselves (pol.). Remarks. 1. The forms de él, de ella, de ello, etc., were formerly conti-acted into del, della, déllo, etc. These contractions are now obsolete. 2. Nos and vos, instead of nosotros, -as, vosotros, -as, as nominatives, are only used in official style, nos expressing the so-called "plural of Majesty". Ex.: Xos Don N., Obispo de , . , , o8 mandamos. We NN. bishop ... bid you. No8 — as accusative — and os are placed before the verb: Nos lo dijo, he told us. ¿ No OS lo contó ? did he not tell you ? Digitized by Google 96 Lesson 23. Contrary to the practice of other Romance languages, in Spanish we and you have a mase, and fern, gender. Thus: Nosotros (masculine); vosotms (feminine). 3. The preposition con (with) is contracted with mi, tí, si into conmigo, contigo, consigo, with me, with thee, with him(self), etc. 4. In the dative and in the accusative there are two kinds of personal pronouns — viz: the absolute and the con- junctive; the former is always detached from the verb; the latter is only employed in the dative and accusative cases and may closely join the verb. Yo lo tengo (el periódico), I have it (the paper). Tómelo V,, Have it. 5. The diflference between the forms de él, de ella, de ello, de V,, de ellos, etc., á él, á ella, etc., con él, con ella, etc., and the forms, de sí, á 8í, consigo is that the latter refer to the subject of the sentence, whilst the former refer to a different person or thing. Compare: Iba hablando con él, he was talking to him. Iba hablando consigo^ he was talking to himself « 6. Ello (nominative) may only be used as the subject of the sentence, and should be placed at the beginning. In the middle of the phrase, lo is used instead of ello; as: (Ello) parece difícil, mas no lo es. It seems (to be) difficult, but it is not. 7. The English expressions "I myself or "my own self," "he himself," "your own self," etc., are always rendered by yo mismo, fem. yo misma; él mismo, V, mismo, -a, etc. ^.jB.— The Spanish personal pronoun in the nominative, i.e., as a subject, is always suppressed, unless required for the sake of emphasis, contrast, or to avoid ambiguity. Words. El dinero, the money. no tener razón, to be wrong. ver, to see. alabar, to praise. luego (adv.), soon. acusar, to accuse. tener razón, to be right. llevar, to carry. Reading Exercise. 30. ¿ Quién lo (it, so) dice ? Yo, — el — ella — nosotros — vosoti*as. Nosotros tuvimos razón; vosotras lo veréis (wUl see) luego. ¿Quién lo ha dicho, él ó ella? ¿Vienes tú con- migo? No voy contigo. ¿Quién estuvo aquí, él ó ella? No hablo de él, sino de ellas. Hablamos de vosotros y de voso- tras. ¿Habla V. de ellos ó de ellas? Esos hombres se ala- Digitized by vaOOQlC Personal Pronouns. 97 ban á sí mismos (themselves). Las mujeres se acusan á sí mis- mas. Harías* mejor (You had better) en ocuparle (care) de tí mismo (mind your own business). Llevo todo mi dinero conmigo; ól nunca lleva dinero consigo cuando voy con él. ¿Quién ha hablado de mí? Yo he hablado de V., de ól y de ella. ¡No hable V. siempre de sí mismo I ¿Me ha dado V. el dinero á mi ó á mi amigo? 8e lo he dado á él. Vosotros tenéis razón. Tradnceióu. 87. Who is there? He, she, we, you, they. Bo you give (da V,) the money to me or to her? I love (quiero) thee, bat I do not love him. Have you seen me or her? You carry it all about (con) you. Has (use llevar) he money about him? She has no money about her. We (m) are poor, but you (f,) are rich. We (m,) speak of you (f,), and you (f,) speak of us (m,). Have you any money? I have more (of it) than you. Have you any friends? I have none (no los tengo). That (it) seems [to be] very difficult, but it is very easy. I have seen you (m, pi,) and them (f, pi,). She loves thee, but she does not love me. He and she were here; they have spoken (to) with him and (to) with her. I did not speak of you, but (sino) I spoke of them (pi, fern.). This lady praises herself. Why do you accuse her, and not him? Shall you take all your money with you? He would have taken all his books with him, if he had had time (tiempo). Conyersaclón. ¿Quién ha hecho eso? Yo, tú, ól, ella. ¿Quién ha hablado de mí? Yo he hablado de V. ¿Quién ha venido conmigo? Yo he venido contigo. ¿ Tiene dinero ? Tiene más dinero que yo, pero nunca lleva dinero conmigo. ¿Qué falta tiene ella? Que habla mucho de sí misma. ¿Me llamas (Dost thou cali) No te llamo á tí, les llamo á á mí? él y á ella. ¿ Quién se acusa á sí mismo ? Pocos se acasan á sí mismos. ¿De quién habla ól? Habla de nosotros y de vosotras. ¿Ha llegado sola ella? No, ha llegado conmigo. Beading Exercise. Geografía de España. (Continuación.) Mares, golfos, cabos; montañas, ríos. Sus mares son el Atlántico y el Mediterráneo; la parte del Atlántico que se extiende por la costa norte se llama Mar Cantábrico ó Golfo de Vizcaya, ó de Gascuña. En Cataluña • From hacer, to do. Spanish Cony. -Grammar. 7 Digitized by VaOOQlC 98 Lesson 24. hay el golfo de Rosas. Sas principales cabos son el de Creus^ en Cataluña, el de Palos en Murcia, el de Gata en Almería, la Punta de Europa en Cádiz, el Finisterre j Ortegal en la Corufia, el de Peñas en Asturias, y el Macbichaco en Vizcaya. En España no hay lagos. El país está cortado por vanas cordilleras paralelas y una transversal; á saber: al N. la cordillera Pirenaica, con las Montañas de Santander y los Montes de Asturias; en el Centro la cordillera Carpetana, con las Sierras de Somo- sierra y Guadarrama, y la cordillera Oretana con los Montes de Toledo; al S. la cordillera Bética, con la Sierra Morena, y la Penibética con la Sierra Nevada; y al E. la cordillera Ibérica, que parte de las Montañas de Santander y termina en el cabo de Gata. Esta cordillera es la principal divisoria de las aguas. Los principales ríos corren entre esas cinco cordilleras paralelas, y la cordillera oriental y los dos mares, y son: el Duero, el Tajo, el Guadiana, el Guadalquivir y el Ebro; éste es el único de ellos que desemboca en el Mediterráneo. Twenty-fourth Lesson. — Lección veinti- cuatro. Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. — Pronombres personales afijos. As we observed in the foregoing lesson, these pro- nouns have only the dative and accusative cases. They are: Sing, Dat. me, me (to me); te, tbee (to thee); Ace. me, me; te, thee; Dat. le; á V., him (to le, her (to her); him); to you. Ace. lo, him; la her; — h, it. Plur. \se Dat. no8, us (to us); os, you (to you); Ace. nos, us ; os, you ; Dat. les, áV.V.,them(io les, them (to them) (f,); them) ; to you (m.); Ace. los, them (m,); las, them (f,). Observations. 1. The rule given in Lesson 3, that the object of the person is put in the dative, holds good also for the himself^ herself, itself, yourself (polite), them- selves, etc. Digitized by Google Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 99 pronouns, but in this case it is not employed with the same consistency by all Spanish writers. Thus, when speaking of persons, we find le and lo for the sing, and les and los for the pi. mase; for the fem. sing. la, more rarely le, and for the pi. las, more rarely les. On the other hand, la and las occur occasionally, besides le (to her), les (to them) for the dat. feminine — e.g., la ^^1 I give to her; but le is better for both genders. Examples : Nuestro amigo salía de su casa, cuando le (or lo) asal- taron unos ladrones. Our friend left his house, when several robbers as- saulted him. ¿Dónde están sus hermanos de Y,? No lea or loa he visto. Where are your brothers? I have not seen them. Creen las mujeres que los hombres laa (ace.) aprecian particularmente por su hermosura ; pero lo que lea (or laa) asegura para siempre una estimación verda- dera es la modestia, la^ virtud, etc. Women think that men appreciate them particularly for their beauty; but what always secures them real esteem is modesty, virtue, etc. In speaking of inanimate objects le or lo are used for the masculine, the latter in preference — e,g.: He comprado este libro, pero no lo {dr le) he leído todavía, I have bought this book, but have not yet read it. 2. Concerning the construction of these pronouns, the following are the most important rules: (a) The conjunctive pronouns precede the verb in the Indicative^ the Subjunctive, and the Imperative moods ; in this latter case only when negatively employed, as: Lo dog, I give it. Lo he dado, I have given it. Te mando, I command thee. No le conocía á Y,, I did not recognize you. Os ha visto, he has seen you. (Quiere que se lo diga, he wants me to tell him. ¡No lo diga Y,! do not tell him. A very remarkable anomaly is presented by the pronouns of the third person. Whenever a dative of this person (masculine or feminine, singular or plural) 7* Digitized by VjOOQIC 100 Lesson 24. meets with an accusative of the same person, the dative, for the sake of euphony, is rendered by 8e, not by Ze, les. Thus : Sing, Plur, le lOy I 1^ ^^' \ = 8e Jo, les lo, it them, = 8e lo, ^^ ^^* I her ko) htr' ] ^ ^^ ^^' ^^^ ^^» ^®^ *'^®°^ = *^ ^^• ^' ^^^' { hirthimrS'}= ^ ^^' ^'' ^^^' **^^^ ^^-¿.^^ *^«^' '^ ^^^' { him them Í/ÍÍ }= *^ ^^^' ^^^ ^^^' ^^^^ ^f'^ ^ *^®™ — sc las, ^of6.— When itc^o of these pronouns, one in the dative, the other in the accusative case, meet in the same sentence, they both precede the verb, the dative being invariably placed before the accusative case, as: Te lo doy, I give it thee. Te lo he dado, I have given it thee. Me lo ha mandado, (lit.) he has ordered it to me. It makes no difference whether the pronouns precede or follow (see c) the verb. Thus: Se lo prometí, I promised it him, for: le lo prometí. Se los enviaré, I shall send them (m,) to them, for: les los enviaré. Prometiéndoselo, promising it him, for: prometiéndotelo. In order to avoid misconception, or if a particular stress is laid on the pronoun, either the absolute pro- noun or the corresponding substantive may be added, as: Se lo prometí á éí, I promised it to him, Se lo prometí á ella, 1 promised it to her, Se lo prometí á mi hermano, I promised it to my brother.* Se lo prometí á mi hermana, I promised it to my sister. (h) The conjunctive personal pronouns follow the verb in the Imperative (except the negative Imperative, see a), the Infinitive, and the Gerund, In this case they are contracted with the verb into one word. Déjame, let me; whereas: no me dejes, do (thou) not let me. Dinas la verdad, tell (thou) us the truth. * If preceding the verb, the substantive is followed imme- diately by the dative of the pronoun, as: A mi hermano se lo prometió, he promised it to my brother. Digitized by VaOOQlC Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 101 Vino á visitarme, be came to pay me a visit. Quererse, to love oneself. Estoy escribiéndolo, I am writing it. -^o^e.— In this case, whenever two conjunctive personal pronouns — one in the dative, and the other in the accusative — meet in the sentence, the dative precedes: Díamelo hacer, let me do it. Biganoálo F., tell us. Estoy escribiéndoselo, I am writing it to him. iV.^.— Notwithstanding the preceding rules, the con- junctive farm precedes (not follows), in the negative im- perative: No se lo deje V, hacer, do not let him do it. No nos lo diga F., do not tell us. ^o.: 1. When nos is affixed to a form ending in -5, the final -s of the verb is dropped, thus: Amémonos, let us love one another, for: amémosnos. Vémonos, we see each other, for: vámosnos, 2, When as meets with the final -d of the Im- perative mood, this consonant is dropped, thus: Amaos, love (you) yourselves, for: amados. Digitized by VjOOQIC 102 Lesson 24. Note,— The only exception is id, go (you). Thus: idos, go away, begone!* General Memark. — Notwithstanding the preceding rules, in poetry as well as in literary style the Conjunctive Pronouns most often follow, not precede, the verb. Words. El nombre, the name. parecer, to seem. la libertad, the liberty. esperar, to expect, to wait for. el estado, the state, condition, sentarse, to sit down. el lacayo, the footman, prometer, to promise. la impaciencia, (the) impa- ir \a p ?to come, to see, to tience. venir f ^ ^' \ call, to visit **. la hora, the hour. veneer, to conquer. comentar, to begin. anunciar, to announce, to im- lamentar, to lament. part. recomendar, to recommend. C5¿arew¿eraí?o, to be acquainted, saber, to know. • mucho tiempo há, it is a good afligir, to afflict. while. ver, to see. di, tell (thon). hallar, to find. apenas, scarcely. escribir, to write. algo, something. Reading Exercise. 38. ¡Díganos V. la verdad! ¡Enviele V. esta carta! Le Tjonocemos. No le conocemos. La conozco mucho tiempo há. Estaba enterado de la muerte de su padre, pero no he querido anunciársela por no afligirle. Escríbaselo V. Puede V. ha- blarle. No le he de decir mi nombre. ¿No sabe V. quién es esa mujer ? ¿ Se lo ha recomendado V. ? Te lo he dicho á tí, y no á él. El pobre muchacho se comenzó á lamentar de su suerte. El caballero halló á su enemigo; y venciéndole (after having conquered him) en batalla singular (duel), después de perdonarle generosamente, le dio la libertad. ¿Han venido Vds. á verme? Ella no se lo ha prometido á él. Apenas me hubo visto uno de los tres pastores, cuando me llamó. Ha- llábame en este estado, cuando supe (knew, learned) que el Señor Gil Blas estaba sin lacayo. Sentámonos á la mesa mi hermana y yo. Esperábamos con impaciencia la hora para * French: Allez-vousen! ** In the Romance languages, "to go" (Fr. aller; Ital. andaré; Span, ir) denotes a motion towards the person spoken tOj whereas *'to come" (Fr. venir; It. venire; Sp. venir) implies a motion towards the speaker. "Come to see me" is therefore Fr. Venez me voir; It. Venga a trovar mi; Sp. Venga F. á verme. "I'll call on you" is: Fr. JHrai vous voir; It. Andró a trovarla; Sp. Iré d verle á V. Digitized by VjOOQIC Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 103 vemos y hablarnos. ¿Tiene V. algo que decirnos? ¿Conoce Y. á esos hombres ? Les he visto ayer en casa de mi amigo, pero no les conozco. Dime la verdad, que (and) no te arre- pentirás (pou will not repent) de haberla hecho. Se lo dijeron (told) á mis hermanas. Á mi amigo no le pareció bien este consejo. Tradocción. 89. Tell me (poh form)\ Tell (thou) it us! I expected you. I do not expect him. Had you expected it? He has given it to him. There are the books; has he given them to them (fem,)t He has given them to the daughters of the neighbour. Leave them (to) them! I promised them to them. Has my brother seen you (plur,) ? Why will you not impart it to him, if you are acquainted (with) of it? Have you told him 80? I have told her, but not him. Tell him! We were not able (lit, in the state) to promise him it. Why have you promised it her? I should not have promised it to her, if you had not given it to me. Begone! I do not give you so much money as I gave you (the) last time (vez). Love one another, men ! He was very sorry (tr. to afflict ones self)^ when he heard (transí. Tcnew) that you had not recommended him. Have you known this gentleman? I did not know him, but 1 knew his sister (transí, hut his sister, I knew her). He has recommended her to me. We came (tr. have come) to visit him, but as we do not find him at home, we shall (wait for) expect him. I have something to tell you. Did you know (—supo Y.) it? I am acquainted with his con- dition, and I (did tell him so) have also told him, but he will not believe it (me). Do you know that I will send them (mase.) to them? ConYersaeión. ¡Dígame V. la verdad! La digo siempre. ¿Conoce V. á ese señor? Le conozco muy bien; es el primo de la Señorita de Fi- gueras. ¿Espera V. á su amigo? Espero á mi tio: me ha pro- metido venir á verme hoy. ¿Se lo ha dicho Y. á ól, ó á Se lo he dicho á ella, y no á ella? él. ¿Por qué lo han hecho? Lo han hecho para honrarle (^¿n hishonourfVú.tohonourhim). ¿A. quién se lo dijeron (told Se lo dijeron á mis hermanos. they)^ ¿Se lo ha prometido? Sí, se lo ha prometido* ¿ Quién ha venido ? Ha venido un caballero á ver- le á V. Digitized by VjOOQIC 104 Lesson 25. ¿ Qué nos manda (orders ^ com- Nos manda amamos como her- mands) el Evangelio (Gos- manos y socorremos (assist) pel)^ en la desgracia. ¿Ha enviado V. las cartas Se las enviaré por el correo á la marquesa? (post). ¿Por qué no le da (gives) di- No puede darle dinero, por- nero su padre? que no lo* tiene. ¿Quiere V. prestarme este No puedo prestárselo (or no libro? se lo puedo prestar) á V. porque lo estoy leyendo. Beading Exereise. Cantares. Cuando nacemos, lloramos, y sonríen los demás, y al morir nos sonreimos, y ellos se echan á llorar. [Palau, "Nuevos Cantares," CXXXL] Despedida, despedida, eres fuente de dolores, cuando las manos se sueltan se rompen los corazones. [Palau, "Nuevos Cantares," CCXCVIU.] Twenty-fifth Lesson. —Lección veinticinco. Demonstrative and Interrogative Prononns. — Pro* nombres demostratiros é interrogativos. Demonstrative Pronouns. As stated in Lesson 14, these words are pronouns when used in lieu of a Substantive — i.e., alone. Of course, they may be inflected with the prepositions á, de, con, etc. They are: Sing. Plur. Este, esta, this; esto (n.), this; estos, estas, these. Ese, esa, this; eso (n.), this; esos, esas, these. A quel, aquella, that ; aquello (n.), that ; aquellos, aquéllas, those. Note. — The forms aqueste, aquesta, aquesto, for este, esta, esto; aquese, aquesa, aqueso for ese, esa, eso, are no^ * As the Spanish language has no precise equivalent for some or any in this meaning, the personal pronoun is often used instead, as in the above sentence. Thus: ¿No come V, fruta? Do you not eat fruit? Nunca la como, I never eat any (lit. it)- Digitized by vaOOQlC Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns. 105 completely obsolete. This is also the case V7ith the compoands of este and ese with otro: estotro, estotra, this other = the other. Again, the articles el, la, and lo are used as de- monstrative pronouns in phrases such as: Mi caballo y el de mi hermano. My horse and that of my brother. The English phrases he who . . ., pi. those who . . ., are rendered by the definite article with que following: Los que no moderan sus pasiones son infelices. Those who do not moderate their passions are unhappy. The neuter lo should be added where the EngHsh tlmt is commonly omitted, as: No sabe lo que dice. He does not know what (that which) he says. He who, especially in the singular, is often trans- lated by quien, and not by el que — e.g.: Quien calla, otorga, he who is silent gives consent. (French: Qui ne dit mot, consent.) The neuter forms esto^ eso, aquello are only used substantively — ie., without a noun following, as: He hablado de esto, de eso, de aquello. I have spoken of it (that). J^.^.— Besides their general use similar to that of the demonstrative adjectives, the Spanish demonstratives may refer to a person or thing already mentioned: Escribí á mi amigo, y éste no me contestó. I wrote to my friend but he did not answer. Yi al padre y al hijo; aquel no me vio, éste si. I saw the father and the son; the former did not see me, the latter did. Interrogative Pronouns. The interrogative pronouns differ in their form from the relative pronouns only in as much as they have the written accent, but they differ in their use. Besides those enumerated in Lesson 14, § 4, 5, and 6 (cuál and qué), we should mention: ¿Quién? plur. ¿quiénes? who? ¿Cuál? plur. ¿cmles? which? and ¿ Cuyo ? í. ¿ cuya ? whose ? Digitized by VjOOQIC 106 Lesson 25. (a) ¿Quién?, ¿quiénes? are never used with a substantive; the singular may sometimes be used in- stead of the plural. This pronoun is inflected with de, á, con, etc. Examples: ¿Quién habla? Who speaks? Plur. ¿Quiénes hablan? ¿ De quién (de quiénes) habla V. ? Of whom do you speak? (b) ¿Cuál? plur. ¿cuáles? never takes the article, and thus diflfers from the relative pronoun el cual Thus : ¿ Cuál es él más rico ? Who is the richest ? Whereas : Es una ciudad en la cual no he estado, it is a town where (in which) I have not been. (c) ¿Cuyo? fem. ¿cuya? plur. ¿cuyos? f. ¿cuyas? corresponds with the English whose, and agrees in gender and number with the noun to tvhich it refers. However, the pupil should be cautioned against the use of this interrogative pronoun, which very rarely occurs, and advised to replace it by: ¿de quién? plur. ¿de quiénes? Thus: ¿De quién es este libro? rather than ¿ Cuyo libro es este? ¿ De quién es esta carta ? rather than ¿ Cuya carta es esta ? ¿ De quiénes son estos libros ? r. th. ¿ Cuyos libros sen estos ? ¿ De quiénes son estas cartas ? r. th. ¿ Cuyas cartels son estas ? Whose book is this? Whose letter is this? Whose books are these? Whose letters are these? N,B. — ¿Quién? (on anyone knocking at a door), who is there? ¿Qué? what? Words. El vicio, vice. la virtud, virtue. el carpintero, the joiner. pernicioso, dangerous. el extranjero, the foreigner. degradar, to degrade. las señas, the address. elevar, to elevate. dudar, hesitate. Reading Exercise. 40. ¿Quién se lo ha dicho á V.? ¿Cuál es el enemigo más pernicioso del hombre ? El vicio. ¿ De quién (whose) es esta casa, y de quiénes (whose) son esos jardines? ¿Cuáles son los señores que han venido? Vendrán (will come) unas mujeres. ¿Quiénes? — La del jardinero y la del carpintero? ¿Á quién hablaba V? Á un extranjero? ¿Á cuál? Á un muchacho que está en casa. ¿Tiene V. mis sefias y las de mi amigo? Digitized by vaOOQlC Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns. 107 go solo las de V. Tenia un bnen amigo, pero ese se murió (died), ¿Quién duda entre el vicio y la virtud?; aquél degrada, ésta eleva. ¿ Quién ? (on anyone knocking at a door). No he hallado lo que buscaba. Hemos hablado de esto y de aquello. ¿Son esos sus hermanos de V.? No, señor, estos son mis primos, aquellos son mis hermanos. Traducción. 41. Who V7as (tr, has been) there ? Who is there (on anyone Imocking at a door)? Which of these men has done it? Whose dog is this? That of our neighbour. To whom do these flowers belong (use pertenecer)^ Which is the finest of them? To whom have you given the bill? I do not know the gentleman to whom I have given it. Who (plur.) has come? The children whose father was here yesterday. Of which girls do you speak? Who has seen the foreigner? Have you my address and that of my friend? I have yours only. These are they (do not translate they). Who hesitates between vice and virtue?; the former degrades, the latter elevates. I have bought (comprado) something. — What? Conversacióu. ¿Quién está ahí? No sé (I do not know) quien. ¿Á quién ha hablado V.? He hablado á un amigo, que ha venido ayer. ¿Tiene Y. mi libro ó el de Tengo el de su hermano de V. mi hermano? ¿De quién es esta casa? No sé de quien es. ¿De quién son esos vestidos? Son los de los niños. ¿De quién son esas flores? ¿Cuáles? ¿Son esos sus niños de V.? Si, lo son. ¿De quién hablaba V.? De un amigo. — ¿De cuál? Beading Exercises. Geografía de España. (Continuación.) Producciones, Industria, Comercio. Las principales producciones de España son: granos (Castilla), legumbres y frutas, principalmente naranjas (Ara- gón, Valencia y Andalucía), arroz (Valencia), vinos y aceites (Andalucía) ; azafrán, esparto, cáñamo y seda. En las regiones meridionales se ha aclimatado el café, el tabaco, la caña de azúcar y el algodón. La producción animal consiste principalmente en bueyes (Galicia, Castilla y Andalucía), caballos (Andalucía), mulos (Estremadnra y Ai-agón), ovejas (Castilla, Aragón y Anda- lucía) y cerdos (Estremadura, Asturias é Islas Baleares). Digitized by VaOOQlC 108 LesBon 26. La producción mineral es rica y variada: hierro (Pro- vincias Vascongadas), carbón (Asturias), cobre (Rio Tinto), plomo (Linares), mercurio (Almadén) y sal (Cardona). La industria está poco desarrollada, aunque progresa: maquinaria y metalurgia en las Provincias Vascongadas y Cataluña, hilados y tejidos en Catalnfia y Valencia, salazones en Galicia y Asturias, molinería en Castilla y Cataluña, vinos y azúcares en Andalucía, y papel en las Provincias Vascon- gadas y Cataluña. El comercio español progresa, y se verifica principal- mente con Francia ó Inglaterra, la América del Sud, Portu- gal, Bélgica y las antiguas posesiones españolas de las An- tillas y Filipinas. Twenty-sixth Lesson. — Lección veintiséis. Possessive and Relative Prononns. — Pronombres posesivos y relativos. Possessive Pronouns. The rules given in Lesson 15 on the possessive adjectives are also applicable to the possessive pronouns. We have only to add here one observation, reserving full particulars on this part of speech for the Second Part. If two sentences have the same substantive for a predicate, the repetition of which is avoided by the use of a possessive pronoun, the Spanish language requires the neuter indefinite article before the verb of the fol- lowing sentence, thus: Charles is my friend, and I am his (friend). Carlos es mi amigo, y yo lo soy suyo. Relative Pronouns. As was said ia Lesson 25, these pronouns differ from the interrogative pronouns in their use, except cual, which, when a relative pronoun, commonly takes the article. They are: que (el que, la que, los que, las que), which, who. quien, who, pi. quienes, el cuál, f. la cual ; pi. los cuales, f. las cuales, who, which. cuyo, f, cuya; pi. cuyos, f. cuyas, whose. cual, m. & f., pi. cuales (without article, mostly with tal, tales, preceding), which, as, like, etc. Digitized by VjOOQIC Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 109 1. These pronouns are varied with con^ de, and á, but the relative que only takes á when preceded by the definite article (al que, á la que, á los que, á las que); without the article it can also be used to express the accusative of the person, but then it does not take á. Qué is aUke in singular and plural, and used both of persons and things, as: Un libro que he comprado, a book which I have bought. V, es el honibre que yo buscaba (or á quien yo buscaba). You are the man whom I sought (was seeking). Los muebles de que está adornada la casa que habitamos, The furniture with which the house in which we live is adorned. 2. Qkiietiy plur. quienes, is used oí persons only, irrespective of gender, as: El hombre á quien Y, debe la vida, The man to whom you owe your life. Las niñas á quienes vi. The girls whom I saw. If a particular stress is laid on a personal pronoun (where in French with the phrases c^est toi, &est lui, etc., qui is used), the pronoun in conjunction with el que, h que or quiefi, in their corresponding cases are used, as : To soy quien (or el que) lo dice. It is 1 who say it. To him you owe your life. Á H es {or Es á él) á quien le debe V, la vida, 3. Cual, plur. cuales, when relative pronouns, are preceded by the article, as: El herm^ano* de mi madre, el cual. My mother's brother, who .... Notes,— (a) Que adds to the preceding sentence one of secondary importance, whereas cual joins to the foregoing thonght a new one of equal weight. For this reason el cual is always preceded by a comma, and que is not**. (b) If cual introduces an indirect interrogative sentence, it is used without the article, as : Es difícil determinar cuál de los dos ha hablado mejor. It is difficult to decide which of the two has spoken better. * Hermano; Latin, germanus. ** In English, the relative pronouns, though understood, are often omitted after the noun. In Spanish, they must be added. Ex.: The letter you have written. La carta que V, ha escrito. Digitized by Google lio Lesson 26. 4. Cuál is likewise used without the article when expressing a comparison, in which case the English employ as, like, etc. Ex.: Era una mujer cual la podía desear. She wa8 such a woman as he could wish for. Cual furioso león, like a furious lion. La vida hay que aceptarla tal cual es*. One must take life such as it is. 5. If the relative prououn refers, not to a single word, but to a whole sentence preceding, to que, to cual, (French: ce qui; It. il che, locche) replace que, as: Los reos fueron ahsusltos, lo que (or lo cual) causó un sentimiento general, The criminals were discharged which {i,e,, their being discharged) caused a general sensation. 6. If the relative pronoun que is preceded by several substantives, so that it might become doubtful to which it refers, the definite article is added to que, Ex.: La relación de las aventuras de Bon Quijote en la que los lectores vulgares sólo ven un asunto de entreteni- miento, etc. The narration of Don Quixote's adventures, in which superficial readers only see a matter of amuse- ment, etc. 7. Cuyo, -a, plur. cuyos, -as, when a relative pro- noun, means whose, and does not differ in its form from the interrogative pronoun (see the preceding Less.), as: El padre á cuyos niños he visto. The father whose children I saw. N,B,—B\it here, too, as with the interrogative pronoun cuyo, the cases of quien or el cuál, etc., may be used: El padre de quien he visto á los niños, or El padre á los niños del cual he visto. As to the further use of cuyo, see Part 11., Lesson 9. Words. La circunstancia, the circum- el puesto, the place, situation. stance. el favor, the favour, kindness. el deudor, the debtor. la amistad, the friendship. ser deudor, to be indebted, la estación, the season. to owe. el olor, the smell. * Tal, cuál; Latin, talis, qudlis. Digitized by VaOOQlC Possessive and Relative Pronouns. Ill ¡a modestia, modesty. quería, loved, wished. d literato, the literary man. matar, to kill. la primavera, the Spring. gastar, to spoil, to spend, to suave, soft, lovely. waste. brusco, harsh. desconfiar, to distrust, digno, worthy. alentar, to encourage. verdadero, true. lograr, to ohtain. respetable, respectable. andar, to have intercourse admirable, admirable, wonder- with, to associate with. ful. podemos, we can. locamente, in a foolish way. desear, to wish, to desire. prudentemente, prudently. es preciso, it is necessary, one reluce, shines. must. Beading Exercise. 42. Él era quien lo quería. Él fué quien le mató. Quien gasta locamente su dinero, no conoce su valor. De sí mismo es de quien uno debe desconfiar. Hay circunstancias en que es preciso obrar prudentemente. La casa que V. ha comprado vale más que aquella. El joven de quien he hablado á V. es digno de ser alentado. ¿Sabe V. á quien es deudor del puesto que ha logrado? Dime con quien andas y te diré quien eres. Me ha hecho un favor cual lo esperaba de su amistad. Estas son frutas cuales las podemos desear en la estación en que estamos. Tengo aquí flores cuyo olor es muy suave. Fulano es un literato cuya modestia es admirable. Ellos son quienes lo han hecho. No es oro todo lo que reluce. Los niños cuyo padre ha muerto están en la casa de mi vecino. Yo soy quien lo he hecho todo por mis amigos. Lo que agrada (pleases), seduce (seduces). Su hermano de V. me dijo unas palabras bruscas, lo que me afligió mucho. Tradneeión. 43. I have done it {tr. It is I who . . .). Thou hast not said so. To her we owe (debemos) (everything) all. I do not know which of these gentlemen (has) said so. The man who (has) wasted his money in such a foolish way is not worthy of being assisted. The friends of my father who were here, have gone (se — ido) to France. Do you know which of the two has done it? Is it you who spoke (has spoken), or is it she who spoke? On the contrary, I have never (nunca) spoken, it is Miss So-and-so who is always speaking. The flowers whose smell is so sweet are the children of (the) Spring. Be my friend, and I shall be yours (thine). The generous prince to whom I owe my situation, encourages me where (ever) he can. The soldiers (that) we have seen on (en) the road (camino), were very tired. The circumstances in which Digitized by Google 112 Lesson 27. I found him, were very sad. We cannot expect favours of these strangers as we expect them of our friends. We are those to whom you owe your life. What (tr, that which) is true is also estimable. The young man obtained the situation, which (see 5) delighted (fr, alegrar) his mother. ConTersación. ¿Quién es aquel señor? Es mi amigo, de quien he ha- blado á V. ¿De quién son estas tijeras Son las de la niña. (scissors) ? ¿De quién es ese perro? Es mío. ¿Cuál es su opinión de V.? No tengo opinión en esa materia. ¿Quién ha escrito esta carta? El capitán cuya hermana ha venido ayer. ¿Cuál de esos señores ha Es difícil decir cuál de los hablado mejor? dos ha hablado mejor. ¿Á quién debo (mmt I) ba- Á Pedro es á quien debe V. blar? hablar. ¿Quiénes son aquellos hom- Los hombres de quienes le bres? hablé á V. ¿De quién debe uno descon- De si mismo es de quien uno fiar? debe desconfiar. ¿Quién es digno de ser alen- El joven de quien le he ba- tado? blado á V. Beadingr Exercise. Cantares, ¡Despedida de mi casa bien te he recordado siempre! Mi padre exclamó: "Sé honrado"; mi madre decía: ¡"Vuelve"! [F. de Arteaga, "Quinientos Cantares," 76.] La muñeca hace á la niña, y la niña á la mujer: ¡Madres las que tenéis niñas, edacad muñecas bien! [F. de Arteaga, "Quinientos Cantares," 405.] Twenty-seventh Lesson. — Lección veintisiete. The Passive Voice. — De la yoz pasiva. The passive voice is formed in Spanish by joining to the auxiliary ser^ to be, the past participle of the Digitized by Google The Passive Voice. IIS active verb. This past participle, when coupled v\^ith ser, is always considered an adjective, and consequently agrees in gender and number with the noun or pronoun to which it refers. Infinitive. Ser amado, -a; Plur. ser amados, ^as, to be loved. Indicative. Present Sing, Plur. Soy amado, -a, I am loved. somos amados, -as, we are loved. eres amado, -a, thou art loved, sois amados, -as, you are loved. es amado, he is loved. son amados, they are loved (m,). es amada, she is loved. son amadas, they are loved (f.). Imperfect. Era amado, -a, I was loved, etc. Definite. Fui amado, -a, I was loved, etc. Future. Seré amado, -a, I shall be loved. Conditional. Seria amado, -a, I should be loved. Imperative. Sing. Sé amado, -a, be (thou) Plur. Sed amados, -as, be (you) loved. loved. Subjunctive. Present. Sea amado, -a, I (may) be loved. Imperfect. Fílese amado, -a, I was loved. Future. Fuere amado, -a, that I shall be loved. Conditional. Fuera amado, -a, that I should be loved. Gerund. Siendo amado, -a, being loved. Spanish Cony.-Grammar. S Digitized by Google lU Lesson 27. Compound Tenses. Infinitive. Haber sido amado, to have been loved. Indicative. Perfect He sido amado, -a, I have been loved. Pluperfect. Hahia sido amado, -a, I had been loved. 2nd Pluperfect. Hube sido amado, -a, I had been loved. Compound Future, Habré sido amado, -a, I shall have been loved. Compound Conditional. Habría sido amado, -a, I should have been loved. Subjunctive. Perfect. Haya sido amado, -a, I have been loved. Pluperfect. Hubiese sido amado, -a, (that) I had been loved. Compound Future. Hubiere sido amado, -a, (that) I shall have been loved^ Compound Conditional. Hubiera sido amado, -a, (that) I should have been loved^ Remarks. 1. It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language to render almost always the passive voice by the active form with the- pronoun se — i.e. reflectively. Thus: Estas mercancías se venden (literally : these goods seU themselves), rather than estas mercancías son vendi- das, these goods are sold. Fm prometida u/na recompensa, a reward was promised ;. or reflectively: JPrometiase una recompensa, they promised a reward^ lit. a reward promised itself^. * Se with the verb commonly precedes the subject of the^ sentence. Digitized by VjOOQIC The Passiye Voice. 115 In English snch sentences are translated with the words : people, they, one, etc., or with the passive voice, thus: Se cree, one believes, they believe, people believe, etc., it is believed. 8e asegura, one affirms, they, people, etc., affirm. 2. The construction with se is frequently impersonal, as in the above sentences, se cree, se asegura, where no accusa- tive follows the verb. In this case se is used with the sin- gular of the verb, as in the preceding examples. But whenever an accusative follows in English, as in the sentence: One sells (people sell) these goods, the verb, in Spanish, agrees with its nominative; thus: Estas mercancías se venden, or se venden (véndense) estas mercancías. 3. Where the reflective form might seem ambiguous^ as in the sentence: One loves the children, reflectively: The children love themselves = Los niños se aman, this mode of expression should be avoided, and the sentence rendered by the passive voice, as: Los niños son amados; or a convenient nominative may be used with the active verb, as in English; thus: Amamos á los niños, we love the children. Aman á los niños, they love the children. Uno ama á los niños, one loves children. N.B,— The same idea may be expressed in the follow- ing way: se ama á los niños, á los niños se les ama. This is also the case, when the English one, people, etc., is nsed with a reflective verb. Thus a mode of speaking like se se ama, one loves oneself, is quite inadmissible, because bere the sentence would have no nominative case, but in its stead a double accusative. Sentences like: One flatters oneself should, therefore, be rendered : (Nosotros) nos lisonjeamos, we flatter ourselves, or: (Vosotros) os lisonjeáis, you flatter yourselves, or: Los hombres se lisonjean, men flatter themselves, or: Alguno se lisonjea, somebody flatters himself, or: 7. se lisonjea, you flatter yourself. 4. If in English the object is a personal pronoun, the subject being one, people, etc., the passive voice should be prefered in Spanish, as: One loves him, él es amado; Digitized by VjOOQIC 116 Lesson 27. or one of the above nominatives may be chosen, as: Alguno (V.) la ama, etc., also le aman. 5. Dative cases of the personal pronouns likewise occur with this reflective form, as: Se me cree, one believes me, or : I am believed, people believe me, etc. Se le quiere, one loves him. 8e me contestó negativamente, I was answered in the negative. 6. Whenever the subject is omitted, as in sentences oí a, vague character, such as: "they say," "people will talk," "it is whispered about," "it is generally believed," "he is generally beloved," etc., the 3rd pers. plur. without the per- sonal pronoun (a nominative like los hombres, people, being understood) is employed. Ex.: Creen, it is believed; aseguran, people affirm ; se lisonjean, they flatter themselves ; prometieron una recompensa, a reward was offered ; le aman, he is liked ; venden estas mercancías, these goods are being sold; me han robado, I have been robbed. N,B,—l\iQ Passive voice, rather than the reflective, is, however, preferred in narratives and statements, to express what is considered as an accomplished fact: Tin niño ha sido atropellado por un coche, A child has been run over by a carriage. El herido fué llevado al hospital, The wounded person was taken to the hospital. The English by with passive verbs is rendered by por if the agent is a living being, or considered as such, or in expressing material actions; and by cíe with verbs of feeling or emotion, or used figuratively: Tin hornbre ha sido muerto por otro, A man has been killed by another. Era muy querido de todos. He was most beloved by all. N,B, — Fué muerto de un balazo, he was killed by a shot. Neuter Verbs. They denote either a state of rest, as dormir, to sleep, or an intransitive action, such as morir, to die, llegar, to arrive, caer, to fall, etc. Their use is very simple, the compound tenses being almost always formed with the auxiliary haber; thus: Digitized by VaOOQlC The Passive Voice. 117 Hube llegado y I had arrived. Ha muerto^ he has died. He dormido, I have slept, etc. Words. Los preliminares y the preli- el compañero, the companion. la paz y the peace, [minaries. soberbio, -a, proud. d embustero, the liar, hypo- herido, -a, wounded, crite, cheat. feroz, ferocious, wild. la lana, the wool. matar, to kill, slaughter. d cuerOy the leather. asesinar, to murder. d asunto, the object, matter, derrotar, to put to flight, to la memoria, the report, the rout (an army). memoir, memory. asegurar, to assure. d dueño, \ ., . firmar, to sign, ei amoy f ' quejarse, to complam. la felicidad, the happiness. pedir, to ask, to demand. d volumen^ the volume, cir- ser muy solicitado, to be in cumference, extent. (great) demand. d nombre, the name. encumbrar, to raise. d apuro, the want, necessity, buscar, to seek. la fortuna, the fortune. acabar, to finish, to terminate. d poder, the power, might. corregir, to correct, to mend. el ladrón, the thief, robber. invitar, to invite. el imperiOy the empire. maltratary to ill-treat. d viajerOy the traveller. concluir, to conclude. sostener, to maintain, to sustain. mucho tiempo ha, it is a good while. Beading Exercise. 44. Dicen que los alemanes (Germans) han sido derrotados por los rusos (Bussians). Aseguran que se han firmado los preliminares de la paz. Se quejan de V. Somos amados de todos nuestros amigos. El embustero es aborrecido. La lana de España es muy solicitada. Los cueros son muy buscados. Gustavo Adolfo, rey de Suecia (Sweden), fué muerto en la batalla de Lützen. El militar que ha sido herido por un paisano*' (civilian), ha muerto esta noche. Cuando nuestras traducciones se acaben, serán corregidas por el maestro. Fui invitado por el ministro á escribir una memoria sobre ese asunto. ¿Han llegado esos señores de Madrid? Este perro es muy maltratado por su dueño. La operación fué concluida con toda felicidad. El libro que he dado á mi prima está escrito (written) por un hombre muy docto (learned). El imperio de los Césares se ha sostenido mucho tiempo sólo por 8u extensión y su nombre. Si su padre no hubiera muerto, no se vería (he would not see [find] himself) en tanto apuro. Digitized by VaOOQlC 118 Lesson 27. El soberbio y feroz Atila fué vencido por los francos y los godos. Julio César, encumbrado por la fortuna al más alto grado del poder, fué asesinado por Bruto y sus compañeros. Traducción. 45. Wallenstein was murdered by two of his officers. The hypocrite is despised by all, and is loved by none. Leather and wool were much in demand. By whom has the letter been signed ? We were invited a long time ago, but we had no time to come. The traveller and his companions were murdered by the robbers. (The) king Gustavus Adolphus of Sweden was killed at Liitzen. They say that a 'great many (muchos) soldiers have been wounded in the battle. Do they think (believe) that the preliminaries of (the) peace have been signed? They assure that these goods are selling well. One is mistaken, if one flatters oneself. My father (has) said that all the goods have been sold {tr, have sold themselves). When did the gentleman arrive? The friends of the mer- chant had all been invited. By whom have the Goths been conquered? This book has been written by one of the first Spanish poets. Frequently one does not believe what one affirms (before) to others. The pupils would have been praised by their masters if they had done their translations without any mistakes (falta). Conversación. ¿Por quién fué asesinado Julio Por Bruto y sus compañeros. César? ¿Ha llegado ayer su amigo No, ha llegado hoy. de V.? ¿ Cuándo ha muerto ? Ha muerto ayer ; fué muerto por otro en una riña (in a quarrel), ¿Por quiénes fué vencido Atila? El soberbio y feroz Atila fué vencido por los francos y los godos. ¿Cómo se concluyó la ope- Fué concluida con toda feli- ración? cidad. ¿Por quién está escrito ese Está escrito por un hombre libro? muy docto. ¿Cuándo murió Gustavo Fué muerto en la batalla de Adolfo? Lützen. ¿ Ha muerto el militar que ha No ha muerto ; al contrario, sido herido? está mejor hoy que ayer. ¿Por quién serán corregidas Serán corregidas por nuestro nuestras traducciones? maestro. ¿ Quién es aborrecido ? El embustero es aborrecido de todo el mundo. Digitized by VjOOQIC Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 119 ¿Cuándo se ha celebrado (taken Se ha celebrado hoj. place) la boda (the wedding)^ ¿Qaé se dice de nuevo en la Dicen que Su Majestad el em- ciadad? perador ha llegado. Beading Exercise. Geografía de España. (Continuación.) Gobierno. El gobierno de España es monárquico, constitucional, hereditario; el heredero del trono tiene el titulo de Principe de Asturias. El poder legislativo reside en las Cortes, com- puestas del Congreso de Diputados y del Senado; el poder ejecutivo reside en el Rey y en el Ministerio, compuesto de un Presidente del Consejo de Ministros y ocho ministros que son, el ministro de Estado, el ministro de Gracia y Justicia, el ministro de Hacienda, el ministro de la Gobernación, el ministro de Instrucción Pública, el ministro de Agricultura, el ministro de la Guerra y el ministro de Marina. España está dividida en cuarenta y nueve provincias y tie^e por capital Madrid. — El gobierno local de cada provincia depende de un Gobernador y de la Diputación Provincial; el gobierno local de cada término municipal depende de un Alcalde y del Ayuntamiento ó Municipio. Del gobernador dependen los guardias civiles y los polizontes, del Alcalde dependen los municipales. La Administración de Justicia tiene en cada término municipal un juez municipal para las faltas menores, y en cada provincia varios partidos judiciales con jueces de primera instancia para las causas civiles y criminales; cierto número de partidos judiciales forman una Audiencia Territorial con sus Magistrados, y en Madrid reside el Tribunal Supremo, para la tercera y última apelación. Twenty-eighth Lesson. — Lección veinti- ocho. Pronominal or Beflective Verbs. — Verbos pro- nominales ó reflexivos. These verbs are called pronominal or reflective, because their object is a personal pronoun, referring to and identical T\dth the subject. In the simple tenses this pronoun, with very few exceptions, may either precede or follow the verb. In the latter case it is subjoined to the verb. Digitized by VjOOQIC 120 Lesson 28. Reflective verbs are very frequent in Spanish, a great many of them being rendered in English by neuter verbs — that is to say, by a verb without a direct object. Example : Me alegro (or alegróme), I rejoice. Infinitive. Alegrarse, to rejoice. Indicative. Present. Sing. Me alegro (alegróme), I rejoice. te alegras (alegraste), thou rejoicest. se alegra (alégrale), he rejoices. Plur. Nos alegramos (alegrámosnos), we rejoice. OS alegráis, you rejoice. se alegran (aUgranse), they rejoice. Imperfect. Sing. Me alegraba (alegrábame), I rejoiced. te alegrabas (alegrábaste), thou rejoicedst. se alegraba (alegrábase), he rejoiced. Plur. Nos alegrábamos (alegrábamosnos), we rejoiced. OS alegrabais, you rejoiced. se alegraban (alegrábanse), they rejoiced. Definite. Sing. Me alegré (alégreme), I rejoiced. te alegraste, thou rejoicedst. se alegró (alegróse), he rejoiced. Plur. Nos alegramos (alegrámosnos), we rejoiced. OS alegrasteis, you rejoiced. se alegraron (alegráronse), they rejoiced. Future. Me alegraré, I shall rejoice. te alegrarás, thou wilt rejoice. se alegrará, he will rejoice, etc. Conditional. Me alegraría, I thould rejoice. te alegrarías, ihou wouldst rejoice, etc. Imperative. Alégrate, rejoice (thou)! alegraos, rejoice (you plur.)l alegrémonos, let us rejoice ! (See Less. 24, page 101.) Digitized by vaOOQlC Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 121 Polite form: Sing, alégrese F., rejoice (you)! Plur. alégrense Vds., rejoice (you) I Subjunctive. Present. Me alegre, T rejoice. te alegres, thou rejoice, etc. Imperfect. Me alegrase, I might rejoice. te alegrases, thou mightest rejoice, etc. Future. Me alegrare, (that) I shall rejoice, etc. Conditional. Me alegrara^ (that) I should rejoice. Gerund. Alegrándose, rejoicing. Compound Tenses. Indicative. Perfect. Me he alegrado, I have rejoiced. te has alegrado, thou hast rejoiced, etc. Pluperfect. Me haUa alegrado, I had rejoiced, etc. 2nd Pluperfect. Me hube alegrado, I had rejoiced, etc. Compound Future, Me habré alegrado, I shall have rejoiced, etc. Compound Conditional. Me habria alegrado, I should have rejoiced, etc. Subjunctive. Perfect. Me haga alegrado, I have rejoiced, etc. Pluperfect. Me hubiese alegrado, (that) I had rejoiced, etc. Compound Future. Me hubiere alegrado, (that) I shall have rejoiced. Compound Conditional. Me hubiera alegrado, (that) I should have rejoiced. Digitized by VjOOQIC 122 Lesson 28. Notes. 1. Very often the Spanish reflective form of the ver"b implies separation or isolation. Thus: estar is "to be," estarse^ **to be alone"; ir "to go," irse, "to go away."* 2. Likewise, verbs denoting a state of transition are very frequently rendered by the Spanish reflective verb. Thus: dormir J to sleep, dormirse, to fall asleep; morir y to die, morirse, to die away (French: "se mourir"); ahogarse, to be drowned; quemarse^ to be burned down, etc. 3. Again, the Spanish reflective form is either redundant or modifies the meaning of the verb in a way which, in Eng- lish, must be rendered by an adverb or in some other mode ; thus: beber, to drink, beberse, to drink (out). comer, to eat, comerse, to eat up. jugar, to gamble, jugarse, to gamble away. Sometimes the meaning of the verb is rendered more emphatic by the reflective form. Thus: Estarse sin hacer nada, to be doing nothing. Pasarse el dia leyendo, to read the whole day. 4. At others the reflective form is used in conjunxition with the article to translate the English possessive: Quemarse la mano, to burn one's hand. Cortarse un dedo, to cut one's finger. 5. Finally, in the plural, the Spanish reflective verb expresses reciprocity; thas: se aman means "they love them- selves" and also "they love each other," or "one another." Where a misconception might arise, the word mismx), -a, should be added to correspond with "self," and el uno al otro, etc.; for "one another, each other," etc. N,B, — In English a great many verbs are neuter or passive, which in Spanish require the reflective form. Such verbs are: llamarse, to be called or named (French: s^appeler). enojarse, to grow angry. levantarse, to rise. acostarse, to go to bed. pasearse, to take a walk. sentarse, to sit down, to take a seat. * In narratives, the Imperfect of ser, to be, used reflectively, corresponds with the English there was in days of yore, there was in olden times, etc. Ex.: Érase un rey, etc. There was in olden times a king, etc. Digitized by VjOOQIC Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 123 Words. La orden, the order. incomodarse^ to take pains, to la razón^ the reason. trouble oneself. la marcha^ the march. ordenar, to order. c26oísiíío, the pocket, the purse, retirar, to draw (or go) back, d jefe, the chief. retire. la mesa, the table. divertirse, to amuse oneself. hs naipes, the cards. apartarse, to stand away, to k bondad, the goodness. keep back. d camino real (or la carre- acomodarse, to conform one- cerá), the main-road. self to ... . el juego, the game (French yeíí). sacar, to take out .... engañarse, to be mistaken. saber, to know. jugar (á los naipes or á las dio (3rd sing, def.), gave. cartas), to play (cards). mui/ de mañana, very early St juega, one plays, they play, (early in the morning), etc. á orillas, at the side, brink, sentarse, to sit down. border, edge, etc. luego que, as soon as. Beading Exercise. 46. V. se engaña. Los hombres se han engañado siempre unos á otros. Unas veces se juega á los naipes y otras veces se habla sobre alguna cosa. ¡Tenga V. la bondad de sentarse ! No se incomode V. ¿ Se ha divertido mucho V. ayer en el baile (ball, dance)? Me alegro mucho que se haya di- vertido V. tanto (so well). V. se ha acostado tarde, pero yo me he levantado muy de mañana. Dióse la orden y todos se dispusieron (pr^ared themselves) á retirarse. Se ordenó á los soldados que se apartasen del camino real. Sentéme al pié de un árbol que estaba á orillas del camino, y para diver- tirme saqué (see Lesson 22, 1) un libro que tenia en el bolsillo. Si no se acomodare V. á la vida que hago (I lead), será dueño (to be at liberty) de retirarse. Sábete que no te he traído (brought) aquí para que (that) te mueras de hambre. Luego que nos levantamos (Def,) de la mesa, el criado me dio la carta. Tradnceión. 47. My mother was (transí, has been) mistaken, when she gave (tr. dando . . . giving . . .) you the letter. If I had been mistaken, I should have told (you so) it you. Get up, child ! Rise, sir! I gave myself much trouble to pull the book out of my pocket. We did not deviate from the main-road. Leave (from apartarse de . , ,) this society ! Shall we sit down at the foot of that tree? We should draw back if the chief (gave the order) ordered it. Did they not state (tr, was not given [fr. darse]) the reason of this order? Do they play at Digitized by VaOOQlC 124 Lesson 28. cards (fr. jugarse) every night at your cousin's?* Cards are seldom played (¿.e., they seldom play) there, but they (talk about) speak of (a great) many things. Do not trouble (your- self), sir, I have already {ya, prec.) taken [a] seat (fr. sentarse). Yesterday I rose at 4 o'clock, and to-morrow I shall likewise (tambiérí) rise at 4 o'clock. Are you not afraid to abuse (abusar de , , ,) my goodness? I was alone (see 1) in my room when the footman gave me the letter. There was once a king who had a daughter. Alas (¡Ay demi!)\ the unhappy man will be drowned! We love ourselves and we love one another. How can you laugh at (de) ih^ misfortune of others? Conversaeión. ¿Se ha engañado V.? Perdone V., no me he engañado. ¿Á qué hora se levanta V. Me levanto á las cinco ó seis cada día? de la mañana. ¿ Cuándo se acuesta** V. (go Me acuesto tarde (late) y á las to bed) ? diez ú*** once, y me levanto temprano (early). ¿Quiere V. pasearse conmigo? Gracias, no tengo tiempo ahora. ¿ No se ha divertido V. ayer Al contrarío, me he divertido en el teatro? muchísimo. ¿ Que se ordenó á los sóida- Se les ordenó que se apartasen dos? del camino real. ¿ Cuándo le dio á V. la carta Luego que nos levantamos de el criado? la mesa. ¿Dónde se sentó V.? Me senté al pié de un árbol. ¿ Por qué no juega V. á los Porque no me gusta (I da naipes? not like) el juego (playing [cards]). Reading Exercise. Soneto. Los padres y los hijos. Un enjambre de pájaros metidos en jaula de metal guardó un cabrero, y á cuidarlos voló desde el otero la pareja de padres afligidos. Si aquí, dijo el pastor, vienen unidos sus hijos á cuidar con tanto esmero, ver como cuidan á los padres quiero, los hijos por amor y agradecidos. * En casa de su primo. The English phrase with the Saxon genitive: at my brother's, cousin's, butcher's, tailor's, etc., should be rendered with en casa de, at the house of ** See Lesson 36. — *** See Lesson 33, 2. Digitized by VjOOQIC Impersonal Yerbe. 125 Deja entra redes la pareja envuelta, la puerta abre el pastor del dnro alambre, cierra á los padres y á los hijos suelta. Huyó de los hijuelos el enjambre, y como en vano se esperó su vuelta, mató á los padres el dolor y el hambre. (Campoamor.) Twenty-ninth Lesson. — Lección veinti- nueve. Impersonal Verbs. — Verbos unipersonales. 1. These verbs are either really impersonal, i.e., they are only used iu the third person singular, as Uueve — - it rains, or they are used as impersonal verbs, as parece, it seems, etc. True impersonal verbs are: Llover, to rain — llueve^ it rains. helar, to freeze — Mela, it freezes. nevar, to snow — nieva, it snows. tronar, to thunder — truena, it thunders. escarchar, to be a hoar frost — escarcha, it is a hoar frost. relampaguear, to lighten — relampaguea, it lightens. llovizfMr, to drizzle — llovizna, it drizzles. granizar, to hail — graniza, it hails. amanecer*, to dawn, to grow — - amanece, it dawns. Ught anochecer, to grow dark — awocAcce, it is growing dark. 2. Many others are coupled with hacer, to make, ser, to be, haber, to have, valer, to be worth, etc., as: Es preciso, it is necessary, one must (see 4). es justo, it is just. es verdad, it is true. es cierto, it is certain, sure. hace calor, it is hot (il fait chaud). hace frió, it is cold (il fait froid). hace luna, the moon shines. ocho dias hace, it is a week ago. mucho tiempo hace, it is a long while. hay un año, it is a year ago. * Amanecer and anochecer are also personally used as: Amanecí en Paris, I arrived in Paris at daybreak. Digitized by VjOOQIC 126 Lesson 29. hay muchos hombres^ there are many persons. más vale tarde qus nunca, better late than never. más valdría, it would be better. 3. As already stated (Lesson 8, 5), there is, plur. there are^ is rendered by hay. In all the tenses of this impersonal verb, the 3rd pers. sing, of haber is used, whether followed by a singular or by a plural, as; Huho tin hombre, there was a man. (II y avait un homme.) Hubo hombres, there were men. (II y avait des hommes,) (When speaking of time, hay is almost always replaced by hdce, which corresponds with ago; thus : hace dos años^ two years ago.) If some, or any, joined to "there is" or "there are", refers to a foregoing substantive (where the French use en, and the Italians ne), the Spanish language requires the personal pronoun, which then agrees with the preced- ing substantive in gender and number. Thus: If there are cowards, he is one. Es cobarde si los hay, I shall give you some books, if there be any. Te daré libros, si los hay. We shall eat cherries, if there be any. Comeremos guindas, si las hay, 4. The English verbs must, to be obliged, etc., are commonly rendered by deber, as: Se debe escribir, one must write. Very often their meaning is expressed by haber de , . ., tener que , . . (see Lesson 8, 6) or es precisOy es necesario, es menester with que and the subjunctive mood, thus: You must expect my brother. Se ha de esperar á mi hermano, or: Se tiene que esperar á mi hermano, or: Es preciso (menester, necesario) esperar (or que se espere) á mi hermano (= It is necessary to , , .). If the nominative is the indefinite pronoun one, as: One must wait, etc., the infinitive is used, as in English; thus: Es menester esperar, one must wait. Digitized by Google Impersonal Verbs. 127 Words, El remedio y the remedy. la tronadüy the thunderstorm. la puerta^ the door*. callar y to be silent. ti nombre, the name. aprender ^ to learn. d color, the heat. creer, to believe. tl cuarto, the room. enseñar, to teach. to ciencia, the science. adivinar, to guess, c/ almacén, the shop. demasiado, too, too much. pronto, quick, swift, prompt. Reading Exercise. 48. ¿Llueve? No, graniza. Hace an mes que estuve en su casa. No hay otro remedio que esperar. Jamás hubo rey tan bueno como él. ¿Hay alguno á la puerta? Más vale el buen nomhre que muchas riquezas. Más vale callar que hablar mal. Hace demasiado calor en su cuarto de V. Este pobre muchacho tiene hambre y frío. Es preciso estudiar mucho para aprender hien una lengua. Te daré dinero, si lo hay. Hay hombres que creen que había una ciencia que enseñaba á adivinar lo futuro. Hacía buen tiempo ayer cuando llegó mi hermano. Ha helado hoy, y ayer ha escarchado. Hace un año que no he visto á mi hermana. Ocho días hace que estuvimos en Viena. ¿Qué debemos hacer? Debemos ir al mercado para comprar pan y frutas. Es preciso que la criada me llame temprano. Ha de venir V. pronto para ir al al- macén. Tradnceión. 49. Did it rain yesterday? No, it snowed. I think (creo) (that) it will snow. It thunders and lightens. It has thundered and lightened. Does it rain? No, it does not rain, it drizzles. 1 arrived at night (anochecer) at Madrid. It was daybreak when we arrived (amanecer) at Toledo. There are many friends who are no {tr, not) better than enemies. Was there much money in that purse? I think there were 10 dollars in it. It is too hot {tr. warm) to-day ; we shall have a thunderstorm. It is too cold in this room. I should give you some money, if I had some (any). He has given him no money, because he had none. I mast write a few letters to-day; yesterday I was obliged to write six. It is necessary to work if one wishes to learn something. My brother must wait till (hasta que) my sister comes. Where were you last year? A year ago I was at Seville, and two years ago I was at Rome. Is it true (verdad) that you have written this letter? I have written it a long time ago. * el puerto, the harbour; French: le port Digitized by VjOOQIC 128 Lesson 29. Conversación. ¿Hace frío hoy? Al contrario, hace mucho calor. ¿Tiene V. hambre? No tengo hambre, pero ten^o sed. ¿Es verdad que su hermano No ha llegado esta mañana; de V. ha llegado esta ma- llegará esta noche. ñaña? ¿Es cierto que el rey ha Todavía no (wo¿ ye() ha muerto, muerto? pero está malísimo. ¿Hay alguno en este cuarto? No, no hay ninguno. ¿ Cuánto tiempo hace que es- Dos años hace que estuve allí. tuvo V. en París? ¿Es preciso que espere yo á No es menester esperarle. su padre de V.? ¿Debe V. ir al mercado? Debo ir allá. ¿ Es verdad que ha comprado No, señor, no es verdad, no V. algunos libros? he comprado nada. ¿Cuántos años hace que está Hace tres años y algunos meses. V. en esta ciudad? Beading Exercise. Geografía de España. (Continuación.) Instrucción Pública. La Instrucción Pública se dá en España en las Escuelas Públicas (ó en las escuelas y colegios particulares), en las Escuelas Normales, en los Institutos, y en las Universidades. Las Escuelas Públicas están sostenidas por los Ayuntamientos, los Institutos por las Diputaciones Provinciales, y las Univer- sidades por el Estado. En las Escuelas Públicas se dá la enseñanza elemental, en las Escuelas Normales la enseñanza superior, ó sea la preparación para maestros y maestras; en los Institutos se estudia la segunda enseñanza, que termina con el grado de bachiller, y en las Universidades se estudia fa- cultad, que termina con el grado de Licenciado : los Institutos y las Universidades están abiertos á las mujeres. En los colegios particulares se dá también la segunda enseñanza. El curso académico empieza el prímero de octubre y termina el 31 de mayo. En España hay diez Universidades (Barcelona, Granada, Madrid, Oviedo, Salamanca, Santiago, Sevilla, Valencia, Valladolid y Zaragoza) y 59 Institutos, de los cuales hay uno en cada capital de Provincia. — La enseñanza primaría es obligatoria y gratuita, pero á pesar de eso solo un 30 por 100 de la población sabe leer y escríbir. Digitized by VjOOQIC Adverbs. 129 Thirtieth Lesson. — Lección treinta. Adyerbs. — Adverbios. Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. They denote manner, time, place, motiony order, quantity, Q^ity^ etc. They are either proper adverbs (see next Lesson), as bien, ^well; demasiado, too, too much, etc., or formed from adjectives or participles by the addition of the termination -mente, under the following Rules. Rules. 1 . If the adjective ends in -o, the adverb is formed by adding -mente to the feminine form in -a, thus: docto, learned, fern, docta, adv. doctamente, diestro, dexteroas, » diestra, » diestramente. 2. If the adjective does not end in -o, -mente is simply added to the termination, thus: fácil, easy, adv. fácilmente. constante, constant, » constantemente. Note.— A. peculiarity of the Spanish language is that when several adverbs ending in -mente follow each other, this termination is, for the sake of euphony, added to the last only. Thus : Cicerón escribió clara, concisa y elegantemente. Cicero wrote distinctly, concisely, and elegantly. (Instead of: claramente, concisamente y elegantemente,) An adverb in -mente, not derived from an adjective end- ing in -0, may not come between adverbs derived from adjectives in -o, but should, for the sake of euphony, be placed at the end. Thus the sentence: Cicero wrote learnedly, elegantly, concisely, and distinctly, may not be translated: Cicerón escribió docta, elegantemente, concisa y claramente, but only: Cicerón escribió docta, concisa, clara y elegantemente,'^ * Likewise, if two or more adverbs in -mente, not derived from adjectives in -o, follow each other, the termination -mente of all the adverbs, except the last, may be dropped: thus, instead of prudentemente y lealfnente we may also say prudente y lealmente (prudently and loyally). Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 9 Digitized by VaOOQlC 130 Lesson 30. 3. The Spanish adverb in general takes its place after the verb; thus: El discípulo estudia siempre su lección. The pupil always studies his lesson. In compound tenses the adverb cannot be placed between the verb and the auxiliary, as in English, but it must always follow the past participle, thus: El discípulo ha estudiado siempre su lección. The pupil has always studied his lesson. N.B. — Adverbs of negation are excepted: El discípulo no estudia, (See page 136, § 5.) 4. Adverbs form their comparative like adjectives (see Lesson 20), as: Oompar. Doctamente^ más doctamente que, míenos doctamente que, tan doctamente como. The superlative^ used to express comparison, does not dififer in form from the comparative, and thus has no article; it can always be gathered from the context,, whether the comparative or superlative of the adverb is to be put in English; e.g.: Manuelito lee el francés peor que su hermana. The little Emanuel reads French worse than his sister. But: De todos los discípulos tú eres el que te portaste peor. Of all the pupils, you are the one who behaved the worst. Adverbs are also derived from the absolute superl. of the adjectives, by changing isimo in isimamente, as: Doctísimo, adv. doctisimamente, in a very learned manner. (We need not add that here also the termination -mente is affixed to the feminine form in a.) 5. Irregular are: Men, well, mejor, better, lo mejor, the best. maly badly, peor, worse, lo peor, the worst. mucho, very, más, more, lo más, the most. poco, little, menos, less, lo menos, the least. Absolute Sup. of mal, pésimamente. The following are both adjectives and adverbs: Bastante, enough, but also adv. bastantemente; cierto, certain, » » » ciertamente, certainly; demasiado, too, too much, etc., but also adv. demasiadamente; Digitized by VaOOQlC Adverbs. 151 derecJw, right, but also adv. derechamente, rightly; solo*, alone, > » » solamente, only, solely; temprano, early » » » tempranamente. The signification of the following adverbs differs from that of the corresponding adjectives : ÁUo, high, aloud — altamente, magnificently, proudly. Inyo, low, in a low voice — bajamente, basely, vilely. (o,ro, dear, beloved — caramente, dearly. primero, first, before — primeramente, firstly. [promptly. pronto, direct, forthwith — prontamente, (also = pronto), Words. El orador, the orator. digno, -a, worthy. ei verano, the summer. ancho, -a, broad, large. d embajador, the ambassador, estrecho, -a, narrow. d actor, the actor. constante, constant. d deseo, the desire. generoso, -a, generous. d gozo, the pleasure. raro, -a, rare, seldom. d lugar, the village. perdonar, to pardon. ia raisón, the reason. levantarse, to get up. tener razón**, to be right. ver (irr.), to see. CÍ consejo, the advice. llenar, to fill. ifl voZww^ae?, the will. siga, subj. pres. of seguir, to ¿Í honradez, the honesty, de- follow. ^ o6ra, the work. [cency. vestir, to clothe, to dress. d inventor, the inventor. conservar, to preserve. ia lota, the boot. tratar, to treat. i?ydici«io, -a, near, next. continuar, to continue. propio, -a, proper. incomodar, to molest, incom- capaz, capable. venir bien, to fit. [mode. Beading Exercise. 50. Este hombre habla muy elocuentemente. Éabla mejor que el otro orador. Me ha dado V. demasiado dinero. Yo no tengo bastante. En verano me levanto cada dia temprano. El actor no habla bastante alto. ¡ Hable V. bajo ! El autor ha escrito clara, concisa y elegantemente. El deseo de ver la ciudad y principalmente el palacio real (royal —) me llenó de gozo.. Los lugares próximos á una gran ciudad venden bien sus frutos. La razón quiere que el hombre siga más los prudentes consejos que no (than) su propia voluntad. El rey dio órdenes para vestir ricamente á los pobres. La honradez * solo, alone (adjective) without accent, sólo, only (adverb) with accent. ** Tener razón, French: Avoir raison. 9* Digitized by Google 182 Lesson 80. se conserva tratando siempre derechamente con los hombres. Cervantes hizo ver (showed, proved; lit. made see) que nin- guna pluma era capaz de continuar dignamente su obra, sino la de su inventor. Este vestido me incomoda mucho; no es bastante ancho. Las botas me son demasiado estrechas ; no me vienen bien. Cuando uno quiere hablar de una obra, es menester que la vea primero. Tradnoción. 51. This author writes well. The orator has spoken distinctly, concisely, and elegantly. He has sent me too much money. He writes too much; if he wrote less he would write more elegantly and more distinctly. This actor speaks too low. Do speak loud, sir! I rose (have risen) very earlj to-day. He has certainly done it. The lawyer spoke very learnedly, but not distinctly enough. Your coat is better made than mine; it fits you very well. I gave (have given) money enough to my son. Why have you followed your own will more than (qvs no) the wise advice of your friends? The am- bassadors were all very richly dressed. I always learn my lesson, and I have always learned it well. He spoke of a work which he had never seen before. Nobody is always happy in this world. The king has generously pardoned his enemies. Which man has always spoken well? We (have) arrived to-day very early. (The) rich people are seldom happy. Conversación. ¿Cómo ha hablado este hom- Ha hablado elocuentisima- bre ? mente. ¿ Cómo escribió Cicerón ? Cicerón escribió concisa, clara y elegantemente. ¿Ha estudiado V. la lección? He estudiado siempre mi8 lecciones. ¿Quién es siempre feliz en Nadie. este mundo? ¿Ha dado V. bastante dinero Le he dado demasiado. á su hijo? ¿Que quiere la razón? Que el hombre siga los pru- dentes consejos. ¿Cómo su conserva la hon- Tratando siempre derecha- radez? mente con los otros. ¿ Qué hizo ver Cervantes ? Que otra pluma no era capaz de continuar dignamente su obra. ¿ Por qué le incomoda á V. Porque no es bastante ancho. su vestido? ¿No le vienen bien á V. sus No, son demasiado estrechas. botas ? Digitized by VaOOQlC The Adverbe continued. 138 Readbiir Exercise* Soneto. Las Hijos y los Padres. Ni arrastrada nn pastor llevar podía Á una cabra infeliz que ola amante Balar detrás al hijo, que, inconstante Marchar junto á la madre no quería. — ¡Necio! — al pastor un sabio le decía, -7- Al qne llevas detrás, ponle delante; Échate el hijo al hombro, y al instante La madre verás ir tras de la cria. — Tal consejo el pastor creyó sencillo, C!ogió la cría y se marchó corriendo Llevando al animal sobre el hatillo. La cabra sin ramal los fué siguiendo, Mas siguiendo tan cerca al cabrítillo, Que los pies por detrás le iba lamiendo. [Campoamor.] Thirty-first Lesson. — Lección treinta y nna. The Ádyerbs eontinued. In the foregoing Lesson we observed that besides the adverbs derived from adjectives or participles by addition of the termination -mente, there are* a great many proper adverbs denoting place, time, order, manner, etc. Thus we have 1. Adverbs of place. 2. Adverbs of time. 3. Adverbs of manner. 4. Adverbs of quantity. 5. Adverbs of affirmation, negation, and doubt. There are also adverbial expressions— i.e., compounds of substantives, adjectives, etc., with prepositions, as: por fuerza, on compulsion, en poco tiempo, soon, etc. 1. Adverbs of Place. Aqui, here. arriba, up, above. ahi, there. cerca, near, about. áttá, there f= thither). abajo, down, below. acá, here (= hither). debajo, beneath. donde, where. enfrente, opposite. 5^, }•""■»• fc,}-»^- de donde, whence. dela/nte, in front. Digitized by VjOOQIC 134 Lesson 31. adelantty forward, on. encimay upon, on. detrás, behind. lejos, far. atrás, backward, behind. dentro, within, inside. junto, near, next to . . . adentro, towards the interior. ^.^.— Adverbs of place answer the question ¿dártele? where? Aqui, alii, are used with verbs of rest; acá, allá, with verbs of motion; ahí, with either. Aqui, acá, refer to the place where the, speaker is; ahi, to the place where the person addressed is; alii, allá, to any other place more or less distant from both. 2. Adverbs of Time. Cuando, when. aún, yet. ayer, yesterday. á menudo, often. hoy, to-day. entonces, then, afterwards. mañana, to-morrow. después, after. luego, directly, immediately. ya, already. tarde, late. pues, then, afterwards. temprano, early. todama, still. siempre, always. aprisa, quickly. despacio, slowly. ahora, now. ^. ] "«'^'y Ínterin, meanwhile. -A^.^.— Adverbs of time answer the question ¿cuantió? when? Cuando is followed by the Indicative in speaking of customary actions or positive facts, and by the Subjunctive if denoting possibility, contingency, or futurity: Cuando voy á paseo voy solo. Whenever I go for a walk, I go alone. Cuando venga se lo diré, I will tell him when he comes. The adverb recientemente, recently, drop3 its last three syllables before participles and adjectives used instead of par- ticiples, as: Un niño recién (^= recientemente) nacido, A new-born child. Los recién llegados. The new comers. Se embarcaron con cuatro personas de las recién libres (= libradas), Cerv, They embarked with four persons of the recently rescued (from among those who had been recently rescued). Digitized by vaOOQlC The Adverbs continued. 135 8. Adrerbs of Manner. Como, how. redo (reciamente), violently, lien, vrell. severely. mcU, badly. aparte, separately. asiy so, thus. quedo, quietly. alto, aloud. medianamente, middling, tole- %*o, low, softly, gently. casi, almost, nearly, [rably. ^.-B.~ Adverbs of manner answer the question ¿eómo? Aow? Adverbs in -nviewte (Lesson 30) belong to this class, as: dulcemente, sweetly; lealmente, loyally. The same meaning may be expressed in the two following ways : CJon dulzn/ra, or de un modo (de una manera) dulce, in a sweet manner. é. Adverbs of Quantity. Cuanto, how much. demasiado, too, too much. mucho, much. además, besides. muy, very, much. tan, tanto, so much. más, more. cuan, cuanto, how much. bastante, enough. harto, enough. poco, little. apenas, scarcely. ^.^.— Adverbs of quantity answer the question ¿ci^íínfo.^ how much? 3Iucho means great in quantity, price, also long in duration, and is equivalent to much, very much, too much; a great deal; long, a long time. It is used before m^ds (more), and menos (less), antes (before), and después (after), with comparatives, and with active verbs, and substantives. Finally, it may stand by itself; Le.: mucho más (míenos), much more (less). mucho mejor (peor), much better (worse). mucho antes (después), much before (after). ¿ Cornee mucho ? — Mucho. Does he eat much ? — Very much. Muy is an abbreviation of mucho, it means high degree, and is generally translated by very, great. It is used before adjectives^ participles, and adverbs; as an exception be- fore the comparatives anterior (earlier), posterior (later), superior (superior), and inferior (inferior); with ser and estar and their equivalents, and before almost all adverbial phrases. Finally, it never stands by itself: muy grande (pequeño), very large (small). muy ainado (aborrecido), very much loved (hated). Digitized by VaOOQlC 136 Lesson 31. muy temprano (tarde), 'very early (late). muy anterior (posterior), much earlier O^ter). es muy hueno, he is very good. está muy contento, he is very pleased. muy de tarde en tarde, very seldom. ¿ Está enfermo ? — y mucho (not muy). — Is he ill ? Very ill indeed. Tan and tanto follow the same rules as mu^ and mucho, thus: Le he estimado tanto, I have esteemed him so much! Whereas : Él es tan estimado como . . ., he is no less esteemed than . . . (lit, qaite as much as . . . .). 5. Adverbs of Áíñrmation, Negation^ and Doubt. Si, yes. quizá, \ siempre, always. quizás, I ^^Vi&m cierto (ciertamente), certainly, tal vez, ( ^ '^ ' no, no. acaso, ) nunca, never. ya no, \ ^^ ^^^^ # / no more. jamás, ever, never. no , , , ya, f nunca jamás * never. ^.jB.— The negative terms nunca, jamás, nada (nothing), ninguno, and nadie (nobody) require no, if they follow the verb, but not if they precede it, as: Ko hay ninguno, there is none; but: Ninguno hay» JVb se dice nada, nothing is said; but: Nada se dice. No lo crei jamás, I never believed it; hnt: jamás lo eré. With ni — ni (neither — nor) the case is much the same: No tengo ni amigos ni dinero, I have neither friends nor money. Ni amigos, ni dinero tengo. Sometimes, however, the first ni may be omitted, as: No es bueno ni malo. He is neither good nor bad. 6* Adverbial Expressions. Por fuerza, on compulsion. por delante, in front. por extenso, in detail, amply, sin falta, surely, assuredly. fully. por desgracia, unfortunately. por la mañana, in the mom- á pierna suelta, carelessly. ing. en voz alta, aloud. * Most emphatic. Digitized by VjOOQIC The Adverbs continued. 187 en poco tiempo, soon, in a short cuanto antes, as soon as possible. time. de buena gana, willingly. sobremanera, immensely, im- cUpié de la letra, literally, etc. moderately. ahora mismo, at once, ihis de repente, suddenly. very moment. de día, in daytime. á veces, sometimes. de día en día, daily. á la derecha, on (to) the right. de tarde en tarde, now and á menudo, often. then, seldom. á oscuras, in the dark. Words. La gloria, the glory. aborrecer, to abhor, to detest. d subdito, the subject. atreverse, to dare. d temor, the fear. venir á las manos, to come to d correo, the post. blows. d trabajo, the labour, work. arncs^ar,tobeatstake,torisk. lo8 víveres, the victuals. dudar de, to doubt about. campestre, rural. vino, he (she, it) came (Fr. venir). o^raííecwío, -a, thankful, grate- lograr, to obtain, to eam, to coronar, to crown. [ful. gain, to win. agradar, to please. muestra, shows, proves. conceder, to allow, to concede, demás j other. vivir, to live. voy, I go. Beading Exercise. 52. Vivo aqui cerca, alii en aquella casa. No voy allá porque está muy lejos. América está cerca de Asia, y lejos de Europa. De buena gana viviría en Madrid, porque allí tengo muchos amigos. Los enemigos se coronaron de gloria, donde pocos dias antes habían sido derrotados. No me agrada la mucha libertad que V. concede á su hijo, ün escritor tan celebrado como Calderón. El discípulo se muestra agradecido á su maestro estudiando mucho. Un rey tiránico es muy aborrecido de todos sus subditos. Siempre he amado mucho la vida campestre. Ni el uno ni el otro se atrevieron á venir á las manos por el temor de no arriesgarlo todo. ¿De dónde '^ viene V.? Aun no llegado el correo; ni ayer tampoco vino. Apenas hubo llegado mi amigo, cuando recibí las cartas. El fruto de su trabajo no pudo lograrlo (or no lo pudo lograr) jamás. La carne y demás víveres eran demasiado caros. * Donde, where, sometimes prefixes the prepositions á, en, de, and por, and thus forms the adverbs : adonde (also written á donde), whither; endonde (en donde), wherein; dedonde (de donde), whence; pordonde (por donde), where through (French: par ou). Occasionally another preposition may be added, as: Si vuelves presto de á donde pienso enviarte (Cero.). If you soon come back from where I have a mind to send you (to). Digitized by VaOOQlC 138 Lesson 81. Tradnecióii. 53. I am very fond of (tr, I love much) my parents. You. speak too loud; speak lower! Cervantes is a very celebrated Spanish writer (escritor). He will never h^ve seen so manj- towns as I have (seen). Why have you come so soon? I have written this letter in a hurry. Perhaps you have not received my letter. This man is so despised that nobody will speak to him. I have always esteemed you so much that I shall never doubt (of) your word. He has already sent me twelve dollars, and now he sends me twenty more. Your son studies too much; six hours a (por) day are more than enough. Unfortunately I have neither friends nor money; how can you expect me to be (tr. will you that I be) satis- fied with (contento con) my situation ? it is now almost two years that (since) I am in this town. Yesterday I came (vine, from venir) too late ; to-day I come (vengo) sooner. Sometimes we are quite as unjust towards ourselves as towards (the) others. I have given you enough money; you have received the price of your work. A town where {tr, in which) the victuals (provisions) are too dear cannot please a foreigner. 8 So 4 learned la 2 man must have studied much. Conversación. ¿Por quo quiere V. vivir en Madrid? ¿Quién es Calderón? ¿Cómo se muestra un discípulo agradecido á su maestro? ¿Por qué es aborrecido este rey? ¿No ha llegado hoy el co- rreo? ¿No te ha pagado aún? ¿Vendrá V. (Will you come) mafiana á mi casa á comer (dine) conmigo? ¿Es verdad qne su amigo de V. ha muerto? ¿Cómo, todavía está V, en cama (hed)^ ¿ Qué se dice en la ciudad ? Porque tengo allí muchos ami- gos. ün escritor español muy céle- bre. Se muestra agradecido estu- diando mucho. Porque es muy tiránico. No ha llegado hoy, ni tampoco llegó ayer. Me ha prometido frecuente- mente darme el dinero, pero hasta hoy no me ha cumplido (kept) la palabra (word). Gracias; lo siento (I am very sorry)^ pero tengo compro- miso (I am engaged) con unos amigos para mañana. Por desgracia es cierto. Perdone V., me acosté (went to bed) ayer muy tarde. No se oye (hears) nada de nuevo. Digitized by VjOOQIC Prepositions. 139 ¿Ha recibido V. mi carta? He recibido sa carta de V, á las ocho 7 luego la de su her- mano. ¿Cuánto tiempo hay (or hace) Aun no hace dos meses, que aprende V. el caste- llano? Keadingr Exercise. La Opinión. i Pobre Carolina mía! ¡Nunca la podré olvidar! Ved lo que el mundo decía Viendo el féretro pasar: Un clérigo. — Empiece el canto. El doctor. -- I Cesó el sufrir! El padre. — \ Me ahoga el llanto ! La madre. — ¡Quiero morir! Un muchacho. — ¡Qué adornada! Un joven, — ¡Era muy bella! Una moza. — ¡Desgraciada! Una vieja. — ¡Feliz ella! — ¡Duerme en paz! dicen los buenos. — ¡Adiós! dicen los demás. Un filósofo. — ¡Uno menos! Un poeta. — \ Un ángel más ! [Campoamor, "Doloras."] Thirty second Lesson. — Lección treinta y dos. Prepositions. — Preposiciones. In Lesson 4 we have enumerated the prepositions most in use. The Spanish prepositions are either simply placed before the noun [see page 19), as: con el padre; para el hermano; en la ciudad; or they require one of the prepositions de and á following, as: Junto d la casa, near the bouse. Encima de la cama, on (upon) the bed. Está delante de mi, he stands before me. They are either adjectives, like junto, or compounds of prepositions with other words like encima = en cima (on the top). Reserving all particulars for the Second Digitized by VaOOQlC 140 Lesson 32. Part, we now give the prepositions and prepositional locutions which are most in use. (a) Followed by de: Acerca de, for, because of, by reason of. además de, besides. al l4JLdo de, aside. al cabo de, at the end. antes de, before. á espaldas de, behind. á pesar de, notwithstanding. debajo de, under. delante de, before, in front. dentro de, within. fuera de, except, outside. después de, after. detrás de, behind. en casa de, at the house,at — 's. encima de, on, upon. enfrente de, opposite. por medio de, through, across. respecto de, concerning. (b) Followed by á: En cuanto á, \ as for, con- conforme á, conformably to, en orden á, ] ceming. according to. tocante á, concerning. respecto á, with respect to. junto á, near, next to . . . «¿wafcwcidwá, without regard to. Words. El pueblo, the people. la fuerza, the force. el temor, the fear. la hacienda, the fortune. el espacio, the space. la potencia, the power. la criatura, the creature. el conciudadano, the citizen. el cumplimiento, the compli- ment(s). el vencedor, the conqueror. hace. la seguridad, the safety, curity. la Casa Ayuntamiento, Town-hall. la costa, the coast. Undo, lovely, sweet. valiente, brave, gallant. desear, to desire. enojarse, to become angry. premiar, to reward. es excusado, is superfluous, does. se- the Beading Exercise. 54. El pueblo deseaba que premiaran á los vencedores y á los sabios. Han llegado dos batallones que estaban de guar- nición en Madrid. Los padres y las madres trabajan para sus hijos. El hombre valiente no hace nada por fuerza ó por temor. ¿Quién soy yo para con (in comparison) él? El vino (carne) antes de mí á la iglesia, y se puso (sat down) delante de mi. Además de sus libros tenían todo lo que es necesario para escribir. El capitán me llamó por mi nombre. Detrás de la casa hay un jardín muy ameno. Dentro de una hora estaremos en seguridad. Los malos se enojan siempre contra los buenos. ¿ Qué tal (What) es este hombre para con Digitized by VjOOQIC ^ Prepositions. 141 sns conciudadanos? Desde el dia en que los demás (the others) 86 fueron (went away), se faé también él. La lámpara está encima de la mesa. El perro durmió debajo de la cama. Para entre amigos son excusados los cumplimientos. Traducción. 55. Near the town-hall there are some beautiful palaces. Shall you come (Vendrá Y.) (still) before night? I shall come ifter sunset (ponerse el sol). The world was created (hecho) by God. What ((¿uUn or Qué) is the creature in com- parison with the Creator? We speak about the affairs (las cosas) of our nation. There might he (Habrá) above two hundred persons. Concerning this matter (asunto), I do not know (sé) anything certain. Opposite the church there were three very high trees. (The) man was (ha) not born (nacido) for himself alone. I am not ashamed to speak the truth always. I was occupied from (the) morning till (to the) evening. The father distributed (def. of repartir) all his fortune among his children. (The) war is (está) declared (use declarar) be- tween the two Powers. The whole honour of the victory is for the general. The thief hid himself behind the door. The «hip was wrecked (use naufragar) near (cerca de) the coast tf Spain. (The) Mount Pico rises (use levantarse) above the other mountains. The king did not wish (quiso) that his sons should reign (Imperf. Subj. of reinar) after him. Conversación. iQiüé deseaba el pueblo? Que premiaran á los vencedores. ¿Ha partido su amigo de V. ? Si, ha partido ayer sin despe- dirse (saying good bye), ¿Qué no quiso el rey? Que sus hijos reinasen después de él. ¿Por quiénes trabajan los pa- Trabajan por sus hijos. ¿Qué ha publicado ese autor? Ha publicado muchas novelas muy buenas; ha publicado mucho. ¿Dónde se escondió el perro? Debajo de la cama. ¿Cuál virtud está sobre todas La caridad. las virtudes? ¿Cuántos años tendrá su Ahora tendrá sobre cuarenta amigo de V.? afios. ¿Iremos por vapor (steamer) Creo que haremos mejor en ó por ferro-carril (train) ? tomar (if we take) el tren. ¿Qué no hace el hombre va- No hace nada por fuerza ó por liente? temor. Digitized by VjOOQIC 142 Lesson. 38. Beading Exercise, El traidor despreciado'^'. Fué rogado un noble español por Carlos quinto para que cediese su palacio, el más hermoso de Toledo, al condestable de Borbón. Viendo el Emperador que resistía, le dijo que debía mirar como un honor el alojar en su casa á tan gran capitán. El español respondió que eran muy conocidas las altas prendas de aquel príncipe; pero que su traidora con- ducta para con Francia su patria las había borrado todas. «Le cederé mi palacio por obediencia», añadió, «mas suplico á Vuestra Majestad (que) me permita darle fuego en cuanto el duque haya salido de él. No podré yo resolverme á ocupar la misma casa en que ha vivido un traidor.» Despreciar, to despise. para con . . ., towards, against . . . rogar, to request. horrar, to efface, to expunge. ceder, to cede. la obediencia, the obedience. el Condestable, the Constable. mas, but. viendo, seein^j. permitir, to permit. resistir, to resist. el capitán, the general. debia, he must; he ought to. añadir, to add. mirar, to regard. suplicar, to beg. alojar, to lodge. dar fuego á . , ., to set on fire. conocido, known. en cuanto, as soon as. las altas prendas, the eminent salir de , , ., to leave, qualities. resolverse, to resolve. traidor, traitor, treacherous. ocupar, to live in . . la conducta, the conduct. vivir, to live. TMrty-tliird Lesson. — Lección treinta y tres. Coignnctlons. — Conjunciones. (a) Simple Conjunctions: Y (é), and. mas**, but. ó (ú), or. pero, but, yet. ni — ni, neither — nor. cuando, when, if. que, that. si, if. ya — ya, now — now. pues, as, because. mientras, whilst. * See the poetical treatment of the same subject in "i^w Castellano Leal'' por el Duque de Bivas, in the "Spanish Reader . ** mas, but, without accent; más, more, with accent. Digitized by VaOOQlC Conjunctions. 143 (b) Compound Gonjiiiietions. Aunque, although, though. asi que, so that, as soon as. jwr qué, i^hy. con tal que, provided, on con- porque, because, as. dition that. hien quCy though, although. por más que, in spite of. supuesto que, \ pj.Q^¿g¿ 4.jja,4- entretanto que, whilst. piesto que, / ^ ' á menos que, unless. W(^ Que, in order to, so that, hasta que, until. pues que, as, since. Some of these conjunctions govern always the Subjunctive mood, such as antes que, before; con tal que, provided; á menos que, unless; para que, in order to. Others govern the Subjunctive only when the idea expressed by the verb appears uncertain, dubious, or merely possible: such are aunque, though; hasta que, until ; asi que, so that, etc. For further particulars see Part n., Lesson 14: Conjunctions. Notes. 1. For the sake of euphony, t/ (and) is replaced by é before words beginning with i or hi (but not hie), as: Padre é hijo, father and son. Acero y hierro, steel and iron. 2. In a similar way, ó is replaced by ü before words beginning with o, as: Siete ü ocho, seven or eight. 3. Porque means both why ? and because, as : ¿ Por qué no habla Y, ? why do you not speak ? Porque no quiero, because I do not choose. In order to mark the difference, por qué, why ? is written in two words and with the accent, and porque, because, in one word and without the accent. Words. El ministro, the minister. sujeto, subject. el embajador, the ambassador, perseguir, to persecute. el juez, the judge. velar, to wiatch. el amo, the master. recompensar, to reward. la ignorancia, the ignorance. ganar, to earn, to gain. la sabiduría, wisdom. cansar, to tire; cansarse, to el discípulo, the pupil, scholar. get tired. afable, kind, friendly. descansar, to repose. dichoso, happy. no tener ningún inconveniente, severo, severe, strict. to have no objection. dormir, to sleep. Digitized by VjOOQIC 144 Lesson 88. Traducción. 56. The ministers and the ambassadors thought that the proposal of (tr, what proposed [tr. proponer]) the emperor would please (convenia) neither the king nor the people. Peter or [an]other shall do (hará) it. I should be glad (Quisiera) to reward him, but* I cannot. I earn money enough, but I am not satisfied. I cannot walk so far, because I get tired. Provided they are (se muestren) kind, I have no objection to pay them a visit (en ir á verles). Money makes (hace) rich, but not happy. (The) virtue, although persecuted, is amiable. If I get (Si me llegare or llega) my money, I shall pay you. I waked (Imperf,), whilst be slept. If it brought (importara) me a kingdom, I would not commit (haría) an injustice. The judge, though severe, is just. (The) virtue renders men happy (felices) in this world and blessed (bienaventurados) in heaven. I say (digo) it now, that (para que) he may hear (sienta) it himself. Wait (espere V.) in this room, sir, until my master comes (venga)l (The) men often say (dicen) that they do not wish for (apetecen) riches. Science and ignorance are opposed things. The girl under- stands (sabe) sewing (coser) and spinning (hilar). He rests neither by (de) day nor by night. Men or women, we are all liable to passions. One should not (No se ha de) live in order to eat, but one should eat in order to live. The master takes pains (se afana) that he may bring forward (Subj. pres. of adelantar) his pupils. Conversación. ¿Quién ha llegado hoy? El conde de Aguilar y su señora (lady), i Qué vende este comerciante Vende plomo (lead) y hierro. (merchant) ? ¿ Cuánto dinero le ha dado V. Le he dado siete ú ocho duros al criado? (dollar). ¿Por qué no ha escrito V. á Porque no tengo tiempo. su padre? ¿ Cuándo recibió V. la res- Después de haber escrito esta puesta (answer)^ carta (letter). ¿ No ha querido (did not like) Ni mi tío ni mi tía han que- venir aquí su tío de V.? rido venir. ¿Qué dice un poeta de la Dice que la imitación es como imitación (imitation)^ el alma de la poesía. ¿Por qué no pudo el capitán Porque estaba ausente. asistir (assist) á la función (solemnity) ? * But is pero^ seldom mas. After a negative sentence hut is sino. Digitized by vaOOQlC Conjunctions. 145 ¿Irá V. conmigo? Iré con usted pues lo quiere. ¿EavistoV. en verdad CrcaWy^ Cuando le aseguro á V. que á mi hermano? le he visto, puede creerme (believe me), ¿Quiere V. á ese hombre ? Aunque no me ha hecho (done) nada, no le quiero. ¿Cuándo me pagará V.? Le pagaré á Y. si me llega (if I get) el dinero. Beading Exercise. Canción de la Primavera. Ya vuelve la primavera: suene la gaita, — ruede la danza: tiende sobre la pradera el verde manto — de la esperanza. Sopla caliente la brisa: suene la gaita, — ruede la danza: las nubes pasan aprisa, y el azur muestran — de la esperanza. La flor ríe en su capullo: suene la gaita, — ruede la danza: canta el agua en su murmullo el poder santo — de la esperanza. ¿La oís que en los aires trina? suene la gaita, — ruede la danza: — «Abrid á la golondrina, que vuelve en alas — de la esperanza.* — Nifia, la niña modesta: suene la gaita, — ruede la danza: el mayo trae tu fiesta que el logro trae — de la esperanza. Cubre la tierra el amor: suene la gaita, — ruede la danza: el perfume engendrador al seno sube — de la esperanza. Todo zumba y reverdece: suene la gaita, — ruede la danza: cuanto el son y el verdor crece, tanto más crece — toda esperanza. Sonido, aroma y color (suene la gaita, — ruede la danza) úñense en himnos de amor, que engendra el himno — de la esperanza. Morirá la primavera: suene la gaita, — ruede la danza: mas cada año en la pradera tornará el manto — de la esperanza. Spanish Conv.-Grammar. 10 Digitized by VaOOQlC 146 Lesson 84. La inocencia dé la vida (calle la gaita, — pare la danza) no toma nna vez perdida: I oh mi inocencia! — ¡ay mi esperanza! Fablo Viferrer. Tliirty-fourth Lesson. — Lección treinta y cuatro. Interjections. — Interjecciones. Interjectionis aré used to express some emotions of the speaker, as Joy, surprise, gnef, etc. Those most in use are: / Ah ! I eh I ¡ hala I to denote joy. ¡Ah! ¡ay! ¡ay de mi! ¡ó! to denote grief. ¡Oh! to denote silrprise. / Eh ! ¡ hola ! to attract attention. / Chito ! ¡ quedo! ¡ silencio ! to command silence. / Ea ! / Sus! ! Animo ! to encourage. / Ta ! ¡ tate! to threaten. Besides these there are many other expressions, as: Ojalá, Would that . . . ¡Válgame Dios! Good gracious! ¡Caramba! Oh, dear me I etc. which are also used a« interjections. The Spanisl> language abounds in such interjectional locutions. Beading Exercise. 57. I Ah, qué desgracia (misfortune) \ ¡Ay, quo jpens, (pain) -y: oh, desdichado de mi (how unhappy I am) I i Oh, cielos! I Eh, quo es lo que decías (saidst)\ ¿Hola, muchacho, vendrás^ luego (soon)? i Hola, quién lo hubiera creído (thought, believed) t ¡Chito, ninguno hable, y todos oigan (let all listen) \ ¡Ea, hijo- mío, buen ánimo! ¡Ta^ ta; qué es lo que veo! ¡Vaya (Up)j- que ya es tiempo de levantarse! ¡Ay, qué gozo (pleasure)l ¡Ah, desventurada mujer! ¡Oh, dolor! ¡Mira (look), que in- famia! ¡Gracias á Dios! ¡Bendito (praised) sea Dios! Beading Exercise. España, — Diversidad de lenguas. Subsiste en España no sólo la diversidad de leyes, sino* también la de lenguas. Se habla todavía en gallego, en bable^ en vasco, en catalán, en mallorquín, en valenciano. Tienen» Digitized by VaOOQlC The Irregular Verbs. 147 estas lenguas, á excepción de la vasca, el mismo origen que la de Castilla; y ninguna, sin embargo, ha caldo en desuso. Lejos de borrarse, pasan hace afios por una especie de renaci- miento. Eran ayer vulgares, y hoy toman el carácter de literarias. Se escriben ahora en todas esas lenguas, principal- mente en las latinas, poesías brillantes de especial índole y tendencia, donde predomina sobre todos los sentimientos el de ^ antigna patria. Se desentierran los cantos y aún los libros a prosa que en ellas compusieron hombres de otros siglos ; y 00 bien se los publica, se los lee y devora. En catalán hasta se escriben y se ponen en escena comedias y dramas de no escaso mérito. [Pí y Margall, "Las Nacionalidades," Cap. XIÍ.] Thirty-fiftli Lesson. — Lección treinta y cinco. The irregular Verbs. — De los verbos in*egulares. Irregular verbs are those which deviate in their conjugation from the regular verbs, unless this deviation ^ a merely orthographical one, as with the verbs enumerated in Lesson 22, where the anomaly is only seeming, as the alterations in the spelling are necessary in order to maintain the original pronunciation of the verb. A very considerable number of Spanish verbs are only so far irregular as to undergo an alteration of the radical vowel in certain persons of the present indicative and subjunctive, and in the imperative, all the other persons and tenses being perfectly regular. This alteration is originated by the stress being laid on the radical vowel', which is, as it were, not strong enough to support alone the full weight of the accent, and is, therefore, changed into a diphthong; whilst in the cases where the stress is not laid on the radical vowel, it remains unaltered. Thus, in the verb alentar, to breathe, the 1. sing. pres. indie, ought pro- perly to be alentó*. Now, this e (the radical vowel) cannot support by itself the weight of the accent, and is therefore changed into ie. Thus aliento*, instead * The accent is only used here to indicate the vowel on which the stress is laid, and must not be written. 10* Digitized b d by Google 148 Lesson 35. of alentó. The 1st pers. plur. of the same tense, however, is alentamos, and not alientamos^ because here the stress is laid on the a (alentamos), and not on the e of the root. Observation.— Yqí this transition of the radical vowel into the diphthongs ie and ue is not confined to the aforesaid forms, but also occurs in the infinitive mood of some verbs. Hence we have double forms, like diezmar, and dezmar, to decimate; adiestrar, and adestrar, to instruct; amueblar, and amoblar, to furnish (a room), etc. The conjugation of such verbs with diphthongs for their radical vowel is regular. The Spanish Academy recognises both forms, yet prefers the form with the diphthong. As the aforesaid deviation is found equally with verbs of the first, second, and third conjugations, we may bring them all under the First Class. Character : The radical e, i is changed into ie. Models. I. II. III. Alentar, to breathe. Encender, to set on fire, to light. Present. Indicative. Adquirir, to ac- quire, to obtain. Aliento, I breathe alientas alienta alentamos alentáis alientan. Enciendo, I light en^ciendes enciende encendemos encendéis encienden. Adquiero adquieres adquiere adquirimos adquirís adquieren. AUente alientes aliente alentemos alentéis alienten. Subjunctive. Encienda enciendas encienda encendamos encendáis enciendan. Adquiera adquieras adquiera adquiramos adquiráis adquieran. Alienta (tú) aliente (Y.). Imperative. Enciende (tú), encienda (V.). Adquiere (tú) adquiera (Y.). Thus: inquirir. to inquire. Digitized by Google The Irregular Verbs. 149 Alphabetical list of the yerbs liable to the same deriations: Memarh—In this and the following lists there are many verbs which are not so important for the beginner. It would therefore be better to learn first those marked with an asterisk. Verbs in -ar. Abnegar, to deny oneself. ^acertar, to guess. acrecentar, to increase. adestrar, to instruct. aferrar, to grapple. ailebrarse, to crouch. *alentar, to breathe. aliquebrar, to break a wing. aneblar, to get foggy. apacentar, to graze, to pasture. apernar, to seize by the leg. *apretar, to press together. arrendar, to lease, to rent. asentar, to set, to note down. aserrar, to saw. asestar, to point (a gun). atentar, to grope, to fumble ^. aterrar, to fling, to knock down ^. atestar, to fill with . . .^. ^atravesar, to perforate, to bar, to block, to cross. aventar, to fan, to kindle; -se, to run away. * Calentar, to warm. * cegar, to blind, to dazzle. *cerrar, to shut. cimentar, to cement, to lay the foundation. *comenzar, to begin, to com- mence, [concert. concertar, to arrange ; se, to ^confesar, to confess. ^confesarse con, to confess to. Decentar, to cut, to get bad sores. denegar, to deny. dentar, to indent, to teeth. derrenegar, to abjure, to de- test. derrengar, to lame. desacertar, to mistake. desaferrar, to unfurl, to un- fasten. desalentar, to discourage. desapretar, to loosen. desarrendar, to unbridle. desasentar, to disagree with. desasosegar, to trouble. desatentar, to perplex the mind. desaterrar, to deposit scoriae. desatravesar, to cross back. desconcertar, to confuse. desdentar, to draw teeth. desempedrar, to unpave (a street, etc.). desencerrar, to free, to set at liberty. *desenterrar, to disinter, to dig out. desgobernar, to disturb. deshelar, to thaw [helar, to freeze], desherrar, to unfetter, to take off a horse-shoe. desmembrar, to dismember. desnegar, to contradict, to unsay. desnevar, to thaw. despernar, to cut off a leg, to lame a leg. ^despertar (dispertar) , to awake. 1 Regular in the signification "to attempt the life of somebody." 2 » » » » . "to terrify." 3 » » » » '*to testify." Digitized by Google 150 Lesson 35. * desplegar \ to unfold. desterrar, to banish, to exile. dezmar, to decimate. JEmparentar, to be related by marriage. *empedrar, to pave. *einpezar, to begin. encensar, to perfume. encentar, to mutilate. * encerrar, to imprison, to com- prehend. *encomendar, to recommend, to entrust. encubertar, to cover with cloth (horses). endentar, to join with a mor- tise. enhambrentary to starve. enhestar, to raise, to put up- right. ^enmendar (emendar), to cor- rect, to mend. ensangrentar, to stain with blood. ^enterrar, to bury. *errar, to be mistaken (Pres, yerro, etc.). ^escarmentar, to sharpen one's wits, to take warning. estercar, to manure. estregar, to rub. * Fregar, to rub, to wash up. * Gobernar, to govern. * Helar y to freeze [French : geler\ herrar, to shoe a horse [f err er]. Incensar, to incense, to per- fume. infernar, to vex, to make angry. invernar, to pass the winter. *Manifestar, to manifest. mentar^, to mention. *merendar, to take one's after- noon collation. *Negar^, to deny. *nevar, to snow. *Pewsar^ to think. [legs. perniquebrar, to break (the) '''plegar^, to fold. *0Me6rar, to break. Recalentar, to warm again. ^recomendar, to recommend. refregar, to rub hard. *regar, to water. regimentar, to organize. remendar, to mend, to patch. remesar, to pull out the hair. renegar, to abjure, to for- swear. replegar, to fold often, to fall back. requebrar, to break into little pieces, to flirt, to woo, to court. resegar, to reap again. resembrar, to resow. restregar, to rub, to scrub. ^retemblar, to tremble re- peatedly. retentar, to threaten with a fresh attack (of illness, etc.). ^ Deitplegar forms desplego and despliego; as well as desple- garse, to retire in good order (milit). Replegar, to fold again, follows plegar, ^ The compounds, like comentar, dewcniar, etc., are regular. Paramentar, to adorn, is not derived from mentar, but from pa- ramento. 3 Anegar, to drown, is not derived from negar, and is regular, although in America spurious forms like aniego, aniegas may occur. ^ Compensar, recompensar, etc., are regular. Digitized by VjOOQIC The Irregular Verbs. 151 ^reventar, to burst. Salpimefitar, to season with salt and pepper. sarmentar, to gather (cut off) vine-wood. * segar, to mow, to cut. sembrar, to sow. sementar, to sow. ^sentar, to seat, to fit ; -5e, to sit down^ "^serrar, to saw. sosegar, to tranquillize. soterrar, to bury. "* Temblar, to tremble. tentar, to touch, to try, to grope; to tempt. trasegar, to pour over, to transfuse, to rack wine. ^tropezar, to stumble. Verbs in -cr. Ascender, to ascend, to be promoted. atender, to attend, to pay attention to. bienquerer, to esteem. Oerner^y to bolt (meal). coextender, to coextend. contender, to fight. *I>efender, to defend. desatender, to disregard. * descender, to descend, to come (down). desentenderse, to feign ig- norance. distender, to distend, [fire. * Encender, to light, to set on *entender, to understand. extender, to stretch out. Heder, to stink. hender, to split. Malquerer, to hate. *Berder, to lose. * Querer, to like, to wish, to want, will. Mequerer, to love intensely. Tender^, to tend, to stretch. trascender, to mount over, to pass. Verter, to shed, to spill. Verbs in -Ir, Adquirir, to acquire, to obtain. Diferir, to differ. Inquirir, to inquire. JPerquü^r, to search for. Words. To be right, tener razón, to be wrong, wo tener razón, the bet, wager, la apuesta, the cigar, ei cigarro, the rampart, ?a i;a?Za. the sea, el mar, the family, la familia. the cow, la vaca, the fault, mistake, la falta. likewise, también, igualmente. to read, leer, I say, digo. not yet, aww — no, ., ji Í la l^na, the wood, J ;^ ^^^^^^ the blow, el golpe [Ft, le coup], the valley, el valle, the noi^e, el ruido. Traducción* 58. What do you think of this matter, sir? I think that you are wrong, and that your friend is right. Think what ^ Presentar and representar, not being compounds of sentar, are regular. "* Discernir, to distinguish, formerly discerner, follows the conjug. of cerner, — Concernir, to concern, is a defective verb. 3 Pretender is regular. The other compounds, like tender. Digitized by VjOOQIC 152 Lesson 35. you please ! I know (se) that my friend will lose this wager. We lose our time, and you (Vds,), too, lose yours. I confess my faults; why do you not confess yours? We confess that you were right. I awake every morning at six o'clock. He eats his afternoon collation at 5 o'clock. The child is teething (pres.). When do we begin? I shall begin directly, and my brother also begins. The poor soldier still breathes. I am not mistaken when I say that he does not understand me. Light your cigar; there is a match (fósforo, m.). The ramparts defend the town against the enemies. We now (ahora) begin to read; dost thou also begin? I do not yet begin. I do not deny that you have given me the money. The sun dazzles me. The river falls (desenibocar) into the sea. He descends from an old Castilian family. I lose too much money with [at] this game. We lose 10 dollars (duro, m.), and that gentleman loses 15 dollars. The sun warms the earth. I split this wood with one blow. The cows graze in the valley. Correct the mistakes in your translation! Thou dost not know what thou sayest (dices). I understand everything. This noise troubles (disturbs) me. A young man acquires friends if he is diligent and honest. We seldom acquire anything in this world without pains (Sing,). Conversación. ¿Piensa V. en su tarea (tasJc)^ Pienso siempre en mis tareas. ¿Pierde V. mucho dinero? He perdido 5 daros, pero mi hermano pierde más. ¿No quiebra V. el vaso f^Za55^? No quiebro nada. ¿Niegan Vds. que tengamos No negamos que Vds. tengan razón? razón, pero negamos que ha- gan bien (do well) en este caso (case). ¿Por qué no empieza V.? No empiezo, porque no tengo gana de hacer lo que V, quiere. ¿Á quién defiende V.? Defiendo á la pobre viuda (wi- dow) que no tiene protección (protection). ¿Está enfermo el nifio? ün poco; dienta. ¿ Por qué no despierta V. á sus Porque aún no es tiempo. compafSeros (companion)^ ¡Siéntese V. Mi ama llegará No me siento, porque no tengo en un instante! tiempo. I Cierre V. la puerta del cuarto! Ya está cerrada. Mi primo niega lo que V. Aunque lo niegue, es verdad ha dicho. lo que he dicho. Digitized by VaOOQlC The Irregular Verbs continued. 153 Reading Exercise. España. — Diversidad de costumbres. No hablaré ahora de las costumbres. Su variedad es in- finita. Cambian de provincia á provincia y aún de pueblo á pueblo. Las de la ciudad difieren generalmente de las del campo; las de la montaña de las del valle. Difieren sobre todo las que se observan en los tres grandes momentos de la vida: el nacimiento, el matrimonio y la muerte. Son en todas partes diversos los trajes, diversos los juegos y las fiestas, diversas las aficiones y las preocupaciones religiosas. Cada comarca tiene su Cristo y su Virgen, y en cada una se les presta distinto culto. [Pí y Margall, *'La8 Nacionalidades," Cap. XII.] Thirty-sixth Lesson. — Lección treinta y seis. The Irregular Yerbs continued. A great many partly irregular verbs of the first and the second conjugations change the radical vowel into ue. To these Jugar (Latin jocare) may be added. They form the Second Class. Character : o, u, is changed Models. into ue. I. 11. III. acordar, to agree. Morder, to bite. Present. Indicative. Jugar, to play. Acuerdo, 1 agree acuerdas acuerda acordamos acordáis acuerdan. Muerdo, I bite muerdes muerde mordemos mordéis muerden. Juego, I play juegas juega jugamos jugáis juegan. Acuerde acuerdes acuerde Subjunctive, Muerda muerdas muerda Juegue juegues juegue Digitized by Google 154 Lesson acordamos acordéis acuerden. mordamos mordáis muerdan. juguemos jtiguéis juegmn/ Imperative. Acuerda (tú) f2^greQ Muerde (tú), bite (thou). (thou). acordad^ agree morded, bite (you). (you). Acuerde Y,, do Muerda Y, ,áo\Áie, agree. All the other tenses are regular, Juega (ttt), plaj (thou). jugad, play (you). Juegue F., do play. Alphabetical list of the verbs Verbs in -ar. Abuñolar, to puff out. aclocar, to brood. acollar, to earth up. *acordar, to agree; -se, to recollect ^ acornar, to gore. *acostar, to convey to bed; 'Se, to go to bed. afollar, to blow against, to breathe at . . . aforar, to enfeoff, to rent, to farm*. [phesy. agorar, tb foretell, to pro- *álmorzar, to breakfast. * amoblar, to funiish, see : Mo- blar, amolar, to grind, to sharpen. aporcar, to cover with earth. '''aportar, to go ashore, to land. *apostar^, to bet. *aprobar, to approve. asolar, to waste, to desolate. that follow this irregularity: asoldar, to hire. asonar, to accord, to chime in. atronar, to make a great noise. avergonzar, to shame (aver- güenzo), azotar, to work with the axe. Clocar, to cluck. colar^, to filter, to wash ; co- larse, to slip in (coll.). ^colgar, to hang, to suspend. comprobar, to prove. concordar, to accord, to agree. '''consolar, to console, to com- fort. consonar, to accord (see sonar), '''contar, to count, to tell. '''costar^ to cost. Degollar, to behead. demostrar, to prove. '''denostar, to offend, to injure. derrocar^, to fling down, to render downcast. desacordar, to disagree, to put out of tune. ^ Acordar, to tune (instruments), is regular. * Aforar, to gauge, is regular; also in all the other signi- fications (to adjust [weights, etc.]). * Apostar, to place, to station, is regular. * Verbs not derived from colar, but from cola, tail, glae, like descolar, to cut the tail off; encolar, to glue together, are regular. * Derrocar forms derroco and derrueco. Digitized by VjOOQIC The Irregular Verbs continued. 155 desaforar^ to deprive of a right, etc.^ desamoblar, to unfumisb. *desaprobar, to disapprove. descolgar, to take down (from a hook, etc.). descollar, to overtop, to tower over. desconsolar, to afflict deeply, to render disconsolate. *descorUar, to discount. descordar, to uncord. descornar, to break off the horns. desencordar, to unstring. desengrosar, to thin. desflocar, to unravel. desmajoJ-ar, to pull up vines by the roots. *desolar, to desolate, to waste. desoldar, to unsolder. desollar, to flay, to excoriate. desosar, to take the bone out (of the meat). desovar, to lay eggs, to spawn. *despohlar, to depopulate. destrocar, to break off a barter, a bargain. * desvergonzarse, to behave in a shameless manner. discordar, to be discordant. disonar, to be dissonant. Emporcar, to soil. enclocar, to fish with a hook, to cluck (like a hen). encoclar (better cloquear), see : enclocar, ^encontrar, to encounter, to meet, to find. encorar, to cover with leather; 'Se, to heal, to cicatrize. encorda/r, to string, to chord. encornar, to grow horns. encovar^ to put in the cellar. engorar, to addle. *engrosar, to become stout. enrodar, to break upon the wheel. ensalmorar, to brine (pickle). ensoñar, to dream. entortar, to render tortuous. escolar, to strain. ^esforzar, to encourage. '*' esforzarse, to take pains. Foliar^, to blow with the bellows. * for zar, to force, to compel, to oblige. * Holgar, to repose. hollar, to tread upon, to trample on. Improbar, to disapprove: *Jugar^, to play. Malsonar, to offend one's ears. mancornar, to tie by the horns. moblar^, to furnish. *mostrar, to show. * Poblar, to populate. *probar, to prove, to try. Mecolar, to strain a second time. recontar, to count again. *recordar, to remind, to awake, -se, to recollect. recostarse, to lie down on one side, to recline. *reforzar, to reinforce. 1 Meaning to redeem a mortgage is regular. 2 Foliar (afollar), when meaning "to put in sheetei," is re- gular. * Conjugar, to conjugate, and enjugar, to dry up, are not derived from jugar, and are regular, * Besides moblar, and amoblar, there are also the regular forms mueblar, and amueblar (see Lesson 35, Observation), Digitized by Google 156 Lesson 36. regoldar, to eruct. rehollar, to tread upon. remolar, to load dice. *renovar, to renew. repoblar, to repeople. * reprobar, to reprobate, to scold. rescontrar, to balance (an account), to compare. resollar, to breathe, to fan. resonar, to resound. retostar, to toast again, to toast brown. retronar, to thunder again. revolar, to flee, to flee again. *revolcarse, to welter, to roll, to wallow. *rodar, to roll. * rogar, to beg, to pray^. Sobresolar, to pave anew. solar^, to sole. soldar, to solder. * soltar, to loosen. sollar, to blow with bellows. *sonar^, to sound; -se, to blow one's nose. sonrodarse, to stick in the mud (a carriage). * soñar, to dream. * Tostar, to roast. trascolar, to bolt, to strain. trascordarse, to forget. trasoñar, to see a vision, to dream. trastrocar, to invert the order of things. trasvolar, to fly across. trocar, to exchange [Fr. tro- quer'], Hronar, to thunder^. * Volar, to fly. *volcar, to upset (a carriage, etc.); -56, to welter. Verbs in -6r. * Absolver, to absolve. amover, to remove. * Cocer, to cook ('cwe^o). condoler, to condole, to pity. conmover, to touch, to stir. contorcer, to distort. *I>emoler, to demolish, to destroy. . desenvolver, to develop. destorcer, to untwist. desvolver, to unfold. ^devolver, to give back. ^disolver, to dissolve. *doler, to ache, to give pain. Entrevolver, to pack between. ^envolver, to envelop, to wrap up, to involve. escocer, to smart. *Llover, to rain. * Moler, to grind, to bother. *morder, to bite. *mover, to move. *'Oler, to smell (pres. huele, etc., olemos, etc.). *JPoder, to be able, can. promover, to promote. Mecocer, to boil again. redoler, to cause great pain. remoler, to regrind. remorder, to cause remorse. remoi;er, to remove. *resolver, to resolve. retorcer, to re-wrap, to crook, to curse, to render tortuous (pres. retuerzo). ^ The compounds of ro^ar are regular, 2 Like 5o2ar the verb consolar, to console, though not derived from so2ar. ^ Sonar and its compounds are irregular. Verbs derived from persona, like apersonarse, to behave with dignity, are regular. * Verbs derived from irowo, throne, like entronizar, destronar, etc., are regular. Digitized by vaOOQlC The Irregular Verbs continued. 157 revolver, to stir, to disar- *Torccr, to come, to wring, to range, wrest (pres. tuerzo), * Soler, to use (be wont). * Volver, to turn back. solver^, to loosen, to untie. * volver á (with the Inf.), to do somover, to remove (earth). a thing once more. Words. The intention, la intención. to dine, comer, the place, el lugar. to doubt, dudar, the bill of exchange, la letra blunt, embotado, -da, or hoto, de cambio, -a, the behaviour, la conducta, furious, enfurecido. the farrier, el herrador'^, the pipe, la pipa, the movement, el ejercicio, the tobacco, el tabasco, the promise, la promesa, to smoke, fumar, Tradncoión. 59. I bet (that) I guess (adivinar) what (lo que) you are think- ing, and that you do not guess what I think. This man shows good intentions. I breakfast at eight o'clock, I dine at one, and go to bed at eleven. (The) war depopulates the countries, and stains with blood the places which are its theatre. Do discount me this bill of exchange! I fear that you will not approve of my conduct. I do not think that these gentlemen will agree to it. I doubt whether (si) you remem- ber me (Gen,), He wishes me to (que yo) exchange my watch for his. I doubt whether it (will) also rain(s) in the afternoon. I do not think (that) this farrier shoes my horse well. Take (Haga usted) more exercise, lest you {transí, that you do not) become too stout. I approve of all (cuanto) he has done. Do not forget {tr, recollect) your promises, my friend! Go to bed ; you are very tired. We breakfast at the same (mismo, -a) hour as (que) my father breakfasts. Do grind this knife, it is too blunt. How much does this book cost ? My book costs seven pesetas. The furious soldiers destroyed the whole house. Do not be afraid, sir, the dog does not bite. We disapprove of your sister's conduct; why do not you disapprove of it? Why do you not play with us? Pray, sir, tell me whether (tr. que me diga) we return at eight o'clock or at half past eight? Come back (return) at half past eight o'clock. This flower smells (fr. oler) very nice {tr, agreeably). In the morning I (use to) smoke a pipe of tobacco, and in the evening a couple of (un par de) cigars. 1 Obsolete. ^ From ferrum (Latin), French: le fer; maréchal-ferrant. Digitized by VaOOQlC 158 Lesson 86. Gonyersacióii. ¿Acuéstate, amigo mió? ¿Cuánto cuesta ese chaleco? ¿No desaprueba V. la con- ducta de ese hombre ? ¿Cuál es el efecto de la guerra ? ¿Qué espera V.? ¡Yo no tengo la culpa! ¿Por qué me reprueba V.? ¿Muerde ese perro? ¿Truena? ¿No se acuerda V. de mi criado Juan? ¿Á qué hora se acuesta V.? ¿Qué le ha contado á Y. el criado ? ¿Cuánto cuestan esos guan- tes? ¿Uuégole á Y., me diga que hora es? ¿Á que hora almuerza V.? ¡Gracias! No tengo gana de acostarme. Cuesta dos duros. Yerdad es que (certainly) la desapruebo ; pero ¿qué puedo hacer ? La guerra demuele las ciudades y despuebla los estados (states). Espero que encuentre él á mi deudor (debtor). No te repruebo á ti, sino á tu primo que ha cometido (com- mitted) la boberia (stupi-^ diiy)*. ¡ Cuidado I (Take care I) El perro es muy furioso (sava^ge). No he oído (heard) tronar. Me acuerdo muy bien de él; está ahora en casa del ge- neral Nufiez. Ordinariamente me acuesto á las once y media. Nada. Jamás me cuenta cosa alguna. Me cuestan dos pesetas y al- gunos céntimos. Han dado las cinco. Yo almuerzo á las once, y mi padre almuerza á las once y media. Reading Exercise. M caer de la tarde. Cuan plácido el río brilla! En ondas de azul y plata Luengamente se dilata Con murmurante rumor: Y los sauces de la orilla Se miran en la corriente Y mezclan confusamente Su -verde y albo color. * Who has made a fool of himself. Digitized by VaOOQlC The Irregular Verbs continued. 159 El caminante cansado Reposa al dulce sombrío, Y el bochorno del estío Templa en el fresco raudal: Por el herboso collado Pastando van las ovejas, Y tafie cantigas viejas El descuidado zagal. Ni en los nidos cantan aves, Ni en las granjas las palomas; El valle destila aromas. Bulle céfiro sutil; Voces lánguidas, suaves En redor vuelan perdidas Como tiernas despedidas De las flores del pensil. El sol, hiriendo á soslayo Por la frondosa enramada, La selva deja bañada De rojo y áureo esplendor: Y amortecido su rayo Desciende tranquilo y puro, Y en el cielo azul, oscuro Perdido vaga un fulgor. [José Ma de Arteaga, "Rimas Libres."] Thirty-seventh Lesson. — Lección treinta y siete. Tbe Irregular Yerbs continued. The Third Class is composed of verbs ending in acevy ecevy ocer^ and acir. With this class* c is changed into zcy whenever a or o follows. Models. I. II. III. IV. WaceVf Crecer, Conocer, Lucir, to be born. to grow. to know. to shine. * Exceptions are hacer ^ to make, to do (see page 177), and cocer, to cook (see page 156). Again mecer, to rock, and empecer, to damage, to hurt, which form mezo and empezó. Digitized by VjOOQIC 160 ) Lesson 37. Present. Indicative, Nazco Crezco Conozco Luzco naces creces conoces luces nace crece conoce luce nacemos crecemos conocemos lucimos nacéis crecéis conocéis lucis nacen. crecen. conocen. lucen. Subjunctive. Nazca Crezca Conozca Luzca nazcas crezcas conozcas luzcas nazca crezca conozca luzca nazcamos crezcamos conozcamos luzcamos nazcáis crezcáis conozcáis luzcáis nazcan. crezcan. conozcan. luzcan. Imperative. Nace Crece (tú) Conoce Luce naced creced conoced Itmd nazca. crezca F. conozca Y. luzca V. NB, — A further peculiar anomaly is presented by the definite, and its derived forms, of verbs in ducir, which change the c of their stem into j. Here e is added for the first pers. sing, instead of i, o instead of id for the third pars, sing., and eron in lieu of ieron for the third pers. plur. of the definite, w^hilst the i of the forms in iese, iere, iera is dropped. Conducir, to lead. Present. Indicative. Subjunctive. Conduzco, I lead Conduzca, I lead. conduces conduzcas conduce conduzca conducimos conducís conducen. conduzcamos conduzcáis conduzcan. Imperative. Conduce (tú), lead (thou). conducid, lead (you). Conduzca Y., do lead. Definite. Conduje (and not i) I led. condujimos condujiste condujisteis condujo (and not i6) condujeron (and not ieron). Digitized by VaOOQlC The Irregular Verbs con tinned. 161 Imperfect condujese, that led condtijeses, etc. Subjunctive. Future, condujere, that shall lead condujeres, etc. ConditxonaL condujeray that I should lead condujeras, etc. Terbs conjugated like those in cicer, ecevy ocer, ucir*: Abastecer, to supply with pro- visions, to victual (a ship). *aborrecer, to abhor. acaecer, to happen. acontecer, to happen. acrecer, to increase. adolecer, to fall ill. adormecer, to lull to sleep; 'Se, to fall asleep. [ful. * agradecer, to owe, to be grate- alhorecer, to dawn. amanecer, to dawn, to be or to arrive somewhere in the morning. amarillecer, to get yellow. amortecer, to benumb. anochecer, to grow dark. ^aparecer, to appear. *apetecer, to wish, to desire. aterecerse, to grow stiff with cold. Blanquecer, to blanch coin. Canecer, to grow grey. *carecer de, to want, to be in want of. ^compadecer, to pity. *comparecer, to appear. ^complaxier, to please. conocer, to know. convalecer, tobe convalescent. I>ecrecer, to diminish. denegrecer, to blacken. desadormecer, to wake. desaperecer, to disappear. desbastecer, to plane. desbravecer, to tame. desconocer, not to know, to know badly, ciesemftrarecer, to tame. dc5Ctn5ruer Imperative. Gerund. Imperf. Suljj. Cupiese, cupieses, cupiese, cupiésemos, etc. Future » Cupiere, cupieres, etc. Condit. » Cupiera, cupieras, etc. Imperative. iCabe (tú)! \ quepa V.! i cabed! 4. Caer, to fall. (6,) Pres. In die. Caigo, caes, cae, caemos, caéis, caen. Pres. Subj. Caiga, caigas, caiga, caigamos, caigáis, caigan. Gerund. Cayendo, Past part. Caído. jY'.JB.— Like caer y decaer, to decay, recaer, to have a relapse, fall upon. 5. Oir, to hear. (8.) Pres. Indie. Oigo, oyes, oye, oímos, oís, oyen, Oi, oiste, oyó, oímos, oísteis, oyeron. Oiga, oigas, oiga, oigamos, oigáis, oigan. Oyese, oyeses, etc. Oyere, oyeres, etc. Oyera, oyeras, etc. \Oye (tú)! [Oiga V.! ¡oíd!* Oyendo, Past part. Oído. ^.^.—Like oir, desoir, not to listen to (disobey), entreoír, to bear indistinctly, trasoír, to misunderstand. N,B,—y shows a euphonic change: y an irregularity. 6. Dar, to give. (2.) Pres. Indie. Doy, das, da, damos, dais, dan. Daba, dabas, daba, dábamos, dabais, daban. Di, diste, dio, dimos, disteis, dieron. Dé, des, dé, demos, deis, den. Diese, dieses, diese, diésemos, dieseis, diesen. Diere, dieres, etc. Diera, dieras, etc. iDá (tú)! idé V.! ¡dad! The same desdar, to untwist a rope. 7. Decir, to say, to tell. (9.) Pres. Indie. Digo, dices, dice, decimos, decís, dicen. Decía, decías, decía, decíamos, decíais, decían. Dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, dijisteis, dijeron. Diré, dirás, dirá, diremos, diréis, dirán. Diría, dirías, diría, diriamos, diríais, dirían. Imperf. Defin. » Pres. Subj. Imperf. » Future » Condit. » Imperative. Imperf. í)efin. » Future » Condit. » * Compare the old French word Oyez, hear you, from the verb Ouir, Digitized by VjOOQIC 174 Lesson 39. Pres. Subj. Diga, digas, diga, digamos, digáis, digan. Imperf. » Dijese, dijeses, dijese, etc. Future » Dijere, dijeres, etc. Condit. » Dijera, dijeras, etc. Imperative. [Di (tú)! \diga V.I ¡decidí Gerund. I>iciendo. Past part. Dicho. Like ííccir are conjugated its compounds as contradecir, to contradict; desdecir, to countermand; predecir, to predict; only in the 2nd Sing. Imperat. they do not form ~di but -dice, thus: desdice (tú). The two verbs bendecir, to bless, and maldecir, to curse, form the Future, Conditional, and Imperative regularly, as: Put. bendeciré and maldeciré ; Cond. bendeciría and maldecirla; Imperat. bendice (tú) and maZ- c?¿ce ("¿ty. They have a double form for the past parti- ciple—viz,, bendecido and maldecido, which, being a real par- ticiple, is used in the compound tenses of the verb (with haber); whereas the second past ]^b,yííc\^Ig maldito B,ná bendito is a verbal adjective, and therefore used with ser and estar. (See Less. 41.) Word». The youth (young man), el the arrival I ^^ ^^^^^^ tne arrival, ^ ^^ ¿¿e^a^^. the army, el ejército. the mutton, el carnero. the purse, el bolsillo. the beef, Za vaca. the policeman, cZ municipal. the beggar, eZ mendigo. the word, Zo palabra. the pains, cZ trabajo. the thunderbolt, eZ Zri^eno. pitiful, charitable, piadoso, -a. the weddinff I ^^ ^^^^' respectable, honest, honrado. ^' \ las nupcias. to keep, to fulfil, cumplir con. the cask, la bota. to take care, \ andar con the ewer, gallon, eZ cubo. to march carefully, / cuidado. the ear, Za oreja. to descend, bajar. the cook (f.), la cociHera. to order, command, mandar. Tradacción. 62. Napoleon passed (tr. went) (over) the Alps (los Alpes) with his army. Where did (Imperf.) you go last night ? My friend told me that he was going (Imperf.) to Paris. It is not yet (aun no . ..) sure (seguro) whether I shall go (Fut.) to my cousin's (f) wedding. How much did this cask hold? It held (Def.) six gallons of wine. I do not think (that) this theatre will hold 3,000 persons. How much do you think (that) this purse vrill hold? I fall from the tree. Do not fall ; there lies (hay) a stone I The child will fall, if you do not (take) care. Do you hear the noise? I do not hear any- thing {tr. I hear nothing); we also hear nothing. Do you Digitized by VjOOQIC Verbs entirely irregular. 175 hear (Def.) what this man says? Many people have ears, yet they do not hear. Yesterday I heard (Def,) the news of the queen's arrival. Listen, my friend! Was not this (a) thnnder? I heard nothing. The policeman seizes the thief (al ladrón) in (en) the street. If I heard that you did not keep your word, I should be very sorry. When I heard (Gerund,) the thunder, I went down the mountain. What does the cook (f.) boil? I boil beef and mutton. What do you give me to (para) eat? I give you ham (jamón), bread, and wine. He gave (Imperf,) me thirty dollars. Last week I gave (Def.) you a hundred dollars. The charitable girl gave (Def.) the beggar some money. Do give me a cigar and some matches! I have given you nothing. What dost thou say, child? I say that my father sent (Def.) you the money yesterday. Tell me, sir, will you give me my salary, or not? We always speak (the) truth, but you have not spoken it. Tell me, shall you obey your master if he orders you [to do] something? Do not say that you are right, for the whole world knows (sahe) that you are wrong {tr. that you are [have] not right). Gonyersación. ¿Por dónde anduvo ayer su amigo de V.? ¿Ha andado V. mucho hoy? ¿Quo me da V.? ¡Dé y. algo á la desdichada madre ! ¿Qué le dieron á V. mis her- manas? ¿Qué quiere V.? ¿Qué dice V.? V. dijo que yo no había cumplido mi deber ; ¿ es ver- dad ? ¿ Qué dice V. de este tiempo ? ¿Qué hace V. en la cocina (kitchen) ? Fué á ver (to see, to pay a visit) Á la marquesa de M., qpe llegó ayer, y nosotros fuimos también. Hoy no; pero ayer anduve mucho. Le doy á V. lo que V. me dio ayer. Ya le di ayer algún dinero. Me dieron algunos libros que mi hermano les dio el otro día. Le ruego á V. que me dé lo que me ha prometido. No digo nada. ¡No es verdad! ¡No he dicho tal cosa! ¿ Qué quiere V. que diga, sino que hace mal tiempo (it is bad weather) ? Cuezo la carne (meat) para la comida de mediodía (dinner). Digitized by VaOOQlC 176 Lesson 40. i Oiga V.I ¿No ha oído V. el No, sefior, no oigo nada. trueno ? ¿ Á quién ha bendecido Jesu- Á todos los pueblos del mundo. cristo? Beading Exercise. Diversidad de las Provincias de España. (Continuación.) Los Castellanos son de todos los pueblos del mundo los que merecen la primacía en linea de lealtad. Cuando el ejército del primer Rey de España de la casa de Francia quedó arruinado en la batalla de Zaragoza, la sola provincia de Soria dio á su Soberano un ejército nuevo y numeroso con que salir á campaña, y fué el que ganó las victorias, de que resultó la destrucción del ejército y bando austríaco. El ilustre historiador que refiere las revoluciones del principio de este siglo con todo el rigor y verdad que pide la historia para distinguirse de la fábula, pondera tanto la fidelidad de estos pueblos que dice será eterna en la memoria de los Beyes. Esta provincia aún conserva cierto orgullo nacido de su antigua grandeza, que hoy no se conserva sino en las ruinas de las ciudades y en la honradez de sus habitantes. Extremadura produjo los conquistadores del nuevo mundo, y ha continuado siendo madre de insignes guerreros. Sus pue- blos son poco afectos á las letras; pero los que entre ellos las han cultivado no han tenido menos éxito que sus com- patriotas en las armas. Fortieth Lesson. — Lección cuarenta. The Entirely Irregular Verbs continued. 8. Dormir, to sleep. (11.) Pres. Indie. Duermo, duermeSy duerme, dormimos, dormis, duermen. DefiUi » Dormi, dormiste, durmió, dormimos, dormisteis, durmieron. Pres. Subj. Duerma, duermas, duerma, durmamos, dur- máis, duerman. Imperf. » Durmiese, durmieses, durmiese, etc. Future » Durmiere, durmieres, etc. Condit. » Durmiera, durmieras, etc. Imperative, \ Duerme (tú)! ¡duerma V.I ¡dormid! Gerund. Durmiendo. Past part. Dormido. N.B,— The same, adormir, to lull. Digitized by VjOOQIC The Entirely Irregular Verbs continued. 177 9. Hacer, to do, to make, to let. (10.) Pres. Indie. HagOy haces, hace, hacemos, hacéis, hacen. Defín. » Hicej hiciste, hizo, hicimos , hicisteis, hicieron. Future » Haréj harás, hará, haremos, haréis, harán, Oondit. » Haría, harías, haría, haríamos, haríais, harían. Pres. Subj. Haga, hagas, haga, hagamos, hagáis, hagan. Imperf. » Hiciese, hicieses, hiciese, etc. Future » Hiciere, hicieres, hiciere, etc. Condit. » Hiciera, hicieras, hiciera, etc. Imperative. \Haz (tú) I ¡haga V.! ¡haced! Gerund. Haciendo. Past part. Hecho, All the compoands follow hacer, such as: contrahacer, to counterfeit, deshacer, to undo, rehacer, to do anew. Satisfacer (to satisfy) is also conjugated like hacer, ex- cept in the Imperat., which forms satisface. The Condit. Subj. is satisfaciera rather than satisficiera, and the Imperf. Subj. satisfaciese rather than satisficiese, — Liquefacer, to liquefy, and rarefacer, to rarify, form liquefaré, rarefaré, etc. 10. Ir, to go; irse, to go away. (S.) Pres. Indie. V€yy, vas, va, vamos, vais, van, Imperf. » Iba, ibas, iba, Íbamos, ibais, iban. Defin. » Fui, fuiste, fué, fuÁnmos, ¡fuisteis, fueron. Future » Iré, irás, irá, iremos, iréis, irán. Condit. » Iría, irías, iría, iríamos, iríais, irían. Pres. Subj. Vaya, vayas, vaya, vayamos, vayáis, vayan, Imperf. » Fuese, fueses, fúmese, etc. Future » Fuere, fueres, fuere, etc. Condit. » Fuera, fueras, fulera, etc. Imperative. \Vé (tú)! \vaya V.! |id! Gerund, Yendo. Past part. Ido. 11. Morir, to die, like Dormir, (12,) Pres. Indic. muero; Pres. Subj. muera; Defin. mori, etc.; él murió; Futur. Subj. muriere; Condit. Subj. muriera; Imperf. Subj. muriese, etc. ; except the Past part., which is muerto. The same premorir, to die before another. 12. Poder, to be able. (13.) Pres. Indic. Fuedo, puedes, puede, podemos, ^podéis, pueden. l^efin. » Pude, pudiste, pudo, pudimos, pudisteis, pudieron, Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 12 Digitized by VjOOQIC 178 Lesson 40. Future Indie. Podré, etc. Condit. » Podría, etc. Pres. Subj. Pueda, puedas, pueda, podamos, podáis, puedan. Pudiese, etc. Pudiere, etc. Pudiera, etc. Pudiendo, Past part. Podido. 13. Poner, to put, to place. (16,) Pres. Indic. Pongo, pones, pone, ponemos, ponéis, ponen. Puse, pusiste, puso, pusimos, pusisteis, pus- ieron. Pondré, pondrás, pondrá, etc. Pondría, pondrías, etc. Ponga, pongas, ponga, etc. Pusiese, pusieses, pusiese, etc. Pusiere, pusieres, etc. Pusiera, pusieras, etc. \Pon (tú)! ¡ponga V.! ¡poned! Puesto. Likewise the compounds, as: componer, to compose; de- poner, to depose, etc. 14. Podrir, to rot (obsolete). (14.) Pres. Indic. Pudro, ptidres, pudre, jyodnmos, ]poáris, pudren. Podrí, podriste, pudrió, podrimos, podristeis, pudrieron. Pudra, pudras, etc. Pudriese, etc. Pudriere, etc. Pudriera, etc. Pudriendo. Past part. Podrido. ^.jB.— Some grammarians prefer the Condicional Indic. pudría (inst. of podría), to distinguish it from the correspond- ing form of pod^r. In fact, podrir is only used with the stem in o in the Inñnitive, and in the Past Part., podrido, otherwise being replaced by pudrir, which in its turn adopts the for its Past Participle. The derivative repudrirse, to long, to wish ardently, is regular. 15. Querer, to be willing, to wish, to love. (15.) Pres. Indic. Quiero, quieres, quiere, queremos, queréis, quieren. Defin. » Quise, quisiste, quiso, quisimos, quisisteis, quisieron. Future » Querré, querrás, querrá, etc. Imperf. Future Condit. Gerund. Defin. Future -» Condit. » Pres. Subj. Imperf. » Future » Condit. » Imperative. Past part. Defin. Pres. Subj. Imperf. » Future » Condit. » Gerund. Digitized by VjOOQIC The Entirely Irregular Verbs continued. 179 Condit. Indie. Querriuy querrías, etc. Pres. Snbj. Quiera, quieras, quiera, etc. Quisiese, etc. Quisiere, etc. Quisiera, etc. \ Quiere (tú)! ¡quiera V.! ¡quered! Queriendo. Past part. Querido. 16. Saber^ to know, to be able. (5.) Pres. Indie. Sé, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabéis, saben. Supe, supiste, supo, supimos, supisteis, su- piaron. Sabré, sabrás, sabrá, sabremos, sabréis, sabrán. Sobria, sabrías, etc. Sepa, sepas, etc. Supiese, etc. Supiere, etc. Supiera, etc. ¡Sabe (tú)! \sepa V.! ¡sabed! Sabiendo. Past part. Sabido. 17. Salir, to go out; to arise. (18.) Pres. Indie. Salgo, sales, sale, salimos, salis, salen. Salí, saliste, salió, salimos, salisteis, salieron. Saldré, saldrás, etc. Saldría, saldrías, etc. Salga, salgas, etc. Saliese, etc. Saliere, etc. Saliera, etc. i Sal (tú)! i salga V.! ¡salid! 18. Valer, to be worth (17), is conjugated like salir, as are also all the eompounds of salir and valer, as: sobresalir, to surpass, to be prominent; equivaler, to be univalent. The Imperative of valer, however, is more rarely val than, vale. The compounds of salir and valer form a regular Imperative mood. Thus: Sobresale tú ; preválete ! (avail thyself!) 19. Traer, to bring, to feteh. (7.) Pres. Indie. Traigo, traes, trae, traemos, traéis, traen. Traia, traias, traía, traíamos, traíais, traían. Traje, trajiste, trajo, trajimos, trajisteis, trajeron. Traeré, etc. Traería, etc. Traiga, traigas, etc. 12* Digitized by VaOOQlC Imperf. Futura > Condit. » Imperative. Gerund. Defin. Future » Condit. » Pres. Snbj. Imperf. » Future » Condit. » Imperative. Gerund. Deftn. Future » Condit. f> Pres. Subj. Imperf. » Future » Condit. » Imperative. Imperf. Defin. » Puture » Condit. » ires. Subj. 180 Lesson 40. Imperf. Subj. Trajese, etc. Future > Trajere, etc. Condit. » Trajera, etc. Imperative. I Trae (tú)! \traiga V.! ¡traed! Gerund. Trayendo. Past part. Traído. N.B.—The same retraer, to retract. 20. Venir, to come. (18.) Pres. Indie. Vengo, vienes, viene, venimos, venís, vienen. Defin. » Vine, viniste, vino, vinimos*, vinisteis, vinieron. Future » Vendré, vendrás, vendrá, etc. Condit. » Vendría, etc. Pres. Subj. Venga, vengas, etc. Imperf. » Finiese, vinieses, etc. Future » Finiere, etc. Condit. » Viniera, etc. Imperative. \Ven (tú)! ¡vengra V.! ¡venid! Gerund. Viniendo. Past part. Venido. Likewise all the compounds of venir, os: ' convenir, to agree, to be convenient; revenir, to come back, etc. The Im- perative mood of these verbs occurs but seldom. 21. Ver, to see. (J21.) Pres. Indie. Veo, ves, ve, vemos, vóis, ven. Imperf. » Veía**, veías, veía, veíamos, veíais, veian. Detín. » Vi, viste, vio, vimos, visteis, vieron. Future » Veré, verás, etc. Condit. » Vería, verías, etc. Pres. Subj. Vea, veas, etc. Imperf. » Viese, vieses, etc. Future » Viere, etc. Condit. » Viera, etc. Imperative. ¡Ve (tú)! ¡vea V.! ¡ved! Gerund. Viendo. Past part. Visto. Likewise the compounds, as prever, to foresee; rever, to see again, etc.; whereas proveer, to provide, is regular. Words. The straw, la paja. the camp, el campo. ., r J. Í la hacienda, the fortune, ( ^^ ^¿^^^ the cage, la jaula. the favour, el favor. the asS; I, donkey, < el asno, el hurro. the flower-pot, el florero. the window, la ventana, the chair, la silla. the coat, el abrigo. f Old and rare forme: veniste, venimos, venisteis. ** Old form: via, etc. Digitized by VjOOQIC The Entirely Irregular Verbs continued. 181 infamous, infame, to distribute, distribuir, sick, ill, enfermo. to order, to command, manejar. slowly, lentamente, despacio, to afflict, afligir, quickly, ligero, de prisa, to quarrel, to scold, reñir, willingly, with pleasure, con regañar, muclio gusto, to comply with (a wish), Wenar. too, too much, demasiado, to accept, aceptar. Tradnccióu. 68. 1. Do the children sleep? They do not yet sleep, but I thought (that) they slept. Do you think that I sleep? Do not sleep the whole day ! The dog slept on the straw before the house. How am I to (quiere V. que) sleep if you make (fr. hacer) so much noise ? The soldiers slept (Imperf.), when the general came into the camp. I die of hunger if you do not give me something to eat. Napoleon died (Def.) on (en) the island of St. Helena the 5th of May, 1821. Leónidas and his gallant companions died (Def,) at Thermopylae. Die, infamous (man)! — He is dying. — He is dead. At his ^eath the father distributed his fortune among (entre) his sons. What are you doing (Pres. Ind,) here? I am making a cage for the bird of my little sister. I did (Def,) all (that) I could (Imperf,) do for a friend. Wilt thou do what I have ordered thee? No, I will not do it, because I cannot do it. I should [like to] do it, if you would also do me a favour. Always do (thou) thy duty, and thou wilt be contented and bappy. 2. My friend did (Def.) what his father wished. Where are you going, my friend ? — I am going, to see my brother, who is ill. It is (already) time ; let us go away (1st pers. plur. Im- perative from irse)\ You go too slowly; go more quickly. Sancho Panza rode (Imperf, of ir) on his donkey like a Pa- triarch. I went (Def) to tell him that I could not come. Do go home! There is nothing more to (que) (be done) do! I cannot tell you how much (cuanto) the behaviour of this Bttan afflicted me. We cannot do all (that) we like. I could (Def.) not come. Could not the merchant give you back the money which you had lent him? I put (Pres.) these books on the table; put yours on it, too! I put (Def) the flower- pots in {tr. en) the window. Where do you want me to put (say mil you that I put) my hat? Put it on the chair! If you put (Imperf.) it on the table, (papa) father would scold (you). Gk>d did not wish (Def.) that the desire of the poor man should be accomplished (reflective: that the d. etc. accom- plished itself, tr. cumplirse). I wish you not to go out to-day. if he wished us to go out, he would tell (us so) it us. Digitized by VaOOQlC 182 Lesson 40. 3. The enemy will not accept our conditions. I know that yon have done what you could (do). Do yon know that the countess arrived yesterday? I did not know it, but the footman told me so (me lo). If I knew that you would go out to-night, I should not come. How much is this coat worth ? It may be worth (valdrá) about 20 dollars. Bring (in) the flowers which I (have) bought this morning! I shall bring them directly. Do you come at last, my friend? As you see, I come; but I should not have come if the tailor (el sastre) had not brought my coat. He did not come (Def.)^ because you had not invited him. Do come! I shall intro- duce you to my cousin (f.) Yesterday I saw a Turk or a Persian on the promenade. Did you see what I had written ? I could not see it, because I was too busy (ocupado). 1 shall see what I shall be able to do for you. Conversacion. ¿Duerme V.? No duermo. ¿Qué tiene V. que decirme? ¿Por qué está V. triste? Porque mi mejor amigo ha muerto. ¿Á que edad (at what age) Murió á los treinta y seis murió su tía de V.? afios. ¿Qué hace V. en mi cuarto? No hago nada. ¿Cómo haría cosa alguna en un cuarto que no es mío? ¿Por qué no hace V. lo que No lo hago, porque no es le he dicho? justo. ¿Qué haremos mañana? Haced lo que queráis. ¿ Hizo frío (cold) ayer en su Sí, hizo mucho frío, pero hoy cuarto de V.? hace calor (it is warm). ¿Por qué no se levanta V. No puedo levantarme, porque (do you rise)^ estoy enfermo. ¿Podrá V. comenzar sus lee- Me parece que todavía no ciones mañana? puedo comenzarlas, porque no tengo tiempo. ¿Quién puso aquí el florero? El criado lo puso en la mesa. ¿Le gusta (pleases) á Y. la Me gusta muchísimo. comida (meal)^ ¿Quieres mucho á tu her- Sí, la quiero mucho, porque mana? es muy afable (amiMe). Beading Exercise. Diversidad de las Provincias de España. (Continuación.) Las Andaluces, nacidos y criados en un pais abundante, delicioso y ardiente, tienen fama de ser algo arrogantes; p©ro si este defecto es verdadero, debe atribuirse á su clima, siendo Digitized by vaOOQlC Present Participle. 188 tan notorio el influjo de lo físico sobre lo moral Las ven- tajas con que natnraleza dotó aquellas Provincias hacen que miren con disprecio la pobreza de Galicia, la aspereza de Vizcaya j la sencillez de Castilla; pero como quiera que toda esto sea, entre ellos ha habido hombres insignes que han dado mucho honor á toda España, y en tiempos antiguos los Tra- janos, Sénecas y otros semejantes, que pueden envanecer al país en que nacieron. La viveza, astucia y atractivo de las andaluzas las hace incomparables. Te aseguro, que una de ellas serla bastante para llenar de confusión el Imperio de Marruecos, de modo que todos nos matásemos unos á otros. Los Murcianos participan del carácter de los Andaluces y Valencianos. Estos últimos están tenidos por hombres de sobrada ligereza, atribuyéndose este defecto al clima y suelo; pretendiendo algunos que hasta en los alimentos mismos falta aquel jugo que se halla en los de otros países. Mi imparcia- lidad no me permite someterme á esta preocupación por ge- neral que sea; antes debo observar que los valencianos de este siglo son ios españoles que más progresos han hecho en las ciencias positivas y lenguas muertas. Forty-first Lesson. — Lección cua- renta y una. Present Participle. — Del participio de presente. Verbs in -ar form their Present Participle by chang- ing ar into ante] those in -er^ -ir change these endings into 'iente. amar, amante, loving. pretender, pretendiente, pretender. vivir. viviente. (living) alive (a) The following forms are in -ente, not -iente: , . expelente, ejecting. From verbs m -er: impelente, impelling. El cedente, the assigner. repelente, repelling. antecedente, previous, ante- ponente, reporter (of a com- cedent. mittee). excedente, exceeding. componente, con^)onent. precedente, preceding, exum^le. el exponente, the applicant. procedente, proceeding from, el imponente, the depositor. coming from. el proponente, the proposer. sohreexcedente, surpassing. ahsolvente, absolving. Digitized by VaOOQlC 184 Lesson 41. disolvente, dissolving. envolvente, involving. abstergente, detergent. convergente, converging. equivcUente, equivalent. incandescente, incandescent. transcendente, transcendent. Prom verbs in -in Coincidente, concurrent. reincidente, relapsed, old offen- der. concurrente, concurrent, spec- tator, one of the audience. ocurrente, witty. conducente, leading. preferente, preferent. referente, referring. adherente, adherent, follower. fluente, flowing, fluent. afluente, affluent. confluente, confluent. diluente, diluent. dimiténte, resigning. remitente, the sender. presidente, president, chairman. residente, resident. asistente, one of the audience, an orderly. consistente, consisting, con- sistent. existente, existing. persistente, persistent. resistente, resistant. subsistente, subsistent. astringente, astringent. restringente, restraining. regente, regent. urgente, urgent, immediate. suplente, substitute. (b) The following are altogether irregular: Decir, el dicente. witness. maldecir. maldiciente. cursing, the curser. convencer. convincente. convincing. abstenerse. abstinente. abstaining. contener, continente. the continent. reir, riente, laughing. sonreír, sonriente, smiling. seguir. siguiente. following, next. padecer. paciente. patient. servir, sirviente. servant. delinquir. delincuente, culprit. dormir. durmiente. sleeper. morir, muriente, dying. poder, pudiente, well-to-do. decaer, decadente, decaying. entender. inteligente, intelligent. obedecer. obediente, obedient. permanecer, permanente. permanent. (c) A few have two distinct Participles with two significations: Acceder, to accede accedente, the one accidente, accident, who accedes fit. ascender, to ascend ascendente, up ascendiente, ances- (train, etc.) tor. Digitized by Google Present Participle. 185 descender, to des- cend pertenecer, to be- long poder, can, to be able poner, to pat, set descendente, down (train, etc.) perteneciente, be- longing to potente, powerful descendiente, des- cendant. pertinente, pertin- ent. pudiente, well-to- do. jjonen^, reporter (of poniente, west, set- conseguir, to obtain ting (sun). consecuente, conse- quent, consistent. a committee) consiguiente, conse- quent, natural (d) The following have no verb Contraproducente, producing insolvente, insolvent. contrary results. diligente, diligent. incesante, continual. solverUe, solvent. transeúnte, a passer-by. insignificante, insignificant. intransigente, unyielding. vigente, existing. Remark. Present Participles as such— i.e., with an active signifi- cation, and preserving the ruling power of the verb, exist no longer in the Spanish language; thus — Present Participles in Spanish are used: (a) as Adjectives— -i.e. : Una comida abundante, a plentiful dinner. Una circunstancia agravante. An aggravating circumstance. Un clima ardiente, a hot climate. (b) as Nouns— i.e.: Los creyentes, the believers. los protestantes, the protestants. un asistente, an orderly. un contribuyente, a taxpayer. los gobernantes, the rulers. (c) or otherwise in certain phrases — i.e. : En dinero contante, ready money. Corriente, all right. Le conozco bastante. I know him very well, or well enough. Tengo bastante, I have plenty. Eso es suficiente, that will do. ^0 obstante, notwithstanding. Tocante 4 eso . . ., as to that . . . Mediante una cantidad. For the consideration of a sum. Dios mediante, if it please Grod. el declarante, witness. el delincuente, the culprit, oflfender. un reincidente, an old offender. el demanante, the plaintiff. Digitized by VjOOQIC 186 Lesson 41. El 5 deH corriente, on the 5th instant. Par la presente, by this letter. Par consiguiente, therefore. Remark. As most Spanish verbs have no Present Participle, it is replaced by an equivalent word or phrase— i.e.: (a) by a Past Participle with an active signification (see further Past Participle): Atrevido, daring. considerado, considerate. bienvenido, welcome. divertido, amusing. caído, fallen. los fallecidos, the deaths. KB.- Nacer, to be born naciente, rising nacido, born. entender, to under- inteligente, intelli- entendido, expe- stand gent rienced. (b) by a Verbal Adjective: Charlatán, chatter-box. ladrador, barking. llorón, weeper. merecedor, deserving. saltaHn, jumper. mordedor, biting. aflictivo, afflicting. conservador, conservative. (c) by a Verbal Noun: Un comprador, a buyer. un lector, a reader. un fumador, a smoker. el contraventor, the defaulter. el testador, the testator. el sucesor, the successor. el examinador, the examiner, un copista, a copyist. un procurador, a solicitor. los ftígitivos, the fugitives. Note how the English Present Participle is rendered in Spanish: By a relative clause, to specify a noun or pronoun: It is a child laughing, es un niño que ríe. That man carrying the stick, ese que lleva el bastón. Those passing know him, esos que pasan le conocen. By the Gerund, in progressive actions: He was crying, estaba llorando. He came running, vino corriendo. KB.— To be going, to be coming, to be leaving, iff venir, salir: We are going to the theatre, vamos aH teatro. He is coming as well, él viene también. We are leaving to-morrow, mañana nos vamos. Digitized by vaOOQlC Past Participle. 187 By the Infinitive depending on verbs of "seeing," **hearing." We saw them starting, les vimos marchar. They heard us calling them, nos oyeron llamarles. Past Participle. iíetnar A;.— Spanish Past Participles, either regular or ir- regular, are treated like adjectives in — o as to inflection. 1. Regular Past Participle. A^erbs in -ar form their regular Past Participle by changing -ar into -ado'j those in -er, ir change those endings into -ido, amar, amado, loved. beber, bebido, drunk. vivir, vivido, lived. 2. Irregular Past Participles, They assume va- rious endings more or less closely connected with their Latin origin, but ending always in -o. (a) Yerbs having ai Abrir, to open; cubrir, to cover; decir, to say; tscr^r, to write; hazier, to do, make; imprimir, to print; morir, to die; poner, to put; romper, to break; ver, to see; volver, to turn, return; irregular Past Participle: ahierto, opened, open. cubierto, covered. dicho, said. etcrOo, written. hecho, done, made. impreso, printed. n^uerto, dead. pueeio, put. roto, broken. visto, seen. vuelto, turned, returned. Their compounds are formed in the same way, with the following exceptions: Liquefacer, liquefacto, liquefied. rarefacer, rarefacto, rarefied. tumefacer, tumefacto, swollen. putrefacto, putrified. N,B, —Yvom the obsolete solver, to solve, Past Part. suelto, loose: absolver, abeuelto, absolved. disolver, disuelto, dissolved. resolver, * resuelto, resolved. Digitized by VjOOQIC 188 Lesson 4L (b) Yerbs haying an irregrnlar Past Partíciple besides the regalar one. Concerning these verbs having a so-called double Participle, the pupil must bear in mind that the regu- lar forms in ado and ido are proper Participles — i.e., they form (with haher) the compound tenses of the verb, as: He omitido, I have omitted, whereas the contracted irregular forms are Adjectives^ which generally may only be used with ser and estar ^ as: Una cosa está completa, a thing is complete. Alphabetical list of the verbs with double participles.* Participle. Verbal Adjective. Absorber, to absorb Absorbido. Absorto (amazed). abstraer, to abstract abstraído. abstracto. aceptar, to accept aceptado. acepto. aclarar, to make clear .... aclarado. claro, aficionarse^ to be fond of . . . aficionado. afecto, afijar^ to fix, to nail . . . . afijado O.* afijo, aguzar, to sharpen, to grind . aguzado, agudo, ahitarse, to overload one's sto- ahitado. cáiito. mach anexar, to annex anexado, anexo. angostar, to narrow angostado. angosto. asegurar, to assure, to insure . asegurado. seguro, astrinjir O., to astringe .... astrinjido O. astricto, atender, to observe, to expect . atendido. atento. Bendecir, to bless Bendecido. Bendito, bienquerer, to like, to love • . bienquerido. bienquisto. Cansarse, to grow tired .... Cansado. Canso O. ceñir, to gird, to surround . . ceñido. cinto O, combarse, to bend, to bow . . . combado. combo, campaginar, to manage to do . compaginado. compacto, completar, to complete .... completado, completo, comprimir, to compress .... comprimido. compreso. concluir, to conclude concluido. concluso. concretar, to join, to unite . . cotu:retado, concreto. confesar, to confess confesado. confeso. confundir, to confound .... confundido. confuso. consumirse, to consume .... consumido. consunto O, contentarse J to be contented with contentado. contento, contraer, to contract, to conclude contraido. contracto, contundir, to bruise . • . . . contundido. contuso, convelerse, to contract (of nerves) convelido. convulse, convencer, to convince .... convencido. convicto. • O. means óbsolett Digitized by VjOOQIC Alphabetical list of the verbs with double participles. 189 Participle. Verbal Adjective. convertir, to convert, to change convertido. converso, convulsarsey to convulse . . . convuUado. convulso. corregir^ to correct corregido. correcto. corromper, to corrupt corrompido. corrupto. corvar, to crooken, to bend . . corvado. corvo, crespar O., to curl, to crisp . . crespado 0. crespo. cultivar, to cultivate cultivado. culto. Densar, to condense Densado. I>enso. descalzar, to take off the shoes descalzado. descalzo, descontentar, to disappoint . . descontentado. descontento. desertar, to desert desei'tado. desierto. desnudar, to denude desnudado. desnudo. despertar, to awake despertado. despierto. desproveer, to deprive .... desproveído. desprovisto, desquitarse, to make up for one's loss (at play), to repair . . . desquitado. desquito O. difundir, to pour out, to shed . difundido. difuso. dirigir, to direct dirigido. directo. dispersar, to disperse .... dispersado. disperso, distinguir, to distinguish . . . distinguido. distinto. divergir, to differ divergido. diverso. Bfundir, to pour out Efundido. JEfuso. elegir, to elect elegido. electo. etÁestar, to set up enhestado. enhiesto. tif^ugar, to dry enjugado. enjuto. entecar, to be feeble entecado. enteco. erijir, to erect . erijido. erecto. espesar, to thicken espesado. espeso. estrechar, to narrow estrechado. estrecho. estreñir, to strain estreñido. estricto. exceptuar, to except exceptuado. excepto. excluir, to exclude excluido. excluso. exentar O., to free exentado. exento. eximir, to exempt eximido. exento. expedir, to send expedido. expedito. ^pder, to expel expelido. expulso. experimentar, to try experimentado. experto. expresar, to express expresado. expreso. extender, to extend extendido. extenso. extinguir, to extinguish .... extinguido. extinto. extraer, to draw out extraido. extracto. t'alsear, to falsify Falseado. Falso. falsificar, to falsify falsificado. falso. faltar, to want faltado. falto. favorecer, to favour favorecido. favorito. ñjar, to fix fijado. fijo. freir, to fry freído. frito. Sartar, to satiate Hartado. Harto. fnduir, to include Incluido. Incluso. incurrir, to incur . incurrido. incurso. wforfar, to obstruct . . ,. . . infartado. infarto. Digitized by VaOOQlC 190 Lesson 41. Participle. infectar^ to infect infectado, infestar, to infest infestado. inficwnar, to infect inficionado. inflijir, to inflict inflijido O. infundir, to pour in infundido, ingerir, to meddle with .... ingerido, injertar, to graft injertado. insertar, to insert ...... insertado, intrusarse, to intrude intrusado, invertir, to invert invertido. juntar, to join juntado. Leudar, to rise, to swell (of dough) Leudado, limpiar, to clean limpiado. llenar, to fill ... • llenado. Maldecir, to curse Maldecido, malquistar, to disunite; to be- come odious malquistado, mancar, to be wanting .... mancado. manifestar, to manifest .... manifestado, manumitir, to manumit, to set free manumitido. marchitar, to wither marchitado. matar, to kill matado. mondar, to shear mondado. mutilar, to mutilate mutilctdo. Nacer, to be born Nacido. Ocultar, to hide Ocultado. omitir, to omit omitido. oprimir, to oppress oprimido, Pagar, to pay JPagado. pasar, to pass pasado. perfeccionar, to perfect .... perfeccionado pervertir, to pervert pervertido. prender, to take, to seize . . . prendido. presumir, to presume presumido. producir, to produce producido, profesar, to profess profesado. propender, to be inclined . . . propendido. proveer, to fill (a vacancy) . . . proveido. Quitar, to take; to impeach . . Quitado, Raer, and rasar, to raze . . . Raido and rasado. ranciarse, to become rancid . . ranciado. rarefacerse, to become rarefied . raref acido. recluir, to seclude recluido. recocer, to boil too much, to boil once more recocido. reflejar, to reverberate .... reflejado. refringir, to refract (of light) . refringido. remitir, to remit . remitido. Verbal Adjective. infecto, infesto, infecto, inflicto O. infuso, ingerto, injerto, inserto, intruso, inverso, junto. Leudo, limpio, lleno. Maldito. malquisto. manco. manifiesto. manumiso. marchitOn muerto. mondo. mútÜo, Nato. Oculto. otniso. opreso. Pago (fami- paso. [liar). perfecto. perverso. preso. presunto. producto. profeso. propenso. provisto. Quito. Raso. rancio. rarefacto. recluso. recocho, reflejo, refracto, remiso. Digitized by VaOOQlC Alphabetical list of the verbs with double participles. 191 Participle. Verbal Adjective. repeier, to push back repelido, repulso O. r^eiar, to fill repletado, repleto, restringir^ to restrain restringido. restricto, romper^ to break rompido (poet.), roto. Salvar, to save Salvado, Salvo, secar, todry secado. seco. s^ultar, to bury sepultado. sepulto, situar, to situate, to place . . . situado. sito, soltar^ to let loose, to let go . soltado, suelto, subtender, to submit (to one's inspection) subtendido. subtenso. sujetar, to subdue sujetado, sujeto, surgir, to come forth, to rise . surgido, surto. mspender, to suspend suspendido. suspenso. sustituir, to substitute .... sustituido, sustituto. Tender, to extend Tendido. Tenso. teñir, to dye tefiido, tinto. torcer, to wring, to wrest, to turn torcido. tuerto. Saciar, to empty, to evacuate . Vaciado, Vacio. Juntar, to put oxen into harness Tuntado. Yunto, Zafarse, to avoid doing some- thing Zafado. Zafo. N.jB.—Oí these verbal adjectives, the following admit of tbe auxiliary haber: Frito, preso, injerto. provisto, opreso, roto. Besides their passive signification, some Past Par- ticiples have an active one, as: -agradecido, thanked, also grateful person. arreglado, arranged, » methodical man. confiado, confided, » a confident person. cumplido, fulfilled, » a polished or civil man. desocupado, unoccupied, » an idler. desordenado, disarranged, » a disorderly person. disimulado, disguised, » a sly person. entendido, understood, » a clever man. ^nraclo, honoured, » an honest man. leido, read, » a well-read man. pesado, weighed, » a bore. porfiado, insisted, » an obstinate man. reconocido, recognised, * a grateful person. sentido, felt, » a very sensitive person. sufrido, suffered, » a hardy or forbearing man. N.B.—For the uses of the Participle, see Ba/rt II. Digitized by vaOOQlC 192 Lesson 41. Traducción. 64. He is a very gratefal person. I have arranged my books. You are a methodical man. I am tired; she is a very tire- some woman. He has fulfilled his duty. Spaniards are very civil. I have not understood anything. He is a very clever pei*son. To be honoured, one must be honest. I have read his book; he is a well-read person. Do not be a bore. I have insisted, but he is very obstinate. She is a very sensi- tive woman, because she has suffered a great deal, bat she is very forbearing. Alphabetical List of the Defective Verbs. AboUr, to abolish, is only used in those forms in which the i of the Infinitive ending is retained.* Acostumbrary to use to, to be in the habit of; used in all forms except the Compound Perfect and the Imperative. Antojarse^ to covet, to long for, has only the 3rd persons of the sing, and plur., the Gerund, and the Past Part. Atañer, to appertain, is only used in the 3rd persons sin- gular and plural and the Past Participle.** Colorir, to colour, is only used in the Infinitive, the other forms being supplemented by colorar or colorear*** Incoar, to begin, and * The following verbs of the 3rd Conj. offer the same ano- maly: aguerrir, to train for war, arrecirse and aterirse, to grow stiff (by cold); balbucir, to stutter; empedernir, to petrify; entumir, to benumb; manir, to render mellow (of meat), to wear oat (clothes, etc.), and a few others of less importance. — Formerly blandir, to brandish, showed the same anomaly ; but at present the forms blande and blanden are sometimes met with. Some of the above verbs have a second regular form to supplement the de- fective ones — i.e.: aterecerse, balbucear, empedernecerse, entumecerse. ** Likewise usucapir, to acquire a right of property by lapse of time, and garantir, to guarantee, which is replaced by garantizar. *** The same is the case with the following verbs: acaecer, \ . haDoen provenir, to derive (as a conse- acontecer, j ^*^ ' quence). * consistir, to be the reason. ocurrir, \ concernir, to concern. pasar, > to happen. cumplir, to suit, to be due. suceder, J incumbir, to concern. Concernir, to concern, is, conformably to the Academy, only used in the 3rd persons: concierne, conciernen; concernía, concer- nían, and the Gerund, concerniendo. However, the forms concernió and concernieron; concierna, conciernan; concerniese; concerniera, concernieran; concerniere and concernieren are also met with. Digitized by VjOOQIC Alphabetical List of the Defective Verbs. 1^3 Loar J to praise, are scarcely used in the l$t sing, Pres. Indie. Obstar, to be an obstacle, nsed only in the 3rd persons sing, and pi. of the Indie, and the Subj. No obstante, never- theless. Facer, to pasture, has no Ist pers. sing, of the Pres. Indie. and Fut SuHfj. Pesar, when meaning to repent and to regret, has only the 3rd pers, sing. The verb is complete when meaning to weigh and to consider. Placer, to please, has of the Pres. and Imperf, Ind, only the 3rd persons (place, placen, placía, etc.). The irregular forma plugo (Def,), plegué, and plega (also plazca) of the Pres, Subj,, pluguiere (Fut, Subj.), pluguiese (Imperf, Subj,), and pluguiera (Cond, Subj,) are met with, as well as the regular forms of the Fuii, and Cond, (placeré and placerla). Of the compounds, aplacer, to please, is obsolete, complacer and deplacer are in use. fiocr, to shave, is seldom used in the first person sing, of the Pres, Ind., or in any of the forms of the Pres, Subj, Beponer, to answer, has only the Def. repuse, etc. When meaning to set back, etc., it is regular. Boer, to nibble, offers the same anomalies as Baer, The Pres, is either roa, etc., or roya, but the Comp, corroer forms only corroa. Salve, God bless you, is a form used only in prayer.* Soler, to use, to be in the habit, has only the Pres, and Im- perf. Indie,: suelo, sueles, etc., solemos, etc., suelen; Im- perf. solía, etc., and Past Part, solido. The Def, soli is rare. Tañer, to playón a stringed instrument, is almost obsolete. Tacer, to lie, to rest, has only yace (Pres.) and yada (Im- perf), the former mostly in the expression aquí yace, here lies (on epitaphs).** Eare forms of this verb are the Gerund, yaciendo, the Pres, yazgo (yago is quite obsolete), yaces, etc., Imperf, yada, Fut. yaceré, and a few others. Beading Exercise. Diversidad de las Provincias de España (Conclusión). Los Catalanes son los pueblos más industriosos de Es- paña. Manufacturas, pescas, navegación, comercio, asientos, son apenas conocidos en otras provincias de la península, res- pecto de los Catalanes. No sólo son útiles en la paz, sino * Like valCf keep in good health, which is only used in familiar correspondence. ** In French: ci-git. Spanish Conv.-Grammar. IS Digitized by VaOOQlC 194 Lesson 41. del mayor servicio en la guerra. Fundición de cañones^ fábricas de armas, vestaario j monturas para ejércitos, con- ducción de artillería, municiones, víveres, formación de tropas ligeras de excelente calidad, todo esto sale de Cataluña. Los campos se cultivan, la población se aumenta, los caudales crecen, y en suma parece estar aquella nación mil leguas de la gallega, andaluza, y castellana. Pero sus genios son poco tratables, únicamente dedicados á su propio interés y ganancia^ y asi los llaman algunos los holandeses de España. Los Aragoneses son hombres de valor y espíritu hon- rados, tenaces en su dictamen, amantes de su provincia, y notablemente preocupados á favor de sus paisanos. En otros tiempos cultivaron con éxito las ciencias, y manejaron con mucha gloria las armas contra los franceses en Ñapóles, y contra nuestros abuelos en España. Cadahalso, «Cartas Marruecas». Digitized by VjOOQIC 195 SECOND PAET. Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation. 1. Orthography. The following letters in certain cases are mis- b and v, b and p; c and ;2J; c and g; d and t; g and j; h; m and n; r (rr); x; y. b and v: b is used — 1. In the syllables bla, We, Wi, Wo, blu; bra, Ire, bri, bro, bru; bu, bur, bus; biblo—i.e.: hablar, cable, república, pueblo, blusa, brazo, breve, abrir, libro, bruto, buril, burla, buscar, biblioteca. 2. In the ending bilidad, as derived from adjec- tives in ahle:, amabilidad, afabilidad. S. In the Latin particles ab, ob, stib, which enter into the formation of many Spanish words: absolver, obtener, subvencionar. 4. In the whole conjugation of caber, haber, saber; beber, deber; also in the verbs with final sound bir, with the exception of hervir, servir, vivir: sabe, sabía, hubimos; beben, debemos; recibirán. 18* Digitized by VaOOQlC 196 Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation. 5. In the sounds in 6a, being endings of the Imperfect of the Indicatiye of the 1st Conjugation^ also of the verb -ir: hablaba, jugaban; íbamos, iban, 6. After m: ambos, cambiar. V is used — 1. After any combination €íd, aZe^ cla, le, Jo, ob, sub: alevoso, clave, advenedizo; leve, joven, obvio, subven- cionar, 2. After n: inveterado, invierno, invicto. 3. In the verbs ver, hervir, venir, aervi/r; the Presents of the Indicatiye^ Imperatiye^ and Subjunc- tive of -if, and the Perfect of the Indicative of andar and estar, as well as the forms derived from them: veo; hierve; sirven; vengo; vivimos; voy, vaya, vayamos; anduvimos, anduviera; estuvieron, estuviese. 4. In the labial sounds ava (not belonging to the Imperfect of a verb), ave, avo; eva, eve, evo; iva, ivo (this not being a verb): esclava, avecilla, clavo; mueva, leve, llevo; aflictiva, positivo. 5. In any combination with vice, villa, villar: vicealmirante, villano, ViUarcaya, p is used before t (except in combinations with ob, sub): aptitud, optar; but obtener, subteniente, c and í^: The following are written with z: zend, zendavesta, zeta; zeugma; zigzag, zipizape, zizaña, zirigaña, zis, zas; also all endings in the soft sound of c, as in paz, juez, maíz, voz, luz. c is used in other cases, even in the plurals of words in «;«?, e^s?, iz, oz, u»: paces, jueces, voces, luces. Digitized by VjOOQIC Orthography. 197 d^ and t: d is used in the particle ad entering into the for- mation of some Spanish words; also in endings dad, tud, of Latin stems in taid, tut: admirar; caridad, virtud, t in all other cases. g and J: g is used — 1. In all beginnings geo, as well as in endings, qélico, genaHo, géneo, etc. ; gésimál, etc. ; géinico, gen, gio, gia, gión; ígeno, ígero, derived either from Greek or Latin words: geografía, higiénico, religión, analogía, 2. In all verbs in ger, gir, except tejer, bri^ir, crujir; j is used — L In the verbs tejer, brujir, c'i*ujir, also those in jear. 2. In verbal endings in the sound je, ji of verbs not having either ^r or j in the Infinitive; also in most words not having originally either g ox j: mvjer (from mulier); dije, dijiste (from decir); traje, trajiste (from traer). 3. In the endings je, jeria of nouns: carruaje, relojería, h is used — 1. In words which In Latin had either h or /: haber (habere), harina (/arina), hijo (/"ilius), honor (^onor). 2. In any initial combinations hidr, hiper, hipo, from the Greek: hidrografía, hipertrofia, hipocampo, 3. In ie Initial, from Latin ge, fe; also in ue, either initial or in the middle of a word if forming a syllable by itself: hielo (gelu); hierro (ferrum); huelo, huevo, ahuecar (but muevo). Exceptions are yergo, yerro, yeso. Digitized by VjOOQIC 198 Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation. 4. Before initial sounds abi, abl, ebr, ibr, emci^ emi, onto, orr: habitar, hahlar, hebreo, híbrido, hematosis, hemisferio, homólogo, horror. m and n: m is used before 6, p, n: cambiar, cam^po, am^nistia. n is used before m^ sometimes before ft: inmortal, innato. r and rr are only misleading in the harsh sound of the r: r is used at the beginning of a word; also after I, n, 8: reloj, razón; malrotar, honra, Israel. rr is used in all other cases: carro, perro, prorroga, virrey. X is used in all words haying the same letter in Latin: Felix, examen, lexicología. N.B.—JJ&Q has caused many people to write s instead of aj in a few cases, such as estraordinari-o, estraño (as ordi- narily pronounced) for extraordinario, extraño; but in no case must such licence be permitted whenever confusion is likely to arise, such as in expiar, expiate, whereas espiar means to spy; nor must cs be written instead of cc; axioma, never acsioma. y (not i) is used — 1. As a conjunction and as a letter: la y, y ; él y yo, he and I. 2. In yo (I), ya (already), and at the beginning of words if followed by a vowel (provided it is not pre- ceded by h): yacer, yugo, yeso, but hielo. Digitized by VjOOQIC Accentuation. 199 3. At the end of words, provided the last syllable is not accented: hay y doy y soy, voy, ley, muy, buey, but benjuí, fui, huí. N.B, — Hierba, hiedra, may also be yerba, yedra. General Remark. It may be taken as a general rule, that Spanish words from the Latin preserve the original spelling ; also that the rules given above hold good as to such derived words. But there are, however, exceptions which must be learned by practice, such as: abogado (advocatus, solicitor), maravilla (mira&ilia, wonder). 2. Accentuation. The written accent^ marked— 1. On words of more than one syllable ending in a vowel, with the stress on the same vowel: Papá, café, alelí, dominó, alajú, amará, tendré, partí, cantó. Alá, José, Martí, Jericó, Perú. 2. On words of more than one syllable ending in n, 8, with the stress on the last vowel: Alacrán, almacén, espadín, corazón, betú/n. amarán, según. compás, revés, anís, adiós, patatús, . quizás. Almaaán, Tremecén, Albarradn, Torrejón, Sahagún, verás. Caifas, prevés, Moisés, decís, París, Alós, Jesús. 3. On words of more than one syllable ending in I, r, Zf with the stress on the last syllable but one: Cárcel, Setúbal, alcázar, César, alférez, Fernández, carácter. Alcacer, mártir. Valor, crémor, fémur, 4. On any word of' more than two syllables having the stress on the antepenultimate syllable: dátil, mármol. Digitized by VaOOQlC 200 Orthography, AccentuatioD, Punctuation. Música, tómala, Málaga, héroe. habíale. Féroe, sábado, disdo. Firamo. malísimo, viéramos, quisiéramos, 5. On words ending in ai, -au (whether followed or not by a consonant), if having the stress on the i, ú: Caí, ataúd, país, Esaú. *• raíz, laúd. Bails, 6. On words ending in -í», -mis, -le, -to; na, no (whether followed or not by n, s), if having the stress on the Í, Ú: Poesía, sería, falúa, continúa, decíais, tío, ríe, dúo, continúo, comprendíais, rio, 7. On final diphthongs with the stress on the last vowel, as well as on a, e of triphthongs -uais, -ieis: Veréis, Sebastián, buscapié, dio, parabién, rió, acaricié, adiós, piélago, después, benjuí, averiguó, Navascués, fui, averiguáis, fué, amortigüéis. 8. OjQ the preposition á, and the conjunctions é, ó, ú. BemarJc, — Compound words (verbal forms included) follow the rules applied to their factors: Fuese, cortésmente, fácilmente. 9. Foreign words, in the matter of accentuation, are treated as Spanish words: Déficit, ultimátum, Leicester, Amiens. 10. Finally, the Spanish language makes use of the written accent in order to distinguish certain words, which are written alike, but differ in their signification, the written accent being marked upon the most emphatic one, as: Digitized by VjOOQIC Accentuation. 201 unaccented. Como, as, like. cual, which (relat.). cuando, when, as. cuanto, -a, so much as . . . da, he (she) gives. de, of. di, I gave. donde, whereof, wherefrom (relat.). el, the (article). ha, has. mas, but. mi, my. j}orgt«6, because, as, etc. que, that, which (relat.). Accented. ¿Cómo? how? ¿cuál? which? (interrog.). ctiál — ci*ál, the one — the ¿Cíiándo? when? [other. ¿cuánto? how much? ¡dá! give (there)! dé, pres. subj. of dar, to give. ¡di! tell (thou)! ¿dónde? where? él, he (pron.). M, ago. más, more. mi, me. ¿por qué? why? ¿^wé.^ what? which? (interr.), ¡qué . ./ what (a) . .! ¿quién? which? quién — quién, the one — the other. sé, I know. si, yes; him- (her-, it-) self. sólo (adv.), only. /5W5/ well! go on! tal, so. té, tea. ii^, thou, /vé.' go (thou)! Further, the demonstrative pronouns este, esta^ ese,, esa, aquél, aquella, are accented when used emphatically -e.g.: ¿ Cuál es el principe JDon Fernando ? — Ése, ése, ése, dijo Gutierre de Cárdenas á la princesa Doña IsaheL Which is Prince Ferdinand? — The one there, said Gutierre de Cardenas to Princess Isabella. The stress only is laid, not the written accent marked, upon: 1. Words of more than one syllable ending in a consonant, not fiy 8, with the stress on the last syllable: Querub, vivac, amad, cesar, merced, temed, romper, reloj, quien, who (relat.). se, himself, herself, itself, etc. si, if. solo (adj.), alone. sus, his, her, etc. tal, such a one. te, thee. tu, thy. ve, he (she) sees. Digitized by VaOOQlC :202 Orthography, Accentuation, Punctuation. laurel, azahar, cenitf partid, venir, Guadix^ carcaj, Ormuz, verdegal^, arroz, Godot/. 2. Words of more than one syllable ending in a Towel, with the stress on the last syllable but one: Ala, ama, España, caballete, teme, úñate, casi, entiendo, Amaifi, obscuro, Jacobo, Aramburu, 3. Words of more than one syllable ending in n^ .«, with the stress on the last syllable but one: Volumen, aman, martes, amaras, Lucas, canten, crisis, leyeres, Carlos, amaron, 4. Words of more than one syllable ending in a Yowel or a diphthong (whether followed or not hy n, s)^ -with the stress on the last syllable but one: Fatria, sitio, deseo, canoa, agua, seria, trataseis, fatuo, lidian, amortiguan, 3. The Signs of Punctuation. The most striking difference between the Spanish ^nd other languages is the use of the note of inter- rogation and the note of exclamation. To the prelimi- nary remarks contained in Part I. we now add the following observations: 1. If another part of the sentence precedes the actual question or exclamation, the respective signs are placed immediately before that part of the sentence to ivhich they refer, as: Y bien mirado, ¿valgo yo lo que ella? (Hartzenbusch) And well considered, — am I as worthy as she? Con que, ¿ bajará Y. al patio ? (Id.) Well then, will you come down to the courtyard? 2. If short questions or exclamations succeed each other immediately, the inverted signs are used but once, as: ¡Señor! mi Señor! Don Diego! (de Castro.) Digitized by VjOOQIC The Signs of Punctuation. 203 3. A comma is put— (a) Between the several subjects, verbs, or objects of a compound sentence, with the exception of the last two: El castellanOy el portugués, él francés y el italiano son lenguas románicas, Castilian, Portuguese, French, and Italian are Romance languages. Escribe, dibuja, toca y canta. He writes, draw, plays and sings. (b) Between the principal^ and the accessory sen- tence, if the latter begins with a preposition, or if the subordinate clause is an apposition, as: Bon Fernando salió de Sevilla con un lu^cido ejército, en que se contaban diez mil caballos, (Id.) Don F. went forth from (left) Sevilla with a brilliant army in which there were ten thousand horse. Podréis convencer á aquellos hombres tímidos que, des- lumhrados por una supersticiosa ignorancia, condenan el estudio de la naturaleza. Yon may persuade those timid people who, blinded by a superstitious ignorance, condemn the study of Nature. 4. The colon (:) is used if a sentence of general import is followed by various other clauses developing its meaning, as: Eran en aquella santa edad todas las cosas comunes: á nadie le era necesario para alcanzar su ordinario sustento tomar otro trabajo que alzar la mano, y alcanzarle de las robustas encinas que liberalmente les estaban convidando con su dulce y sazonado fruto. (Cervantes.) The colon is also used instead of a conjunction, by which the following sentence, containing a reason, a consequence, or a contradiction, ought properly to be joined to the preceding phrase, as: Por eso yo me hago á veces el remolón para pagar: claro es, que el que no paga es porque no puede ó no quiere. (Hartzenbusch.) This is the reason why I sometimes delay paying, for it is evident that he who does not pay either cannot or will not pay. Finally, the colon is employed after the initiatory address in a letter, unless the writer prefers writing this Digitized by VaOOQlC 204 Lesson 1. address in a separate line, which however, is only due to a person of higher rank. Ex. : Muy Señor mió: Por fin soy tan dichoso, etc. Dear Sir, — At length I am so happy, etc. First Lesson. The Gender of Snbstantiyes. (See Part I., Lesson 1.) § 1. Feminine substantives beginning with a or ha and having the stress on the first syllable, which for the sake of euphony take the article el in the singular, as: el alma, the soul, have in the plural the article las, as: Las almaSf the souls; las habas, the beans. If the word beginning with a— is not a substantive, the article la should be used, thus: La alta sierra. Note.— The article la is but an abbreviation of the ancient demonstrative pronoun ela, as: De las buenas costumnes nasce ela paz et ela concordia, (Translation of Fuero Juzgo,) In the century of Cervantes, el was used before feminine nouns not accented on the first syllable, as: el alegría, the joy; él arena, the sand; el acémila, the beast of burden; ei alta sierra, the high ridge of mountains. Formerly el also occurred before words beginning with other vowels, as el es- pada, etc. With words beginning with al—, some authors, for euphony's sake, substitute á el for al in the dative, thus d el alma (for al alma); á el alcance (for al alcance), attainability. § 2. Masculine by either their sex or significa- tion are: (a) All nouns denoting male beings, or their names, kindred, degree, rank, or profession, as usually ascribed to male persons, as: el hombre, man; Carlos, Charles; el padre, the father; el rey, the king; el poeta, the poet; el león^ the lion. Except. : la haca (or jaca), the nag, pony. Digitized by VaOOQlC The Gender of Substantives. 205 (b) Names of rivers, lakes, mountains, volcanoes, trees, winds, and cardinal points, as: el Tajo, él Gua- diana, el Ladoga, el Cáucaso, el Vesuvio, él naranjo, él levante, the east wind; él Sud [S.], el Norte [N.]. Except.: la EsgíAeva and la Huerva, two Spanish rivers, which, however, are also sometimes masculine. Again, la tra- montana, the north wind, and la brisa, the north-east wind. (c) The names of countries, towns, and villages not ending in —a, as: JEl Brasil, Brazil; el Perú, el gran Madrid, el Toboso, Whereas: la España meridional; la baja Andalucía, because these names of countries terminate in a. Names of towns not ending in —a may be used with the fe- minine gender if the word ciudad (town)* or villa is understood. (d) Names of seconds, minutes, days, months, and years; also of numbers, musical and orthographic signs, colours and languages: Un segundo, un minuto, el día, el lunes, Monday, el mes, diciembre es frió, December is cold, el año. JEl dos, No. 2, el do, C, el punto, fall stop, el blanco, white, el castellano, Spanish. § 3. Feminine by their signification are: (a) All names of female beings, or their names, kindred, degree, rank, or profession, as usually ascribed to female persons and animals, as: La mujer, la madre, Maria, Mary; la reina, the queen; la hermana, the sister; la leona, the lioness; la yegua, the mare, etc. (b) Names of marshes (lagunas), ranges, chains, fruits (frutas), as: Las lagunas de Buidera, Sierra Nevada, Sierra Morena, la cordillera Pirenaica; la manzana. Except.: El melón, el higo, etc. (c) Names of countries, provinces, towns, and villages ending in — a, as: La Mancha; (la encantadora) Francia, France, etc. * From civitas (Latin) ; cittá (Ital.), cité (French), city (Engl.). Digitized by VaOOQlC 206 Lesson 1. (d) Names of hours and seasons, also names of the letters of the alphabet (because here the word leira^ letter, is understood), as: Las dos, 2 o'clock. la jota, the letter J. la primavera, Spring. la equis, the letter X. Except.: El verano, Summer; el otoño. Autumn; el in- vierno, Winter. Note,— If the sex of animals is not distinguished by dif- ferent words or terminations, macho (male) and hembra (fe- male) are prefixed, as in English. Thus, müano, hawk, has no form for the feminine, which is therefore expressed: un milano hembra, a female hawk. Paloma, pigeon, on the other hand, has no masculine form, and thus a m^le pigeon is called una paloma macho, (e) The names of arts, sciences, and professions almost all terminating in -a or -ción, as: La jurisprudencia, jurisprudence; la lectura, reading, etc. Except those ending in -o, as: el derecho, law; el dibujo, drawing, etc. Gender by Termination. General Bule. — Nouns ending in -a, -d, -j^, and -ion are feminine, all others are masculine: Casa, house. vo0y voice. ciudad, town, acción, action. luz, light. Exceptions to the feminine in -a, -d, z, 1. Those that are masculine either by sex or meaning: AKbacea, executor. sud, south. dia, day. juez, judge. cihad, abbot. 2. (a) Among those in -a: Mapa, map. tranvía, tramway. (b) Those in -ma (from Greek, Arab.): Anagrama, anagram. enigma, riddle. clima, climate. poema, poem. dilema, dilemma. sistema, system. dogma, dogma. telegrama, telegram. drama, drama. (c) Those in -a (accented): sofá, sofa. maná, manna. Digitized by VaOOQlC Gender by Termination. 207- 3. Among those in Césped, turf, ardid, trick. áspid, asp. alud, avalanche. ataúd, coffin. agraz, verjuice. antifaz, mask. disfraz, disguise. ajedrez, chess. fez, fez. d, z: tamiz, varnish. cariz, aspect. lápiz, pencil. maiz, maize. tapiz, tapestry. arroz, rice. tornavoz, sounding-board. alcuzcuz, a kind of Moorish». tragaluz, skylight. [bread.. trasluz, transverse light. Note. Some among those in -a, -z admit also of a masculine- article— i.e.: (a) Having a personal signification: m -a: La alhaja, jewel. la atalaya, watch-tower. ¡a ayuda, help. la harba, beard. la cabeza, head. la calavera, skull. un canalla, a rogue. la corneta, trumpet. la cura, cure. la gallina, hen. la guia, guidance. la máscara, mask. la ordenanza, regulation. el papa, the pope. la guardia, guard (body- guard). la vista, sight. el (la) alhaja, **jewel" (iron.).. el atalaya, warder of a tower.. el ayuda, assistant. el barba, the old man (in the play). el cabeza, chief, the head. un calavera, a harum-scarum, fellow. la canalla, the rabble. el corneta, trumpeter. el cura, curate. un gallina, a chicken- hearted person. el guia, guide (man). el máscara, the masker. el ordenanza, orderly. una papa, a lie. el guardia, the guard (man).. el vista, custom-house officer.. (b) Not having a personal signification: m -a: La cólera, anger. la corneta, kite. la planeta, horoscope. la tema, hobby. el cólera, cholera. el cometa, comet. el planeta, planet. el tema, theme, exercise. Digitized by VaOOQlC 208 Lesson 1. in 'Z\ La dobles, duplicity. el doblez, hem. la haz (de la tierra), sur^ él haz, bundle. face. la pez, pitch. el pez, fish (in the water). Exceptions to the masculine: To those in -e: Ave, bird. base, basis. calle, street. came, meat, flesh. catástrofe, catastrophe. clase, class. costumbre, habit. efigie, effigy. especie, kind, sort. fase, phase. fe, faith, /ieftre, fever. /*rase, phrase. fuente, fountain, dish. gente, people. hambre, hunger. hélice, screw. indole, character. intemperie, weather, exposure. leche, milk. llave, key. muerte, death. nieve, snow. noche, night. nube, cloud. i>esie, pestilence, plague. plebe, populace. sangre, blood. serpiente, serpent. simiente, seed. «werie, fortune, luck. tarde, afternoon. torre, tower. vacante, vacancy. Also nouns in -icie, -aide, -umbre, derived from the Latin and Greek — i.e.: Esferoide, spheroid, superficie, surface, KB.: El breve, apostolic brief. el consonante, rhyme. el corriente (mes), current month (inst.). el corte, cut, edge. el (la) dote, dowry. el frente, front (of a building, army). el parte, telegram, report. el pendiente, earring. el secante, seccative (chem.). el (la) tilde, the dash. pesadumbre, sorrow. la breve, breve (music). la consonante, letter. la corriente, stream. la corte, court. las dotes, good qualities. la frente, forehead. Cal, chalk. cárcel, jail. la parte, part. la pendiente, slope. la secante, secant. la tilde, spot (stain). To those in -I: col, cabbage. credencial, credential. Digitized by VaOOQlC Gender of Compound Nouns. 209 miel, honey. saly salt. piel, leather, skin. señálj sign, mark. hie!, gall. El canal, canal, la canal, gutter. el capital, capital (money). la capital, capital (chief town). d moral, mulberry tree. la moral, moral. d vocal, voter (on a com- la vocal, vowel, mittee). To those in -n: Imagen, image. comezón, itching. sartén, frying-pan. desazón, affliction. sien, temple (of the head). razón, reason. din (crin), mane. El orden, order (regularity, la orden, order (command, archit. order). religious order). el margen, margin. la margen, bank of a river. To those in -r: Flor, flower. segur, axe. labor, labour, needlework. El mar, the sea (element). la mar, the sea (in speaking of states). el mar Bojo, the Red Sea. en alta mar, on the high seas. To those in -s: Bilis, bile. res, head of cattle. crisis, crisis. tos, cough. mies, harvest. And, in general, all nouns of scientific use ending in "is, -sis, derived from the Greek, such as: Hipótesis, hypothesis, tesis, thesis, conclusion. paráfrasis, paraphrase, JY".^.— -Exceptions to those in -i, -j, -o, -u, -x, -y, are: La diócesi, the diocese. la tribu, the tribe. la metrópoli, the metropolis. la onix, the onyx. la troj, the granary. la ley, the law. la mano, the hand. la grey, the flock. la seo, the cathedral. Gender of Compound Nouns. If the last member is an Infinitive or an in* variable part of speech, they are masculine: Spanish Conv. -Grammar. Digitized byííoogk 210 Lesson 1. Un correveidile, a go-between, el hazmerreír, the langhing- un cusotacalles, idler. stock. el besamanos, levee. el quehacer, work, bnúness. el cumpleaños, birthday. un matasiete, a bully. If a noun, or adjective in the singular, they come under the rule of gender by termination: Una hocacaUe, a taming, street corner. el portaestandarte, standard-bearer. una marisabidilla, blae-stocking. Except.: EH tranvía, the tramway. La aguachirle, the last after- » contrapeste, a remedy wine. against the plague. » aguapié, the after-wine. » cortaplumas, penknife. » bajamar, the lowest-ebb. » guardamano, the sword- » pleamar, the highest flood. hilt, guard. » altamar, the high sea. » guardavela, the sail-rope. » estrellamar, the lily of » pasacalle, the street-march the valley. (played on the guitar). » i^o^amano, the bannister. » sacabotas, bootjack. » tapaboca, the muffler. » ¿ro^mono, the after-hand (at cards). » trasluz, the semi-darkness. » I7er(^sinera2c2a, emerald-green. » verdemontaña, mountain-green, chrysocolla \ (both also » verdevejiga, sap-green. j feminine). Gender of Words used as Substantives. 1. If an adjective is used substantively, we must distinguish whether it denotes a person, abstract idea, or a concrete thing. In the first case the article is, of course, employed conformably with the sex of the per- sons, as: él viejo^ the old man; la vieja, the old woman. If an abstract idea is intended, the article lo is used, as stated Lesson 1. Part I. Thus: lo bueno^ the good, lo ajeno, other people's property, etc. If, however, the adjective denotes a concrete thing, we employ the mas- culine article el. Thus el español, Spanish {i.e., the Spanish language); él azul, the azure or sky-blue. 2. All words that are not adjectives, if substantively employed, require the masculine article, as: el porqué^ the Why; el no, the No; ei estudiar, the study(ing). Digitized by VaOOQlC Formation of the Feminine. 211 Formation of the Feminine. § 1. Masculine substantives and adjectives in — o form their feminine in — a, as: El vecino, the neighbour, — la vecina. htAcnOf good, — huena. Except.: el testigo, the witness, el reo, the culprit, el moddo, the model, which only change the article: la testigo, la reo, la modelo. Irregular are: El canónigo, the dean (of a cathedral), — la canonesa. el diácono, the deacon, — la diaconisa. el gallo, the cock, — la gallina. § 2. Substantives and adjectives ending in d, n, and r form the feminine by adding —a, as: Sefior, Sir, Mr., — Señora, lady, Mrs., el huésped, the guest (m,), — la huéspeda, the guest (f,), el bailarín, the dancer, — la bailarina, the (fern,) dancer. Exceptions: Emperador, emperor, — emperatriz, cantador, singer, — cantatriz.''^ abad, abbot, — abadesa, don, Mr., Sir, — doña, elector, elector, -— electriz. § 3. Masculine substantives in —6 form their femi- nine in --esa, those in — a form —isa^ as: El duque, the duke, — la duquesa, el principe, the prince, — la princesa, él poeta, the poet, — la poetisa, el profeta, the prophet, — la profetisa, el sacerdote, the priest, — la sacerdotisa. Exceptions: El monje, the monk, — la monja. el pariente, the relation, — la parienta. el héroe, the hero, — la heroína, el elefante, the elephant, — la elefanta, regordete, corpulent, fat, — regordeta. altóte, very high, huge, — altota. § 4. Invariable are the comparatives in — or, as: Mayor, larger, fern, mayor, peor, worse, » peor. Likewise the adjectives of one termination, like alegre, fdiz, etc. (See Part I., Less. 19.) * Cantante is most commonly used for both genders. Digitized by VaOOQlC 212 Lesson 1. § 5. Irregular are the following: DioSf god, fern, diosa. coronel, colonel, » coronela, rey, king, » reina, jabalí, wild boar, » jabalina, N,B,—k few nouns of pairs have a feminine derived from a separate root, such are: Varón (of persons), hembra, male, female. hombre, mujer, man, woman, wife. padre, madre, father, mother. marido, mujer, husband, wife. fray, sor, brother (friar), sister. fraile, monja, friar, nun. yerno, nuera, son-in-law, daughter-in-law. caballero, señora, gentleman, lady, madam. galán, dama, gallant, lady. lord, milady, Lord, Lady. macho (of creatures), hembra, male, female. caballo, yegua, horse, mare. carnero, oveja, ram, ewe. § 6. The following have a double gender: El compatriota, the countryman, fem, la compatriota. el cómplice, the accomplice, » la cómplice. el indígena, the native, » la indígena, el persa, the Persian, » la persa. Likewise el testigo, the witness, mentioned § 1. § 7. The following are either masculine or feminine: Centinela, sentinel. crisma, holy oil. cisma, schism (in ecclesias- espía, spy. tical matters). guia, guide, leader; and a few words of rarer occurrence, such as: hermafrodita, hermaphrodite; híbrida, hybrid, mongrel; nema, seal (of a letter); neuma, gesture; and anatema, anathema. § 8. Arte (art) is in the singular commonly femi- nine, although for euphony's sake requiring the article él, thus el arte. In the plural it is always feminine: las artes mecánicas, etc. With mar (sea) the masculine gender predominates. In poetry, however, the singular is commonly feminine, as: Mi única patria la mar (Espronceda), especially if the adjective used with mar has only one termination, as: la mar espu- mante, the foaming brine. Digitized by VjOOQIC Formation of the Feminine. 218 Nada, nothing, used substantively, is masculine if no article precedes, nada nuevo, nothing new. Employed with the article, it is feminine, as: una nada, a mere nothing. Pro, behalf, benefit, is feminine in the expression huena pro! much good may it do you! In other significations it is masculine, as: el pro y el contra, pro and con, § 9. Defectives: (a) Some have no feminine, others have no mas- culine: Eremita, hermit. azafata, lady of honour. espadachín, bully. bacante, bacchante. evangelista. Evangelist. matrona, matron. ganapán, drudge. náyade, naiad. gañán, day labourer. nereida, nereid. jesuíta, Jesuit. nodriza, wet-nurse. negociante, business-man. niñera, nurse. nigromante, wizard, necro- sirena, mermaid. mancer. (b) In some others, either the masculine includes the feminine, or the feminine the mascuHne: JEl auditorio, audience. la canalla, rabble. el concurso, concourse. la clientela, customers, clients. el gentío, crowd. la gente, people. d vulgo, common people. la muchedumbre, multitude, el populacho, populace. crowd. la plebe, mob, common people. la multitud, multitude. Tradnceiéu. 1.* 1. The village where we live during the summer has a beautiful situation at the foot of high mountains. The soul of (the) man, says Goethe, resembles {say to the) water. The nag you (have) bought is too dear. The west wind is cooler than the south wind and usually brings rain. The north wind and the north-east wind are very cold. Peru was formerly a colony of Spain. (The) old Madrid has almost disappeared. Eight does not need science in order to be known and prac- tised. This word is not spelt (no se escribe) with a G, but with a J. The male witness as well as the female witness did not know what to say definitely. My uncle is a dean, and the aunt of my friend is a deaconess. Have you spoken to the lodger or the lodger*s wife? The emperor and the ♦ Henceforth the words of the translations are not given in the vocabulary at the end of this Grammar. The sign () show the need of the Spanish article. Digitized by VjOOQIC 214 LesBon 1. empress orderecl (fr. hacer) the singer (m,) [to] come to the castle. The duke and the duchess dined with the prince and the princess. Fernán Caballero is a Spanish poetess. Prophets and prophetesses are rare in our age (time). Is this young nun a relation of yours (tr. a r. your)^ The Cid is one of the greatest heroes of Spain. The maid of Saragossa is cele- brated by the poets as a great heroine. 2. Hero was a priestess of Venus. This female elephant is very strong. The ancient heathens had many gods and goddesses. The King of Spain signs his orders: «I, the king.» This gentleman is my countryman, and this lady is my countrywoman. The Persian woman was the accomplice of the native (m.). The guide was arrested by the sentinel as a spy. Louis XIV., King of France, was a protector of arts and sciences. The stream increased on the 7th inst. She lost an earring on coming down (al bajar) the slope. The pope is dead (ha muerto). That is a lie. The curate is entrusted with (encargado de) the care of (the) souls. The mechanical arts are mostly a matter of practice. The Greeks on their retreat greeted the foaming brine with exultation. Nothing is beautiful enough for the discontented (m.), k dream is a mere nothing. The watch-tower stands at the entrance of the harbour. The (help-)mate of the tower-warder is either a dunce or a thoughtless fellow. The boys played with kites. The comet of the year 1858 was beautiful. At the end of the present month you will receive my report. The order of Charles the Third is a Spinish order. The hilt of this sword is worked with great art. You have here a very fine penknife. The Better is often the enemy of the Good. He knows neither how nor why. The crowd [both w. if" f,] was numerous. There were many people. Beading Exercise. Descubrimiento de América. Adoptada y protegida la empresa por Isabel, pronto iba á saberse si el proyectista era en efecto un visionario, digno de lástima, ó si era el más sabio y el más calculista de los hombres. Seguido de un puñado de atrevidos aventureros, el náutico genovós se lanza en tres frágiles lefios por los desco- nocidos mares de Occidente. «; Pobre temerario!», quedaban diciendo en España y Europa. Y Colón lleno de fe en su Dios y en su ciencia, en sus mapas y en su brújula, no decía más que «i adelante!» España y Europa suponían pero igno- raban sus peligros y trabajos, sus conflictos y penalidades. ¿Qué habrá sido del pobre aventurero? — Transcurridos al- guno meses, volvió el aventurero á España á dar la respuesta. Digitized by vaOOQlC Plural of Substantives. 215 Nada necesitó decir. La respuesta la daban por él los habi- tantes y los objetos que consigo traía de las regiones tras- atlánticas en que nadie habla creído. El testimonio no admitía dudas. El Nuevo Mundo había sido descubierto! El miserable visionario, el desdeñado de los doctos, el rechazado por los monarcas, el peregrino de la tierra, el mendigo del convento de la Bábida, era el más insigne cosmógrafo, el gran almi- rante de los mares de Occidente, el virrey de .Indias, el más envidiable y el más esclarecido de los mortales. Espafia y Europa se quedaron absortas, y para que en este extraordinario acontecimiento todo fuese singular, asombró á los sabios aún más que los ignorantes. [Lafuente, Historia de Espalia.] Conversación. ¿Qaé hizo Isabel? ¿Qaó iba á saberse pronto? ¿Que hace Colón? ¿Que se decía de él, y que decía él? ¿Cuándo se aupo la respuesta? ¿Quién la dio por él? ¿Qué había sido, y qué era entonces Colón? ¿Qué efecto produjo el descubrimiento? Second Lesson. Plural of Snbstantiyes. The principal rules on the formation of the plural have been given, Lesson 2, Part I. (page 11). We repeat them here in a more enlarged form. § 1. The following words take s in the plural 1. Substantives terminating in a single unaccented vowel, y excepted, as: La carta (letter) Plur. las cartas, el padre (father) » los padres, la metrópoli (capital) » las metrópolis, la mano (hand) » las manos, el espíritu (spirit) » los espíritus. But, rey (king), reyes. 2. Words terminating in é accented, as: El pié (foot) Plur. los pies. Except.: 'la é, las ees. Digitized by VjOOQIC 216 Lesson 2. § 2. The following words take es in the plural: 1. Words terminating in a consonant or in y^ as : La flor (flower) Plur. las flores, el ángel (angel) » los ángeles, el huésped (guest) > los huéspedes, ü corazón (heart) > los corazones, ruin (mean) » ruines, el rey (king) » los reyes, la ley (law) » las leyes, i^emarA;.— Substantives in x (if sounded like ks) and z change their flnal consonant into c before es^ as: La vez (time) Plur. las veces, la voz (voice) » las voces, la cruz (cross) » feliz (happy) » el fénix (phenix) » el ónix (onyx) > 2. Word terminating in an accented vowel, e cepted, as: las cruces, felices, ios[f^:^p''' \ fenix. los ónices. ex- El bajá (pasha) el aleli (gillyflower) el rondó (rondeau) el tisú (tissue) Exceptions: El papá la mamá el sofá d maravedi (farthing = V»* part of 1 real) el bisturí (bistoury) d zaquizamí (uppermost loft) Plur. los. bajaes, los alelíes, los rondóes, los tisúes. Plur. papas. » mamas. > sofás. » maravedís (maravedíes or maravedises). » bisturis. » zaquizamís. § 3. The following are invariable: Polysyllables in -es and -is unaccented ou the last syllable, as well as patronymics in -s, -z, and Latin technical words, as: El martes (Tuesday) el éxtasis (ecstasy) la análisis (analysis) G^iérrez Sánchez El déficit el memorándum Plur. los martes. los éxtasis, las análisis, los Gutiérrez, » los Sánchez, Plur. los déficits, » los memorándums. Plur. Digitized by VaOOQlC Plural of Subetantivee. 217 § 4. Irregular Plurals. El lord (lord) Plnr. los lores. eí/ící«»e»(Eoman priest) » [\Z%Zms. la testudo (testudo) » las testiídines. d val (sewer, drain) » los valles, el frac (dress-coat) » los fraques. Properly speaking, the plural of frac is not irre- gular, c being of necessity changed into qti before c, according to a well-known orthographical rule. Observation, — Sometimes the accent is displaced in the plural. El carácter (character) Plur. los caracteres, el régimen (government, object, diet) » los regímenes. § 5. Plural of Compound Substantives. The question whether a compound substantive is changed in the plural or not must be decided by looking at its components. 1. Both factors are changed in the plural, if each, when taken separately, would undergo such an alter- ation, as: La casamata (casemate) Plur. las casasmatas, el gentilhombre (nobleman) » los gentilesliombres. d ricohombre \ (member of the / » los ricoshombrea, la ricahembra ] high aristocracy) \ > las ricashembras, la mediacaña (semi-circular tools) » las m^diascañas. Exceptions: El padrenuestro (the Lord's Prayer) Plur. las padrenuestros, d ferrocarril (railway) » Jos ferrocarriles, la vanagloria (vainglory) » las vanaglorias, la barbacana (barbacan) > las barbacanas, la bocacalle (street entrance) » las bocacalles, el viaducto (viaduct) » los viaductos. 2. Only one factor is changed in the plural if the other, when taken separately, could not undergo such an alteration, as: Cualquiera \ ( x. \ Plur. cualesquiera, quienquiera / ^^ oever; ^ quienesquiera, el hijodalgo* » los hijosdalgo, * = hijo de algo, lit, the son of something — t.e., the son of a person "who is somebody" — viz., who holds some rank in society. Digitized by VjOOQIC 218 Lesson 2. 3. Singular and plural are alike if both factors, when taken separately, could not undergo any alteration in the plural, or (and this case applies to the majority of the Spanish compound substantives) if the second factor is plural already, thus: El and los sacabotas, bootjack. el y> los mondadientes, toothpick. el » los guardapiés (or guardapieses), petticoat. el » los limpiabotas, shoeblack. el > los quitamanchas, cleaner, dyer. el » los besamanos, levee. el » los azotacalles, lounger. el » los catalejos, spy-glass (lit, "look-far'*). § 6. Besides the words enumerated on page 12, the following are likewise used in the plural only: Los bofes, \ expensas, expense. los chofes, \ lungs. los esponsales, betrothal. los livianos, ) los pertrechos, utensils, fumi- gas arras, earnest(-money).* ture. las carnestolendas, carnival. los postres, dessert. los calzones, trousers. las ríspcras, vespers, las pinzas, pincers, nippers. and a few others of less importance. § 7. The following words change their signification in the plural (see also page 12): El alfiler, the pin Plur. los alfileres, the pin-money. la baqueta, the ramrod » las baquetas, the gauntlet. la corte, the court > las Cortes, the Spanish Parlia- ment. la mano, the hand » las manos, the handiwork.**** el zelo, zeal » los zelos, jealousy. § 8. The following substantives denote the male sex in the singular, both the male and female in the plural (see those enumerated on page 12): El amo, \ ., . , Plur. los amos, los señores, xnBstQrsaiá el señor, f Piaster mistress. el conde, » los condes, count and countess. el marqués, the marquis » los marqueses, marquis and marchioness. § 9. If a geographical name is plural, as los Arcos, * French: les arrhes. ** But also "the hands." Digitized by VaOOQlC Plural of Substantives. 219 las Navas, Dos Barrios, the verb remains in the singur lar, since the word denotes but one object, as: Los Arcos es una ciudad de España, Los Arcos is a town in Spain. Traducción. 2. 1. On the sofas in the salon the different papas and mamas were seated, and watched the amusements of the young folks. The upper parts of the lofts of these houses are usu- ally entirely empty. How many maravedís had a real? Thirty-four maravedís. The flamtns of the ancient Romans were priests. Of how many members does the English House of (the) Lords consist? It is very difficult to know exactly the different characters of men. The principles of government have a great influence on the prosperity or the decay of (the) empires. Three consecutive Mondays we could not get our box at (tr. in) the theatre. You do best (had better not care) if you do not care for the boastings of that man. The casemates of this fortress are extremely strong. The noblemen at the court of this unhappy prince all shared the fate of their master. The members of the high nobility of Spain have all the title (of) Grandee. By foreigners the noblemen of inferior rank in Spain are commonly called "Hidalgos," contrary to the rules of the language. The outskirts of Paris are finer than those of Madrid. 2. Have you given the earnest money to the merchant? (The) Carnival was very long this year. To what sum does the expense of your journey amount? In a fortnight we shall celebrate the betrothal of my cousin (f,). These trousers are very well made (bien hechos); which tailor has made them? Why (did) has not the footman put the dessert on the table? The origin of his family is lost in the obscurity (darkness) of history. (The) vespers were being chanted when we returned from our walk. The Estates of the country will not assemble this year, because the queen and her court are abroad. My master and mistress will have no reason to complain of my behaviour. The king and queen refused to receive the count and countess. Do your parents know that you are here? Can you tell pae in which province "Las Navas" is situated? Give me the toothpicks! I bought two bootjacks yesterday. This petticoat is finer than the petticoats which are sold in that shop. Readingr Exercise. Descripción dd pais mejicano. Esta tierra tiene cincuenta leguas de costa de la una parte y de la otra de este pueblo, y por la costa de la mar Digitized by VjOOQIC 220 Lesson 8. es toda llana, de muchos arenales que en algunas partes duran dos leguas y más. La tierra adentro j fuera de los dichos arenales es tierra muy llana y de muy hermosas vegas y riberas en ellas, tales y tan hermosas, que en toda Espafla no pueden ser mejores, asi de apacibles á la vista, como de fructíferas de cosas que en ellas siembran. Hay en esta tierra todo género de caza y aves y animales conforme á los de nuestra naturaleza, asi como ciervos, corzos, gamos, lobos, zorros, perdices, palomas, tórtolas de dos y tres maneras, codornices, liebres, conejos; por manera que en aves y ani- males no hay diferencia de esta tierra á España; á mas da una gran cordillera de sierras muy hermosas, y algunas de ellas son en gran manera muy altas, entre las cuales hay una que excede en mucha altura á todas las otras, y de ella se vé y descubre una gran parte del mar y de la tierra, y es tan alta que si el dia no es bien claro no se puede divisar ni ver lo alto de ella, porque de la mitad arriba está toda cubierta de nubes. [Hernán Cortés, Cartas de Relación, Carta primera.] ConTersacién. ¿Cuál es la extensión de esta tierra? ¿Qué tiene por la parte del mar? ¿Cómo es la tierra? ¿Cómo son sus vegas? ¿Qué tiene en caza, aves y animales? ¿Qué tiene además, y como son sus sierras? ¿Cómo es una de ellas? Third Lesson. Use of the Article. Definite Article. Expressed in Spanish and suppressed in English. 1. Before plural words in sentences expressing general or universal characteristics, or before words in the singular either referring to abstract things or used in an abstract meaning: Lo8 cometas tienen cola, comets have tails. Las golondrinas vuelven en verano. Swallows return in summer. Lo8 árboles tienen hqjas, trees have leaves. Digitized by VjOOQIC Definite Article. ?21 Lo8 pájaros vuelan, y los peces nadan. Birds fljy fishes swim. Las abuelas miman á sus nietas. Grandmothers spoil their granddaughters. Los oídos son para oir, ears are made to hear with. La mentira es odiada^ lying is hated. La tórtola es el emblema de la inocencia. Doves are the emblems of innocence. La leña se saca de los bosques. Firewood is obtained from woods. La fruta verde es nociva. Unripe fruit is unwholesome. El amarillo y el azul produ>cen el verde. Yellow and blue produce green. N.B. — Thus, before the Infinitives when used as a verbal noun: El saber no ocupa lugar, knowledge is no hindrance. El viajar es agradable, travelling is pleasant. Le encontré al salir, I met him on coming out. Bemark.— When in the above case (See 1) todos, todas is introduced, it precedes the article; todo or toda replaces the article: Todos los árboles tienen hojas, all trees have leaves. Toda fruta verde es nociva. Any unripe fruit is unwholesome. N.B.-Cf: No todo libro es bueno. It is not every book that is good. Todo el libro es bueno, the whole book is good. 2. Before the names of titles, dignities, etc., -- don, doña, sor, fray excepted — when speaking of the per- son, riot to the person: El rey Alfonso XIII, King Alphonse XIII. El general Prim, General Prim. El Sr. de Pérez Galdós, Mr. Perez Galdos. Bon Juan, Bona Maria, Sor Ju^na, Sister Joan. Fray Lope, Brother Lope. 3. Before the proper names of certain countries, provinces, towns, and most of the volcanoes: El Brasil, Brazil. el Ferrol, Ferrol. el Canadá, Canada. el Japón, Japan. Digitized by VjOOQIC 222 Lesson 3. él Perú, Peru. la Florida, Florida. d VesuviOy Mount Vesuvius. la Habana, Havana. la Coruña, Corunna. la Argentina, the Argentine. KB. —Castilla la Nueva (la Vieja), New (Old) Castile, iíewiarA;.— Indifferent are: África, or el Africa, Africa. Asia, or el Asia, Asia. Argelia, or la Argelia, Algeria. Egipto, or el Egipto, Egypt ^.jB.— Proper names of countries, towns, etc., when re- ferred to in a restricted meaning require the article: La España de los Beyes Católicos, Spain of the time of the Catholic Monarchs. El Madrid de entonces, the Madrid of those days. 4. With the names of the days of the week and the hours of the day, except in dates and time in a letter or telegram: Le veré á usted el domingo, I shall see you on Sunday. Hasta el lunes, until Monday. El año pasado, last year. El mes que viene, next month. La semana próxima, next week. Son las tres, it is three o'clock. El sol se pone á las cinco, the sun sets at five. But: Lunes, 12 diciembre, Monday, December 12. Madrid, 2. 40 tarde, Madrid, 2.40. p. m. 5. After nosotros and vosotros, if followed by a noun collectively used, as: Nosotros los españoles. We Spaniards. Vosotros los actores. You actors. 6. After the verb dar, when meaning "to wish" in certain locutions, as: Bar lo8 buenos dias, to wish a good morning (day). Bar las buenas tardes. To wish a good evening, good night. Likewise: dar el parabién, to congratulate, dar el pé' same,^ to condole. 7. With certain words, phrases, or idioms: Voy á la iglesia, I am going to church. Se prohibe la entrada, no admittance. Creer en el cielo, to believe in heaven. * pésame = me yesa, it afflicts me. Digitized by VjOOQIC Definite Article. 228 Se ha proclamado ¡a ley marcial. Martial law has been proclaimed. La luna brilla en el espado. The moon shines in space. Me voy al extranjero, I am going abroad. Los reclutas son llevados al cuartel. Recruits are taken to bariracks. La Cámara de los Lores, the House of Lords. La Cámara de los Comunes, the House of Commons. La gente va á la iglesia, people go to church. Irse á la cama, to go to bed. JEJl monopolio del tabaco, the monopoly of tobacco. El ministro de la Guerra, the Minister of War. Competido de la necesidad, compelled by necessity. ; Todo el mundo, everybody. ÁI parecer, apparently. Es á la vez una ciencia y un arte. It is at once an art and a science. Señores viajeros, al tren, gentlemen, take your seats. Pronunciar eZ si, to say "I will". Hemos estado en el Real. We have been to the Opera House (Madrid). 8. After todo, all, if the following word has a con- crete signification, as: todo el dinero, all the money. If, however, the following words express an abstract idea, without any further attribute, the article is omitted after todo^ as: Con toda consideración, with all consideration. 9. With the names of languages (note the con- trast), speaking of languages: Mi hermano lee y escribe el español. My brother reads and writes Spanish. Whereas: Esas señoras hablan italiano (or en italiano). Those ladies speak Italian— i.e., just now, and not English, etc. 10. To render the English possessives — 's, my, thy, etc., mine, his, etc.; the correlatives he who^ whoeyer, and the demonstratives that, those — ie.: La casa de Jtuin, John's house. Me he cortado el dedo, I have cut my finger. Aquel libro es el de F., that is your book. Digitized by VjOOQIC 224 Lesson 8. El que vive aprende^ he who lives, learns. El hueno de mi hermano, that good brother of mine. Observation,-'\t must be well understood that the pre- positions de and á cannot be contracted with the article, if this precedes a word which is taken as a title or a name of a book, opera, or a similar work. Thus: Bodrigo Diaz de Vivar es generalmente conocido con et sobrenombre de él Cid (and not del Cid). R. etc. is commonly known by the surname of the Cid. Pocas comedias de Calderón aventajan á El alcalde de Zalamea. There are but few comedies of Calderón superior to "The Justice of Zalamea." Definite Article omitted in Spanish and expressed in English. 1. With the apposition, as: Bernardo Taso, padre de Torcuato. Bernard Tasso, the father of Torquato. Isabel, reina de España. Isabel, the Queen of Spain. Exception. — The article should be used with the apposition: (a) If the apposition is quahfied by a superlative; as : Shakespeare, el poeta dramático más famoso de Ingla- terra. Shakespeare, the most celebrated dramatic poet of England. Dante, él tnaytM* poeta de Italia. Dante, the greatest poet of Italy. (b) If a characteristic surname (not a numeral) is added to an historical name, as: Luis el grande, Louis the Great. Carlos el temerario, Charles the Dauntless. 2. With the ordinals with the names of kings, popes, etc., both in writing and in speaking: Alfonso XIII (trece, not el trece). Eduardo Vil (séptimo). Carlos V (quinto) y Felipe II (segundo). Fio IX (nono). 3. With titles of books: Vida de Cristobal Colófi. The life of Christopher Columbus. Digitized by VjOOQIC I>efinite Article. 225 4. With the names of the months, and in the dating of letters: Efnero y febi^ero son meses muy fríos, January and February are very cold months. Miércoles diez y ocho de octubre, Wednesday, the 18th of October. Note.— The article should always be used otherwise: JSl doce de enero y the 12 th of January. Le veré á Y, el lunes, I will see you on Monday. 5. The article is omitted after the verbs to he, to become, to seem, to name, to call, etc., if these verbs are followed by a word denoting rank, dignity, office, nation- ality, etc., as: Es hijo de un principe ruso. He is the son of a Russian prince. La reina nombró al general por ministro, The queen appointed the general her minister. Likewise, with fines (end), mediados (half, middle), principios (beginning), if denoting a certain period, as: A fines de abril, at (towards) the end of April. Á mediados del año pasado. Towards the middle of last year. 6. In a great many adverbial locutions and idioms, as : Morir á hierro, to perish by the sword. -A porfía, in emulation. Morir de fiebre (de calentura), to die of (a) fever. Por desdicha, unfortunately. Estar en ascuas, to be in great anxiety. Fin, The end (in books). En primer lugar, en segundo lugar. In the first place, in the second place. Comida hecha, compañía deshecha. The end of a feast is the parting of company. Note, —With some expressions, however, the article is not totally excluded. Thus we may as well say: ir en socorro, as ir al socorro, to hasten to some one's assistance ; traducir en francés, as al francés, to translate into French. Further cases of the omission of the Indefinite Article in Spanish. 1. In such locutions as: Tener costumbre, to use (to have the habit), tener sed, to be thirsty, tener intención, to have the intention. Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 16 Digitized by VaOOQlC 226 Lesson 8. Likewise: mudar de semblante, to change colour (of the face); hacer número, to make up a sum, etc. Note.— Very often the idea is essentially modified by the omission or the use of the article. Thus: Dar alma, means: to give life, and dar el alma, means: to expire. diade juicio, > law- day, day » dia del juicio, » doomsday. of trial, ?iacer cama, » to be confined» hacer la cama, » to make to one's bed, the bed. iamar estado, » to marry » tomar el estado » to become eclesiástico, a priest. 2. With the words ca^a and palacio (the latter in the signification of the Boyal Palace), used in quite a general sense, after the prepositions de, á, and en, as : Toy á casa de mi tio, I am going to my uncle's. Viene de Palacio, he comes from the Royal Palace. Mi hermana vive en casa de mi prima. My sister lives at my cousin's. Otherwise, the article should be added, as: El militar salió de la casa del aldeano. The soldier left the house of the peasant. 3. In famiUar style, before the words papá, mamá, as : Fapá no está (i.e., en casa), papa is not at home. 4. If several words connected by y, ó, etc., follow each other, no particular stress being laid on any of them, the article may be omitted after the first, even if they are of different genders. The same is the case .if a substantive is qualified by two or more ad- jectives, as: Las lenguas* alemana y francesa. The German and French languages. El primero y segundo canto. The first and second canto. Los palacios, aldeas y castillos. The palaces, villages, and castles. N.£. — But the article should be added in speaking of Uving beings of different sexes, as: Los hombres y las mujeres, the men and women. La^ hermanas y los hermanos, the sisters and brothers. * If the substantive precedes, as in this sentence, it should be plural. Digitized by VjOOQIC Indefinite Article. 227 Indefinite Article. The Indefinite Article omitted in Spanish and expressed in English. 1. Before nouns used in connection with ser, ha- cerse^ meterse, to denote class, profession, etc., in a general sense, also in speaking of qualities, as: Es liubil músico, he is a clever musician. Es general, be is a general. 8e metió soldado, be became a soldier. 8e ha hecho ctira, be bas become a priest. Lo creían traidor, tbey believed bim (to be) a traitor. Esta flor da buen olor, tbis flower bas a good smell. Note,— In tbese sentences tbe speaker does not consider tbe individuality, but only tbe quality. If I say, "He is a clever musician,'* of course I do not mean to say tbat be is but one musician, but tbat be is very musical. The substan- tive is therefore used instead of an adjective, and tbe article denoting individuality, being superfluous, is omitted in Spanish. But the indefinite article is required, if the quality is represented as a particularly remarkable or striking one, or if the substantive used as a predicate is followed by an adjunct. Compare: Es un loco, be is a madman. Es loco, he is a fool (a foolish fellow). Es un hoho, he is a dunce. Es hobo, he is stupid. El marqués es un general de El marqués es general, the mérito, the marquis is a marquis is a general. general of great merit. 2. With the apposition (see p. 224, § 1) and with words denoting office, ranJc^ social position, or any other particular quality, as: El desdén con el desdén, drama de Moreto. Disdain with disdain, a drama of Moreto. El titulo de marqués, the title of marquis. El nombre de padre de los pobres, tbe name of "father of the poor.** 3. Before the adjectives tan (so), tal (such), otro (other), semejante (similar), igual (equal), medio (half), derto (certain), tanto, tamaño (so great), and before the substantives número (number), parte (part), porción (portion), cantidad (quantity), multitud (many), where the Digitized by LiiOOQIC ^28 Lesson 3. •expression becomes more emphatic by the omission of the article. Examples: Tan noble acdon, so noble an action. Tamaño esfuerzo, so great an exertion. Gran parte de los infelices, a great number of the un- happy men, etc. Otra'^ vez, another time. Media hora después, half an hour afterwards. Tanta virtud, such (so great a) virtue. 4. In exclamatm'y and interrogatory elliptical sen- tences, where the exclamation or interrogation is used instead of a negation, likewise in negative elliptical sentences, as: ¿Hay tnyjer más arrogante? Is there a more arrogant woman to be found (that is to say: there is no woman more arrogant than . . .). Nunca vi hombre más impertinente. 1 never saw a more impudent man. 5. In elliptical sentences with the admirative ¡qué , . ..' to render What a . . .! ¡Qué hombre más orgulloso! what a proud man! / Qué cosa tan bonita ! what a pretty thing ! Use of the Neuter Article, lo. 1. With adjectives in the masculine singular; it gives the adjective the force of a substantive, or of a substantive-equivalent : Lo bueno y lo verdadero, good and truth. Todo lo barato es caro, cheap things are dear in the end. Eso será lo prudente, that will be the wisest thing. 2. With adjectives, of either gender and number, in conjunction with ser (to he) or any of its equi- valents, and que (either expressed or understood), to translate how, how much, so, when bringing forth the attribute or quality: No sabe usted lo mal que está. You do not know how ill he is. ¡Lo alta que está! how tall she has grown! ¡ Lo atentos que son! they (m.) are so polite. No me gustan por lo orgullosas. I do not like them, because they (f) are so proud. * Otro is never preceded by the indefinite article. Digitized by vaOOQlC Indefinite Article. 229 3. Before comparatives, or adverbs to form a kind of superlative: Eso es lo peor, that is the worst of it. Lo mejor es callar, the best thing is not say anything. Es lo menos que puede hacer, it is the least he can do^ ¡Lo bien que canta! how well she sings I Ignoraba lo cerca que vive V. I did not know you lived so near. 4. With qtie, almost always with the force of a pronoun: Eso es lo que quiero, that is what I like. ¡Lo que es ser pobre! that shows what it is to be poor I The Articles Used Idiomatically. Its power of being used in idiomatic expressions is characteristic of the Spanish article, as: Al contado, ready money. Á la española, in the Spanish fashion. A la moda, according to the fashion. A la chita callando, on the sly. Obrar á la ligera, to act thoughtlessly. Al óleo, á la aguada, in oils, in water-colours. Al punto, al momento, at once, immediately. Al revés, al contrario. Upside down, quite the contrary, on the contrary. Hacerla, to put one's foot in it. Guardársela á uno, to nurse a grudge. Jugársela á uno de puño. To play a nasty trick on someone. Pegársela á uno, to take one in. No tenderlas todas consigo, to feel uneasy. No se como se las compone, I do not know how he manages to do it. Me la pagará, me las pagará. I will make him pay for it. Le ha pasado una. Something serious has happened to him. A lo militar, in a military way. A lo torero, in bull-fighter's fashion. A lo hipócrita, hypocritically. Comer á lo cerdo, to it like a pig. JPor lo común, por lo general, generally. Digitized by VjOOQIC 230 Lesson 3. Traducción. 3. 1. O Birds fly and () fishes swim. () Ears are to hear with. Life is short. All () trees have leaves in summer. Any unripe fruit is unwholesome. Brazil has many mines. Canada has many pastures. Does the ship call (tr. tocar) at Corunna and Ferrol? Until Sunday. I wish you a good night. I am going abroad. Has your daughter blue or black eyes? The culprit answered bending his head. Has he a sore eye or a sore ear? His eye is bad. Heaven and earth proclaim the glory of God. I swear by the God of my fathers that I have spoken the truth. My elder brother studies philosophy; my younger, theology. Hatred and love are two powerful motives of () human actions. () Lead is heavier than iron, but () iron is more useful than () lead. Has Mr. Verguero already written to you from Paris? No, sii*, Mr. Verguero has not yet written, but Miss Verguero has written to a friend (f,) of hers in our town. You () French are the vainest of all () nations. We () authors have more to do than you () actors. We (say the) three brothers found ourselves in a desperate situation at our uncle's death. I have condoled with the captain. Go and wish the young lady good evening! 2. Will you come back at nine or at ten o'clock? Last week I (had) received a letter from my friend at Madrid. My grandfather died at 85 years of age. Shall you depart [on] Thursday or Friday? The ship starts on Tuesdays. Why did you not bring (use Compound Perfect) all the cloth? With all respect for your word, sir, I beg leave to doubt the (say of the) fact. I do not know, whether the ladies spoke Spanish or Italian; I was too far off to be able to understand them. My brother speaks () French better than () English. Gre- gory VII., the son of a peasant, was one of the most cele- brated popes. Alexander, Caesar, and Napoleon were the three greatest generals of all () ages. Schiller, the greatest dramatic poet of Germany, died in the year 1805. Louis XIV. of France is also sometimes called Louis the Great. 3. Charles the Dauntless was Duke of Burgundy. King Philip II. of Spain was the father of Don Carlos. Do you know this gentleman? Yes, he is the son of a rich American merchant. The prince appointed the lieutenant, captain. July and August are usually very warm months. December was very cold last year. We arrived at Prague (on) Tuesday the 14th of October. The second person of the plural of () Spanish verbs usually ends in s, and the third person of the plural in n, Aristides had the surname of the Just. Un- happily my best friend died of () fever a few days after his Digitized by VaOOQlC Indefinite Article. 231 arrival. The awkward footman let the cup fall on the floor. I have never lost sight of (de vista) this gentleman. The ship rides at anchor in the harbour of Cadiz. I have translated this book into French. Traducción. 4. 1. Many people have the habit to sleep an hour after dinner. Have you the intention to oflTend me (de ofenderme) with these words? Are you hungry or are you thirsty? The poor child has the fever (la calentura). The criminal turned pale when the Judge appeared. The unfortunate man expired at 10 o'clock in the evening. The enthusiasm for a great cause enlivens our endeavours. On the day of the trial (dia del juicio) there appeared more than thirty persons. Dooms- day is the day of the end of the world. Has the servant (f.) made the bed? I was confined to bed for a fortnight. The young lady will become a nun. One easily takes the habit of sleeping long. I go to my aunt's in order to dine with her. Do you live with your aunt or with your cousin (f) ? When we left the house of the judge, it began to thunder. Towards the middle of May we hope to be in London. 2. Have you read () "Don Juan," by Lord Byron? No, but I have read () "Childe Harold." () Canada is a British colony in North America. () Corunna and () Ferrol are Spanish towns. There are two Castiles, Old Castile and New Castile. I study the English and Italian languages. The fourth and fifth cantos of this poem are most beautiful (superL), The boys and girls greeted the prince on his entering (al entrar en) the castle. This young man is a clever physician, but a bad poet. He obtained the title of Aulic Councillor for his merits. Such a man can never be my friend. Half an hour afterwards everything had disappeared. Is there a more distrustful man than he? I doubt if (tr, that) there is a good theatre in that town. Do you speak of () "Disdain with Disdain," by Moreto? 3.* She buys everything that is cheap, but cheap things are dear in the end. That is not the wisest thing. She is an admirer (admiradora) of beauty, but you do not know how proud she is, and that is not the worst of her. When one cannot praise, the best thing is not to say anything. How well you speak! I say what I feel. I hate () things done on the sly, hypocriticaly. Generally () things are done in (se hacen de) that way. How (neut.) ill he is! How (neut,) proud they (f.) are for the little they have! That will be * For this part of the Exercise see " Use of the Neuter Ar- ticle lo'' and "The Articles Used Idiomatically.'' Digitized by VjOOQIC 282 Lesson 4. the best. Pay always ready money! He has played me a nasty trick, but I will make him pay for it. Reading Exercise. Descripción de la ciudad de Méjico, Estaba fundada en un plano muy espacioso, coronado por todas partes de altísimas sierras y montañas, de cuyos ríos y vertientes, rebalsadas en el valle, se formaban diferentes lagunas, y en lo más profundo los dos lagos mayores, que ocupaba, con más de cincuenta poblaciones, la nación mejicana. Tendría este pequeño mar treinta leguas de circunferencia, y los dos lagos que le formaban se unían y comunicaban entre sí por un dique de piedra que los dividía, reservando algunas aberturas, con puentes de madera, en cuyos lados tenían sus compuertas levadizas para cebar el lago inferior, siempre que necesitaban de socorrer la mengua del uno con la redundancia del otro. Era el más alto de agua dulce y clara, donde se hallaban algunos pescados de agradable mantenimiento, y el otro de agua salobre y oscura, semejante á la marítima, no porque fuesen de otra calidad las vertientes de que se ali- mentaba, sino por vicio natural de la misma tierra, donde se detenían, gruesa y salitrosa por aquel paraje, pero de grande utilidad para la fábrica de la sal, que beneficiaban cerca de sus orillas, purificando al sol y adelgazando con el fuego las espumas y superfluidades que despedía la resaca. [SoUSy Conquista de Méjico.] Conversación. ¿Dónde estaba fundada la ciudad de Méjico? ¿De qué estaba coronado el plano? ¿Qué se formaban de los río3 y vertientes? ¿Cuántas poblaciones formaban la nación mejicana, y qué territorio ocupaban? ¿Cómo se unían y comunicaban los dos lagos? ¿Cómo cebaban el lago inferior? ¿Cómo eran estos lagos, y cómo era la tierra? ¿Para qué era útil? ¿Cómo fabricaban la sal? Fourth Lesson. (See Part I., Lesson 15.) Possessiyes. Possessive Adjectives. Use of the complete, postpositive forms (mío, tuyo, suyo, etc.). Digitized by VaOOQlC Possessive Adjectives. 238 1. Emphatically after nouns preceded either by the definite article, or by the indefinite article [not followed by de], or by que; also by the demonstratives or car- dinals provided they are not followed by de — i.e.: El libro mio está encuadernado^ my book is bound. Un amigo suyo lo vio, a friend of his saw it. ¿ Qué obras suyas conoce F. ? What works by him do you know? Aquél tío nuestro murió, that uncle of ours died. Tres hijas suyas se casaron. Three of his daughters married. But: Uno de su^ amigos lo vio, tres de sus hijas se casaron. 2. In general statements, not emphatically, as a predicate of 8ev, to be: Son unas parientas mlas, they (f.) are relatives of mine. N.B.—jHijo mio! my son! Padre nuestro que estás en los cielos. Our Father which art in Heaven. Muy Sr. mio: — Dear Sir. Muy Sra. mia: — Dear Madam. Use of the apocopated, prepositive forms (mf, tu^ suj etc.). 1. Not emphatically when either the possessive be- gins the sentence or when no article accompanies the noun to which the possessive refers: Mi amigo lo sabe, my friend knows it. Su8 Ubros no se venden, his books do not sell. Mis padres han llegado hoy. My parents have arrived to-day. No me gusta su cara, I do not like his face. Le conoci en mi juventud, I knew him in my youth. 2. After uno, una^ the relatives quien, cual^ etc., the cardinals, the ordinals, and the comparatives and superlatives, when they are followed by de: Uno de mis amigos, one of my friends. ¿Cuál de sus obras? which of his works? Tres de sus hijas, three of his daughters. JEl m,ayor de mis hermanos, my eldest brother. N.B.— The Spanish definite article replaces the English Possessive Adjective in such sentences as: Digitized by VjOOQIC 2S4 Lesson 4. Me he cortado el dedo, I have cut my finger. 8e ha roto la pierna, he has broken his leg. He perdido los guantes y él anillo, I have lost my gloves and my ring. Possessive Pronouns. Use of the forms with the article (el mío, la mía, etc.). 1. When referring to a noun in the same sentence or in a previous one (except in answering a question with ¿quién?): Si no tiene F. paraguas llévese V. el mío. If you have not got an umbrella take mine. ¿Es esta la mía ó la suya? Is this mine or his (pen, etc.)? Bat: ¿ Be quién es este paraguas ? — Mío. Whose umbrella is this? — Mine. 2. In answering to ¿que? ¿cuál? ¿cuántos?, also in elliptical sentences, as: ¿ Qué libro este? — El mió. Whose book is this? — Mine. ¿ Á cuál amigo se refiere F. ? — Al mió. Which friend do you mean? — My friend. / Qué memoria la mia ! v^hat a memory mine is I § 1. As stated in Lesson 15, § 4 (Part L), the possessive adjective is in Spanish, as in EngUsh, commonly expressed but once, if two or more nouns, connected by y or ó, follow each other, thus: Su persona y (sus) facultades, his person and qualities. If, however, these substantives denote persons, or if they are of different numbers, or if a particular stress is laid on each word, the possessive should be repeated; as: Sits fueros, sus hrios, sus pramáticas, su voluntad, (Cervantes.) His privileges, his courage, his deeds, his will. He perdido m^i sombrero y m,is guantes, I have lost my hat and my gloves. Mi amiga y m,i prima. My friend (f) and my cousin (f,). Digitized by VjOOQIC Possessive Pronouns. 235 N,B, — Mi amiga y prima would be: my friend and cousin (i.e., the same person). § 2. If the substantive is preceded or followed by an adjective, either the apocopated or the complete form of the possessive may be used. The latter is preferred if a stress is laid on the adjective, or if the expression is exclamative; thus: Mi querido amigo, my dear friend. Whereas: ¡Querido amigo mió I dear friend! § 3. The complete form should be used if not possession, but a mere personal reference is intended, as: Es costumbre suya, that is his habit (a custom of his). § 4. By using the indefinite article together with the possessive adjective, the expression is rendered more emphatic. Thus : Es amigo mio, means: he is living on friendly terms with me. Whereas : Es un amigo mio, means: he is a friend of mine. § 5. Sometimes a demonstrative pronoun is added to the possessive adjective, as: this book of yours. In this case either the apocopated or the complete form may be used, as: Esta tu culpa or esta culpa tuya, this fault of yours. § 6. Very often the possessive pronoun of the 3rd person is rendered by the genitive of the personal pro- noun, especially if a misconception might arise from the possessive pronoun being alike for both genders. Thus : My pen, his, and hers. Mi pluma, ¡a suya y la de ella {lit. that of her). This is her book, and that is his. Este es sti libro y aquel es el de él, § 7. The possessive of the polite form (your) has been mentioned Part I., page 53, § 7. Note now how it is rendered in Spanish. Mi casa y la de F. (or y su casa de F.). My house and yours. Mis amigos y los de F. (or y sus amigos de F.). My friends and yours. jY".J5. — The same mode of expression should be employed if "yours" is preceded by the auxiliary verb "to be," as: Digitized by VaOOQlC 236 Le88on 4. j estos guantes son los de V. These gloves aie yours, < estos guantes son stis guantes \ de r. N.B.— Estos guantes son de F. (lit,: these gloves are of you). * Traducción. 5. 1. A friend of his saw her and told (¡o dijo á) one of my friends. Her words were, my son I Do you come from her house or from your house? Neither from hers nor from mine. Which of his works do you like best? The best of his works is **Hamlet*\ She had always loved him for his kindness towards his sisters. This poet is distinguished for his profoundness and clearness. Have you found your knife and gloves? I have found them, but I have lost my pocket-handkerchief and my earrings. My friend and cousin (m,) has no idea how much he owes me. Last night my aunt and cousin (f.) har- rived by (the) train. Dearest sister! You (tr, thou) do not know how much I love you (tr, thee), or you would think better of your (thy) ^ brother and friend ! It is an arrogance on (tr, of) your part (possess, pronoun) to pronounce (a) judgment on a matter that does not concern you. No prudence on my side (mia) could have prevented (prevenido) that danger. So much the worse for him {tr. It is in his harm) if he does not follow (the) good advice. It is your fault if we do not succeed. It is a habit of mine to call everything by its right name. This gentleman is a friend of mine. Whose book is this? Mine. What a memory mine is! My friend is a writer; have you read his works? I have read some. Which of his works? 2. Mr. Ferrer is a relation of mine, but he is not a friend of mine. (This) your levity will do you the greatest harm. (This) my behaviour needs not to be concealed from anybody. Next year my uncle and yours will (go to) visit the Exhibition in Paris. Your brother and his have settled the conditions of the sale. Our house, his, and hers will be newly painted this year. My uncle has always provided for his sister and her children like a father. This is his pen ; where (did Agnes leave) has Agnes hers. Whose are these beautiful steel pens? They are yours. Miss (N.)! My children and yours have done great mischief in our neighbour's garden. Beadingr Exercise. Descripción de Ta plajea del mercado de México, Digo esto porque á caballo nuestro capitán, con todos los más que tenian caballo y la más parte de nuestros snjda- * The English verb "to belong to" is generally translated by ser de. Digitized by VjOOQIC Degrees of Comparison with Verbs. 237 dos, muy apercibidos fuimos al Tatelulco, é iban muchos ca- ciques que el Montezuma envió para que nos acompañasen; 7 cuando llegamos á la gran plaza que se dice el Tatelulco, como no habíamos visto tal cosa, quedamos admirados de la multitud de gente y mercaderías que en ella habla y del gran concierto y regimiento que en todo tenían; y los principales que iban con nosotros nos lo iban mostrando : cada género de mercaderías estaba por si, y tenían situados y señalados sus asientos. Comencemos por los mercaderes de oro y plata, y piedras ricas y plumas y mantas y cosas labradas, y otras mercaderías, esclavos y esclavas; digo que traían tantos á vender á aquella gran plaza como traen los portugueses los negros de Guinea; y traíanlos atados en unas varas largas, con collares á los pescuezos, porque no se les huyesen, y otros dejaban sueltos. Luego estaban otros mercaderes que vendían ropa más bista, y algodón, y otras cosas de hilo torcido, y cacagüeteros que vendían cacao; y de esta manera estaban cuantos géneros de mercaderías hay en toda Nueva España. [Bernal Diaz del Castillo, Conquista de Nueva España.] ConTersación. ¿Quiénes fueron á Tatelulco? ¿Cómo iban? ¿Qué hizo Montezuma? ¿Qué les sucedió al llegar á la gran plaza? ¿ De que se quedaron admirados ? ¿Qué hacían los principales que iban con ellos? ¿Quiénes eran los mercaderes? ¿Cómo llevaban á los esclavos? ¿Cuales eran los géneros de mercaderías? Fifth Lesson. Degrees of Comparison with Verbs. Degrees of Comparison. 1. Máximo, greatest, and mínimo, smallest, and ín- fimo, lowest, are only used in certain phrases, as: Un circulo máximo (mínimo), a great (small) circle. Un disparate máximo, the greatest nonsense. Binen por la cosa más minima. They quarrel for the slightest thing. A precios Ínfimos, at the lowest prices. 2. The forms bonísimo (also buenisimo) and malísimo have almost the same signification as óptimo (best) and Digitized by VaOOQlC 238 Lesson 5. pésimo (worst), whereas el menor (the least) expresses the accessory idea of comparison^ el mínimo denoting a6- solutely the lowest degree. Of pequeño (little) there exists a regular superl. absol. pequeñísimo, meaning the *'very least," the *'most trifling," etc. Supremo corre- sponds with the English adjective "supreme," as: el consejo supremo^ the supreme council. Sumo means the highest — i.e., the greatest, as: Con sumo gustOy with the greatest pleasure. Formulae of Comparison with Verbs. 1. For equality: lo sabe como yo. he andado tanto como usted, no sabe tanto como dicen, le conozco tan bien como usted, lo sé no menos que él. como, tanto como, as as much as tan bien como, as well as no tnenos que, not less than N.£. — Lee tanto que pierde la vista. gana tanto que no sabe lo que gana. 2. For superiority: m,ás que, more than mejor que. better than paseo más que antes, le quiere más que él á ella, le conozco mejor que usted, escribe mejor que Cervantes, 3. For inferiority: menos que, less than los jóvenes saben menos que los viejos, estudia m^nos que su her- mano. not— so— as no sale tanto como antes, no me costó tanto como á usted. worse than lo hace peor que yo, está peor que estaba. not so well as no lo hace tan bien como yo. no duermo tan bien como solía. 4. If a number forras the second part af a com- parison, the English "than" is not rendered by que (see page 80) but by de [as in French], Thus: no— tanto— CO' m^, peor que, no tan bien co mo. Digitized by VaOOQlC Degrees of Comparison with Verbs. 289 Cayeron más de cincuenta hombres. There fell more than fifty men. Habia menos de veinte hombres. There were less than twenty men there. If, however, the first part of the comparison is negative, **than" is translated by que^ as: No tengo m,ás que cinco duros, I have only ^y% dollars. N,B,—No tengo m,ás de cinco duros, I have not more than ^\q dollars. 5. If the second part of the comparison is an accessory sentence (seepage 79, §4b), "than" is rendered by de, as: Mi amigo tiene más (or menos) libros de los que puede leer. My friend has more (or less) books than he can read. If, on the other hand, the comparative is an ad- verb J que lo is employed, as: Habla el español mejor que lo (or de lo que lo) escribe,. He speaks the Spanish language better than he writes it. 6. The English "the more the more" and "the less the less" are rendered by cuanto más (menos) .... (tanto) más (menos), as : Cuanto, más dinero tiene^ (tanto) más quiere, The more money he has, the more he wants. Note, — The first part of the comparison may likewise be expressed by mientras más (menos), but then in the second part only más (and not tanto más) follows, whereas after cuanto más the corresponding tanto may, or may not be ex- pressed, as shown by the above sentence. If cuanto or tanto are followed by a substantive^ they become adjectives, and therefore agree with their noun, as: Era tanto más aplicado, cuanta más facilidad tenia para estudiar. He was the more diligent, the more talent he had for studying. 7. If in English a superlative immediately follows a numeral, as: "owe of the greatest men," etc., the Spanish equivalent may be rendered as follows: One of the most cruel kings. Tin rey de los más crueles. Uno de los reyes más crueles. Digitized by VjOOQIC 240 Lesson 5. 8. The adjectives most and least are rendered as follows: (a) By la mayor (menor) parte, if a substantive follows, as: Most men = La mayor parte de los hombres. (b) If these words are neuter — i.e., if they are them- selves substantives, as: *'the least," "the most," they are rendered lo más (lo menos) ^ as: That is the least you can do. Esto es lo menos que Y. puede hacer. (c) If the substantive following most or least denotes not persons but things, los (las) más (menos) de los (las) may be used, as well as la mayor (menor) parte de . . ., as: (The) most houses of this town. Las más de las casas de esta ciudad, 9. The highest degree of comparison is rendered in Spanish: (a) By the relat, superl. preceded by lo más (me- nos), as: An extremely clear river, un rio lo más limpio. An extremely simple woman, una mujer lo m,as sencilla, (b) By the verb poder (to be able), sabm* (to know), or, less frequently, by caber, as: He shouted as loud as possible, gritó lo m,á8 que podia. He did his best, hizo cuanto supo. I shall do my utmost. Haré cuanto pueda (todo cuanto cabe en mi), (c) By lo (la), todo (toda) . . . posible, if a substantive without another adjective follows, as: With the utmost correctness. Con la posible corrección (or con la corrección posible). (d) By hasta no más (lit, *'till no more"), in which case the substantive with its adjective should precede, as: An extremely timid woman. Una mujer tímida hasta no más. Degrees of Comparison with Adverbs. 1. Spanish adverbs expressing ideas which admit of comparison follow the rules given for the adjectives : Digitized by vaOOQlC Degrees of Comparison with Verbs. 241 tan lejos como, más ó menos lejos que. tan tarde como, más 6 menos tarde que, tan dulcemente como, más ó menos dulcemente que, muy lejos, lejisimo, muy tarde, tardísimo, muy dulcemente, dulcisimamente. Note the following: mucho antes (not muy antes), mucho después (not muy después), mucho más (not muy más), mucho menos (not 'tnuy menos). N,B,—lrí degrees of comparison acá and allá are used instead of aqui and alii; tan acá (ahi, allá) más acá (ahí, allá) muy acá (ahí, allá), como, que, Formulae of Comparison with Adverbs. 1. For equality: tan — corno, as — as no— menos— que, not— less— than 2. For superiority: tnás—gtief more— tban 3. For inferiority: míenos— que, less— than no — tctn—conto, not— so— as Traducción. 1. To quarrel for the slightest sense. She is a very good woman, Spanish Conv.-Grammar. vive tan lejos como yo, llegué tan tarde como éL toca tan lien como canta, vive no menos lejos que yo. llegó no menos tarde queyo. toca no únenos bien que canta, vive más lejos que yo. se levantó más tarde que ayer, habla más dulcemente que su hermana, se ha levantado menos tarde que ayer, le veo menos á menudo que le veia. vive menos cómodamente que antes, no le veo tan á menudo como le veia. 6. thing is the greatest non- but he is very wicked ; he Digitized by VaOOQlC 242 Lesson 5. is one of the most wicked men. She had very bad taste ( — pésimo) when she married him. I will do it with the greatest pleasure. ( ) Fruit is now sold at the lowest prices. He know» her as I (do). You do not know him as well as I do. I know him as much as you do. I have read more than I read. He speaks better () French than () English. I walk more than I used to (solía). There were more than a thousand per- sons there. We waited more than three hours. I have seen that opera more than six times. They spend more than ne- cessary — at least, more than they ought to. () Old people have more experience than () young people. She does not receive sa much as she used to, because she is not so well as she was. She is worse than she was. She lives very far and retires very early. I knew her much before I knew (de conocerle á) you. You knew me much later. Come a little closer (más acá). Move back (Hágase V.) a little farther (más allá). Does he live so far as he did before? He does not live nearer than he did. I do not go to bed so late as when I was young. They do not go to the theatre so often as before. Lying is the worst excuse of a fault. **Wallenstein" is the best dramatic work of Schiller. In the whole town there is no worse lodging than ours. The greatest sum does not suffice to satisfy his wishes. I have read the new novel with the greatest pleasure. One hears such abominable words only amongst (entre) the lowest people. Did you pay more than 200 reals for this coat ? No, sir, I did not pay more than 180, This lady has more whims than she can satisfy. You write English better than you speak it. 2. The more wealth we possess, the more we wish to possess. The more faults we have, the less we are inclined to confess them. These people are the more presumptuous, the less knowledge they possess. The more talent he has for learning, the less diligent he is. Frederick Barbarossa was one of the most powerful emperors of Germany. (The) most young people like pleasure (better) more than work. Ten dollars are the least you can give. It is you, my friend, who always speak most and act (do) least. The greatest number of the trees of this garden are old and do not bear any fruit. Few (tr. the least) things please us long, as soon a& we possess them. Italy has an extremely agreeable climate. I said as much as I could, but he would not believe me. The prince promised him to do his utmost (fr. poder). Write this letter with the utmost care! An extremely impudent beggar followed me through several streets. Digitized by VjOOQIC Numerals. 243 Reading Exercise. Be las riquezas del Peru, Los que miran con otros ojos que los comunes las ri- quezas que el Perú ha enviado al mundo viejo y derramá- dolas por todo él, dicen que antes le han dafíado que aprove- chado, porque dicen que tas riquezas comúnmente antes son causa de vicios que de virtudes, porque á sus posesores los inclinan á la soberbia, á la ambición y á la gula, y que los hombres, criándose con tantos regalos como hoy tienen, salen afeminados, inútiles para el gobierno de la paz, y mucho más para el de la guen-a, y que como tales emplean todo su cuidado en inventar comidas y bebidas, galas y arreos ; y que de inventarlos cada día tantos y tan extraños, ya no saben que inventar, ó inventan torpezas en lugar de galas, que más son hábito de mujeres que de hombres, como hoy se vé; y que si han crecido las rentas de los ricos, para que ellos vi- van en abundancias y regalos, también han crecido las mi- serias de los pobres, para que ellos mueran de hambre y des- nudez, por la carestía que el mucho dinero ha causado en los mantenimientos y vestidos; que, aunque sea pobremente, ya los pobres el día de hoy no se pueden vestir ni comer por la mucha carestía, y que ésta es la causa de haber tantos pobres en la república, que mejor lo pasaban cuando no había tant^ moneda. [El Inca Garcüaso de la Vega, Comentarios Keales.] Conyersación. ¿Qué se dice de las riquezas del Perú? ¿Quiénes lo dicen? ¿Por qué dicen que las riquezas son causa de vicios? ¿Qué les sucede á los hombres que se crian con tantos regalos ? ¿ Y cuál es la consecuencia de ello ? ¿De haber crecido la riqueza en los ricos y la miseria en los pobres qué resulta? ¿Cuál es la causa de haber tantos pobres? ¿Cuándo lo pasaban mejor? Sixth Lesson. Numerals. (See Lessons 16, 17, Part I.) § 1. In colloquial language, iino^ una, are very much used pronominally, either with a personal or with an impersonal meaning: 16* Digitized by VaOOQlC 244 Lesson 6. A veces uno no piensa en lo que hace. Sometimes one does not think about what he is doing. No sabe uno que hacer, si ir ó no ir. I do not know what to do, whether to go, or not. As an indefinite, uno, una, may be used both in the singular and in the plural: Ha estado uno á preguntar por V. Somebody called for you. Ha venido una con un niño. A woman with a child came. Pasaban unos, y lo vieron. Some that were passing saw it. As an indefinite, as well as a partitive, may be U3ed with the article: Be los dos, él uno escapó, one of the two escaped. Las unas decían una cosa, las otras, otra. Some of them (f.) were saying one thing, the others another. § 2. AmboSj both is often expressed (see p. 59, 10), by uno y otro, and negatively, by ni uno ni otro. Seldom *'both" is rendered by el uno y él otro. Likewise, dos occurs with the signification "both," as: Sus do8 primos, both his cousins. ¿ Tiene Y. pan y vino ? Tengo uno y otro. Have you (some) bread and wine? 1 have both. N.B.—Both used adverbially means á la vez, á un mismo tiempoj and may be rendered by tan(to) . . . como . . ., or negatively by no menos — que. Thus, he is both prudent and brave, is rendered by: Es á la vez prudente y valiente. Es á un mismo tiempo prudente y valiente, Es tan prudente como valiente, or negatively : No es míenos prudente que valiente. § 3. Some peculiar expressions may be noted: Á últimos de mes, in the last days of the month. Á primeros de enero, in the first days of January. A mediados de semana, about the middle of the week. We need not add that in these examples the word dias (days) is understood. § 4. Frequently primero is used adverbially with the signification first(ly) and sooner, or it is periphrased by to like better, to prefer, etc. Digitized by VjOOQIC Indefinite Numerals. 245 Primero quiero comer, first I will eat. Primero me quedo con el libro que venderlo tan barato, I would sooner keep the book (I prefer keeping the book) than sell it so cheaply. § 5. The adverb first and last are frequently trans- lated primero and último, preceded by the respective article, as: Los niños se recogieron los primeros (los últimos), The children went away first (last). Indefinite Numerals. (See Lesson 18, Part I.) 1. Alguno* followed by que otro means now and again, now and then, very few, seldom. It is equivalent to the plural of alguno, as: Leo alguna que otra novela. I read now and again a novel. Voy alguna que otra vez* I go now and then (seldom). Le veo alguno que otro día. I see him now and then. Hdbia alii alguna que otra persona. There were very few people there. 2. The contrary of alguno is ninguno (none). It requires the negation only when follotving the verb. 8u opinión no es de ningún valor. His opinion is of no importance. N,B,-'En ningún pais de Europa, In no country of Europe. En ningún caso, in no case. 3. Nadie (nobody) and nada (nothing) follow the same rules as ninguno — i.e,: fji".^- ] "' ■"«" """»«■ In the following cases they are expressed in Eng- lish by the affirmative words one, anybody, anything. * If alguno, mucho, poco, tanto, harto are used adverbially before más, they beconie true adjectives, as : Alguna (mucha, poca} más agua, Some (much, a little) more water. Digitized by VjOOQIC 246 Lesson 6. (a) In rhetorical questions— e.gr.; ¡Denws á la nueva población el nombre de Santa Fé! ¿ Cabe en el mundo ninguno tan glorioso ? Let US give to the new town the name Santa Fé! Is there a more renowned one in the world? ¿Hay nada más formidable? Is there anything more terrible? (b) After a comparative — e.g.: F. lo sabe mejor que nadie. You know it better than anyone else. Also the preposition, sin, tvithouf, and the conjunction derived from it, sin que, icitliout (that) change the follow- ing indefinite numeral into a negative one — e.g.: Sin ningún amigo, without any friend. Sin que na^ie lo supiera, without anyone knowing it. 4. Quienquiera is only used substantively (i.e., without a substantive), whereas cualquiera is either an adjective or a substantive, as: He de salir con cualquier tiempo. I must go out in any weather whatever. Dígalo F. á quienquiera. You may tell whom you please. Note,—\{ cualquiera or quienquiera introduce a relative accessory sentence, they should be followed by que, as: Cualquiera que sea el tiempo he de salir. Whatever the weather may be, 1 must go out. Cualquiera que lo diga se equivoca. Whoever may say it is mistaken. N.B.—Ese en un cualquiera, he is nobody. 5. Todo (all, whole, every) is either an adjective or a substantive. In the former case it should be followed by the article (as in French and Italian), or by its substitutes, unless in sentences of a general character, with the meaning of every, — Compare: Todo el mundo, the whole world. Todo un día, a whole day. Toda mi casa, my whole house. And: Todo hombre honrado, every honest man. Toda día trae sus penas, every day brings its sorrows. Toda casa tiene puerta, every hoise has a door. Digitized by VaOOQlC Indefinite Numerals. 247 On the other hand, the article is omitted before proper names or in adverbial expressions, as: Por toda E$paña, all over Spain (lit. through the whole Spain). Con toda puntuálidadj with all punctuality, in the nick of time. If everyone or all is followed by a rdative pronoun, this pronoun is rendered either by the corresponding form of cuanto or by que preceded by the article, as: Todo lo que tengo, all (that which) I have. Todo el que lo haya dicho, whoever may have said so ; or (Todos) cuantos lo hayan dicho* (but not cuanto lo ha dicho). El principe ha hablado con (todos) cuantos estaban presentes, The prince spoke to all those who were present. Bemark, — Todo is also neuter and corresponds to the English everything, as: Él habla de todo, he speaks of everything. N'.B,— TodOf if adverbially used (as much as, all, every- thing, entirely), is invariable, and when followed by a verb is used in connection with que, cuanto — i.e.; Lo ha perdido todo, he has lost everything. Ha jugado todo lo que tenia. He has gambled away all he had. Todo cuanto se haga, sera inútil. All that may be done will be useless. Idioms with toclo: Es todo un caballero, he is a perfect gentleman. Es una mujer todo corazón, she is a woman all heart» Lo sabe y, con todo, no lo dice. He knows it, and yet does not tell. Lo sabe él y todo, even he knows it. 6. Mismo, saine, self, own, is used adjectively, as: la misma cosa, the same thing, su mismo padre, his own father. Sometimes it occurs as an absol. superl., as: la mismísima cosa, the very same thing, and frequently it corresponds to the English even, as: La misma reina lo ha dicho. Even the queen said so. * Todos cuantos lo han dicho, all those who said it. Digitized by VjOOQIC 248 Lesson 6. In conjunction with the personal pronouns it immediately follows the pronoun, thus: Nosotros mismos, we ... . ourselves. Vosotras mismas, you .... yourselves (few,). If the personal pronoun is a dative or accusative case, both the conjunctive and the absolute form of the same pronoun should be used, as: He will give it me (to myself). Me lo dará á mí mismo. Note the expressions: Hoy mismo, this very day. Mañana mismo, on the (very) morrow itself. Propio, propia (self, same, own) may be used as an adjective and as a pronoun: Al propio tiempo, at the same time. A las 9 de la mañana del propio dia. At 9 o'clock in the morning of the same day. N.B, — Identity, equality, are the striking features of mismo; possession, suitability, those oí propio. Compare: Ya no soy el mism^ (not el propio). I am not the same man. Tiene coche propio (not mismo). He has a private carriage (of his own). Esto es lo fnism4> qtie eso. This and that are the same. Eso es lo propio del caso. That is the proper thing under the circumstances. Thus, though mismo and propio may join nouns, and pronouns, only mismo, on account of its signi- fication, may join adverbs of time and place : To propio (yo m^ismo) lo oi, I saw it myself. Él propio (él mism,o) Juan lo asegura. John himself affirms it. Ayer m^ismo (not propio), indeed yesterday. Aquí nUsm^o (not propio), in this very place. 7. Demás (from de — más), "pther," is invariable and used both adjectively and substantively, as: Las demias hermanas, the other sisters. Los demás no han hablado. The others did not speak (have not spoken). Dígale V. eso, y yo le diré lo demús. Tell him that, I will tell him the rest. Digitized by VjOOQIC Indefinite Numerals. 249. A derivative of demás is demasiado, ''too much," whicli (like the Italian troppo) is used both adjectively and substantively, as: Demasiada gente, too many people. Bebió demasiado vino, be drank too much wine. Somewhat stronger than demasiado is sobrado, as: Ha dado á su hijo sobrado dinero. He gave his son too much money. ^.jB.— From sobrado is formed the adverb sobradamente, 8. Bastante and harto (enough) are used both adjectively and substantively, and sometimes even ad- verbially, as: Tengo bastante dinero, I have money enough. Me ha dicho bastante (harto), he has told me enough. Harto se ¡o he dicho, I have told him many a time. 9. Otd*o, -a (other, another) is both an adjective and a pronoun. As already stated (p. 69, 7), it never takes the indefinite article. Coupled with uno, as: uno con otro or uno y otro, pi. unos y otros, it corresponds to the English both; uno á otro with one another, each other, as: Eso es otra cosa, that is a different thing. Déme F. otro, give another. Salieron uno con otro, they both went out. Miráronse unos á otros, they looked at each other. Followed by tanto, it means just as much or quite as much (as many), as: Yo tengo dos varas, y V, tiene otra>s tantas*. I have two ells, and you have just (quite) as much. KB.- otro libro, el otro libro, another book, the other book. otro dia, el otro dia, another day, the other day. otras casas, las otras casas, other houses, the other houses. 10. Tal (such, such a thing) is both a substantive and an adjective. It also means the aforesaid, the same, etc., as: M tal Diego, the aforesaid D. * In this case otro tanto should agree in gender and num- ber with the word to which it refers. Digitized by VjOOQIC 250 Lesson 6. Joined to uno, it means a certain, etc., as: Un tal López lo ha dichOy a Mr. Lopez said so. Habla de una tal Elvira^ he speaks of a certain E. -^0 haré yo tal, I will not do such a thing. Preceded by cual it means as — so; thus: Cual es el padre, tal es el hijo. As the father, so is the son. In proverbial expressions tal is often used instead of cual, as: Tal amo, tal criado, like master, like man*. Idioms with tal are: Por tal razón, therefore. Si tal; no tal, yes, indeed; no, indeed. Ese es un tal, he is a rogue. No hay tal, no such thing! Con tal que, on condition that .... ¿ Qué tal? — Tal cual, Well, how are you? — Middling. Tal vez, perhaps. 11. Fulano or fulano de tal (Mr. So-and-So): Fulano no quiere pagar, So-and-So won't pay. Tiene en su casa á fulano y á zutano. He has Mr. So-and-So and Mr. So-and-So at his house. Traducción. 7. 1. Sometimes one (m.) does not know what to do. One (f.) does not know what to say. Somebody (m.) has been. Some (m.) came, but did not leave their naiaaes. Oae-of the two (say of the two, the one) was a foreigner. Both my sisters are now in Paris. Here is ice and lemonade; you may have both if you like. The ship will arrive here in the last days of June. We left the town in the first days of January. Will you write a letter, or give me your orders by word of mouth? I prefer (see p. 244, § 4) keeping my old servant to (tr, than) taking (Inf.) another (one). The gentlemen entered last and the ladies went out first. Have you found any (see page 245, 1) book that you could recommend me? In no town of this country are there so many foreigners as in the capital. These jewels are of no value. None of your friends (has) said that you had not done your duty. He arrived in this town without having (Inf) any acquaintances here. Is there anything more precious than the friendship of a virtuous man? * In French: Tel maitre, tel valet Digitized by VaOOQlC Indefinite Numerals. 251 2. I go now and then to that house, and I sing now and again; I meet very few people there. You know me better than anybody else; how can you say that I have cheated my friends on (en) any occasion? Whatever ex- cuse he may proffer, I shall not pardon him. The whole town speaks of this accident. All over Earope one finds Englishmen travelling. I have listened to him with the greatest (toda) attention. Everybody that (has) seen it will say that I am right. All he said was the purest truth. Every sensible man will be of my opinion. Here you have your poems; I (have) read them all, but none has pleased me. You speak of everything, you judge of everything, and yet you know nothing. That is all (which) I have heard. The child screamed with all its might, and nevertheless the nurse did not awake. She has lost all she had, and yet even in her poverty she is a perfect lady, 3. She is not the same woman she was (que era) since (desde que) she has a private carriage. This (neuter) and that (n.) are not the same. I heard it myself, indeed, to-day, in this very place. The eount (has) told me so himself. Has the footman given it to you (thee) himself? No, he has not given it to me himself, the (maid-) servant gave it to me. Give me another book, the other book. Where are the other books? Have you not (got) them all? Yes, you (thou) have given them to me yourself. The coachman got five dollars, and the cook (f,) as much; the others got nothing. No, (indeed) you want (pide) too much, my friend. That is too much money for so little work. He has shown (to) his children too much tenderness. Have you wine enough? Thank you, sir, I have enough. Yesterday he lost ten dollars, and I gained (gané) just as much. Yesterday they spoke (with) me of a certain count Fabian; is he still here? The proverb says: Like mistress, like maid; like master, like man. Shall you come with me? Yes, (but) on condition that we return soon. Reading Exercise. De algunas costumbres de los Incas. Tuvieron los indios por costumbre traer las orejas hora- dadas, y el primero que lo usó fue Mango Capa, Inca, de donde todos proceden. Y visto después como este traía esta señal, y que habia sido valiente, usaron después los sucesores de ella, y otros muchos, asimismo, á quienes ellos daban li- cencia, por ser criados, ó allegados, ó parientes, como se dirá. Y tuvieron por grande blasón y nobleza esto, y asi lo tienen el día de hoy. La solemnidad y costumbre que entre ellos habia cuando se horadaban las orejas, y se hacían Incas (que Digitized by VaOOQlC 252 Lesson 7. es como cuando arma el Bey á uno caballero), es ésta. To- dos los que se habían de horadar las orejas venían donde estaba el señor, y todos allí juntos ayunaban treinta días (que era no comer sal ni ají, que son dos cosas que ellos más usaban en sus comidas, y usan el día de hoy). Vestíanse todos unas camisetas casi blancas, que tenían por delante una señal como cruz: y estas no las vestían en otro tiempo, sino para este efecto. Y á los quince días juntábanse todos, y subían á un cerro, el más alto que hubiese, ó iban corriendo, y los que más presto subían estos eran tenidos en más, y por más valientes y señalados. [Diego Fernandez, Historia del Perú.] Conversación. ¿Qué tenían por costumbre los indios? ¿ Por qué la usaron después los sucesores de Mango Capa? ¿Por qué lo tenían? ¿Qué cosa era hacerse Inca? ¿ Qué hacían todo? los que se habían de horadar las orejas ? ¿En qué consistía su ayuno? ¿ Qué se vestían ? ¿Se vestían esas camisas en otro tiempo? ¿Qué hacían á los quince días, y quiénes eran tenidos en más, y por más valientes? Seventh Lesson. Pronouns. (See Lesson 24, Part I.) Personal Pronouns. § 1. From numerous examples the learner will have observed that the personal pronoun in the nominative case is usually omitted before the verb, provided no stress be laid upon it, or that no misconception can possibly arise by this omission. Thus we should say: Yo trabajo más que tú, I work more than you (thou), be- cause here the comparison requires the personal pronoun. § 2. The form of address usted (V.) or its plural ustedes (VV., Yds,), is only omitted if it has been employed immediately before, so as to avoid every chance of a misconception, as: Digitized by VjOOQIC Pronouns. 253 Y, ha venido y me ha hablado mucho, Yott have come and (you) have spoken much with me. § 3. Concerning the position of the dative and accusative case of the conjunctive personal pronouns the general rules have been given, page 100, 2(b). Further particulars are here added. (a) Contrary to the general rules, the conjunctive pronouns are affixed to the verb if the latter begins the sentence, also in poetry and in literary prose, as: Alegróme f I rejoice. Porque alii llego sediento, Pido vino de lo nuevo; MidenlOy dánmelo, béíolo, Pagólo, y voyme contento: Parecióle ser ya tiempo oportuno. It seemed to him üi^t it was the right time (to be the r. t.). (b) These pronouns are rarely applied to the first and second persons plural. If the accent is on the ante- penultimate of the verb, they can never be affixed. Thus : ló8 mandaríamos, we should send them, but never **mandaríamoslo¿** • (c) In the case of auxiliary verbs used in a wider sense, the pronoun can either be put before these or be attached to the following gerund or infinitive— e.gf.; Iba buscándolo or Lo iba buscando. • He sought it (cf. Lesson 23, The Gerund). No me lo quiere decir, or: No quiere decírmelo, he won't tell me. Se estaba levantando, or: Estábase levantando, or: Estaba levantándose, he was rising. No he de decirlo, or: No lo he de decir, I shall not tell.' N.B. — In literary style, this practice is also admissible in the tenses compounded with haber, as: Habíanlo hallado, they had found it, but in conversation the auxiliary is always preceded by the . pronoun: . : , Lo habían hallado. (d) If an accessory sentence refers to a conjunctive personal pronoun in the dative or accusative case, the accessory sentence should be preceded by the absolute form of the same pronoun, as: Digitized by vaOOQlC 254 Lesson 7. Declaróte por mi heredero á tí que has tenido ingenio para entender el sentido de ¡a inscripción. I declare thee for my beir that hadst sagacity enough to understand the meaning of the inscription. (e) Sometimes for the sake of greater emphasis, a substantive in the dative or accusative, is placed before the verb, contrary to the general arrangement of words. In this case the corresponding personal pronoun should be added, as: Á mi padre no le conocí, as to my father, I did not know him (instead of: I did not know my father). Eso no lo sé, 1 do not know that (and not eso no se). § 4. Very frequently, even with good authors, the accusative cases lo and le are used indiscriminately. When speaking of things, we may, as we observed page 99, 1, substitute lo for le; thus: ¿ Ha visto V, mi libro ? No lo (or le) he visto. Have you seen my book? I have not seen it. If, however, the preceding substantive denotes a person^ le is decidedly preferable, as: ¿Quiere V. á su hermano? Si, le quiero mucho. Do you love year brother? Yes, I love him much. § 5. Notice how such expressions as " Ye English,'' ''We . . . both,'' are rendered in Spanish: Mase. Vamos loa dos juntos, let us go both (together). Fem. Vamos Ids dos juntas, » » » » » . Lds midieres queréis hablar iodo el dia. Ye women like to chatter all day long. Vosotros los médicos, ¿ qué sabéis ? You, doctors, what do you know? The same, if a relative accessory sentence follows a personal pronoun, as: You that know nothing. Los (fem. Itis) que no sabéis nada. § 6. Whenever in exclamations an adjective or an interjection is joined to a personal pronoun, the pro- noun should be preceded by de, as: ¡Desdichado de ml! Unhappy man that I am! ¡Desdichada de ti! Unhappy woman that you are! ¡Ay de mi! Woe to me! Digitized by VjOOQIC Pronouns. 255 Traducción. 8. 1. Have you studied the song which I brought (trcfje) you yesterday ? Yes, it is very pretty ; I (have) sung it twice this morning. You have written more than I, but I have drawn more than you. You have asked me, and you have got the answer (which) you desired; what more do you wish? I am very glad to see you here. I told (fr. referir) him [about] the accident, but he would not believe me. Let us go (fr. irse)\ If we had already received the books, we should have sent them to you. Have you found your hat ? No, I have been looking (§ 3. c) for it in my room and in yours, but I cannot find it. I went to see him at his house in order to ask him if he could lend me a book. I wrote him three times, but he would not answer me. 2. I appeal to you who have been my best friend. To that famous Greek called Ulysses they gave the surname of the Prudent. As for his brother, I never saw him. Have you read this novel? No, I have not yet read it. Have you (already) seen the author of the new play? I have not yet seen him; but the play, — I have seen it. "We shall both go to Paris," said the girls; "there we shall visit our uncle and aunt." Ye men are often more loquacious than (the) women. We who always work, we do not know weariness; but you, who do nothing the whole day, you are always complaining of weariness. Woe to you, reprobate (m,), if you dare to enter this house! "Alas (¿r. Woe to me)!" cried the peasant, "I have lost all my money!" Reading Exercise. Be algunas costumbres de los Incas. (Continuación.) Todos los treinta días, desde el primero hasta el postrero, se juntaban en la plaza del Cuzco, ó en las del pueblo donde se hallaban aquel año. Y sentábanse por su orden, y hacían sus calles, y venían allí sus parientes y hermanos y deudos, y á las veces sus caciques. Y ponían á cada uno de los que se habían dr.imcer Incas una lanza en las manos, las cuales tenían juntas, como cuando un cristiano está rezando, y en medio tomaban la lanza. Y luego decían á cada uno los padres, y sus parientes y caciques: «Mira que de aquí en adelante no seas vellaco; sirve y obedece bien á tus padres, y trabaja y no seas perezoso ; corre mucho y haz todo lo que te mandaren, con mucha diligencia, porque cuando te llamare el Inca para la guerra, ó para cualquier otra cosa, le sepa» servir». Ellos decían en respuesta que así lo prometían hacer, y acabadas de decir estas palabras dábanle cuatro azotes, en cada brazo uno, y en cada pierna otro, y él habíase de estar quedo, y no se había de menear, ni hacer muestra de senti- Digitized by Google 256 Lesson 8. miento, porque si se meneaba ó hacia muestra de dolerse, teníanle en poco. Llegado el postrer dia, sentábase el Inca en medio de toda la gente, y venían indios viejos, y maestros de horadar las orejas con sus herramientas, que para ello te- nían. Algunos de estos maestros lo hacían mejor, y eran más diestros, y no lastimaban tanto y dejaban los agujeros mayores. Luego les metían los anillos, y á los que eran hijos de caciques y señores poníanselos de oro, y de plata, y á los demás de madera ó de metal. Acabado esto, ofrecían sus padres ó parientes un carnero ú oveja, y matábanlo y sacábanle el corazón, y tomábale un hechicero y mirábale, y soplábale ; y 6Í el corazón estaba tieso, decía que aquel tal había de ser para muchOj y valiente, y que era buena señal ; empero, si el cora- zón estaba flojo, decía que viviría poco, y que aquel tal no había de ser valiente, ni para nada. El carnero que se ofre- cía partíase entre los padres y parientes de cada uno, y luego bebían y hacían sus borracheras. [Diego Fernandez, Historia del Perú.] ConversacióD. ¿Qué hacían cada treinta años? ¿Cómo se sentaban y que hacían? ¿Qué les ponían á los que se habían de hacer Incas? ¿Y qué les decían? ¿Y ellos qué respondían? ¿Qué les hacían entonces? ¿Cómo se habían de estar? ¿Qué hacían el postrer día? ¿ Cómo les horadaban las orejas? ¿Y qué les níetían en ellas? ¿Cuántas clases de anillos había? ¿Qué hacían después? ¿Qué decían los hechiceros? ¿Qué hacían por fin? Eighth Lesson. Demonstratires. — Interrogative Pronouns. (See Lesson 25, P. I.) Demonstratives. § 1. The principal difference between este and ese is that este generally refers only to the speaker or anything near him, whereas ese refers not only to the Digitized by Google Demonstratives. 257 person addressed* or things near by, but also to the sub- jects of conversation. The opposite of both is aqtid. From this difference it results that este should always be rendered by *'this/' and that esc frequently corre- sponds to the English "this . . . here/' whereas aquél is "that." Examples: Esta casa es más alta que aquella. This house is higher than that (house). JDéme Y, ese libro, give me that book near you, or: which you have in your hand. Esas palabras no las dije yo, I never said those words. La cuestión no es esa, that is not the case. Eso no es verdad, that is not true. N.JB.—Este and ese can never be used as contrast in translating the English the former, . . . the latter . . . ; which must be rendered by aquél . . ., éste . . . ; or more generally, éste . . ., aquél . . ., agreeing in gender and number with the words to which they refer. Compare: Los niños y las mujeres tienen derecho á la protección de los hombres, éstas por su debilidad, aquellos por su inocencia. Children and women have a right to be protected by men, the former on account of their innocence, the latter on account of their weakness. § 2. In English, it (or that) is very often used ab- solutdy—i.e., as the seeming subject of a sentence, whilst the real subject follows, as: It is my sister. In Spanish, the neuter form may only be used, if "that" refers to a whole sentence preceding, as: Eso es increíble, it (that) is incredible {viz,: what I heard or\ what I have been told, etc.). But, as in English: Esta es mi hermana, this (that) is my sister. Estas son mis esperanzas, these are my hopes. Esta es la Señora de A. y aquella es la Señora de N, This is Mrs. A. and that is Mrs. N. N,jB,— Position of the demonstrative. Though demon- strative adjectives precede the noun, they must follow it when, — for the sake of emphasis — this is affected by the definite article, also in exclamations with qué . ./ * The Italian cotesto. Spanish Conv.-Grammar. 17 Digitized by VjOOQIC 258 Lesson 8. Este libro . . . ., 6Í libro este^ this book. Esa casa la casa esa . . ., that house. Aquél amigo . ., el amigo aquel, that friend. ¡Qué hombre ese! what a man! ¡Qué muyer aquella! what a woman! § 3. We noticed (page 105) that the Spanish lan- guage often replaces the article by the demonstrative pronoun. This is the case when the demonstrative pronoun refers to a preceding substantive, as: My house and that of my neighbour. Mi casa y la de mi vecino. § 4. If the real subject of the sentence is not a single word, but an infinitive with its object, as: To see you happy is my greatest happiness, this infinitive in Spanish commonly follows and, if so, should be intro- duced by the article^ and de; the article, of course, agreeing with the preceding predicate. Thus: Mi única felicidad es la de ver á V, dichoso. My only happiness is to see you happy. § 5. The article used in lieu of the relative pronoun may also appear as a genitive or dative case, as: Prefiero este libro al que V, leyó ayer, I prefer this book to that which you read yesterday. ^.J5.— Formerly the preposition de was often contracted with este and ese into one word, as: deste = de este; destos = de estos; desa = de esa. These contractions are now obsolete. § 6. In English the reference to a foregoing sub- stantive or adjective is often not expressed. In Spanish the neuter article to is used: ¿Es V. la hermana de este señor? Are you the sister of this gentleman? Si, lo soy, yes, I am {i.e., the sister). ¿Sois los criados del conde? Are you the servants of the count? Si, lo somos, yes, we are (i.e., the sei-vants). Todos se precian de patriotas; y sin embargo de que muchos lo parecen, ¡ cuan pocos lo son ! All boast of being patriots, and though many seem to be such, how few are so! Hermoso fué aquel dia, y no lo fué menos la noche. Beautiful was the day, and no less {i.e., beautiful) was the night. Digitized by VjOOQIC Interrogative Pronouns. 259 Likewise, the reference to a preceding adverb is expressed by lo, as: Amadis fué él sol de los valientes. Siendo pues esto asíj como lo es, etc. Amadis was the star of the gallant (knights). This being as it is, etc. § 7. Note the following peeuliarities of the Spanish demonstratives: ¿(iué hay de nuevo en ésa? What is going on at your placed En ésta no ocurre nada. Nothing new is going on here. Los niños de estos días, children nowadays. Idioms : JEsta noche, to-night. Ése lo sabe, he knows it. Ni por esas, not even so. Ésta (or ésa) no se la perdono. I shall not pardon him for this. ¡A ése, á ése! stop thief [murderer]! No me ha dado ni esto. He has not given me even the smallest thing. JEn esto, at this time. ¿Hemos reñido ? — ¿Y eso ? We have quarrelled — Why? Me fui á eso de las cinco, I left about 5 o'clock. Interrogative Pronouns. § 1. Like que in French, the interrogative qué?, what? is often accompanied by de, if the following adjective is used substantively, as: ¿Qm hay de nuevo? What is the news? (Qu'y a-t-il de nouveau?) § 2. If in an exclamation qué precedes a substan- tive, it should likewise be followed by de, if more em- phasis is required, as: ¡Qué de envidia! What envy! ¡Qué de locuras! What follies! § 3. If qué precedes a substantive qualified by an adjective, tan is often inserted for the sake of emphasis, as: 17* Digitized by vaOOQlC 260 Lesson 8. ¡Oh, qué carga tan pesada! Oh, what a heavy burden ! / Qtfé mucha>cha tan hermosa es esta ! How beautiful this girl is! N,B,—Yqí tan may be omitted: ¡Qué hermosa muchacha es esta! § 4. As mentioned on page 106, cúyo"^ occurs as an interrogative pronoun (whose?); but the proper inter- rogative pronoun is preferable. Thus: Whose books are these? ¿Cuyos libros son estos? Or rather: ¿Be quién son estos libros? § 5. ¿Cuál? implies distinction between two or more persons or things; it always carries the written accent; as: Estoy leyendo una novela, — ¿Cuál? I am reading a novel. — Which one? ¿ Cuál es su sombrero de F., éste ó aquél ? Which is your hat, this one or that one? ¿ Cuál de los dos le gusta á F. mus ? Which of the two do you like best? Traducción. 9. 1. These flowers and yours (see § 3) are finer than those. Which hat do you want, this or that ? Give me that which you have in your hand. I have seen this picture and that; that pleases (fr. gustar) me better (más) than this. Father and son parted, the former to return to his lonely house, the latter to join his friends. This wine is bad ; this bread is good ; what bad wine ! what good bread (see p. 259, § 3., N.B.). — I never said those words, that is not true. These gentlemen and those have not been present at the ceremony. Is this your sister or your cousin? Neither one nor the other; she is my aunt. If these are all your wishes, they are very easily fulfilled {tr, to fulf.). Those are remarks which are not be- coming to a young man. He said he would not give the workman his wages; that is abominable. My cloak and that of my cousin Paul are made in the latest fashion. You say that he has told you (that) he came at 3 o'clock, but that * The relative cuyo is sometimes separated from its sub- stantive by the verb, as: El caballero, cuya era la espada. The knight to whom the sword belonged. Yet de quien is much to be preferred in such a case. Digitized by VaOOQlC Interrogative Pronouns. 261 is impossible. Who is that lady ? She is Miss Vallarino, and her companion is my sister's governess. 2. He has lost his fortune and that of his uncle. She has invested your money and that of her sister. My most ardent wish was always to see you friends. Do you speak of Mr. Estrada? I do not speak of (the) Mr. Estrada who lives here, but of him (tr, that) who is in Mexico. I prefer this wine to that which we had (tr, drunk) yesterday. What news have you heard ? Nothing of importance. What non- sense I How can anybody believe such a thing as that ? Oh, what a horrible crime! What meanness to do such a deed! How charming are the banks of the river! How majestic are the summits of these mountains! Whose gloves are these? They are those of the young officer who arrived with me yesterday. Are you the daughter of my old friend Sagasta? Yes, sir, I am. Were you satisfied (plur, f,) with your new dresses? Yes, Mrs. B., we were. Is this man really happy? To be sure he is. My dear mother, nothing new is going on liere ; Charles left and must be now at your place (see p. 259, § 7). I will write more to-night. They have quarrelled. Why? She begged and cried, but not even so. She will not pardon him for that. I left their house about 11. Which of the two do you think is right ? Which do you like best? Reading Exercise. Grandeiza y decadencia de España, España es país para todo, y también los españoles. Es- paña produce todas las materias necesarias para la vida, no sólo las de primera necesidad, sino aún las útiles y de deli- cia. España es, entre los descubiertos, el único reino que pudiera vivir con solos sus frutos, sin mendigar género alguno extranjero : pan, vino, legumbres, aceites, agrios, frutas, miel, cera, pescados, carnes, aves, caza, lana, seda, linos, cáñamos y minerales de todas especies. Estas son sus más abundantes producciones; y se hallan debajo de un clima sano, delicioso, de aguas muy saludables, y de ríos en gran número, y rodea- dos de dos mares. España tiene en sus dominios todas las materias simples que necesitan sacar de nosotros las fábricas extranjeras; á ninguna nación le sucede otro tanto. Y á Es- paña DO le falta, en fin, ni le ha faltado nunca, más que ser conocida. El cielo hizo mucho por ella; nosotros lo deshace- mos; á Dios le debe infinito; á nosotros muy poco. (To be continued.) [M. A. Gándara. — ^^ Apuntes sobre el bien y él mal de España,''] Digitized by vaOOQlC 262 Lesson 9. Coiirersación* ¿Qué clase de pais es Espafia? ¿Qué clase de gente son los españoles? ¿Qué produce Espafia? ¿Puede algún pais vivir con solos sus frutos? Pruébese con la descripción de las producciones y clima de Espafia. ¿Qué materias simples tiene Espafia? ¿Qué le falta á Espafia? Ninth Lesson. Possesstye and Relative Pronouns. (See Lessons 15 and 26, Part I.) Possessive Pronouns. Concerning the possessive pronouns we need add but one observation to what we stated in the first part of the Grammar — t;e>.; As the possessive pronoun of the third person sin- gular is alike in the masculine and feminine, a mis- conception might often arise, as in the sentence: This is his book and that is hers, or yours, Este es su libro y aquel es el suyo, where it seems doubtful whether "el suyo" means Ms, hers or yours. Hence the above sentence should be accor- dingly translated: Éste es su libro y aquel es el de ella. This is his book, and that is hers. Éste es su libro y aquel es el de usted. This is his book, and that is yours. N.B. — Idioms: lios míos, my people (family, friends, partisans). Le han pasado de las suyas, he has had many troubles. He de hacer la mía, I shall have my own way. Relative Pronouns. 1. The rel^-tive pronoun que is used for all cases if referring to things; with reference to persons, however, it may only be employed in the nominative and accusa- tive case. Que also does not take á if it is an accusative Digitized by vaOOQlC Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 268 and refers to persons. Besides de and á, other prepo- sitions may likewise be coupled with que, provided they are monosyllables. The preposition por, however, cannot be used before que*. Examples: Nam, La señora que mene, the lady who comes. Las señoras que vienen, the ladies who come. Ace. La carta \ .-., the letter \ ^hjch T received Las cartas] ^^^ ^^^^^^' the letters P^^^*^^^® ^®^^^^- Las señoras que he visto, the ladies whom I have seen. With prepositions : La casa de que le hallé á F. The house of which I spoke to you. El jardín en que he visto á V, The garden where (in which) I saw you. N.B, — The direct object que is never suppressed in Spanish; compare: I have read the book that yon | lent me, [ He lei do el libro que I have read the book you lent [ 7. me prestó, me, I 2. Que also occurs with the article, especially if preceded by two substantives, in which case it is used instead of el (la) cual, as: La señora me envió á un colegio de Cartagena, del que era directora una parienta suya, The lady sent me to a school in Cartagena, the head- mistress of which was a relation of hers. Note, — usually no comma is put before the relative pronoun. If it is, the meaning of the accessory sentence undergoes a slight variation. [A similar rule obtains in French.] The pupil is requested to compare the following sentences : Las señoras, que deseaban descansar, se retiraron. The ladies, who wished to repose, withdrew (here all the ladies wished to repose). Whereas : Las señoras que deseaban descansar, se retiraron, means: (Only) those ladies who wished, etc., withdrew. It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language that if que refers at once to two foregoing nouns of different gender, * Que corresponds to the French que and the Italian che, with the sole exception that these relative pronouns only refer to the nominative and accusative, whilst the Spanish que admits of other prepositions. Por is avoided before que, because por que (=z porque) means "because" and por qué, why? Digitized by VjOOQIC 264 Leeson 9. demonstrative pronouns should be added in order to distinguish these words, as: Adornaron la nave con flámulas y gallardetes que, éUos a/sotando el aire y eUas bescmdo las aguas, vistosí- sima vista hacían. (Cervantes.) They adorned the ship with pennons and flags which, the latter beating the air and the former kissing the waves, offered a splendid sight. Note,— Que if coupled with ser emphasizes the foUowing verb: ¡Es que no quiero! But I won't! (French: Cest que je ne veux pas!) ¡Es que no se trata de eso! We are not speaking of such a thing! ¡ 8i no fuera que teme ser descubierto! If it were not for his being afraid of discovery! N,B, — Que is very often met with in phrases such as: JBI que lo sepa que lo diga, let he who knows tell. JLa que lo sabe lo calla, she who knows it does not tell. Sea el que sea (or la que sea), whoever it may be. Sea el caballero (or la señora) que sea. Whatever gentleman (or lady) it may be. Suceda lo que suceda, whatever may happen. To soy el que lo dice. It is I who say it. JElla es la que lo sabe, it is she who knows it. La casa es la que arde, it is the house that is on fire. JRemarA;.— Finally, que being a weaker relative is used after quienquiera, cualquiera (compounds of quien and cual), which quien and cual cannot. Quienquiera (or cualquiera) que lo diga se equivoca. Whoever says it makes a mistake. 3. Quien (like the Italian chi) often corresponds to the English he who, people who, as: Hay quien* dice, there are people who say. Á quien está contento nada le falta. To him who is satisfied nothing is wanting. Quien — quien is an equivalent for the English some — , some — , or the one — the other, as: Quien lee, quien escribe; some read, some write. (Cual — cual is likewise used in this sense.) * Also in the plural, as: Hay quienes no tienen vergüenza, there art? people who are shameless. Digitized by VaOOQlC Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 265 N.B. — Quien is also found in phrases referring to per- sons, and similar to those above (see page 263, N.B.), though withont the article, as quien already means el que: quien lo sepa que lo diga, sea quien sea, yo soy quien lo dice. 4. Cual (without the article) expresses a comparison (see Lesson 26, Part I., page 110, § 4), whilst el (la) cual develops the meaning of the preceding sentence. In the former signification, it supposes a preceding tal, which, however, may be omitted, as: Esos hombres no son (tales) cuales se muestran. These people are not (such) as they show themselves. 5. Cuyo, -a, pi. -os, -as, as a relative pronoun, renders the Enghsh whose, and, like this, requires a substantive following, with which it agrees in gender and number, as: La madre cuya hija es tan laboriosa. The mother whose daughter is so diligent. El caballero cuyos amigos han llegado. The gentleman whose friends have arrived. Note. —Sometimes cuyo is also separated by the verb from the substantive to which it belongs, as: El caballero cuya era la espada. The knight whose sword this was {i.e., to whom this sword belonged). Bufc, at any rate, it is better, in sueh a ease {i.e., when speaking of persons or personified beings), to use de quien instead of cuyo. But if the substantive after the relative whose is the predicate of the accessory sentence, cuyo must be replaced by another relative pronoun. Thus we cannot say: El niño cuyo tutor él es, the child whose guardian he is, but only: El niño de quien or del cual es tutor. Observations. 1. If the relative pronoun is followed by a numeral referring to a preceding substantive, as in the sentence: The child looked at its apples, which were seven (i.e., apples), que is coupled with the corresponding article in the nominative case, as: Digitized by VjOOQIC 266 Lesson 9. He conn ted the dollars in his parse, which were eight. Contó los duros de su bolsillo, los que eran ocho. 2. Quien (see p. 264, n? 3) referring to things, though met with in ancient writers, is now quite obsolete and must not be imitated. Es un bálsamo de quien tengo la receta en la memoria. (Cervantes.) It is an ointment who?e receipt I have in my memorj. Es un bálsamo cuya receta tengo . . (or del cual tengo la receta . .). 3. Donde is used instead of a relative pronoun, provided it denotes a local circumstance, as: La ciudad donde or en donde vivo. The town where (or in which) I live. 4. Cuyo connects more closely an apposition with the word to which it refers, as: Tin porquero tocó un cuerno, á cuya señal se recogen los puercos, (Cerv.) A swine-herd blew a horn, at which signal the pigs go home. Vinieron algtmas embajadas, por cuyo motivo se detuvo. There came several embassies, for which reason he re- mained longer. 5. It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language to employ relative sentences, where the English use indirect questions or exclamations, as: No puede V, figurarse el dolor con que recibí esta noticia. You cannot imagine how much grieved I was to learn this news. Sé lo Men* que me quiere, I know how much he loves me. 6. The English in that ... to introduce an ex- planatory sentence, is rendered by its Spanish equi- valent en qiie; but in referring to a previous sentence, by en lo que, en Jo cnal. Compare: Animals differ from () plants in that they feel and move, or: by their being capable of feeling and * Querer bien, to love, lit. to wish the good of somebody. French: Le bien qu^il me veut. Ital. II bene che mi vuole. Digitized by vaOOQlC Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 267 moving, or: by sensation and motion, (French: en ce quHls sentent et se meuoent.) Los animales se diferencian de las plantas en que sienten y se mueven. Pueden los relativos no sólo reproducir un concepto pre- cedente sino anunciar un concepto subsiguiente; en lo que no se diferencian de los otros demostrativos. The relative pronouns are not only capable of reproduc- ing a preceding idea, but they can also indicate a following notion, wherein they do not differ from the demonstrative pronouns. 7. If the relative sentence is but a periphrase of a substantive in the nominative case, the definite article €Í ^should precede que, as: Parecieron estas condiciones duras ; ni valió, para hacer- las aceptar, el que Colon propusiese contribuir con la octava parte. These conditions seemed bard, and it was of no avail Colnmbus proposing (= Columbus' proposal was of no avail) in order to have them accepted, to contri- bute with the eighth part. Again, relative sentences which imply an accusative case are introduced in this way, as: No podia yo mirar con indiferencia el que se infamase mi doctrina. I could not see with indifference how they calumniated my doctrine (= the calumniation, detraction, etc., of my doctrine). 8. If which refers to a whole foregoing sentence, it is rendered by lo que (French : ce qui; It. il or lo che), as: Los reos fueron condenados al último suplicio, lo que causó un sentimiento general. The culprits were condemned to death, which caused a general sensation. 9. The exclamative *'how" or "how much" is very often lo . . . . que, and then the adjective takes its place between lo and que. Now it may occur that the adjective is feminine, when the pupil might easily be misled to consider the somewhat strange form (lo . . a) incorrect, which is by no means the case. Example: Asi se ve lo generosa que eres. Thus one sees how generous (fern.) you are. Digitized by VjOOQIC 268 Lesson 9. This must be understood thus: Asi se ve lo que (how much) tú eres generosa. Traducción. 10. 1. Yesterday I saw your friends and mine. I cannot at once comply with his wishes and with hers. He wrote a long letter to his relations and to hers. These are his flowers and those are hers. He has had many troubles, because he always had his own way. (See page 262, N.B.) Who are the gentlemen that come there ? They are the two merchants of whom I spoke to you. I thank you for the kindness with which you have always treated me. Have you read that book I lent you ? Yes ; the friend you know wants to read it. (See page 263, N.B.) To him who is hungry, any meal pleases (le gusta). Have you thought of (en) what you have promised me ? Mr. Silvela lives at the beginning of the street in which the house of (the) General Moya is situated (fr. hallarse). You behave like a man (pronoun) who knows no- thing. He who flatters you, wants (fr. querer) to cheat you. (The) one prefers (the) work, the other (the) idleness. (The) one pretends this, the other something else. These people are as you have depicted them to me. The workman whose child is 80 ill, is (tr. finds himselQ in the greatest distress. Let him who knows how to do a thing do it, whoever it may be. Who- ever may come, tell them that I am not at home. And if it should be that lady? Whatever lady it may be. It is I who say it. Do your duty, whatever may happen. 2. The tulips whose colours are so brilliant, have no smell. The girl whose aunt you saw here yesterday will now live in our house. The boy whose godfather he is, gives him much trouble (dar disgustos). He attentively observed the members of the family, who were seven. The little girl joyfully counted her dolls, of which she had received four. The house where we live stands in the middle of a beautiful garden. He had to pay seven hundred dollars, which sum he could not raise for the moment. She asked her money from him, for which reason he resolved to (á) sell his house. You cannot imagine with what great joy I accepted this proposition. If you knew how much (lo bien que) she loves him, you would not doubt (of) her sincerity. Now, one could see how malicious the servant (f,) had been. I cannot de- scribe to you how afflicted my mother was at this news. Beading Exercise* (jhrandeza y decadencia de España, (Continuación.) Doscientos afios hace que comenzaron flamencos, ingleses y franceses á aprender de nosotros el arte de las fábricas, á Digitized by vaOOQlC Adverbs. 269 sacarlas, tomarlas y llevarlas de España á sus países; y ésta fué la época en que dio principio nuestra decadencia. En el siglo diez y seis daban nuestras fábricas la ley en tres cuar- tas partes del mundo. En todas ellas tenían factorías nues- tros comerciantes españoles. El increíble número de telares que contaba España, es cosa repetida en muchos escritos an- tiguos y modernos. Pero lo más notable es que con todo el esmero de su esquisita aplicación, aún no han llegado todavía estas industriosas naciones á dar á los bordados, telas de seda, tisúes, y tejidos de oro y plata, aquella perfección, permanen- cia, solidez y hermosura que, después de doscientos años, to- davía se admiran hoy en los nuestros. Los ornamentos de altar que Felipe II donó á la sacristía del Escorial, fabricados en Sevilla, etc., y que se conservan en ella, expuestos á la disposición de quien quiera verlos, responden de esta verdad. (To be continued.) [M. A. Gándara. — '* Apuntes sobre el bien y el mal de España,'*] Conversación. ¿Cuándo principió nuestra decadencia? ¿Cuál era el estado de las fábricas españolas en el siglo dieciseis? ¿Han llegado Flandes, Inglaterra y Francia á igualar nuestros bordados, etc., de entonces? ¿Qué era lo distintivo de aquellos bordados, etc.? ¿ Dónde pueden probarse esas verdades ? Tenth Lesson. Adrerbs. — Their position. — Affirmations and Negations. In addition to the treatment of this Subject in Part I. (Lessons 30th, 31st) we further add: 1. Peculiarities of certain Adverbs. Adverbs of Place. (a) Adonde instead of donde, where? is now obso- lete. In modern speech it means only where-to, as: El lugar adonde nos encaminamos. The place where we go to; whereas: El liigar donde residimos, the place where we live. Digitized by VjOOQIC 270 Lesson 10. (b) Donde may be used as a relative or as a con- junction in such sentences as: La ciudad por donde transitábamos. The town through which we passed. Que to haga, donde no, que le castiguen. Let him do it, otherwise, let him be punished. Adverbs of Time. (a) Cuando cannot be a relative, and must be re- placed by en que to render wlien in sentences such as: Hay dias en que todo sale mal. There are days when everything goes wrong. N.B. — However, in referring to another adverb of time, it renders the English relative that in such sentences as: Ayer fué cuando la vi. It was yesterday that I saw her. Mntances fué cuando me lo dijo. It was then that she told me. (b) Cuando as a conjunction— i.e.: ¿Cómo se lo he de dar cuando no lo tengo? How can I give it to him if I have not got it. Adverbs of Manner. Note the peculiar meaning of the following adverbs. ¿ Cómo no se lo dijo V. ? Why did you not tell him? Es cierto, como que lo vi yo, it is true, for I saw it. Como soy Juan [in strong assertions]. As true as my name is John. ¿A cómo se venden? How much do you sell them at? Eran cotno unos veinte. There were about twenty of them. Tráigame V. agua bien caliente. Brint; me some water very hot. Bien se lo decía yo á V., I told you so. Ha^e V. mal en hacer eso. You are wrong in doing that. Mal podrá decirlo, si no lo sabe. He cannot say it, since he does not know it. MeQor que mejor, so much the better. Peor que peor, so much the worse. ¡Así lo maten! I wished they would kill him I Digitized by vaOOQlC Affirmation and Negations. 271 AH lo tncUen no lo hará. He will not do it, even if they kill him for it. Asi como asi, anyhow. 2. Position of the Adverb. Regarding the position of the adverb, we now add the following rules: (a) Proper adverbs are generally placed after the verb and before the direct object — Le., the accusative case (see Less. 15, Part II.: The Direct Object). Thus: Mi amigo no ha llegado todavía. My friend has not yet arrived. Su amigo de V, ha ganado siempre mucho dinero. Your friend has always gained a great deal of money. Observation,— \t must be distinctly understood that if the verb is in a compound tense, the adverb can never be placed between the auxiliary and the past participle, bat always follows the latter. A construction like: ha siempre ganado, would therefore be erroneous. (b) Adverbial locutions follow the direct object, as : He Uido su carta de V, con mucfia €Uención, I have read your letter with great attention. The above observations are understood of the con- struction when regular. As, however, the Spanish language abounds in inversions — i.e,, deviations from the regular construction — mauy exceptions are met with in the works of Spanish authors; for emphasis, euphony, distinctness, and elegance of speech often require another arrangement of the words than that of the regular construction. 3. Affirmations and Negations. The simplest affirmation is si, yes. Si and no are seldom used alone, but generally accompanied by señor, señora, señorita, hijo, hija, hombre, mujer, amigo, etc., according to the degree of respect or familiarity be- tween the speaker and the person spoken to. Instead of St, the word ya (already) is also used as an affirmation (like giá in Italian) if the speaker supposes that the meaning of his answer is already known to the person addressed, as: Yes, I recollect, ya me acuerdo. Digitized by VjOOQIC 272 Lesson 10. The simple affirmation or negation is made more emphatic by the addition of que, as: I say neither Yes nor No. No digo ni que si ni que no. Note,— The student will not forget that, as stated on p. 136, the first negative particle ni may be omitted with neither — nor, as: No debe V, (ni) decirlo ni escribirlo. You shall neither tell nor write it. Observation,— The English student must bear in mind that the English practice of answering simply with "Yes, I do" or "No, I do not," etc., is by no means admissible in Spanish. Here the answer is either simply SI, señor, or No, señor, or a complete sentence added to the negative particle, as : Did you see my brother to-day? Yes, I did. No, I did not, ¿ Ha visto V, hoy á mi hermano ? Sí, señor, le he visto. No, señor, no le he pisto. Only the verbs ser, estar, and hacer sometimes show a certain resemblance, though only a seeming one, with the English construction. Examples: Are you the mother of this child? Yes, I am. ¿Es V, la madre de este niño? Si, lo soy. Are yon ready? Yes, I am. ¿ Está V, pronto ? Si, estoy pronto. Did the shoemaker make my shoes? Yes, he did. ¿Hizo el zapatero mis zapatos? Si, los hizo. It is easily understood that in Spanish these verbs are not atixiliaries, as in English, but principal verbs, with pre- dicates or objects of their own, which is not the case in Eng- lish; and therefore the English and Spanish constructions are totally different. As already stated (Lesson 31, Part I), in Spanish the negations never, nothing, none, nobody, etc., may be used with the preceding particle no. But this is only the case with the regular construction. As soon as the negation itself begins the sentence (by inversion), no is omitted as superfluous; thus: No como jatnás en esta fonda, I never eat at this inn. Ese vil perezoso no hace nada. This vile idler does nothing at all. No verá V, hoy á nadie. You will not see anybody to-day. Digitized by VaOOQlC Affirmations and Negations. 273 Whereas: Jamás como en esta fonda. A nadie le gusta recibir consejos. Nobody likes to receive advice. Nada me agrada^ nothing pleases me. Note.—Ji the English no or not any is rendered by nin- guno or (no) alguno, the position of these two words should be carefully observed. Ninguno always precedes, algimo follows the accusatvve to which it belongs. Thus: No le confiaré á 7. ningún secreto, or: » » » » » secreto alguno, I shall not entrust you with any secret. No more, if the verb has an accusative (direct ob- ject), is y a no, as: Ya no tengo dinetH), I have no more money. If, on the contrary, the verb governs no accusative case, it is no — más, as: I shall lie (tell a falsehood) no more, no mentiré más; or, rendered more emphatic by the addition of nunca (never): ya no mentiré nunca más. If no more (or not . , , any more) means as much as "wof again," it may be rendered by no with the cor- responding tense of volver with á, as: I shall lie no more, no volveré á mentir; do not come to my house any more, no vuelvas á entrar en mi casa. If only or but refers to a number, as : "I have only six dollars," it is translated no — más que, as: I have but (only) ten dollars. No tengo más que dieis duros. (Je n'ai que . . ,) In aU other cases but (or only) is no — sino, as: I travel but rarely. No viajo sino rara vez, N,B, — But and only are also rendered by solamente, sólOf meramente, etc. In exclamations más que is also met with, as: ¡Más que nunca vuelva! If he but never returned! (God forbid he should ever return!) Traducción. 11. 1. Where are you going? Tell me, otherwise I shall not let you go. How can I tell you if I do not know it my- self? There are occasions when one does not know what to do. It is now that I do not understand you, as true as I am here. So much the better. Are you here at last? Yes, I Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 18 Digitized by VaOOQlC 274 Lesson 10. am ready. How do you think about {tr. what do you say of) this demand? I say neither Yes nor No, for I do not know whether Mr. Moreno is right or wrong. I never got a letter from you, and I never (have) heard that you had written to me. I never write in twilight, because I am afraid to injure my eyes. Did you write to Mr. Marino? Yes, I did. Shall you come this evening? Yes, I shall. Are you the tutor of these young gentlemen? Yes, I am. Never, shall Í forget what you have done for me! Why do these young people not work? They have nothing to do, because you have not given them anything to do. I saw nobody when I entered the house. 2. Nobody has arrived by (en) (the) train. Tell nobody that I have spoken with you. You are a queer fellow, my dear friend; nothing pleases you, you do not feel sympathy with anybody, you treat everyone unkindly, and yet you want everyone to treat you (tr, that everyone treat [St^j.'] you) politely and affectionately. I always avoid intercourse (el trato) with a man that has no friends. Have you some wine left (tr. still some wine)? I have no more. You have cheated me, therefore I shall not believe you any longer (more). Pardon me, sir, I shall not do it again (tr. no more). I had but two hundred dollars. I write only in the morning; in the evening I have no time to write. Have you given him only 12 pesetas? He has not asked for more; if he had asked for more, I should have given him more. Beading Exercise. Grandeisa y decadencia de España, (Continuación.) ¿Y España, no es país para fábricas? ¿Puede oírse esto sin compasión? ¿Qué Londres, qué París, qué Nimes, ni qué Lyon han igualado á las fábricas antiguas de Toledo, Granada, Sevilla y Segovia? Si exceden hoy á las actuales (en que no hay controversia) ya se ha indicado el motivo en que consiste: y se dirá más todavía para que en pocos años se queden muy atrás, si se practicare lo que yo propondré en estos apuntes. Damascos ha hecho la piedad del Rey fabricar en Talavera para adornar una capilla del Escorial, que no pueden ceder á ningunos de Europa. ¿Pero qué ha de suce- demos, si cuando más hacemos, quitamos un par de grillos de los pies del comerciante, labrador, fabricante, ó navegante, y en el mismo acto le amarramos por la cintura con una ca- dena mucho más fuerte? y no obstante decimos: «camina ade- lante, que ya tienes los pies sueltos.» Él no da paso, ni puede ; y luego se dice : « \ ven ustedes que España no es país para esto! . . .» (To be continued.) [M. A. Gándara. — i< Apuntes sobre el bien y el mal de España.»\ Digitized by VaOOQlC Prepositions. 275 CourersaciÓD. ¿Es Espafia pais para fábricas? Pruébese. ¿Dónde se fabricaban los damascos? ¿Eran notables? ¿Qaé sucede pues, j por qué no adelanta Espafia ? Eleventh Lesson. Prepositions. As stated in Part I., the Spanish prepositions are either proper prepositions, being simply placed before the word to which they refer, as: sobre los montes, over the mountains, or they are adjectives, substantives, par- ticiples, etc., coupled with a preposition, and thus pro- perly prepositional locutions, as delante de testigos, be- fore witnesses. 1. Proper Prepositions. Among these, á, de, en, para, and por offer the greatest difficulty; we will, therefore, consider each of tiiem separately. Á, at, in, to, etc. 1. The predominating idea of this preposition is direc- tion, aiming at a point, therefore motion to or towards, as: Ir al correo, to go to the post. Tirar al blanco, to shoot at the target. Volverse al principe, to address oneself to the prince. 2. Thus, action: Empezar á andar, to begin to walk. Ponerse á leer, to begin to read. JEntregarse á los placeres. To give oneself up to pleasure. 3. Again, it impUes the majiner of an action or state, as: Á mi modo, in my (own) way. Á la turca, after the Turkish fashion. A lo militar, in a military fashion. Á sangre fría, coolly, in cold blood. Cara á cara, face to face. 4. With transitive verbs, to point out the direct object, if a person or a personified thing: 18* Digitized by VaOOQlC 276 Lesson 11. Amar al prójimo^ to love the neighbour. Aborrecer á alguno^ to hate someone. Temer á la muerte, to fear death. Thus, to distinguish the personal from the im- personal object, as: Bar una cosa á alguno^ to give someone something. Permitir algo á otro, to allow anyone anything. 5. Time and place of an action or state, as: El mendigo está á la puerta. The beggar stands at the door. Á las diez, at ten o'clock. Al anochecer, at nightfall. 6. The price of something, as: Á dos pesetas kilo, 2 pesetas a kilogram. 7. Instrument, means, and cause, as: Matar á hierro, to kill with the sword (lit. iron). ^ fuerza de armas, by force of arms. Á instancias de sus amigos, at the request of his friends. 8. A with the infinitive replaces an accessory sen^ ence beginning with when or if, as: Á verla V. diría, if you could see her (or when you saw her) you would say. [French: A la voir, rows diriez.'] 9. Besides, á is met with in a great number of peculiar expressions, mostly adverbial locutions, to be foimd in every good dictionary. Such are: Á sabiendas, wittingly, purposely. Á ojos cerrados, blindfold (lit. with closed eyes). A saiga lo que saliere, at random, at haphazard. De. 1. jDe is frequently the opposite of a. Its pre- dominating idea is possession, motion towards the speaker, material, and origin. Examples: El jardín de mi tío, the garden of my uncle. Mi primo viene de Madrid, my cousin comes from M. Un reloj de oro, a gold watch. El hijo del capitán, the son of the captain. 2. Again, the end of an action: Acabar de comer, to finish dinner. Dejar de estudiar, to leave off studying. Cesar de Hover, to stop raining. Digitized by VjOOQIC Prepositions. 277 3. With reflective and passive verbs or participles to point out the agent of a reflective or passive action, almost always equivalent to por (by, with, at): Ofenderse de algo, to be hurt (offended) by something. Querido de sus amigos, loved by his friends. Sorprenderse de %ma cosa, to be surprised at something. 4. Thus, the cause of an action or state, as: Ciego de furor, blind with fury. 5. Extent: Este cuarto tiene 12 pies de ancho y 16 de largo. This room is 12 feet wide and 16 feet long. 6. Qualities ascribed to a person under certain circumstances*, as: Trabajar de sastre, to work as a tailor. Hacer de intérprete, to officiate as an interpreter. De is preferred if a peculiar distinction of a person or thing is denoted, as: El hombre del gabán verde, the man with the green coat. La niña de los ojos azules, the girl with the blue eyes. Francfort del Main, Frankfort on the Main. 7. After the names of days^ months, titles^ dignities, etc. Examples : La dtidad de Toledo, the city of Toledo. El mes de enero, the month of January. El titulo de conde, the title of count. ^.-B.— With mountains and rivers de is only used, if the attribution is a proper nams or an appellative noun, as: El rio de San Lorenzo, the river St. Lawrence. El rio de la Plata, the river La Plata (silver). If this is not the case, de is omitted, as: El rio Duero, the river Duero. 8. It is a pecuHarity of the Spanish language** that in exclamations a substantive is often joined by de to the following proper name or appellative noun denoting a person, as: * Chiefly after the verb estar, as: El conde de B. está de embajador en París, Count B. is ambassador at P. ** In German likewise: „S)er 2:5I|)eí t)on ^utfd^err ^a)a8 Sommerbilb t)on SDilenfd^cn!* „S)er Glacier ton ©taat!" Digitized by VjOOQIC 278 Lesson 11. ¡El pobre de Bocinante! Poor R.! ¡La loca de Elvira! That foolish E.! ¡El ladrón del* criado! That thief of a footman I 9. With de are formed a great many locutions, as : de baJde, gratis; de miedo, for fear; de veras, in truth; vestir de verano, to dress in summer clothes; de camino, on the way, etc. The cases where de is coupled with a foregoing adjective, substantive, or verb are so manifold that we refer the pupil to his dictionary. For those who are somewhat acquainted with the language, we recommend the excellent work of V. Salvá*"^. Bn. 1. The predominating idea of this preposition is residence in some place. It therefore denotes a state of repose, as: Estoy en ntt cuarto, I am in my room. En su casa de Y., in your house. Mi primo vive en Paris, my cousin lives in P. 2. It likewise denotes direction, but diflfers from the synonymous á in so far as it also conveys the second- ary idea of penetration into, as: El criado entró en mi cuarto, The footman entered (into) my room. La piedra cae en el agua. The stone falls into the water. 3. With verbs of motion, to express the means of conveyance: Ir en ferrocarril, to go by rail. Viajar en vapor, to travel by steamer. But, á pié, on foot; á caballo, on horseback. 4. Moreover, en denotes an epoch at or within which something happens, as: En el mes de enero, in (the month of) January. En el año de 1880, in the year 1880. En breve, in a short time. But, á las diez, at 10; por la noche, in the evening. * With appellative nouns the article is commonly affixed to de. ** The full title of Salvá's Work is, Gramática de la lengua castellana según ahora se habla, ordenada por Don Vicente Salva; Paris, Gamier Hermanos. Digitized by VaOOQlC Prepositions. 279 Note,— En is not used, if a demonstrative adjective, a numeral, or the definite article precedes the respective day ol the week, the month etc., as: FA diez de octubre, the 10th of October. ¿Irá V. á ver á mi tic el miércoles? Shall you come to see my uncle this Wednesday? 5. Again, en denotes the cause as well as the pur- pose of an action, as: Lo hizo en provecho de su patria. He did it for the benefit of his country. Le mató en venganza del ultrage.* He killed him in revenge of the offence. Un discurso en memoria del rey, A speech in memory of the king. 6. With some adjectives denoting skill, superiority, and their contraries: Hábil en todo, skilful in everything. Superior en calidad, of a superior quality. 7. The manner and kind of an occupation, as: 8e ocupa en cazar, he is busy hunting. Trabajar en plata, en oro, to work in silver, in gold. Negociar en tabaco, to deal in tobacco. 8. En precedes the infinitive governed by a sub- stantive with haber (where the French use il y a), as: Hay dificultad en decirlo. There is a difficulty in telling it. 9. When before a substantive which occurs tunee, it denotes continuation or repetition^ as: De dia en dia, from day to day. De hora en hora, from hour to hour. 10. Finally, en is used after a great many ad- jectives and verbs, of which we give those most in use. The adjectives are: lento and tordio, slow; versado, versed, experienced; exacto, exact; and the verbs: comerciar and traficar, to deal, to transact; insistir, to insist; meditar, to reflect; pensar, to think (of something); perseverar, to persevere; tardar, to tarry; vacilar, to stagger, to totter; alucinarse, to be mistaken; emplearse and ocuparse, to occupy oneself; mezclarse, to meddle with. * = "outrage" (French and English). Digitized by VjOOQIC 280 Lesson 11. 11. Idioms with en are: En estOy at this moment. En voz hoja, in a low voice. Beber en una taza, to drink out of a cup (in a cap*) etc. N.B.—En comiendo f se vá. No sooner he finishes dinner, he leaves. JEn Uegando le veré. I will see him as soon as I arrive. Con. It expresses: 1. Accompaniment, cooperation, state, contact: Ir con alguno, to go with somebody. Vivir con otro, to live with someone. Trabajar con alguno, to work with somebody. España confina con Francia. Spain lies adjacent to France. Estar con un constipado, to have a cold. 2. Manner, instrument: Vivir con economía, to live economically. Hablar con dulzura, to speak softly. Pescar con caña, to fish with a rod. Tocar con los dedos, to touch with the fingers. 3. Disposition towards: Llevarse bien con otro. To be on good terms with another. Afable con los niños, kind to children. N.B,— 'Conmigo, contigo, with me, with you (thee). General Remark.— K peculiarity possessed in common by the prepositions á, con, de, en is that of their being used after verbs beginning with such prepositions— i.e.; Acercarse á, to get near to. Acostumbrarse á, to get used to. Combinar una cosa con otra. To combine one with another. Colaborar con otro, to collaborate with another. Contentarse con algo. To be pleased (satisfied) with something. * French: hoire dans une tasse. Digitized by VjOOQIC Prepositions. • 28 1 Depender de las circunstancias. To depend on circumstances. Encastillarse uno en su opinión. To stick to one's opinion. Tradncción. 12. 1. Shall you go (fut,) to the theatre to-night? No, I am going to the concert and afterwards to my friend Bastinos's who gives a hall to-night (baile esta noche). The dog stood before the door and barked. At nightfall we arrived at Ma- drid. It began to rain and did not stop raining. The ladies were dressed after the English fashion. I should like to speak with you (in private) face to face. Allow me to finish dinner. These cherries are sold (reñect.) (at) one real a pound. At the prompting (A instancia) of my friends I have bought the house. If one hears him, one thinks that he is right. I should find the way to your house blindfold. Stay with us to supper. He conld not move for the cold. This tower is (has) 200 feet high and 40 feet wide. His brother worked long (tr. much time) as (a) joiner at Paris. We shall disguise ourselves (disfrazarse) as gardeners and go to the badl in this costume. The president's brother is (estar) interpreter at the embassy at Athens. The girl with the fair hair has spoken to the gentleman with the brown cloak. 2. In the month of March he obtained the title of Mar- quis. This rogue of a lawyer (has) made me pay two hun- .dred dollars. In my room you will find ink, pens, and paper. Last year in (the month of) May we travelled to Paris. Ere long (in a short time) I shall write to my cousin (f,). On Tuesday there will be (habrá) a ball at the count's. It is generous to speak on behalf of the oppressed. Tou have done it to your own damage. The merchant deals in sugar and coffee, wine and oil. Why will you give vent (desfogar) to your anger on me ? I did not think of offending you. It was dangerous to speak. There was danger in speaking the truth to a favourite. I am waiting from day to day, but no letter is forthcoming (no llega carta). He waited hour after hour (for) the return of his friend. The just man is always slow to punish. It is a disgrace not to be acquainted with (no estar uno enterado de) the history of one's country. Do you still think of going (Infin,) to Italy ? It is sometimes a dan- gerous thing to meddle with other people's affairs. With whom do you live? Are you coming with me? I am going to fish with rod and line (hilo y caña). He is not on good terms with her. He is in bed with a cold. Get near the fireplace, it is cold. No, thanks; I am used to cold weather. Would you be satisfied with that? It would depend on () cir- cumstances. Digitized by VaOOQlC 282* Lesson 12. ReadiDgr Exercise. Grandesa y decadencia de España, (Continuación.) La nación española es nación de mucho honor, dócil, fiel, obediente j amantisima de sus Soberanos. Sn carácter es vivo, pronto, esforzado, constante, especulativo y penetrante. Por la senda del honor se la conduce hasta lo sumo. Los Beyes Católicos y el famoso Jiménez (por no volver más atrás) que quisieron teólogos, jurisconsultos, capitanes, estadistas y políticos, todos los hallaron con superioridad á las demás na- ciones. Sus obras doy por garantes. Carlos V deseó capi- tanes y estadistas : jamás vio la Europa un Consejo de Estado como el suyo, y nunca hubo príncipe que tuviese tanto nú- mero de generales insignes. Felipe II anheló toda suerte de hombres sobresalientes en todas líneas, y en todas se aventa- jaron sus vasallos. El Concilio de Trento lo dirá. Felipe III quiso santos, y los altares se poblaron. Felipe IV amó poetas, y el Parnaso se declaró español. La débil complexión de Carlos II no le permitió pensar en nada, y en España nada hubo. El Rey Felipe quiso capitanes y eruditos, y en un instante se formaron de la nada: no digo hasta lo sumo; pero digo hasta más allá de aquel punto que permiten los instantes. ¿Si probarán estas expresiones que todas las cosas dependen de los Gobiernos? (To be continued.) [M. A. Gándara. — ^Apuntes sobre él bien y el mal de España,*] Conversación. ¿Qué clase de nación es la española, y cuál es su carácter? ¿Cómo se la puede conducir? Pruébese que en cada época ha producido España los hombres que sus Reyes necesitaban. ¿Á qué pregunta puede dar origen este hecho? Twelfth Lesson. The Prepositions continued. For and para (i.e., por á), on account of their common origin, are sometimes misleading. It will, therefore, be worth stating that por denotes cause, whilst para means purpose. For. 1. It denotes the intrinsic motive or the criteriofi of an action, as: Digitized by vaOOQlC TJie Prepositions continued. 283 La mvjer lo hizo por vanidad. The woman did it from vanity. Lo sé par experiencia, I know it by experience. N,B, — Where par denotes purpose, the preposition para may be used in its stead, as: Callaré por (or para) no dar disgusto á V, I shall be silent, that I may not vex you. 2. A certain quality attributed to a person or a thing, as: Tomar la mar por patria, to take the sea for one's home. Becibir á uno por maestro, to take one as a tutor. Tener á uno por docto. To consider a person to be learned. 3. The price of anything, barter, or in general an act of exchange, as: ¿ Cíiánto pide V, por este sombrero ? How much do you ask for this hat? Compré mi casa por 10,000 duros, I bought my house for 10,000 dollars. No daré mi lápiz por tu pluma, I shall not give my pencil for your pen. Trabajo por mi amigo. I work in place of my friend (or for my friend's sake). Trabajo para mi amigo. I work on behalf of my friend. 4. A certain place, direction, as well as repose, as: Pasar por la calle, to go through the street. Fui por París á Londres, I went by Paris to London. Echar por tierra, to throw to the ground. Perdí mi dinero por esta calle, I lost my money in this street. 5. Por used with the passive voice* indicates the argent, and is translated by by or through, as: Fué muerto por otro de una puñalada. He was killed by another by a thrust with a poniard (he was stabbed). If the English passive voice is rendered by the reflective verb, por should be used, as: * Generally speaking, por is an equivalent for the French par, whereas para corresponds to pour. Digitized by VaOOQlC 284 Lesson 12. Aqud busto se hizo por un gran escultor. That bnst was made by a great scalptor. 6. Again, por denotes timey answering to the ques- tions **when?" and "how long?" as: JPor la tarde, la mañana, la noche. In the afternoon, the morning, the night. Hemos hablado por una hora. We talked for an hour. Le he prestado á V. el libro por una semana. I lent you the book for a week. 7. Certain parts of anything may be denoted by por, as: Coger por la mano, to seize by the hand. Asir por el brazo, to seize by the arm. El perro cogió al toro por la oreja. The dog seized the ball by the ear. Lo tomó por el mango, he took it by the handle. 8. Por frequently answers to the question howF thus implying manner or means, as: Tor orden alfabético, in alphabetical order. Tor fuerza, on compulsion. Lo supo por él criado, he knew it from the servant. Marchar por compañías, to march by companies. 9. Por often corresponds to the English for, when it means in favour of, as: Combatir por la patria, to fight for one's country. 10. After verbs importing motion, as ir, enviar, etc., por indicates the object of the motion, as: Ir por pan, to go for bread. Enviar por d vidriero, to send for the glazier. 11. Whilst estar para implies an impending futu- rity, something about to happen, estar por expresses that something has not yet happened, as: Las peras estfin por madurar. The pears are not yet ripe (i.e., must still ripen). Las casas están por alquilar*. The houses must first be let (they are not yet let); on the other hand: * Estar por used with the Ist person expresses a desire of this person to do something, as: Estaba por abofetear al palurdo. I had a mind to give the impudent fellow a box on the ear. Digitized by vaOOQlC The Prepositions continued. 285 Las casds están pa/ta alquilar. The houses are to let (they can be had at any moment). (See under ;para No. 5.) 12. With an adjective, por corresponds to the Eng- lish "however," and requires the subjunctive of the verb following with que, as: Par hermosa que sea esta señora. However beautiful this lady may be. Bor grandes que sean los reyes, Dios es superior á ellos. However great kings may be, God is greater than they. 13. Far with the infinitive mood is an equivalent for an accessory sentence denoting cause, as: Por ser yo tu amigo, as I am your friend (being y. f.). Se le recompensará par haber cumplido con su obligación. He will be rewarded for having done his duty (because he, etc.). Here, just as in the example under No. 1: (Callaré por no dar disgusto á Y,) por expresses the reason, and its sentence takes the place of a single substantive, as is frequently the case in Spanish. See Lesson 21, n.<^ 4, Part II. Para. 1. To indicate purpose and destination, advantage and prejudice, as: 8e come para vivir, one eats in order to live. Este libro es para V, This book is for you (destined for you). Partiré para España, I shall set out for Spain. La casa está para vender, the house is to be sold. Lo he hecho para un amigo, I have done it for (the benefit of) a friend. Lo hizo para engañarme. He did it in order to deceive me. J^.^. —After ir (to go) á should be preferred; 2iñ&r partir and salir, to depart, to set out, hacer vela, to set sail, á like- wise obtains, but para is preferable, as: Ir á Inglaterra, to go to England. Salgo para Madrid, I start for Madrid. Hieo vela para Málaga, he sailed for Malaga. Fartir para (seldom á) Inglaterra, To start for England. Digitized by VjOOQIC 286 Lesson 12. 2. To denote the time when an action will be per- formed or something will happen, as: Me pagará V, para San Juan. You will pay me on St. John's day (Midsummer). JPara siempre*, for ever. 3. Frequently para restrains the meaning of the predicate to a certain subject or object, as: Tengo para mi, I, for my part, am of opinion. El general legó la relación para si. The general read the report to himself (in private). 4. "In proportion" or "comparatively" is commonly rendered by paray as: El niño es pequeño para su edad. The child is small for its age. N.B. — Para should be followed by con if the comparison lies between two different subjects, as: ¿ Quién eres tú para con tu hermano ? What are you in comparison to your brother? Fara con likewise signifies for or towards, with reference to a person**, as: No tengo reserva para con mi madre. For my mother I have no secret. Era mug paternal su conducta para con Francisco. To Francis he behaved very much like a father. If "in proportion" or "proportionally" is not followed by a substantive, but by an accessory sentence, para lo que is employed, as: V. no pagó el sombrero pa/ra lo que vale. * You have not paid for the hat in proportion to what it is worth. 5. Coupled with estar, the preposition para denotes that something is impending*"^*, as: Estamos para salir, we shall go out directly. Esiog para acabar, I shall have done presently. 6. Frequently para is joined to an infinitive or par- ticiple, instead of an accessory sentence denoting condi- tion, as: * But also: Por siempre. ** Where the French often use vis-a-vis and envers. *** In Italian essere per or essere in procinto, sul punto di . . . Digitized by vaOOQlC The Prepositions continued. 287 Tara decir verdad no le he visto á V. To speak the truth (= if I shall speak the truth), I have not seen you. Es difícil para aprendido de memoria. It is difficult to learn by heart. If para with the infinitive does not replace an accessory sentence, it means "in order to," as: Para escriMr es menester . . . In order to write, it is necessary ... Tradaecién. 18. 1. On par. He acted thus from pride and supercilious- ness. For (jod*s sake (par amor de , , ,) do not speak in this way I One might think that you said so only from envy. In order to (give) do my friend (a) pleasure, I at once im- parted (to) him the news. He may say what he pleases, no matter how much (par muchoque) he affirms it, I shall not believe him. The Count has adopted his nephew as [a] son. I sold my library for 800 dollars. I gave hira my "Cervantes'* for his "Lope de Vega." This morning when I passed (on pass- ing by) the great square, I met my tailor, who had promised (me) to bring my new coat yesterday. Why (did) have yoa thrown the water on the ground ? I did it by accident. The boy was run over (atropellado) by a carriage. We were in- vited to (the) dinner by the aide-de-camp of the prince. The works of this poet are admired by everybody. I have lent him the money for two months. He seized me by the shoulder and pretended that I had taken the money. Tou must not take the dog by the tail, else he will bite you. With mild- ness we often obtain more than with severity. I knew of your arrival from my aunt. The soldiers marched by com- panies. Do you go for wine or for beer? Send for the physician; the child is ill. The house and garden are (still) to he sold. The linen must still dry. However rich (the) men be, they are seldom satisfied. However nice this child be, it also has its faults. I had a good mind (Estaba por) to tell him. As there is [a] great deal of (mucho) wine in this country, the commerce in this article is very lively. 2. On para. Are these flowers for you or for your sister? This garden is not to he sold (active voice). Shall you travel to France or to Italy? I do not say the word^ that I may not betray myself (tr, me). Do you go to Toledo or to Madrid? I shall go to Madrid. He has bid me fare- well for ever. I shair write to you at Christmas if you are still at Paris then. The girl read the letter by herself. I find that it is little money for (in comparison with) such Digitized by VaOOQlC 288 Lesson 12. great pains (sing.). What is the creature in comparison with the Creator? I am a beggar in comparison with that prince of the Exchange. For (one's) friends one must not have se- crets. What he spends (gastar) is little in comparison with what he earns. We were on the point of (leaving) departing by (fche) rail (road) when we got your letter. I was on the point of setting out when your aunt arrived. I do as much as I can, in order to gain the esteem of my equals (mis semejantes.) For being (i.e., considering it was) sung from memory, the song was very correctly sung. — If I am to speak my mind (tr. to speak freely), the comedy did not please me. — In order to please, it is necessary to be ami- able and good-natured. He who works for his family is an honest man. Reading Exercise. Grandeva y decadencia de España. (Continuación.) Guando las Castillas solas ponian cómodamente cuarenta mil caballos bizarros en campaña, no habla las ordenanzas que hoy; pero había libertad, labranza y crianza. Tampoco había caballería andaluza; ésta era batida por la castellana. Los ejércitos de nuestros augustos soberanos no se sirvieron de caballos andaluces hasta el reinado de don Juan II. Al- fonso Yin, rey sólo de las dos Castillas, para coronarse de laureles en las Navas de Tolosa, revistó en Toledo 40,000 caballos castellanos, pagados á cinco reales cada uno; 130,000 infantes á tres, sin contar algunos tercios de infantera que aún no habían llegado: y 60,000 carros de provisiones, equi- pages y bagajes, que ocuparían, á lo menos, 140,000 ca- ballerías; y algunas irían de carga, aunque la historia no lo dice. Á este respecto, no sería mucho creer que la España de entonces, considerada en toda la extensión que domina hoy la corona de Castilla, podría poner hoy en campaña desahoga- damente 120,000 caballos, con 400,000 infantes, y 200,000 carros. Y al presente costaría buen trabajo sacar de las Castillas 6,000 caballos, con 50,000 infantes efectivos, y 20,000 carros. Esta cuenta gira sobre el supuesto de que las dos Castillas compongan una tercera parte de las Españas unidas hoy, que no la componen. (To be continued.) [M. A. Gáná&r&.—* Apuntes sobre el bien y el mal de España.y^] " Conyersacién. ¿Cuántos caballos podían poner cómodamente en cam- paña las dos Castillas? ¿Por qué? ¿Había entonces caballería andaluza? Digitized by VjOOQIC Prepositions. 289 ¿ Cnándo empezaron á servirse los Reyes de la caballería andaluza? ¿Qné ejército revistó Alfonso VIH antes de la batalla de las Navas de Tolosa? Thirteenth Lesson. Prepositions. (Conclusion.) The following are the other simple prepositions in their alphabetical order: 1. Ante, before — i.e., in the presence of^ as: ante d rey^ in the presence of the king; ante sus ojos^ before his eyes. Ante denotes time and order only in ante todo or ante todas cosas, before any other thing, before all. Aqtiende (obsol.)» bere, on this side, and aUende, there, on the other side, are properly adverbs, although used as prepositions, as : Aquende el mar, on this side of the sea ; allende el rio, on the other side of the river. {Allende de is quite antiquated. It means more than = además de, etc.) 2. Contra, against, implies opposition or resistance, contact^ as: No hay remedio contra la muerte. There is no remedy against death. Dio contra la pared. He knocked against the wall. It rarely refers to place, as: Mi casa está contra el (better frente al) palacio. My house is situated opposite the palace. 3. Desde, from, is the contrary of hasta (see 6), and denotes the point of departure, as: Desde Paris hasta Yiena, from Paris to Vienna. Desde may be used of time as well as place: Desde ayer, from yesterday (till . . .). N,B,—li not the point of departure, but duration is intended, de may be used instead of desde; in which case to is rendered by á: e,g,, from 3 to 4, de las tres á las cuatro, 4. JEntre, among, between, from, denotes space, time, and number (French parmi), as: Spanish Cony.-Grammar. 19 Digitized by VaOOQlC 290 Lesson 18. Entre ayer y hoy, between to-day and yesterday. Entre doce y veinte, from (between) twelve to twenty. EfUre et jardín y la casa, between the garden and the house. 5. Hdoia, towards, denotes direction, but without the accessory idea of aim; also an approximate time^ as: Hacia el poniente, towards the west. Hada medianoche, towards midnight. 6. Hasta, till, as far as, denotes limit as to space, time, or number, as: Hasta el mar, as far as the sea. Hasta las once, till 11 o'clock. Tengo hasta 2,000 libros, I have some 2,000 books. N.B. — When used as an adverb, hasta means even, as: Hasta las miÁJeres pelearon, even the women fought. Hasta no más signifies to the utmost, 7. Según, according to, conformably, agreeably, expresses the conformity of a circumstance, as: Según las historias, conformably to the histories. Según las circunstancias, according to circumstances. Según factura, as per invoice. 8. Sin, without, differs from the English preposition in so far as it may never be used as an adverb: Sin duda, without doubt. N,B.— Tiene otras casas, sin esas. He has other houses, besides those. 9. So, under, is now almost obsolete, and occurs in but few locutions, as: So capa, so color, so pretexto, under pretext. So pena, upon pain of ... . 10. Sobre, on, upon, denotes height and superiority in the proper sense as well as figuratively, as: Sobre la mesa, on the table. Sobre todos los vicios, worse than all vices. Sobre cien duros, more than a hundred dollars. When used with the names of places, it likewise denotes vicinity, as: Anochecer sobre Valladolid, To arrive at nightfall near Valladolid. El rey I)(on) Sancho murió sobre Zamora, King Sancho died before {i.e., at the siege of) Zamora. Digitized by vaOOQlC Improper Prepositions. 291 Moreover, it expresses the subject of a book, an essay, etc., as: Un libro sobre la inmortalidad del alma, A book on the immortality of the soul. A higher rate of something, as: Sobre el salario^ over and above the salary. A security or warrantship, as: Creer sobre palabra, to believe upon (one's) word. A repetition with the accessory idea of reinforce- ment, as: Escribir carta sobre carta, to write letter after letter. And finally an approximate time, as: Vino sobre las ocho, he came about 8 o'clock. N.B, — Sobre ser caro, es malo, it is bad besides being dear. 11. Tras, behind, after, implies time and space, as: Tras los montes, behind the mountains. Tras el verano viene el otoño. After (behind) the summer comes the autumn. 2. Improper Prepositions. These were originally either adjectives or substan- tives with prepositions or adverbs. With the only ex- ception of bajo (see 3), they all require cle after them. They are: 1. Acerca de, about, relating to, in reference to, concerning. It is only used in referring either to per- sons or matters, as: Le hablé acerca de éso, I spoke to him about it. ¿ Qué piensa V, acerca de él ? What do you think about him? 2. Antes, before, denotes time and order, as: Antes del otoño, before autumn. Antes del dia, before daybreak. Antes del rey, before the king {e.g., marching before the king). N.B.— Antes y con antes, long before. 3. Bajo, under, underneath, below, beneath, as: Bajo protesto, under protest. Bajo la rodilla, beneath (under) the knee. 19* d by Google Digitized b 292 Lesson 13. N,B,^Bajo may be followed by de, as: Bajo del brazo, under the arm. 4. Delante de . , ,, before (of space), but also in presence of, as: Delante de testigos, before witnesses. Delante de la puerta, before the door. Vive delante de la iglesia, he Uves opposite the church . 5. Dentro de . . ,, within, as: Dentro de las murallas, within the walls. Dentro de sí mismo, within him- (her-, it-) self. Dentro de ocho dios, within a week (8 days). 6. Después de, after, behind, imports time and order, as: Despides de sus días, after his death. Uno después del otro, one after another; one behind the other. 7. Encima de, on, upon; besides, as: Encima de la mesa, on (upon) the table. Encima de la carta, above (upon) the letter. Le regañan y endma le pegan. They grumble at him and, besides, they beat him. 8. Fuera, outside, without, beside, as: Fuera de la puerta, outside the door. Fuera de hora, oat of time. Estar fuera de sí, to be beside oneself. As observed with reference to para con (p. 286), a preposition may be coupled with another preposition in order to modify the original idea. Thus: De á, each of, as: Dos barriles de á cien libras, two casks, each of 100 pounds. De debajo, from under, as : De debajo de la mesa, from under the table. De entre, from between, as: De entre las piedras, from between the stones. De hacia, from, as: De hacia los montes, from the moun- tains {Le,, in the direction from the m.). Por entre, between, as: For entre la reja, between the trellis or grating (direction). For endma de, over, as: For endma de la mesa, (to pass, to throw, etc.) over the table. For detrás de, from behind, as: For detrás del árbol, from behind the tree. Digitized by VjOOQIC Improper Prepositions. 293 Traducción. 14. 1. We are not speaking about that. Concerning that • I know nothing. I will see him about it, he spoke about you. Make the payment as per invoice. There are many reasons besides (tr, withotit) that. He dare not (no se atreve) (to) appear before my eyes! Before all things (todo) I tell you that you are mistaken. The maniac thrust (did) (with) his (tr. the) head against the wall. Quinine is an excellent remedy against fever. He has married the lady against the desire of his family. He knocked his head against the wall. I accompanied him from his house to the bridge. We must suffer from the cradle to the grave. Even among robbers there is still a law. There is a great difference between him and his father. There came between (from) 50 to 60 soldiers. The suburb is situated towards [the] west. Go on (Ade- lante)*; there you will find room enough. Towards 9 o'clock I shall come home. We stayed with your brother till 8 o'clock. To meet soon again! (Hasta luego,) Even the children laughed at the nonsense (which) he told us. One noust always act conformably to (the) circumstances. In con- sequence of the treaty, the town belongs to the king. Ac- cording to the law, he deserves a severe punishment. Your father will he now above 70 years old (tendrá). That is in- sipid beyond [all] measure (manera). Vice exercises a great dominion {dominio^ m.) on (the) man. Is this a book about hunting or about fishing? The church is built on the top of a hill. Besides their salary, the actors sometimes receive a special payment (i.e., gratification) if they perform (tror bajan). He lent me 10 dollars on my ring. 2. We sent one messenger after another, but he did not come. At last, about 8 o'clock, he appeared, and besides being late he grumbled. Beyond {tr. behind) the mountains there are also people, my dear friend. Why do you not shut the door behind you? I have come even {tr. still) before the appointed time. Long before. Three pages walked be- fore the duke. The garrison did not surrender on {tr. under) such conditions. The soldier was wounded below the elbow. What shall you do before the trellis? He confirmed the truth before witnesses. Do write to me within a fortnight {tr. 15 days)! Within my house I am king. After an absence of seven years, I returned (fr. volver) to Vienna. After the Po, the Tiber is the greatest river of Italy. Put the books on the chest of drawers! Do you see that little bird on the * ^'¡Adelante cm juicio (= judgment)"! = "Drive on cau- tiously 1" — words of Ferrer, the governor of Milan, to his coachman during the riot (Manzoni, «I Promessi Sposi»). Digitized by VjOOQIC 294 Lesson 13. roof? God be thanked, now we are out of danger! He tagged the dog from under the bed. The thunderstorm came from the direction of (de hacia) Valencia. The robber stepped forth from behind a column. Beading Exercise. Grandeza y decadencia de España, (Continuación.) Y para que nadie se admire de esta diferencia de fuerza, sepan todos que, mucho más inmediato á nosotros, en el año de 1563, en la feria de Medina del Campo solamente, se tra- ficaron y giraron en letras de cambio más de 150,000,000 de escudos. En los afios anteriores habia sido mayor el tráfico. Las ferias consimiles que entonces se celebraban por todo el reino, eran muchas, y muchos los millones de millones que se comerciaban cada año. Cotéjense con las contrataciones de hoy. T afiádase á esto, para convencimiento general de las cosas, tanto de mar cuanto de tierra, el número increíble que á todos consta de las embarcaciones mercantiles que habia en solo el puerto de Pontevedra, reducido hoy á cuatro tristes pescadores; y de los millones de fanegas de pan que se cogían en España, y resulta de las tazmías eclesiásticas. Sueños pa- recen estas realidades ... Dv s siglos ha que está bajando España, y dos siglos ha que están subiendo sobre nuestras caídas, errores y desaciertos, primero Holanda, luego Ingla- terra, y después Francia. ¿Cómo, pues, no han de haber as- cendido ellas á la cumbre de la felicidad, y descendido noso- tros al abismo de las desdichas? A la verdad han sabido aprovecharse bien de las ocasiones que les hemos presentado; y en esto merecen elogio . . . (To be continued.) [M. A. Gándara.— «J|)Mníc5 sobre él bien y el mal de España.^] Conversación. ¿ Qué hecho explica esta diferencia de fuerza ? ¿Había muchas ferias entonces? ¿Por cuanto se comer- ciaba en ellas? ¿Cuál era una de ellas? ¿Era notable el puerto de Pontevedra? ¿Cuál ha sido la causa de la decadencia de España? ¿Qué naciones han subido mientras España ha bajado? Digitized by VjOOQIC Use of Conjunctions. 295 Fourteenth Lesson. Use of Coigunctions. Connective Conjunctions. Y (and). In a series, between the two last, in reading out numbers, between tens and units; between two words alike to translate the English after or many and many a in similar cases: El padre, la madre y el hijo. Tbe father, the mother, and the son. Limes, miércoles y viernes, Mondays, Wednesdays, and Saturdays. 1900, mil novecientos; 891, ochocientos noventa y uno. Horas y horas, hours after hours. Libros y libros, many and many a book. At the beginning of sentences, such as: ¿ Está V, contento ? — Y mucho. Are you pleased? — Very much indeed. / T qué frió hace! How cold it is! N,B,— Hablo de él y no de Y,, or Hablo de él, que no de Y. I am speaking of him, and not of you. Hi (neither, nor). It may follow a sentence with no, or y no, or ni, or even stand by itself at the beginning of a sentence, but cannot be followed by no. In such sequence of compound negations, no, y no are used only with verbs, whilst ni is used with any part of speech: No le he msto, ni le veré hoy. I have not seen him, nor shall I see him to-day. Entró, y no me dijo nada, ni yo tampoco. He came, and did not say anything, neither did I. No tiene ni dinero ni salud. He has neither money nor health. Ni ayer, ni hoy, neither yesterday nor to-day. Ni él, ni yo, neither he nor I. ¿Le ha visto Y.? •— Ni le veré. Have you seen him? — No, neither will I see him. Ni eUa misnia sabe lo que quiere. Not even she herself knows what she wants. Digitized by VjOOQIC 296 Lesson 14. yi siquiera me ha hablado. He did not even speak to me. i^.J?.— JVI may be immediately followed by the negatives ninguno, nadie, nada, nunca, as well as follow them, which no may not: No lo sabe ni nunca lo sabrá. He neither knows it, nor will he ever know. yi él ni nadie, neither he nor anybody. Nadie, ni él; nobody, not even he. Disjunctive Conjunctions. ó (or). Between the last of two or more disjunctive parts of a sentence or clause; or before each of them, if emphasis, distinction, etc., is required, or verbs are introduced, or distribution is implied: Vendrá hoy é mañana. He will come either to-day, or to-morrow. ¿8e queda V., 6 viene? Are you coming or are you going to stay here? Ó v., é él, uno de los dos. Either you or he, one of the two. Ó no lo sabe, é no lo quiere decir. Either he does not know or will not say. To denote approximate number: Tiene veinte ó veintiún años. She is twenty or twenty one. Habia ocho ó diez personas. There were eight or ten (about eight or ten) people there. In conjunction with sea^ be: Sea v., é (sea) él, it may be either you or he. N.B.— Ó lo has hecho tú, ó él. Either you have done it or he has. Ó tü, 6 él, lo habéis hecho. Either you or he has done it. Adversative Conjunctions. Sino (but). To correct a statement by turning a negative sentence into an affirmative one. If a verb is introduced in the latter, sino que is employed: Digitized by VjOOQIC Use of Conjunctions. 297 La huena crianza no es obra de da naturaleza, sino el fruto de una huena educación (or sino que es el.. .). Good behaviour is no work of Nature, but the result of a good education. No lo dijo él, sino ella, or No lo dijo él, sino qtie lo dijo ella. It was not he, hut she tliat said it. No lo sabe, sino que lo aparenta. He does not know, he only pretends. No sólo habla bien, sino que escribe muy elegantemente. He does not only speak well, but he also writes very elegantly. No — sino corresponds also to the English but or only, as: No viene sino raramente, H-í comes but seldom (Ital. Non viene se non rara- mente). No espero sino que te vayas, 1 only wait till you are gone. As seen by these examples, the principal sentence sihonla likewise be negative. JPero (but). To introduce distinction without deny- ing a previous statement, which may be either affirma- tive or negative. JPero may he followed by a nrgative, and be the first word of a sentence, or even stand by itself, which sino may not: Lo dice, pero no lo cree. He only says it, he does not believe it. No sabe mucho^ pero habla bien. He does not know much, but talks well. Pero ¿por qué?, but why? N.B.—Es malo, pero malo, it is very bad indeed. Mils (but). To denote either opposition to what immediately precedes, or a consequence differing from that which one might have expected, as: Lo dice Tácito, mas no convienen con él los otros historiadores, Tacitus says so, but the other historians do not agree with him. Mas no porque las ciencias sean el primero, deben ser el único objeto de vuestro estudio. But although the sciences be the first object of your study, they must not be the only one. Digitized by Google 298 Lesson 14. N.B. — JPero aiKl mtis are much the same thing; the former is more used in the colloquial language, the latter in literary style. Aunqiie (though, although^ even, in spite of) in hypothetical sentences is followed by the Subjunctive, as : Aunque lo sepa, no lo dirá. Even if he knows, he will not tell. No lo haga Y, aunque él se lo diga. Do not do it, even if he asks you. Also aun cuando, even if: Aun cuando lo sepa, no lo dirá. No lo haga F. aun cuando él se lo diga. Cuando (provided, on condition, if; even, though), also precedes the Subjunctive in hypothetical sentences, as: Ctuindo no lo sepa V., pregúntelo. K you do not know it, ask. Cuando venga Y., tráigalo. Bring it when you come. J^r.5.— However, in speaking oí positive facts, the Indi- cative, not the Subjunctive, is used: Aunque lo sabe, no lo dice. He knows, but does not tell. Cuando viene, lo trae. Whenever he comes, he brings it. No lo hace aun cuando él se lo dice. He does not do it, although he tells him to. Adversative conjunctional phrases are: Sin embargo. no obstante, con todo, no por eso, nevertheless, notwithstanding. «oto ^e, \ J ^i^^j solo si que, f ^ Conditional Conjunctions. Si (if). It requires the Conditional or the Imperfect of the Subjunctive if the condition appears only possible or dubious, as: Si estudiaras (estudiases), te querría mucho más. If you would study (learn), I should love you (much) more. Digitized by VaOOQlC Use of Conjunctione. 299 Si esto fuera asi, yo lo consentiría. If it were so, I should consent. In this case the sentence expressing the condition may be contracted into an infinitive with á, as: A ser esto asi, yo lo consentiría. If ¡t were so (it being so), I should consent. N.B.—Si with the Present of the Indicative expresses also condition: Si viene, que espere, if he comes, tell him to wait. But if the condition rather than such is something con- sidered as certain or universally known, the Indicative follows, as: Si aspiréis á ser docto, estudia. Study, if you wish to be learned. Si hay malos. My buenos. If there are wicked people, there are also good. N,B, — The following are further uses of si with the Indicative: ¿Si lo sabrá? I wonder if he knows it. No me ha dicho si lo sabe ó no. He has not told me whether he knows it, or not. No lo dirá si le aJwrcan, He will not tell, even if they hang him for it. Como, when signifying if, unless^ or / wonder if, requires the Subjunctive; but meaning as, or in question- ing, the Indicative, as: Cébe de hacer frió, it must be cold. Tengo que escribir muchas cartas, I have many letters to write. 8u hermano de F. ha de estar enfermo. Your brother must be ill. Observations,—!. A construction not rarely met with, is ihe dative of the personal pronoun with es preciso, followed by the infinitive, as: Me fué preciso hacer eso, I was obliged to do so. (French: il me fallut faire cela.) 2. The English *'oughf' is likewise rendered by es me- -nester, etc., or by deber, etc. If this verb is followed by the Compound infinitive (as: you ought \o have given), it is trans- lated by the imperfect Indie, or by the corkditU>nal of the Sut)j,', I>ébía (or debiera) habérmelo dicho. He ought to have told me so. Tradneción. 17. 1. He was run over by a carriage. He was taken to the hospital. He has been buried to-day. His death will be greatly (muy) felt. Listen to me : "English spoken here." •'Carriages lent on hire," "apprentice wanted," "it is said," etc., are always rendered (se traducen) by se. Yes, I understand, verbs "to permit," "to allow." Dejar should always be followed by the infinitive of the active verb : Dejó m>atar (or que matasen) á aquél hombre. He allowed that man to be killed. • In French: 11 faut travailler, and: II faut que ¡es femwes travaillent. Digitized by VjOOQIC 816 Lesson 16. but let us go out this interval. But we cannot. Why? Be- cause "no re-admittances are given.** Though he is a verj old man, he is a good walker (use ser de). Have you (ge- nerally) a good appetite? What has become of your friend? In order to become clever, it is necessary to have intercourse with clever people. The boy said : '*! will become an officer." My sister was {tr, became) very glad when she heard this news. At first he was sad (afligido) y and afterwards he be- came merry, without any reason. Not every acorn becomes on oak-tree, and not every soldier a general. This man be- came richer every year. Who will be (become) the first of the class? If you want to become (a) merchant, you must first of all learn order and diligence. You will turn out a spend- thrift if you (go on like that) continue in the same way. Jacob Lafitte was (became) at last a great banker. Tell me, what has become of the servant (whom) you had last year? When we heard this, we were (became) much surprised. (The) spring is coming; the trees are getting green. Do you know that your father is growing rather (muy) old? Do not be deceived {tr. Do not let yourself deceive) by (the) appearances. Why do you not let the dog come in? Tell the footman to come in. The emperor ordered the culprit to be put in- to prison. 2. Where do you (Por quién . . see 4) have your linen washed (i.e., who washes y. 1.)? I shall send him word that I am (estoy) engaged. It is to be hoped {tr. it lets itself hope) that we shall have fine weather. That is easy to assert (lit. : it is easy to assert that), but difficult to prove. It is not said {lit.: it cannot be said) that you are not right, but yet I do not believe it. Where have you had this coat made? My neighbour will have his house freshly painted. One must always speak the truth. You need* only com- mand (mandar)y and it will he done (tr. hacerse) directly. The children must go to bed at eight o'clock and get up at six. I must stay at home to-day, for I have yet to do my task. Our friends must be abroad, for their house is shut up. You ought to have waited for me, for you knew for certain {tr. certainly) that I should come. You ought not to have done so (it) if you did not wish deeply to afflict your poor father. ♦ "To need" and "to want" are often rendered as shown by the following examples: Necesitamos dinero^ we want some money. No hay más que hablar ^ one only needs to speak. "Ought" is sometimes translated by necesitar ^ as: V. hubiera necesitado descansar. You ought to have reposed. Digitized by VjOOQIC Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs. 317 Reading Exercise. Grandeza y decadencia de España. (Continuación.) La codicia inconsiderada del oro 7 plata americana em- pobreció la riqueza natural de España: oro y plata la des- poblaron: oro y plata la convirtieron de industriosa en ocio- sa: oro 7 plata destruyeron su labranza, crianza, fábricas, artes é industrias: oro 7 plata trasmutaron en esterilidad su .abundancia, 7 en carestía la baratura de sus víveres: oro 7 plata, extraídos del reino, la hicieron pobre. De la pobreza de los particulares resultó la indigencia universal 7 las nece- sidades del Erario: de ésta, la ruina de los vasallos 7 sus pueblos: de sus atrasos, el general de la monarquía; de éste, el de los miembros. Una á otra se dio la mano. Crecieron los gastos, el lujo 7 las obligaciones de la corona, cuando eran menores los medios de asistirla, fomentarla 7 auxiliarla. De esta misma indigencia se derivó el aumento de tributos, impuestos 7 arbitrios, que fué redoblar 7 remachar el mal. Una carga superior á las fuerzas conclu7Ó en de8ma7o, aban- dono 7 holgazanería. Y de estos antecedentes resultó (7 necesitó resultar por consecuencia necesaria) toda la actual que padecemos en todas líneas. En una palabra, nosotros ba- jamos por aquel principio mismo que hizo subir á los demás, 7 todo ha provenido de una conducta contraria á la natura- leza del bien; de sistemas, digo, opuestos á la conveniencia del Estado. (To be continued.) [M. A. Gándara.— «^pMwfeí sobre él him y el mal de España,^] Conversación. ¿Qué empobreció la riqueza natural de España? ¿Qué hicieron el oro 7 la plata? ¿Qné resultó de todo esto? ¿Por qué se aumentaron los tributos? ¿Y de estos antecedentes que resultó? ¿Por qué bajamos? Seventeenth Lesson. Pecnliarities of some Spanish Yerbs. With some verbs idioms are formed which in Eng- lish must commonly be periphrased with adverbs, etc. Tho^e most in use are: 1. Acahar, to finish, to terminate, is commonly rendered by just, just now, also by to have done, as: Digitized by VaOOQlC 318 Leeson 17. Acaban de llegar, they have just arrived. Acabo de leer, I have done reading. Sometimes acabar corresponds to the English finaUy, at lasty and fuUy, as: Acabar de resolverse, to resolve finally, at last. Acabar de entender, to understand fully, entirely. Acabar de conocer, to know at last. No acabar may be rendered in diflPerent ways, as: No acababa de maravillarse,* Lit.: He could not leave ofiF wondering = he was quite amaeed, etc. Acabar con uno, to kill a person. 2. Acertar^ to gain, to carry one's point, answers to the English "to be able," as: No acertó á resolver qué hacer. He could not determine what to do. Sometimes it expresses a casualty or contingency and is an equivalent for to happen, as: Acerté á pasar, I happened to pass. Acertar con alguno cosa means: to guess. 3. Alcanzar, to reach, to overtake, has very nearly the same meaning as acertar; thus: No alcancé á persuadirle, I was not able to (I could not) persuade him. No alcanzo como pueda ser eso. I cannot understand how that could be. 4. Cansarse, to get tired, when negatively employed, imphes (like no acabar) that an action is going on^ as: No se cansaba de hablar. Literally: He did not grow tired of speaking = He went on or kept speaking. 5. Bar, to give, like echar (see this verb, 7), ex- presses the sudden and instantaneous beginning of an action or a state, as: El niño dio á reir, the child began (suddenly) to laugh. (Besides, dar forms a good many idioms, for which the pupil is referred to the dictionary): Dar las gracias, to thank. Dar los buenos dias, to wish (one) good morning. * In French: II ne finissait pas de ^émerveiller. Digitized by vaOOQlC Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs. 319 Bar la enhorabuena, to congratulate. Bar el pésame, to condole with. (Ir á) dar un paseo, to go for a walk. Bar las doce, to be striking 12. Bar que decir, to cause people to talk. Bar de bofetadas. To give a sound smacking on the face. Se ha dado á la bebida (á las diversiones). He has taken to drink (to amusements). 6. Dejar, to let, joined to the participle, chiefly in commercial style, is equivalent to an auxiliary verb, as: Bejé acreditado en cuenta, I have credited the account. (On dejar, to let, see the preceding Lesson.) Bejar dieho, to leave word, to have already stated. Bejar de hacer una cosa. To leave off doing something (i.e., not to do it). No dejar de hacer una cosa. To go on doing a thing (i.e., to do it). 7. Echar, to throw, is often synonymous with dar (see 5), as: Echar á correr, to start running. Se echó á llorar, he began (all at once) to cry. Echar de ver means "to behold, to get a sight of"; echarla de escritor, to pose as a writer {Echar, too, forms a great many idioms). 8. Estar para, followed by the infinitive, corresponds to the English ''to be about," ''to be upon the point of," *'to be going to," as: Estaba para decirle, I was going (I was about) totell him (see p. 286, n.® 5). Note the following, among many idioms: Estar de cumpleaños, to be one's birthday. Estar de luto, to be in mourning. Estar de paseo, to be out for a walk. Estar en candelero, to be a high wig. 9. Gustar, to please, to relish, when negatively em- ployed, means "to dislike," as: No me gusta ese hombre, I dislike that man. 10. Haber de (see the preceding Lesson) is some- times an equivalent for the English "ought," as: F. había de saberlo, you ought to know it. Digitized by VjOOQIC 820 Lesson 17. But: Ha de saber F. (has de saber), know, then! V, ha de saber que estoy aqui. Enow, then, that I am here. When used impersonally (hay — quej^ it should be rendered as in the following sentence: Htxy mucho que desear, there is much to be wished for. Note,— Haber, though commonly an auxiliary, is some- times a principal verb, especially in poetry, as: Héroes hubieron Inglaterra y Francia, England and France had their heroes. Los hijos que de Isabel hubo el rey 2>. Fernando. The children that King Ferdinand had from Isabella. Conviene que se haya como hombre que no sabe ni oye (Oranada). He must behave like a man who does neither know nor hear. Also in the expressions he aqui, here is, there is, haber is an independent verb: he aqtii á nuestro héroe, here is our hero. Besides, haber is used absolutely in certain exclamative expressions, as: ¡Bien haya! happy he who . . . ¡Mai haya! woe to him who . . . ¡(^ue Bios haya! God give him eternal repose! 11. Ir á, like the English '*to be going to," denotes impending futurity, as: Voy á decirle, I am going to tell him. Vamos á ver, let us see! Idioms are: Ir de luto, to be (dressed) in mourning. Ir de paseo, to go for a walk. Ir de reunión, to go to a party. 12. Llegar^ to arrive, like acabar , frequently an- swers to the English "at last," **finally,", "in fine," etc., as: Ha llegado á comprender, at last he understands. Llegar á oir, á entender means: to hear for the first time; We^ar á saber is "to come to know," "to be informed," "to learn," "to hear," etc. 13. Llevar, to bring, to carry, to wear, joined to the participle, expresses, like dejar (see p. 319, n.® 6), past Digitized by vaOOQlC Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs. 321 time in general, as: llevar sabido, to have known; Uevar estudiado, to have studied, learned; Uevar hecho, to have done. The pupil must bear in mind that if the past time is expressed by dejar, Uevar, tener (see 17) or trasr (to bring), the past participle should agree in gender and number with the substantive to which it refers: Le Uevo escritcis ya cuatro cartas, I have already written four letters to him. Lleva mandados tres recados. He has sent three messages. 14. Ponerse á, meterse á correspond to the Eng- lish "to begin" (French: se mettre a), as: 8e puso á escribir, á hablar, á comer. He began to write, to speak, to eat. Foner forms a great many idioms: Poner en duda, to doubt. Poner en claro, to ascertain. Poner en limpio, to make a fine copy. Ponerse (el sol), to set (the sun). Ponerse colorado (or encarnado), to blush. Poner por escrito, to put down in writing. Poner miedo, to ifrighten. Ponerse en la razón, to be reasonable. 15. Saber J to know, to be able, denotes an acquired ability, as: ¿Sabe V. hablar castellano? Can you speak Spanish (i.e., have you learnt it)? Saber de algtmo, to hear from anyone. Poder, on the contrary., expresses an innate faculty, as: No puede hablar, porqtte es mudo. He cannot speak because he is dumb. 16. Tardar, is to (tarry) be a long time in . . ., to defer, to delay, as: Tarda mucho en responder. He Is a long time in answering. No tardar is commonly rendered by soon, as: No tardará en responder, he will soon answer.* Note: ¡Cuánto tarda el tren! how late the train is! ¿Cuánto se tarda de aquí aUá? How long does it take from here to there? * In French: II ne tardera pas á repondré. Spanish Conv. -Grammar. 21 Digitized by VjOOQIC 322 Lesson 17. 17. Tener, to have, to hold, as already stated (Part L, p. 10), is commonly used instead of the auxiliary "to have." The difference between tener and habe^- has been explained. Tener impUes the lasting eflPect of an action, as: te he dicho, I told you; but: te tengo dicho, I told you once for all. Thus: he escrito la carta, I have written the letter, simply denotes the past tense, whereas: tengo escrita la carta lays a particular stress on the word written, — Me ha ofendido is: he has offended me, but me tiene ofendido, means: he has offended me, and I still resent the offence. — La casa que ha comprado, the house he (has) bought; /a casa que tiene comprada, the house he has bought and still possesses. — The pupil will notice that the participle used with tener agrees in gender and number with the word to which it refers. — Without an accusative following, tener sel- dom occurs with the past participle, as: Tengo acabado, I have done (see Participles). Tener que . . ., to be obliged, has been mentioned before. Tener likewise forms a great many idioms: Tener miedo, to be afraid. Tener frío (calor), to be cold (warm). (No) tener razón, (not) to be right. Tener en poco (en mucho), to value (not to value). Tener que hacer, to have something to do. 18. Tratar^ to treat, to deal, to purpose, to set about, if emphatically denoting a design or purpose, is followed by de, as: Los conjurados tríUqban de asesinar al rey, The conspirators purposed killing the king. 19. Venir de , , , like acabar, intimates that an action has just been performed, or that a condition began or ceased immediately before; thus: Viene de verla (or: acaba de verla), he has just seen her. However, venir de cannot be used, unless the idea of ''to be coming from^^ is implied. Venir á ser (or: llegar á ser), simply means "to be,'* **to become." 20. Volver á . . ., is an equivalent for again or once more, as: Vuelvo á decir á su hermano de V, , , . I once more (again) tell your brother . . . Digitized by VaOOQlC Peculiarities of some Spanish Verbs. 328 Volver without the infinitive following is "to return/* "to come back," as: Volveré á las once, I shall be back at 11 o'clock. N,B.— The repetition of an action is often expressed by the prefix re — , as: Animar, to animate; reanimar, to reanimate. Observation, — The cases where duration, etc., of an action or a state is expressed by the verbs andar, estar, ir, and venir with the gerundio, are explained in Lesson 23, "The Gerund." Tradnecién. IS. 1. We had just entered the house when we heard her crying. We could not wonder enough at his impudence. He will kill (use finish) her. I was not able to dissuade him from his project. You have hit (guessed) it, my friend! He has taken to drink; he has taken to amusements (see 8. dar), I congratulate you. I thank you very much. It is striking one. That will cause people to talk. He left word that you should do it (use d€Qar), When he poses as a writer, I always begin to laugh. It is her birthday, but she does not keep it (lo celebra) because she is in mourning. I was on the point of writing to you when I got your letter. I did not wish to speak to him any longer, for he bored me dreadfully. I cannot go out to-day, I must stay at (tr. guardar, to watch) the shop. You must send me the book (still) to-day. There is (a good deal more) still much to be (tr. dejarse) said about your behaviour, but I have no mind to scold any longer. 2. What are you about (to do) there, Charles? I want to open the window, for it is very warm in the room. Have you at last understood that I cannot comply with your re- quest? I have already asked him three times (use Uevar), He just began to work when his friend came into the room. I doubt it (use poner). You are not right ; I value your opinion very much (use tener). Can you dance? No, I cannot dance, but I can fence and ride. You cannot ride to-day; the horse is ill. You can never get your task done (fr. You always tarry to finish your task). Never mind ! I shall soon come back. As I have bought the article, I shall not send it back again. We tell you again that you are wrong in acting thus. Mr. Gayoso has sold the house which he bought two years ago. I would get rid of this disagreeable occupation, but my master told me that he could not get on without me. Do not trouble me. You see that I have no time to talk to you. He has insulted me, and I shall never 21» Digitized by VjOOQIC 324 Lesson 17. forgive him again for this insult. I shall not sell the garden again which I bought. I have already dressed myself this morning, and now I must (es menester) dress myself once more. I never saw my poor brother again! Reading Exercise. Grandeza y decadencia de España. (Continuación.) El carácter de la nación en general no es holgazán; si fuese este su genio y su temperamento, ¿cómo habla de ha- ber sido la más industriosa hasta el reinado de Felipe III? Aquel mal es adquirido. Hoy mismo no me señalarán en toda la Europa cinco naciones que amen el trabajo tanto como los Catalanes, Gallegos Vizcaínos, Guipuzcoanos y Montañeses: improbas son sus fatigas .... Puertas abiertas y puertas cerradas, digo que han sido las dos fuentes de todas nuestras desgracias. Abriéronse las que debieron cerrarse y cerráronse las que debían abrirse. Veis aquí ya el trastorno de toda España. Ésta en realidad, ha sido, es y será, siempre que no se remedie, la surgente de los males políticos que han armiñado al Estado. Carcoma silenciosa, que insensiblemente ha ido royéndole hasta el corazón. Todas nuestras decaden- cias son hijas de esta lima sorda. Para restituir la monarquía á su antiguo y debido es- plendor, es preciso mudar de estilo. Volver el cuadro al re- vés: abrir, digo, lo cerrado, y cerrar lo abierto. Veis aquí ya los dos polos de la felicidad pública. Este es el sistema necesario; ni el bien tiene más entrada, ni los males otra cura. Y nada es más conforme al derecho natural que dis- tribuirse y consumirse los productos dentro de la nación misma que los contribuye. Por aquí ha de comenzar sus operaciones el héroe que se propusiere el plan de remediarla. No hay que equivocarse : todo lo demás será pérdida de tiempo, y acaso complemento de la destrucción. Crecerá el mal cada día: bajarán las rentas reales: se empeñará el Real Erario: irán los pueblos á menos, y á más la dificultad. ¡Ojalá sea yo mal profeta! (To be continued.) [M. E. Gándara.— «4pwníes sobre él bien y el mal de España.*] Conyersación. ¿Cómo se prueba que el carácter general de la nación no es holgazán? ¿Quiénes pueden señalarse entre los más trabajadores de Europa? ¿Cuáles han sido las dos fuentes de todas nuestras desgracias ? Digitized by VjOOQIC / Moods. 325 ¿Por qué? ¿Qué es preciso para restituir la monarquía á su an- tiguo esplendor? ¿Hay otro sistema? ¿Por qué no lo hay? ¿Todo lo demás que será? Eighteenth Lesson. The Moods. 1. The Indicative Mood. This mood represents an action as positive and beyond all doubt. In this regard the English and Spanish language offer no remarkable difference. In accessory clauses, no less than in the principal sentence, the In- dicative Mood is employed, as: El criado dice que ya está pronto, I'he footman says that he is ready. Mi amigo me escribió que ya había visto á su primeo. My friend iwrote me that he had already seen his cousin. 2. The Subjunctive Mood. Any action or state that does not appear to be quite certain, but is represented as possible or doubtful, as well as consequences resulting, not from any fact, but from mere thought or feeling , should be expressed by the Subjunctive Mood. In Spanish this mood — com- monly neglected by the English — is strictly observed and is one of the greatest beauties of the language, as it modifies the expression far more than is possible with the English Subjunctive. For this reason the Eng- lish verbs could, wotdd, should, may, might, must, etc., are usually not translated, but rendered by the Spanish Subjimctive. The student who is acquaiuted with the French and Italian languages will find a great analogy between these languages and the Spanish, and will be seldom mistaken in using the Spanish Subjunctive (ex- cept the future and conditional) where he would employ the Subjunctive in French or Italian. Digitized by VaOOQlC 826 Lesflon 18. We may distinguish between: (1) The dependent Subjunctive. (2) The absolute Subjunctive. The dependent Subjunctive is used: 1. After the conjunctions antes que, before, ere; aunque, although, though; cuando, when; con tal que, on condition that ; dado que, caso que, puesto que, pro- vided that; para que, in order to, so that; por más que, however .....; 5¿, if; como si, as if; sin que, without . . .; and after the exclamation ¡Ojalá!, God grant it, and a few others. Examples: Vendré aunque Uueva, I shall come, though it may rain. Haré mi deber, sin que F. me lo recuerde, I shall do my duty without your reminding* me of it. For más que hcigaSy no te perdonaré. Whatever you may do, I shall not pardon you. Note.—li, however, a fact admitting of no doubt is stated, the Indicative mood is required even after these con- junctions, as: He venido aunque lluetfe, I have come, though it rains. 2. After verbs importing order, fear, and apprehen- sion, permission, desire, doubt, etc., as: Temo que mi tío no venga, I am afraid my uncle will not come. El maestro quiso que y o diese mi libro á mi hermano, The master wanted me to (= wished that I should) give my book to my brother. Dudo que cumpla con su palabra. I doubt if he will keep his word. N,B,— But after dudar (de) si ..,, to doubt, the Indi- cative should be used, as: Dudo (de) si está á su palabra. I doubt whether he will keep his word. 3. Decir, when meaning "to order," "to ask," and esperar, when meaning "to hope," govern the Subjunc- tive mood; when meaning, respectively, "to relate" (to * We need not add that the English presewi participle, when used, as in the above sentence, instead of accessory clauses, should always be rendered by the respective person and tense of the verb with the corresponding conjunction. Thus: without your reminding me = without that you remind me. Digitized by vaOOQlC Moods. 827 tell, speak), or "to wait" ("to expect"), they govern the Indicative, as: Me dice que venga, he tells (orders) me to come. Espero que venga F., I hope (that) you will come. Whereas: Me dijo que mi tío vendría. He told me that my uncle would come. Espero que F. vendrá, I expect that you will come. 4. The Subjunctive is also used in relative sentences if the action, expressed in them, is not meant to imply something as definite, but as negative, unknown, doubt- ful, intended in the future — e.g.: Diga lo que quiera, no le creeré. He may say what he likes, I shall not believe him. No encontrarás quien te perdone semejante injuria. Thou wilt find no one to pardon thee such an insult. JDonde quiera que fueres, haz lo que vieres (Truéba). Wherever thou mayest be, do what thou seest done. 5. In compound interrogatory sentences meant to be open questions: ¿Hay aqui alguien que lo sepa? Is there here anyone who knows it? ¿He dicho yo que no tenga razón él? Did I ever say that he was wrong? 6. After sin que: Lo hizo sin que le viesen. He did it without anybody seeing him. 8e lo han dado sin que lo pidiera. They have given it to him without his asking for it. 7. In sentences such as: Sea el que sea, whoever it may be. Dijéralo quien lo dijera. No matter v^rho might have said it. Que viniese que no viniese, whether he came or not. Si lo dice, que lo diga, if he says it, let him say. Si viniese, que venga, if he comes, let him come. The absolute Subjunctive is used: 1. In exclamations with que — viz.: i Que me haya este favor! If he only would do me this favour! Digitized by VaOOQlC 828 Lesson 18. NoU.—Que is dropped in such expressions as: J Quiera Dios! God grant it! ¡Quiera el cielo! Please heaven 1 2. In requests, exhortations, and commands assuming a negatiTe form, as: ¡No dig€i8 que estoy aqui! Do (thou) not say that I am here! ¡No vengas acá! do not come here! ¡No me niegues tu favor! Do not deny me your (thy) favour! Observation.— In sentences of this kind, as well as in those introduced by ^we, a verb importing a msh or desire is understood, so that the construction is properly elliptical. The whole phrase would run: ¡(Quiero) Que me haga este favor! I wish that he would do me this favour! ¡(JEM jo que) No hagas ruido! Do (thou) not make a noise! {i.e., I wish that thou do not make a noise!) 3. The Imperative Mood. It is used: 1. In requests, exhortations, and commands, niiless assuming a negatiye form: Mancedlo, do it. No lo hagáis, do not do it. Diselo, tell him. No se lo digas, do not tdl him. 2. In ironical expressions to show the consequences of an action: Hazlo, y te pego (lit.: do it, and I will beat you). If you do it, I will beat you. Dígalo v., y no le creerán (lit.: say it, and they will not believe you). Do not say it, because they will not believe yon. Idiom atical Imperative by means of the Infinitive: A comer, come to dine; eat! A vestirte! get dressed! Traducción. 19. 1. I (am at) work now, that I may have finished (haber acabado) at 6 o'clock. These people looked at me, as if I were a criminal. Before (i.e., sooner than) doing (tr. I do) that, I had rather (tr. I will) die. I shall come at all events, Digitized by vaOOQlC Moods. 829 even if I have no news from you. I lend yon the money on condition that you give it me back soon. In case (that) Mr. Barrera should depart to-day, let me know (tr. avisar) by telegraph. I entered the saloon without the others noti- cing (tr. notar) it. God grant that I find my family in good health! I was afraid (that) your mother would not find us at home. I wish you a happy journey (transí, that you have). I doubt (very) much that he will come (still) to-day. I (have no doubt, but) do not doubt that every one of your words is the strictest truth. Tell the footman to come (i.e., that be comes) directly. I tell you that I have not received your letter. I hope (that) you will send me good news again. I still expect (you to keep) that you will keep the promise which you have made me. Is there anyone here who. has seen it? He did it without anybody seeing him. No matter who may say it, it is not true. 2. Do it. Do not do it. Tell him. Do not tell him. Do it, and do not tell him. Get dressed, and come to dine. (Idiom, Imperat,) Do come, my dear friend, it is much too cold in this room! Never mind (tr, that may not give you trouble), I shall put all to rights! Tell him that I am ready! I am looking for the book in order to give it to you. I seek a footman that may serve me well. God grant (that) it were true! Let him speak out (tr, speak) if he wishes us to do him the favour. Do not tell your brother that we are here. Do not come here! There is no room for you! Do not tell him the whole truth, that he may not be too much up- set. Do speak to me with (en) confidence! I shall do all that is in my power! Be patient! I told the servant to tell the physician to come directly! Fear (thou) my wrath I Do (thou) not fear anything! I shall assist you! Let us take (Vamos á dar) a walk! Reading Exercise. Grandeza y decadencia de España, (Continuación.) Ciérrense, pues, en España las puertas abiertas ; ábranse las cerradas: pónganse diques á los ríos de oro y plata que desaguan fuera del reino: piénsese, búsquese, y tómese por primera diligencia un temperamento equitativo que sirva de equivalente, y aún de grande aumento al Real Erario: róm- panse las cadenas que embarazan los progresos: repruóbense los estorbos: quítense á la Nación los grillos que se han fa- bricado de los yerros de dos siglos: derríbense las murallas que quedan señaladas: mírese la libertad del comercio como único fundamento de la felicidad pública: fórmese y dése sistema fijo á todas las partes y ramos de la monarquía, que Digitized by VaOOQlC 880 Lesson 19. vive, ó mejor diré, muere 8in él. Un sistema, digo, sabio, prudente, justo y equitativo: un sistema libertador: x\n sistema combinatorio, que abrace desde el interés y parte más alta del Estado hasta el ramo y partecilla más mínima de la mo- narquía: nn sistema auxiliador, reformador: en una palabra, un sistema sencillo y perfecto, obra ilustre de un rey grande, que sujete á un centro de unión todas las ideas del Gobierno; qne reduzca á su punto de vista todos los intereses de la autoridad real, del pueblo y del £rario; que enlace intima- mente la gloria de la majestad con la abundancia y felicidad pública, de tal modo que, unidos estrechamente estos dos ob- jetos (que siempre deben caminar á paso igual), se haga im- posible la ventaja del uno sin la mejora del otro, el adelan- tamiento de éste sin el florecimiento de aquél: y en fin, un sistema dichoso y perpetuo que lleve á la inmortalidad el glorioso nombre del Rey, restablezca la opulencia en Espafia, y haga respetable el crédito de la nación. (M. A. Gándara. — «42^***^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^ V ^^ ^^^ ^^ Esjpaña.^] Con ver sacien. ¿Qué hay que hacer? ¿Qué sistema ha de ser ese? ¿ De qué modo se ha de enlazar la gloria de la majestad real con la felicidad pública? ¿Pueden caminar separados esos dos objetos? ¿Cuál será el resultado de tal sistema? Nineteenth Lesson. The Use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. Use of the Tenses of the Indicative. § 1. Present. (a) In narratives, instead of the Definite; as: Esta mañana iba yo por la callea cuando un amigo se me acerca y me dice (se me acerco y me dijo): Thiá morning I was going along the street, when a friend approached me, and said to me . . . (b) Likewise in colloquial language to replace the Future, as: Voy (instead of ire) á misa mañana, I shall hear mass to-morrow. Dentro de quince días me vuelvo á Inglaterra, Within a fortnight I shall return to England. Digitized by Google The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 331 § 2. Imperfect. (a) In descriptions of characters, opinions, states, manners and customs^ representing a past action as often repeated, or customary, or progressive, as : Tenia en su casa un ama que pasaba de los cuarenta, y una sobrina que no llegaba á los veinte, y un mo0O de campo que así ensillaha él rocín como to- maba la podadera, (Cervantes: <íDon Quijote.T^) He had in his house a housekeeper that was more than forty years old, a niece who ha-d not yet reached her twentieth year, and a farm-hand who used to saddle the tiag, as well as to handle the pruner. Cuando yo era pequeño era muy travieso. When I was small, I used to be very mischievous. ¿Qué iioHa Y,? — Estaha leyendo, What were you doing? — I was reading, (h) When two actions are represented as being performed at, or as lasting, the sam£ time, as: Mientras yo escribia, mi amigo fumaba, AVhilst I was writing, my friend was smoking. Él hablaba, pero no le entendían. He was speaking, but they did not understand him. N.B.—li one action is interrupted by another, the Imper- fect denotes the action that was going on when the other took place; the latter requiring the Definite, Ex.: Mientras yo escribia, él entró en mi cuarto. Whilst / was writing, he entered ray room. (c) To render the Imperfect auxiliaries could, should, iind ought, etc., as: Debía (or debiera) habérmelo dicho. He should have told me so (= He ought to have told me so. See page 315, Observ. 2). § 3. Definite. (a) To represent a past action as occurred on one occasion and entirely elapsed; hence in historical narration. Ex.: Falleció Napoleon el 5 de mayo de 1821, Napoleon died the 5th of May 1821. En la mañana del 8 renovaron el asalto. On the morning of the 8th they renewed the assault. Me lo dijeron ayer, they told me yesterday. Digitized by VaOOQlC 832 Lesson 19. Cervantes murió pobres Cervantes died in poverty. Colón descubrió la América en 1492. Columbas discovered America en 1492. ^.^.— The Definite may mark duration, but withoat any reference to another action or state, as: Napoleon fué un gran general. Napoleon was a great general. JPaaé mi niñez en Inglaterra, I passed my childhood in England. (b) Instead of the Compound perfect whenever the speaker considers less the action or the state itself than the final result^ as: ¿Cuándo ha visto F. á mi madre? When have you seen (did you see) my mother? La VÍ esta mañana, I saw her this morning. Me did orden de esperarle á él. He gave me orders to wait for him. N.B. —¥or euphony Spaniards very often replace the Pluperfect or 2nd Pluperfect by the Definite, if one of these tenses immediately precedes. Thus: HaMa admirado las tablas que mi tio compró (for había or hubo comprado). I had admired the pictures which my uncle had bought § 4. Compound Perfect. To represent an action perfected some time ago, but whose consequences extend to the present time.* Thus: (a) In referring to a past still present in its results: Su padre le ha desheredado. His father has disinherited him. To he viajado mucho. I have travelled a great deal. Lope de Vega ha escrito más de 1800 comedias. Lope de Vega has written more than 1.800 plays. (b) To represent past actions which have occurred within a period of time which we consider as not elapsed : * It never has the meaning of the English Perfect in the sentence: Mr. Scrooge has been dead these seven years (Dickens). Digitized by VjOOQIC The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 888 JHJoy por la mañana ha hecho frió. This morning it was cold. Esta semana casi no he salido de casa» I scarcely have been out of doors this week. § 5. Future. (a) As in English, with the force of an Impera- tive, as: ¿No callarás? will you not be silent = Be silent! Darás al momento el dinero á tu tía. Yon will at once give the money to your aunt! = Give the money to your aunt at once! (b) Again, to express a desire to do somethmg, as: ¡Con que, tú serás müitar! Well, so you want to be a soldier! (c) To express doubt, probability, or strong con- viction by means of an indirect question which does not admit of a negation, as: ¿Qué tendrá, que no viene? I wonder what is the matter with him, that he does not come? Esta/rá enfermo, probably he may be ill. ¿Habrá amigo mejor que él? Can there be a better friend than he? Observation. — After dicese, it is said, they say, etc., where in| English the Infinitive mood follows, preceded by to, the Future should be used in Spanish, as: The general is said (expected) to come to-day. Dicese que el general llegará hoy. § 6. Conditional. This mood presents some difficulties to the foreigner. In Part I., on the Auxiliaries, the most important ob- servations may be found. As we shall yet have to speak of the Conditional mood when treating of the Sequence of tenses (Lesson 20), we need only add that the absolute Conditional of the Indicative is often used, in order to express an approximate time or number, as well as any uncertain assertion whatever, as: Serian las 5, cuando él llegó. It was about 5 o'clock when he arrived. Digitized by V^OOQIC 834 Lesson 19. Tendría en aquél tiempo veinticinco años. Sbe might then have been 25. ¿No se equivocaría Y.? Bat might you not be mistaken? Also in expressing any humble request, question, or wish; and in exclamations to a express strong wish: ¿ Tendería F. la amabilidad de , . .? Will (or would) you kindly . . .? ¿Querría V. dar un paseito? Would you not come for a short walk? ¿No Unna/ria F. un bizcochito'f Will (or would) you not take a biscuit? ¡Lo mataría! I would kill him! ^.^.— With querer, in expressing wishes (not requests) the Conditional of the Subjunctive (Vo) is preferred: Quisiera decirle á F. dos palabras. I wish to speak a few words to you. The Imperfect, the Definite, and the Compound Perfect compared. The Imperfect refers to continuous or customary actions as viewed from the past, as: Cuando tenia dinero, tenia muchos amigos. When I bad money, I used to have many friends (then). The Perfect to complete actions as not connected vdth the Present, as: Perdí el dinero, I lost the money (not now). The Compound Perfect to past actions as still present in their consequence, as: Solo me ha quedado un amigo. I have only one friend left (still). Or, compared in a clause: Chiando tenia dinero, tenía muchos amigos; perdí él dinero, y solo me ha quedado uno. Tradncción. 20. 1. Yesterday I wascoming home when a friend of mine stopped me and said (to me): *To-morrow I am going to Paris". (Use the Present.) Do you go to the theatre to-night? No, I go to the concert; I went to the theatre last night. Oh, yes, I met you when you were going. Did you come out late ? We came out very late. How is it that the perform- Digitized by vaOOQlC The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 335 anee ended so late? Because the theatres in Spain begin late, and the intervals are very long. Is it a long time since you bought this house? No, I bought it last autumn. This summer I bought a garden; but as it did not please me, I sold it. May I offer (fut,) you a glass of wine? No, thank you, I have (had some) already drunk some. Tell your bro- ther that he must pay me. The Lord's Commandment says: *'Thou shalt not kill!'* When we were in the country, we used to take a walk every day ; after breakfast we read or played, and after dinner we took a nap. Napoleon was bom in the island of Corsica. The Greeks besieged the city of Troy, and finally took it by assault. I wonder if he is ill. (use the Future,) Go and give him this letter. (Use the Future,) Can there be a better man than he? 2. Schiller and Goethe have been the greatest poets of Germany. Did you pay a visit to Mr. Lorenzo Sepiilveda last week? Yes, I was there, but I could not speak to him. Whilst the young gentlemen and ladies danced, the papas and mammas played at cards or looked at the amusements of the young folk. Italy had her greatest poets in the 13th and 15 th centuries. For three years I received no news of my brother. The ball lasted till 6 o'clock in the morning. Was the count last year in Italy or in France ? How much have you paid for this coat? I do not recollect whether I paid 24 or 26 dollars. When I got your letter, I had already posted the one I sent you. When he* had related him all (which) his father had told us, he grew (tr. quedar) very sad. After I had done the task which the master had (set) given me, I went down into the garden. 3. Do your duty, come what may. If it please God, I shall go to Seville next month. I should give you your money if you had done your duty. If you were less dis- contented, you would not always be complaining. I should very much like to learn something new. If we do our duty, no one can blame us. I have ordered {tr, that you go not out) you not to go out to-day; why have you not obeyed me? He has advised (tr. that I may not write) me not to write in the twilight, because my eyes are too weak. I should have asked you to do me this service if I had not known that you were absent. Do you doubt (de) that (que) I am an honourable man? No, but I doubt that you are able to do what you have promised me. I expect you to tell me the truth. I am waiting for my brother to come, in order to speak to him about (de) your proposal. He has told me he cannot do what you wish. I tell you to be quiet (suent). Do not speak to your friend about what I have been telling you. Do not stay here. Do not interrupt me Digitized by VaOOQlC 836 Lesson 19. if I speak. Do not trust him with your secrets, he is a prattler. Let us go, that we may be in time (llegar á). Reading Exercise. La Farsa de Ávüa. Incorporados los de la liga con el arzobispo de Toledo en Ávila, determinaron desposeer al rey de una manera tan solemne como audaz y afrentosa. En un llano inmediato á la ciudad hicieron levantar un estrado tan alto que pudiera verse á larga distancia. En él colocaron un trono, sobre el cual sentaron una efigie ó estatua de don Enrique con todas las insignias reales, aunque en traje de luto. Hecho esto, leyeron un manifiesto en que se hacían graves acusaciones contra el rey, por las cuales merecia ser depuesto del trono y perder el titulo y la dignidad real. En su consecuencia procedieron á despojarle de todas las insignias y atributos de la magestad. El arzobispo de Toledo fué el primero que le quitó la corona de la cabeza; el conde de Plasencia le arre- bató el estoque; el de Benavente le despojó del cetro, y don Diego Lopez de Zúfíiga derribó al suelo la estatua. Seguida- mente alzaron en brazos al joven príncipe don Alfonso, y le sentaron en el trono vacante, proclamando á grandes voces: «i Castilla por el rey don Alfonso!» Los gritos de la multitud se confundieron con ^ ruido de los tambores y trompetas, y los grandes y prelados, y después el pueblo, pasaron con gran ceremonia á besar la mano al nuevo monarca. [Lafuente. — «Historia de España.^] Conversación. ¿Qué hicieron los de la liga, y cuando lo determinaron? ¿Dónde levantaron el estrado? ¿Cómo era? ¿Qué pusieron en él? ¿Qué leyeron? ¿Qué contenía el manifiesto? ¿Qué hicieron después, y que parte tomó cada uno? ¿Qué hicieron con el Príncipe? ¿Cómo terminó el acto? Digitized by VjOOQIC The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 337 Twentieth Lesson. The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. (Conclusion.) The Tenses of the Indicative. Of the tenses of the Indicative mood we have still to consider the Pluperfect, the 2nd Pluperfect, the Com- pound Future, and the Compound Conditional. The Pluperfect and the 2nd Pluperfect, being compounds of the Imperfect and the Definite, are dis- tinguished in a similar way. Thus the 2nd Pluperfect refers to a past action as occurred immediately before another already completed or past and with which it is more or less connected. So it must be used in compound sentences, after ad- verbs and conjunctions denoting time, as: cuando, luego que, así que, apenas (scarcely) or apenas . . . (cuando), no bien . . . (cuando), Ex.: Cuando hubo amanecido salí. When it had grown light, I went out. JLuego que to hubo dicho se arrepintió. Así que lo hubo dicho se arrepintió. Apenas lo hubo dicho (cuando) se arrepintió, lío bien lo hubo dicho (cuando) se arrepintió. Are all rendered by: No sooner he said it, he repented. If, on the contrary, the actions do not appear so closely following on another, and on the other hand are not considered as being connected, the Pluper- feet should be used. Ex.: Los israelitas desobedecieron al Señor que los había saciado de la tierra de Egipto, The Israelites were disobedient to the Lord, who had led them out of the land of Egypt. Ya lo hdbia dicho cuando se arrepintió. When he repented, he had already said it (i.e., he re- pented, but he had already said it). In these sentences there is no immediate connection between the two actions (desobedecieron and habia sa- cado, and habia dicho and arrepintió). Spanish Conv.-Grammar. 22 Digitized by vaOOQlC 338 Lesson 20. The Compound Future denotes a future action or state, as previous to another future action, as: Véame F. pasados algunos dios, quizá le habré pro- curtido una colocación. Cali on me in a few days; perhaps I shall have found yon a situation. Cuando yo llegue, ya se habrá ido (previous future). He will be gone by the time I get there. N.B. — No se habrá ido cuando yo llegue (preyions future). He will not be gone, by the time I get there. For the Compound Conditional see The Conditional (page 341). The Tenses of the Subjunctive. The Present of the Subjunctive is used: (a) Negatively— i.e.^ in prohibitions, also in requests, exhortations, and commands made in a negative form, as: No lo h4iga F., se lo prohibo. Do not do it, I forbid you. No se vaya V,, si es temprano. Do not go, it is so early. No se acerquen F. F. al perro, que muerde. Do not come too near the dog, it bites. Nunca preste V, libros, porque no se devuelven. Never lend your books, because books are never returned. (b) With que, in elliptical sentences depending on verbs of command and wish: ¡Que entre! let him come in! ¡Que OS divirtáis mucho! enjoy yourselves! ¡Que tengas feliz viaje! happy journey to you! (c) In exclamations: / Sea F. muy bien venido ! welcome ! ¡Ojalá venga pronto! oh, that he may come soon! ¡Bendito seas! God bless thee! Sequence of Tenses. The Subjunctive being a depending Mood, the theory of the use of its tenses at once comprises the most im- portant rules concerning the sequence of tenses— ^'.e.: Digitized by vaOOQlC The use of the Teosee. Sequence of Tenses. 839 1. The Present of the Subjunctive, preceded by que, is used in subordinate clauses depending on a Present, Future^ or Imperative of verbs of wish, command, fear^ and sorrow, in the principal sentence [the same rule as in French], as: Deseo que lo consiga V,, I hope you will succeed. Desearé que F. ae alivie, I hope you will get better. Teme que no le comprendan. He is afraid lest they do not understand him. Le mando á F. que lo haga, I command you to do it. Le he dicho que me escriba. I told (asked) him to write to me. ¡Cuanto siento que V. se moleste! How sorry I am to trouble you! Sentiré que se ofenda. I should be sory if he feels hurt. N.B. — If the subject of the two sentences is the same, the Infinitive, without que, is used: Deseo conseguirlo, I wish to succeed. Temo no comprender I am afraid of not understanding. 2. The Imperfect of the Subj. (or the Conditional in -ra), preceded by que must be used in subordinate clauses depending on a past tense in the principal sent- ence [the same rule as in French], as: Deseaba (deseé, he deseado), que F. lo consiguiese (or consiguiera). Temía (temió, había temido) que no le comprendiesen (comprendieran). Le mandaba (mandé, he mandado) á V. que lo hiciese (hiciera). ¡Cuánto sentía (sentí, he sentido) que V. se molestase (molestara) I {See 1. N.B.) Likewise depending on the Conditional of the In- dicative, (a) with que in the above sentences: Desearía que consiguiera (consiguiese) V. (b) with si in conditional sentences: Conseguiría el empleo si tuviese (tuviera) amigos, or si tuviese (tuviera) amigos, conseguiría el empleo. He would obtain the situation if he had friends. 3. The Future of the Subj. in a subordinate clause refers to a Future, Present of the Subj., or 7m- 22* Digitized by vaOOQlC 340 Lesson 20. perative in the principal sentence. In English this tense is wanting, being commonly rendered by the Present Subjunctive. Ex. : Si el cielo diere fuerzas, cantaré aquí el dulce ccmto, (Valbnena.) If Heaven grant me strength, I shall sing here the sweet song .... En ¡0 que tocare á defender mi persona, no tendré mucha cuenta con esas leyes. Concerning the defence of my person, I shall not care much for these laws. Hazlo si pudieres. Do it, if you can (= if you mil be able to . . . .). N,B,—Yerj often the JFuttM'e of the Subj. may be re- placed by the :Bre8ent of the same Mood, without any essential alteration of the meaning. Thus we may as well say (in the second of the above sentences): en lo que toque á Only if, as in the first sentence, the future of the Siibj. is introduced by si, this change is not admissible. The student should be careful not to mistake conditional clauses like these for those which admit of the conditional. To be quite certain, he need but try whether they may be rendered by the present or not. Thus the sentence: Si ella fuere de tanta hermosura, de buena gana conr fesaremos la verdad, (Cervantes.) If she be so beautiful, we shall willingly confess the truth — might quite as well be expressed: Si ella es de tanta hermosura .... With the conditional, however (if she were or would be, etc.), the sense would be quite different. With the Compound Futttre of the Subju/nctive, which occurs very rarely, the same rules are to be observed as with the simple future in -re, of course taking into consideration the correlativeness of the tenses: Si ella hubiere sido de tanta hermosura, de buena gana confesaríamos (or huMéra/mos confesando) la verdad, 4. The Compound Perfect of the Subj, is used in a subordinate clause*, if a Present or Future pre- cedes in the principal sentence [the same rule as in French], as: * We need not observe that these compound tenses may Digitized by vaOOQlC The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 341 Espero que el correo haya Uegado para fines de la semana, I hope the post will have arrived by the end of the week. 5. The JPltiperfect, as far as this tense is not concerned with the conditional (see this), is used in a subordinate clause, if the verb of the principal sentence stands in one of the past tenses, [the same rule as in French], as: Deseaba que lo hubiese (or httbiera) F. conseguido, I wished you might have succeeded. Conditionah In Part I. (on the '*Auxiharies") we gave some ge- neral rules as to the uses of the Conditional. We now add further rules, at the same time stating that every- thing said there concerning the simple tenses must also be understood of the compound forms. 1. Of the Indicative: (a) Simple Conditional. Preceded by que follows any Past tense (either simple or compound) of the Indicative of verbs of ''believing," "saying," ''knowing^" or "affirming": Creía que me escribiría V, I thought you would write. Dijo V, que lo haría, you said you would do it. HoMa escrito que vendrían. They had written that they would come. Ta sahia yo que no to haría, I knew he would not do it. Ha prometido que lo mandaría. He has promised that he would send it. quite as well be used absolutely as the simple tenses (see on the Subjunctive\ as: Mañana^ haya venido ó no d socorro, ha de capitular la plaza, To-morrow, though relief may have come or not, the place must surrender. Or: El gobernador de la plaza era de opinión que, viniese 6 no el socorro, era necessario rendirse, The governor of the place was of opinion that he must surrender, though relief may have come, or not. Digitized by VaOOQlC 342 Lesson 20. It is also used in comparisons, preceded by canio, and with the verb repeated: Le hablo á F. como hablaría á tm amigo, I speak to you, as I would speak to a friend. (b) Compound ConditionaJ. It is used in Con- ditional sentences, the condition either preceding or following — in the Past tenses of the Subjunctive — and being opened by «Í, aunqtie: 8i lo hubiera visto, se lo habría preguntado. If I had seen him, I should have asked him. Lo habría dicho, H lo supiese. He would have told, had he known it. Aunque lo supiera, no lo habría dicho (or hubiera dicho). Even if he had known it, he would not have told. Likewise, aunque lo supiera, no lo diría. It may, hke the simple Conditional, express either doubty probability, or inclination, or intense wish: Tal vez no habrían Uegado. Perhaps they had not yet arrived. Le habría comido á besos al niño. I could have devoured the child with kisses. N.B. — The conjunction si cannot precede any of the two Conditionals of the Indicative in Conditional sentences, though in other sentences, it may, as: ¡Si lo contaría! I wonder if he has told! ¡Si habría venido, mientras yo salí! I wonder if he might have come while I went out! But: Si hubiera venido, lo hubiera sabido. I should have known if he had come. 2. Of the Subjunctive: (a) The Conditional may be used in all cases instead of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive, as: Deseé que lo consiguiera (or consiguiese) usted. I wished that you might succeed. Ü^.^.—The form in -ra (not in -se) is used in certain special cases, instead of the Conditional of the Indicative, especially with deber, poder, querer, and ser: Jurara yo que lo sabe, I would swear that he knows it. Debiera decirlo él, no V, He should have said it, not you. Digitized by VjOOQIC The use of the Tenses. Sequence of Tenses. 343 ¡Quisiera ser rico! I wish I were rich! Eso fuera fácil de hacer. That would be an easy thing to do. (b) Very often the simple Conditional replaces the compound, as : Esta noticia me desazonó tanto como si estuviera (for hubiera estado) enamorado de veras. (Isla.) This news exasperated me as much as if I had been indeed in love. ^.5.— Instead of the Compound Conditional of the In- dicativCy the Simple is sometiuo^s used, chiefly with ancient writers, as: Pasarían (for habrían pasado) ya tres semanas desde nuestra llegada. Three weeks might have elapsed since our arrival. Further Remarks on the Sequence of Tenses. 1. In a series of sentences depending on a principal verb on any past tense, or on the Conditional of the Indicative, either the forms in ^ra and ^se are found together, or either of them repeated: Me suplicó qtie le viera á F. (viese á V.) y se lo dijese (dijera). He asked me to see you and tell you. Desearía que viniese Y. (vieniera V.) para que pasar sernos (pasáramos) unos días juntos. I wish you would come, that we might spend a few days together. 2. The Conditional (or the Imperfect) of the Sub- junctive, as well as the Compound Perfect, the Pluper- fect, and the Compound Conditional of the same Mood, preceded by como si, may follow any tense of the Indicative— i.e.; Habla como si tuviese razón. He speaks as if he were right. Farecía como si le hubiera pasado algo. He looked as if something had happened to him. Tradnccion. 21. 1. I did not yet know that the letter had arrived. The news (which) we had received set us at rest as to {tr. on) the fate of the fugitive. Scarcely had I entered the drawing- Digitized by vaOOQlC 344 Lesson 20. room, when he took my arm and began to talk to me. As soon as the bear had been seen (tr. dejarse ver) in the forest, they resolved to give him a general chase. As soon as we had heard (sabido) that your cousin had arrived, we went to pay him a visit. The general reconquered (tr. recuperar) all the fortresses of the country which the enemy had taken. When you have done your duty, you may quietly await what then will happen. The judge wants the witness to speak the truth. Ask him to pay (tr, ask that he pay) you your money. He will be here by the time the letter arrives, do not write to him. Oh, that he may come soon! 2. The judge wanted the witness to speak the truth. I have not said that you had written to me; it was my foot- man who told your father so. The colonel permitted the sol- diers to give a ball at the barracks. You would work more easily if you studied more carefully. You may do (subj. pr.) what you please, I shall not obey you. You will tell me all (which) he will impart to you. Whatever it may be, I do not believe that he has told a falsehood. Cost what it may, I shall revenge myself. I hoped you would call on us more frequently (más á mentido). He did not know that we waited for him, otherwise he would have come. My uncle wished (tr, that) his son should at once set out for Paids. 3. I want to do it, and I told my friend to recommend you, because I wish you to succeed. I should be sorry to trouble you. I was afraid of not getting it. I thought you would recommend me to him, because he said you would do it. I knew he would not do it, though he told you that he was speaking to you as a friend. Had I known it, I should not have relied upon him. I wish you would not believe everything they tell you. But he spoke as though he spoke sincerely. Reading Exercise. Á Don Pedro Fernandez de Castro^ Conde de Lemos, Aquellas coplas antiguas que fueron en su tiempo tan celebradas, que comienzan : Puesto ya el pié en eZ estribo, qui- siera yo no vinieran tan á pelo en esta mi epístola, porque casi con las mismas palabras la puedo comenzar diciendo: Puesto ya el pió en el estribo. Con las ansias de la muerte, Gran Señor, esta te escribo. Ayer me dieron la Extrema- unción, y hoy escribo ésta: el tiempo es breve, las ansias crecen, las esperanzas menguan, y con todo esto llevo la vida sobre el deseo que tengo de vivir; y quisiera yo ponerle coto, hasta besar los pies á V. B., que podría ser fuese tanto el contento de ver á V. E. bueno Digitized by vaOOQlC The Infinitive Mood. 345 en España, que me volviese á dar la vida. Pero si está de- cretado que la haya de perder, cúmplase la voluntad de los Cielos, y por lo menos sepa V. E. este mi deseo, y sepa que tuvo en mi un tan aficionado criado de servirle que quiso pasar aún más allá de la muerte, mostrando su intención. Con todo esto, como en profecía, me alegro de la llegada de V. E. : regocijóme de verle señalar con el dedo, y realegróme de que salieron verdaderas mis esperanzas, dilatadas en la fama de las bondades de V. E. Todavía me quedan en el alma ciertas reliquias y asomos de la Semana del jardín, y del famoso Bernardo, Si á dicha, por buena ventura mía, que ya no sería ventura sino milagro, me diese el Cielo vida, las verá, y con ellas el fin de la Galatea, de quien sé está afi- cionado V. E. ; y con estas obras continuado mi deseo. Guarde Dios á V. E. como puede. De Madrid á 19 de Abril de 1616 años. Criado de vuestra Excelencia Miguel de Cervantes. Twenty-first Lesson, The Inflnitive Mood. I. The Absolute Infinitive. The Infinitive, when called absolute, is used as a substantive, and appears with or without the article. Though considered a noun, this mood does not lose its verbal character, and may therefore govern a gramma- tical object as such a verb. In English the absolute In- finitive is rendered either by the Infinitive mood or, more frequently, by the present participle. The absolute Infinitive appears: 1. As a substantive with the article, as: . El escribir, writing; el hablar, speaking. 2. Likewise as a substantive, but without the article, and as a predicate, as : El reino de Dios no es comer ni beber, mas paz y justicia, (Granada.) The kingdom of God is neither eating nor drinking, but peace and justice. 3. With adjectives and adverbs, as: El hablar bien, to speak well. El vivir mío, my life {Jit, living). El levantarse temprano, to rise early, rising early. Digitized by VaOOQlC 846 Lesson 21. 4. With a grammatical object like the personal forms of the verb. These objects may be either direct or otherwise {ix,, English). Ex.: El comer manjo/res eacquisitos, to eat choice food. El murmurar las fuentes, the babbling of the springs. With an adverbial object, as: El escribir can atención^ to write with attention. Observations. — 1. It is a peculiarity of the Spanish lan- guage that the Infinitive very rarely governs the genitive case, as the present participle (''the babbling") does in English in the above example ("the babbling of the springs"), where the genitive has properly the value of a nominative {who babbles? the springs f nomin,). Whenever in English such a genitive occurs with the present participle, it must be placed after the infinitive as a nominative, as: At the entering (entrance) of the foreigner (who enters? — the foreigner, nom,) al entrar el extranjero. The eclipse (darkening) of the sun (who dark- ens? — the sun, nom.), el eclipsarse el sol. Whenever in Spanish the Infinitive governs the genitive case, this is to be considered as an irregularity which mast not be imitated, as: El murmurar de las fuentes. Al alborear del 3 de julio. 2. Though infinitives have no plural, however, the infini- tive appears with the plural termination when it has entirely lost its verbal character and become a real substantive. Such are: Los placeres, the pleasures; los dares y tomares, things given and taken; los Cantares, Solomon's Song, etc. Note.— The infinitive with the article preceded by the preposition á imports simultaneousness, whereas the infinitive with á without the article expresses a condition, as: Al ceñirle la espada, whilst girding on his sword. But: A saber yo. If 1 knew, or: If I had known. A oirle, if one hears him. A no ser que esté dotado de . . . If he is not endowed with . . . (Trueba.) II. The Dependent Infinitive. The Infinitive when depending on another word is used either mth or without a preposition. Digitized by vaOOQlC The Infinitive Mood. 347 1. Without a preposition after those verbs which take their object likewise without a preposition. Such are: alegrarse^ gustar, to be glad; deber, to be obUged, must; dejar y to let; desear, to desire, to wish; dignarse, to deign; figurarse, to imagine; esperar, to hope, to ex- pect; hacer, to make, to cause to be done; llamarse, to be called; air, to hear; mandar, to order; parecer, to seem; pensar, to think; poder, to be able; proponer, to propose; procurar, to endeavour; querer, to be willing; saber, to know; sentir, to feel, to resent; ser, to be; servirse, to have the kindness, to please; soler, to use; temer, to fear; ver, to see, etc. Ex.: Le veo salir, I see him go out. Pienso salir, I have a mind to go out. ¡D^ame dormir! let me sleep! Quiero imitar al pueblo en el vestido, En las costumbres sólo á los mejores, (Rioja.) lu (my) dress I'll imitate the people, In manners (I shall imitate) only the best. N,B. — Frequently the infinitive with que is used ellipti- cally^ nada or algo being understood, as: Déme F. que comer (== algo que comer). Give me something to eat. Aqui no hag que ver (= nada que ver). Here is nothing to be seen. 2. The Infinitive with de is used after those verbs, adjectives, etc., which take likewise this preposition, as: L/uego que fueron capaces de amar. As soon as they were able to love. No d^aha el principe de lograr alguna ocasión, The prince did not omit (forget) to avail himself of any opportunity. Es tiempo de irse, it is time to be gone. JRemarTc,—(a) The locutions with acabar and venir de, mentioned Less. 17, Part II., fall under the same rule, but it must be born in mind that verUr de cannot be used unless motion is implied. Ex.: Vengo de hacerlo, I have done it just now (I am coming from doing it). Acaban de dar las 8, it has just struck 8 o'clock. (b) De is also used after deber, haber, and ser, with the signification "must," "ought," "to be obliged," etc. Ex.: Digitized by VaOOQlC 848 Lesson 21. Debe de estar enfermo, be must be ill. Ea de presumir, it is to be presumed. He de verle, 1 must (sball) see him.* (After deber, however, de may also be omitted without altering much the signification, i,e,, debe estar enfermo.) (c) If después (after) precedes an infinitive, it should be followed by de, as: Después de haber escrito la carta. After having written the letter. 3. The Infinitive with á is used (besides the cases mentioned when speaking of this preposition, see Lesson 11, Part 11.), after such verbs as to teach or to learn, to begin**, to set oneself, as: Aprende á escribir, he learns writing. Comienza á nevar, it begins to snow. 8e puso á reir, he began laughing. Echaron á correr, they started running. Este ministro se dedicó á dar á E. una enseñanza, (Isla.) This minister tried to give E. an education. Itemark,—k^ before mentioned, the Infinitive with á is used after ir, in order to express a future, close at hand, as: Voy á oir misa, I shall go to (hear) mass. The Infinitive with á is used after words implying ex- clusion, like solo, último, primero, etc. Ex.: Fui el solo á hablar. I was the only one to speak. * Haber de , . . . followed by an Infinitive very often ex- presses futurity. In all Romance languages this tense is nothing else but the Infinitive coupled with the Latin verb habere, to have, and contracted with it into one word. Thus: Spanish: amaré = armar-he, literally: I have to love = I sball love. Italian: sentiro = sentirhOf » I have to feel = I shall feel. French : parlerai = parler-ai, » I have to speak = I shall speak. Portuguese: partir ei = partir-hei, » I have to divide = I shall divide. ** If, on the contrary, the starting point of an action or its final point is indicated (the latter with acabar), the prepos. par should be used, as: Comenzó por decirme, he began by telling me (= first he told me). Acabó por decirme, he finished by telling me. Digitized by VaOOQlC The Infinitive Mood. 349 4. The Infinitive with par is often used instead of an accessory sentence beginning with porque, because, as, etc. Ex.: Por ser pobre esta muchacha. As the girl is poor (in lieu of porque esta muchacha es etc.). ^.^.—1. For por with dejar, estar, and quedar, as well as para after estar, see Lesson 12, Part II. 2. It sometimes occurs that a whole accessory sentence is inserted between the infinitive and its preposition, as: Tenia una tropa de cabaUeria de respeto para, en caso que perdiese la jornada, poderse salvar. (Hen era.) He held a troop of cavalry in reserve, that he might save himself in case he should lose the battle. Tradncciéu. 22. 1. Writing and drawing are useful accomplishments. Too much sleeping is quite as injurious as too much eating or drinking. Rising early is very good for the health. We heard the babbling of the rivulets and the singing of the birds in the wood. Reading bad books is a very bad thing (tr. very prejudicial) for young people. On the entrance (infin,) of the (nom,) monarch, the whole assembly rose. At daybreak (to break, rayar), the enemy began to bombard the fortress. The sowing of the grain takes place in (the) autumn, after the harvest. You must not tell your brother that I (have been) was here to-day. I wish to speak to your uncle; is he at home? Let me eat in peace! When I shall have had my dinner (tr, after having eaten), I shall tell you everything you want to know. Please (tr. servirse) walk in, sir! Why do you not let (go) out the dog? 2. I saw the footman entering (in) the house, but I do not know whether he is still there. Come, children, it is time to go to bed! The intention to do one's duty is not suffi- cient, for we do not judge the intention (infin. querer)^ but the action (tr. the doing). What o'clock is it? It has just struck 9 o'clock. The king had just arrived when the can- nonade began. A priest must be adorned with all (the) virtues. I have nothing to do. Do give me something to do! I had still to write three letters when the servant told me that the post had already gone. After having read the novel, I forgot to send it to my sister. After having shut the door, he for- got to take the key out. Does the child begin to speak? Who teaches him singing? When he began to sing, they started laughing. He began by calling the footman a thief. Digitized by VaOOQlC 850 Lesson 21. and finished by giving him a box on the ear. As he is an impostor, he will be punished. He has been punished for haying been an impostor. Beading Exercise. Lope Félix de Vega Carpió, Hijo de ana familia de conocida nobleza, nació en Madrid en 1562. Anunciáronse ya en su más tierna infancia sus agi- gantadas disposiciones. Poeta desde la cuna, con una facili- dad extraordinaria componía versos, cuando aquellos á quienes la naturaleza trat-ó menos pródigamente, empiezan á articular palabras. Á los doce años había estudiado las Humanidades. Habiendo perdido á sus padres en tan tierna edad, se habrían acaso malogrado los talentos de este monstruo de la natura- leza, como le llama Cervantes, si en su orfandad no hubiera encontrado un apoyo en D. Gerónimo Manrique, obispo de Ávila, que le recibió en clase de familiar suyo. Estudió la filosofía en Alcalá, vino después á Madrid y sirvió de Secre- tario, al Duque de Alba. Casóse con D*^ Isabel de Urbina, y por un lance de honor en que hirió gravemente á su adver- sario, tuvo que andar por algunos años desterrado. A su re- greso perdió á su esposa, y parte obligado por la necesidad, y parte aburrido por las desgracias, tomó servicio en la aciaga espedición naval de Felipe II contra Inglaterra, cuando nuestra Invencible quedó vencida. Disgustado sin duda de esta carrera, volvió de nuevo á su patria, y casóse segunda vez ; pero habiendo también perdido á su esposa, abrazó el estado eclesiástico. La consideración que le dio esta nueva situación, y el sosiego de que la acompañaba, contribuyeron mucho á multiplicar sus obras y extender sus relaciones y celebridad. Llegó ésta á tal término que el Papa Urbana VIII, nada amigo de Fe- lipe IV ni de España, y mas apasionado del jesuíta Santa- relia que de Homero ni Virgilio, le escribió de su puño con- firiéndole el título de Doctor en teología y el hábito de S. Juan, y nombrándole Fiscal de la Cámara Apostólica. Col- mado de honores, lleno de aplausos, y en el seno de la abun- dancia vivió Lope de Vega hasta que, en 1635, terminó sus días de edad de setenta y tres años, recibiendo un suntuoso entierro por dirección y á costa de su testamentario el Duque de Sesa. [P. Mendibil y M. Silvela. — «Biblioteca Selecta Española.'»] Conversación. ¿De quién era hijo Lope de Vega? ¿Dónde y cuando nació? ¿Demostró pronto sus disposiciones? Dése una prueba. ¿Cómo le llama Cervantes? Digitized by VaOOQlC The Infinitive. 351 ¿Quién le protegió? ¿Cómo? ¿Dónde estudió Lope de Vega? ¿Cuántas veces se casó? ¿Con quién la primera vez? ¿Por qué estuvo desterrado? ¿Qué hizo después de haber perdido ásu primera esposa? ¿Y qué después de perder á la segunda? Consecuencias de su nuevo estado. Prueba de su celebridad. ¿Cómo murió, y cuándo? Twenty-second Lesson. The iDflnitive. (Conclusion.) in. The Infinitive taking the place of an acces- sory sentence. As the Infinitive specifies neither person nor number, it is peculiarly suited for the forming of such contrac- ted accessory sentences where the references to person and number are so evident as not to need to be ex- pressed. These contracted sentences are introduced: 1. When both the principal and the accessory sent- ence have the same subject (the same as in French), as: Figurábase ver á Enrique ya en el trono. Lit. He fancied he saw Henry already on the throne. (Without contraction: He fancied that he saw etc.) 2. When the subject of the subordinate clause stands in the principal sentence as a dative or accu- sative case: Castigué al niño, por hctberme dicho una mentira. I punished the child for having told me a falsehood. ( Without contracton : I punished the child because it had told me, etc.) Here the subject of the subordinate clause (it) occurs as an accusative (the child) (in Spanish al niño) in the principal sentence. N.B,—MiQY the verb decir, to say, to tell, the direct form is used, just as in English; thus: Bice que ha visto á tu primeo en el teatro (and not haber visto, etc.). He says he has seen your cousin at the theatre. Digitized by VaOOQlC 852 Lesson 22. Remark, — It must be well understood that the con- traction of a subordinate sentence by means of the Infinitive is not imperative; and that the speaker wishing to lay a greater stress on the accessory idea may do so by employing the direct form. Thus the phrase: He did not know whom to apply to, may be translated: No supo á quién volverse, or, in a direct form: No supo á quién debía volverse. He did not know to whom he should apply. 3. When the subordinate sentence is practically but the Subject of the principal one — i.e.: Es notorio ser este hombre tm picaro. This man is known to be a rogue. (A misconception cannot arise in such a case, because the contracted subordinate clause has its own subject: este hombre.) 4. With other subordinate sentences the contracted form is also possible, even when the subject of the accessory sentence stands only indirectly in the prin- cipal one ; but not if any misconception could arise. Ex. : Su misantropía proviene de no haber tenido nunca un verdadero amigo. His misanthropy is caused by his never having had a true friend. Here the subject of the principal sentence *'misan- thropy," could not possibly be considered as the subject of the contracted accessory sentence. If, however, a misconception could arise, the sub- ject of the subordinate sentence ought to be added to the Infinitive, as in 2 (see above); thus: Antes de salir yo, llegó mi amigo. Before I went out, my friend arrived. {Antes de salir llegó mi amigo, before going out, my friend arrived, would suggest that it was the friend who went out.) ^.^.— After antes (before), and después (after) the In- finitive should be preceded by de, as: Después de haber pesado bien las razones .... After having well weighed the reasons .... Antes de hacer algo, hay que pensarlo bien. Before doing anything, one must think it over. Digitized by VaOOQlC The Infinitive. 353 Tradnccién. 23. (The subordinate sentences are to be rendered by the Infinitive.) 1. I gave (have given) the gardener a tip, because he has taken my letter to the post. I do not know how I shaU get rid of this tedious company (how to get , . .) My poor friend, you never know how to spend your time! I know my brother too (muy) well, to think he could have done such a tbing. Did you not tell me yesterday, that your cousin (f,) bad gone to England? I have told you that you must be quiet. The footman affirmed that he had not seen his master (all day long) the whole day. You will do well if you (en) do not send him more money than he wants for his journey. It is well known (admitido) that Cervantes and Calderón art tbe greatest Spanish writers {or: C. and C. are known to "be . . . .). When I arrived in Paris, I did not know which of my relations / should go to see first. Bring me some- thing to drink! Is there anything to be seen in this church? Before I have received his letter, I cannot go away. Before mj uncle has arrived, I cannot start. 2. After having arrived, we visited the cathedral, the museum, and the public gardens of the town. As (por) the rain was so heavy, my friend lent me his umbrella. By (con) always doing our duty, we gain the esteem of people. If (á) you take (tomar) this way, you will attain your end. If (á) one hears him, he knows everything better than other people. If (á) I had not seen it with my own eyes, I should not believe it. It is not enough that he (sobre) does not work, he also wants to be paid better than the others. If (para) one wishes to attain one's end, one must carefully examine every circumstance. After having teased me long, he finally desisted from his request. It is enough for me that I know it. Before the physician arrived, the patient had died. You have offended me too much* for me to (para) forgive you. Beading Exercise. Retrato del Duque de Wellington. Representaba Wellington cuarenta y cinco años, y esta era su edad, la misma exactamente que Napoleón, pues am- bos nacieron en 1769, el uno en mayo, y el otro en agosto. El sol de la India y el de España habían alterado la blancura de su color sajón. Era la nariz, cómo antes he dicho, larga y un poco bermellonada ; la frente, resguardada de los rayos del sol por el sombrero, conservaba su blancura y era her- * Too much with that following is simply translated muy or mucho. Spanish Conv. -Grammar. 28 Digitized by vaOOQlC 854 Lesson 23. mosa 7 serena como la de ana estatua griega, revelando nn pensamiento sin agitación y sin fiebre, ana imaginación en- cadenada 7 gran facaltad de ponderación y cálcalo. Ador- naba sa cabeza un mechón de pelo ó tup^ que no usaban ciertamente las estatuas griegas, pero que no cala mal, sir- viendo de vértice á una mollera inglesa. Los grandes ojos azules del general miraban con frialdad, posándose vagamente sobre el objeto observado, y observaban sin aparente interés. Era la voz sonora, acompasada, medida, sin cambiar de tono, exacerbaciones, ni acentos duros, y el conjunto de su modo de expresarse, reunidos el gesto, la voz y los ojos, producía grata impresión de respeto y cariño. [B. Pérez Galdós.— «Xa Batalla de los Arapile8.y>] Conversación. ¿Qué edad tenia Wellington? ¿La representaba? ¿Había mncba diferencia de edad entre él y Napoleón? ¿Por qué? ¿Cuál es en general el color de la raza sajona? ¿Lo era el de Wellington? ¿Por qué no? Describase la fisonomía de Wellington. Descríbase su modo de mirar y de hablar. ¿Cuál era el resultado de este conjunto? Twenty-third Lesson. The Gerand. § 1. This invariable form either replaces an acces- sory sentence introduced by one of the conjunctions hecaicse, as^ whilst, if, etc., or corresponds exactly to the English present participle*. It commonly refers to the subject of the principal sentence^ and expresses an action simultaneous ,with that of the principal sentence. At the same time it loses nothing of its verbal character and may, therefore, govern an object If we consider the following sentence: Los cabreros, tendiendo por él suelo unas pieles de ovejas, aderezaron su rústica cena, The goat-herds, spreading on the ground some sheep- skins, prepai*ed their simple supper. • Or, rather, to the English gerund, commonly misnamed "Present participle," bacause it has the same form. Digitized by vaOOQlC The Gerund. 355 we observe: 1. that the gerundio tendiendo (spreading) refers to the subject, los cabreros (the goat-herds); 2. that the action expressed by tendiendo is simul- taneous with that which the principal sentence, Los cabreros aderejsaron su rústica cena, imports; 3. that the gerundio has retained its verbal character, and thus governs its own object, unas pieles (some sheep-skins). It must be distinctly understood that the Spanish Gerund cannot take the place of the English present participle if this latter be* employed as an equivalent for an adjective, as in the sentence: He sent four parcels containing 20 pieces of cloth. It is true that Spaniards likewise often say: Envió cuatro fardos conteniendo veinte piezas de paño, exactly as in English, but this mode of speaking is in- correct and must be considered a Gallicism, The re- lative que should be used instead: Envió cuatro fardos que contenían .... § 2. Where no misconception can possibly arise, the Spanish Gerund may quite as well refer to the accusative case**, especially if this accusative is a per- sonal pronoun and not a substantive. Thus : Le hallaron durmiendo, they found him sleeping. Here * 'sleeping" can by no means refer to the subject "they," but only to "him," i.e., the accusative case, and thus any misconception is impossible. § 3. If the Spanish Gerund is used instead of an accessory sentence whose subject is a substantive, this substantive should be added to the gerundio, as: Faltándoles los víveres, los sitiados se rindieron á discreción. As provisions were wanting, the besieged surrendered unconditionally. (Here the subordinate clause: as provisions, etc., has its own subject, which is therefore added to the gerundio.) * No gerund, but a participle. ** The Spanish Gerund often does refer to the accusative in Spanish, whilst in Italian such constructions (see our Italian 28* Digitized by vaOOQlC 856 Lesson 23. § 4. If the Gerund refers to the subject (nomina- tive) y it takes its place before the verb; when referring to the accusative^ it follows the verb, as: SaUendo me dijo. Going out, he told me (saliendo refers to the nomina- tive él [he], suppressed in dijo). Whereas: Le oigo hdblando con un hombre desconocido. I hear him speaking with an unknown man (hablando refers to the accusative le [him]). Note.— In the latter case, however (i.e., where the Gerund refers to the accusative case), the Infinitive is preferred, pro- vided no peculiar stress be laid on the duration of the action (see 8). § 5. Commonly the Spanish Gerund is used in- stead of the Infinitive with verbs of ''seeing" "hearing" ''feeling," etc. But it cannot be used with these verbs if the verb of the principal sentence is in a past tensCy or if the accusative is a substantive (see § 2). Thus: La VÍ* escribir (and not la vi escribiendo). I saw her writing (Vi is a past tense). Oigo habUir á mi hermano (and not oigo hablando á....). I hear my brother speaking. (The accus. my brother is a substantive.) § 6. Sometimes the Infinitive conveys another meaning than the Gerund: the former being passive (and therefore never taking an object) , the latter active (sometimes, with an object). Thus: Le vi dibujando (una cosa). I saw him drawing (something). Le vi dUyujar, I saw him as he was drawing. § 7. The English Participles (both Present and Past) are often preceded by 9i preposition^ as: On seeing him; whilst reflecting; after having said; when bom, etc. In Spanish en precedes the Gerund if it is to be meant Grammar y 5th edit. : On the Gerund) are carefully avoided, being now quite obsolete. — In English the present participle frequently refers to the accusative, as in the above sentence: They found him sleeping. "^ If the áuration is to be emphasized with a past tense, the corresponding tense of estar is coupled with the gerundio of the prvncvpal verb (see 8). Digitized by VaOOQlC The Gerund. 357 that the action imported by the principal sentence is sub- sequent to, and closely connected with the action expressed by the Gerund, otherwise, al with the Infinitive is employed. Ex. : En Uegando^ le veré. As soon as I arrive, I shall see him. Lo primero que en naciendo* hacemos^ es llorar. The first thing we do, on being born, is to cry. Al verlCy le abrazó, on seeing him, he embraced him. ^.^.— In no case, but the above, is a Spanish preposition used with the Oernnd: JPracticándolo, el lector lo aprenderá. By practising it, the reader will learn it. § 8. In order to express duration, the verbs andar, estar, ir, ser, and venir are joined to the Gerund; if the continuation of the action is to be emphasized, caminar, continuar, and seguir are used in the same way. Ex. : Le aconsejaba redoblase su ternura para ir dispo^ fiiendo el corazón de Blanca, He advised him to redouble his tenderness, in order to soften Blanca's heart. La grave enfermedad que le iba consumiendo. The severe illness by which he was consumed (which was consuming him). Los grandes del reino están aguardando vuestras órdenes, The grandees of the kingdom are awaiting your orders. 8e va haciendo tarde, it is growing late. El ave vino volando, the bird flew hither. Siguieron durmiendo. They slept on (they continued sleeping). Poco á poco fué Tiaciéndose rico. Little by little he became rich. § 9. A pecuharity of the Spanish Gerund is that it receives — in a very few cases — the masculine dimi- nutive ending, as: corriendito, callandito. These Ge- ** In Italian the gerundio with in only occurs in ancient writers. Thus: Se Vardor fallace. Duró molfanni in aspettando un giorno. (Petrarca, Son. 21.) Digitized by VjOOQIC 358 Lesson 28. mnds have lost their signification as verbs and are simply adverbs. Note the following: Hágalo F. volando, do it this very moment Vuelva F. corriendo, come back at once. Callandito, que hay enfermos. Keep (or come in) very quietly, somebody is ill here. Matarlas caUando, to do things on the quiet ¿Cómo sigue F? — Pasando. How are you getting on y — Middling. Bemark. — In modern Spanish, the Gerund, which by its nature can only express a time preceding to, or simultaneous with, the time of the principal sentence, is also sometimes erroneously employed in such cases where the action denoted by the Gerund must be logically considered as following that implied by the principal sentence. If we analyse the sentence: Las tropas se hicieron fuertes en tm c&nvento, teniendo pronto que rendirse, después de una vigorosa rcsís- tencia .... The troops entrenched themselves in a convent, beifi^ soon obliged to surrender, after a vigorous resist- ance .... it may be easily seen that the action of "entrenching themselves" must be previous to the action of "surrendering." The gerund teniendo qus is therefore incorrect. A logical construction of the sentence would be: Las tropas, qus se habían hecho fuertes en un con' vento, tuvieron pronto que rendirse, después de una vigorosa resistencia. Tradnccién. 24. 1. Handing me the letter, he requested me to read it and send it at once (adverbial gerund) to you. Whilst uttering these words, she began to sob. I found him smoking his cigar. Alfonso XII. died after having said these significant words: ''What a responsibility r These people spend their nights (in) gambling. Whilst we were (estar) talking, we heard an alarm of fire. By always speaking the truth, we obey the voice of our conscience. If you study (ger.) with zeal, you will soon make great progress in anything. As he entered (infin.), he told me to shut the window. I saw him talking to your aunt. This is your father's portrait; I saw him sitting for it. Yesterday the painter was in this drawing- Digitized by vaOOQlC The Gerund. 359 room; I saw him painting. Yesterday I heard the new singer singing. Whilst (mientras) I listened to the singer (f.) [tr. Whilst I heard (with estar) the singer singing], the foot- man entered (in) the room. 2. This man is a sluggard; in order to avoid working [tr. for (para) not working (infin.)'], he will (tr. ir) sell (ger7) all (ciumio) he possesses. The agent is (tr. andar) running about the town all day long. By following his advice, I have sustained a great loss. On leaving the room, he went out (use irse); I saw him shutting (¿nf.) the door. After having read the letter to the end (tr. acabar, preposit. gerund), he gave it back, saying: **As soon as I get (tr. llegar) to the office, I will see to (tr. ocuparse de) this business." -á^ the singer (m,) is ill to-day, the opera cannot be performed. Speaking thus to me (tr. al with infin.), he gave me his (the) hand. I looked everywhere (ir with ger.) for my hat, but I could not find it. I have been (fr. estar) waiting for yon three hours, but you did not come. What are you doing there (tr. estar)? I am waiting for my master. It kept on raining the whole (seguir with gerund) night. The heat is increasing (ir with ger.) from hour to hour. Let us go; it is growing (tr. irse haciendo) night. Do it this very moment (gerund) and come back at once (gerund). How is the invalid? Middling (gerund); come in quietly (gerund) , he is asleep (gerund) now. Beading Exercise. Facia, No era antipática, ciertamente, la cara de aquella sir- viente, y hasta se hallaban en ella vestigios de haber sido hermosa en su juventud. Respondía con agrado á las pre- guntas que me arriesgué á hacerla, por hablar de algo y alegrar un poco el tedioso colorido de mis ideas. Así supe que se llamaba Facia; que desde muy joven servia en casa de mi tío, y que en ella pensaba morir, si esa era la voluntad de su amo, á quien quería y respetaba como á padre y señor, y aun con eso no le pagaba bastante los grandes beneficios que le debía. El y su señora la habían recogido huérfana y des- amparada, dándola desde entonces buena enseñanza y poco trabajo, pan abundante, y lo que vale más que eso, cariño y sombra. Todo esto me lo iba declarando como á la descui- dada, en períodos cortados y sin mirarme á la cara, pero reflejando en la suya cierta expresión de dulzura melancólica que la hacía muy interesante, mientras se movía lentamente de acá para allá, poniendo aquí un plato después de pasarle con un lienzo blanquísimo, y allí un vaso ó tenedor. [José M.a de Pereda. — «Peñas Arriba.»] Digitized by VaOOQlC 860 Lesson 24. CoüTersación. ¿Qué era Facia, y cómo era su cara? ¿Había sido hermosa? ¿Cómo se conocía? ¿Por qué la habló? ¿Qué supo? ¿Cómo ñié declarando todo aquello Facia? ¿Qué hacía Facia entretanto? Twenty-fourth Lesson. Past Participle, In Lesson 11, Part I., we have already treated the Present as well as the Past Participle. We now add a few remarks as to the use of the latter. § 1. As stated in Lesson 9, Part L, the past parti- ciple coupled with haber is always invariable'^, as: He visto una hermosa comedia, 1 have seen a fine comedy. Les he referido el suceso y no me lo han creído, I have informed them of the event, and they have not believed me. Las cerezas que he comprado son buenas. The cherries which I have bought are good. § 2. On the contrary, joined to ser or estar, or to one of the auxiliaries dejar, llevar, quedar (see Part II, Lesson 17), it becomes an adjective, and must therefore agree with the substantive in gender and number, as: La casa fué edificada en 1901, The house was built in 1901. La carta está acabada^ the letter is finished. Los asesinos fueron muertos. The murderers were killed. Yo quedé muy agradecida á sus beneficios, I (f,) was very thankful for his kindness. * In ancient Spanish, however, examples are met with where the past participle, coupled with haber, agrees with its foregoing object, as in French and Italian. Thus: Ayquellas (= aquellas) lees (= leyes) que habernos (= hemos) fechas (= hechas). These laws which we have made. (Partidas del rey D, Alfonso X.) Digitized by vaOOQlC Past Participle. 361 § 3. If the participle is coupled with tener instead of haber, it hkewise agrees in gender and number with its object, as: Tengo leida la carta. I have already read the letter. Tengo comprados algunos libros, I have bought some books. § 4. Tener may be used with a participle that governs no accusative; in which case the participle is invariable, as: Les tengo escrito largamente sobre esta materia, I have written them in fall about this matter. Note, — The student should be well aware, that in such a case tener may only be used with verbs that are not ge- nerally neuter, but which are only used as such, so that the direct object of the verb is understood from the context. In the above sentence, the direct object of tengo escrito would be lo que era menester, that which was necessary, or lo que con- venía, or something similar. As this object is not a word, but a subordinate sentence, the participle cannot, of course, agree with it. The whole sentence would be properly: Les tengo escrito largamente sobre esta materia lo que era menester. Neuter verbs do not admit of the construction with tener, as such verbs can never govern a direct object. Thus it would be utterly impossible to say: Tengo sido cónsul en Hamburgo, I have been Consul at Hamburg, or tenían en- fermado de la epidemia reinante, they were taken ill with the prevailing epidemic; the only correct rendering of which would be: He sido cónsul, etc., and habían enfermado. Note, — Nor is the construction with tener admissible with reflective verbs. Thus we may say: Les tiene instruidos, he has instructed them, but never: Él se tiene instruido, he has instructed himself. The sentence may only be: Él se ha instruido. § 5. Very often the participle replaces an accessory sentence (the Latin Ablativus absolutus). In such a case the participle agrees in gender and number with the word to which it refers, and the auxiliary is omitted, bnt the participle mnst always precede. Ex.: Becobrados* los espíritus, volvió Blanca en si. After having recovered her senses, Blanca came again to herself. * Properly: habiendo recobrado^ etc. Digitized by VjOOQIC 862 Lesson 24. Abracada esta idea, quedó un poco más tranquilo. After having taken this resolution, he became a little more tranquil. § 6. Very often these participles are preceded by después de ... . (less frequently by antes de, before and luego de, as soon as), for the sake of greater emphasis, as: La hija de aquel Manfredo, á quien después de ven- cido y muerto el padre, había tratado con una barbarie sin ejemplo .... The daughter of that Manfred whom, after having con- quered and killed her father, he had treated with a barbarity without example .... Antes de dada la arden, before the order was given. iMcgo de acabada la misa, as soon as mass was over. Again, the personal pronoun in the nominative case sometimes occurs with such participles, though, in the modem language, it must follow the participle, as: Después de yo muerta (i.e., de muerta yo). (Santa Teresa.) When I shall be dead. § 7. Constructions like: Tomado que fuese uno de ellos (i.e., castillos, as soon as one of them would have been taken) have been explained in LfCsson 14, Part 11. ("On the Subordinate Conjunctions"). It must be dist- inctly understood, that this is not an instance of an absolute participle, like those mentioned under 5, but simply of an inversion, where que is used instead of a compound conjunction. The ordinary construction of the above sentence would be: lAiego que uno de ellos fuese tomado etc. Finally, we add now a further list of the participles mentioned on p. 191, Parti, which, besides their j^assive form, have an active signification, and are therefore adjectives most frequently used with ser\ Acomodado, comfortable and well-to-do. atrevido, dared » bold. avisado, advised » cautious. callado, (having) been silent » taciturn. cansado, fatigued, tired » tiresome. cenado, supped » having supped. comido, eaten » having eaten. comedido, measured » prudent. desarreglado, disarranged » careless. Digitized by VaOOQlC Past Participle. 363 desconfiado, mistrasted desesperadOy despaired determinadOy resolved disimulado, concealed distinguido, distinguished entendido, understood esforzado, encouraged fingido, feigned (bien) hablado, spoken leido, read medido, measured mirado, looked moderado, moderated necesitado, needed ocasionado, caused ordenado, ordered osado, dared parado, arrested parecido, seemed pausado, paused pesado, weighed porfiado, persisted, quarrelled precavido, taken care or heeded preciado, appreciated presumiclo, presumed recatado, concealed sabido, known sacudido, hit, hurt, etc. sentido, felt sufrido, suffered válido, esteemed versado, versed and mistrustful (person). » desperate. » very resolute. » malignant. » distinguished (person). » intelligent. » bold. » fallacious. » eloquent. » learned, well-read. » cautious. » circumspect. » moderate, temperate. » a poor, indigent person. » causing . . . » methodical person. » daring, dauntless. » slow, lazy. » similar, seeming. » deliberate. » tiresome, a bore. » stubborn. » cautious. » vain, affected. » . presuming, haughty. » chaste, modest, cautious. » intelligent, prudent. » harsh, audacious. » sensible. » hardy. » beloved, favourite. » very conversant. N.B.—Wiih ancient authors, and even now sometimes in poetry, some verbal adjectives derived from intransitive verbs, like nacido, born; muerto, died, dead; ido, gone; venido, come; vuelto, come back, returned; llegado, arrived, occur with the auxiliary ser. The difference is exactly as in English. Ex.: Son idos, they are gone; han ido, they have gone. Es vuelto, he is returned (a good while); ha vuelto, he has returned. JEs musrto, he is dead; ha muerto, he has died. Son llegados, they are arrived; han llegado, they have arrived. Digitized by VjOOQIC 864 Lesson 24.. Further Remarks on the use of the Past Participle. 1. Some denoting state, condition, eaunot be used with estar, but are replaced by the corresponding a^ectiye: 8e ha alegrado, but está alegre, he is pleased. se ha calentado, » está caliente, he is hot, warm. ha enfriado (el dio), » esta frió, it is cold. se ha entristecido, » está triste, he is sad. ha enviudado, » está muda (viudo), she (he) is a widow(er). And such others as flaco (thin), gord4} (fat), mudo (dumb), pobre (poor), rico (rich), seco (dry), sordo (deaf), sucio (dirty), turbio (stirred), húmeda (damp), and libre (free), the corresponding participles of which are enflaquecido, engordado, enmudecido, em- pobrecido, enriquecido, ensordecido, ensuciado, enturbiado, humedecido, and librado. 2. Some others susceptible of an active meaning (see Lists pages 191, 362), and therefore used with ser, may also be used trith estar when referring to a pecuhar case, moment, or circumstance — i.e.: Au/nque es timido, ha estado muy osado hoy. Although timid, he has behaved very daringly to-day. / Qué presumida estaba porque todos la miraban en d baile ! How haughtily she behaved, because all were looking at her at the dance. 3. Ser and estar are never followed by their own participles, which are used with haber; thus: He sido acusado injustamente. I am accused unjustly. El niño no viene porque está castigado (or ha sido castigado). The child does not come, because he is being punished. 4. Verbs with two past participles have one of them irregular, in a contracted form, with the force of an adjective (sometimes with a meaning different to that of the regular participle), and used with estar; such are, among others: Absorber, absorbido, absorbed; absorto, astonished. bendecir, bendecido, blessed ; bendito, blessed, holy. Digitized by vaOOQlC Past Participle. 365 completar, completado,comp\etedí ; completo, complete. confundiVj confundido, confound- ed; contentado, pleased; confuso, confused. contentar, contento, happy. desnudar, desnudado, undressed; desnudo, naked. despertar, despertado, awaken; despierto, awake. expedir. expedido, sent; des- expedito, free, cleared patched ; (of roads). fijar, fijado, fixed; jftjo, fixed, immovable. juntar, juntado, joined; junto(s), together. limpiar, limpiado, cleaned; limpio, clean, neat. llenar. llenado, filled; Ueno, full. maldecir. maldecido, cursed; maldito, cursed. matar, matado, killed; m>uerto, dead. prender. prendido, caught; fastened; preso, (put) in prison. 5. The contracted forms of the following — among others — are used as: (a) Adjectives that do not join estar: Abstraer, abstraido, abstracted; absorbed ; abstrcicto, abstract. concretar. concretado, concreted concreto, special (as (not abstracted); of a case). expresar, expresado, manifested; eocpreso, express. extender, extendido, prolonged; eoctenso, large. (b) Substantives: Extraer, extraído, extracted; un extracto, an ab- stract. favorecer. favorecido, favoured; el favorito, the fa- vourite. impeler, impelido, impelled; el impulso, the im- pulse. permitir. permitido, permitted; el permiso, the con- sent. (c) Participles, or in adverbial phrases: Exceptuar, exceptuado, excluded; excepto hoy, but to- day. improvisar, improvisado, impro- de im,proviso, sud- vised ; denly. salvar, salvado, saved; salvo mañana, but to- morrow. ver. visto, seen; por lo visto, un- doubtedly. Digitized by Google 866 Lesson 24. Tradnceión. 25. 1. Have you read the letter (which) my sister wrote (has written) to me? No, I have not yet read it. The apples which the (maid-) servant has bought are finer than those which you have bought. Is the new church already conse- crated? No, it will be consecrated next Sunday. At these words he became (tr. quedar) very sad. The enemies were pursued to the very ramparts of the fortress. Have you read the book which I (have) sent you by the footman? No, I have bought several new novels which I shall read before I begin (if^.) reading your book. He has spoken much with my father about the matter, but I do not know what he has resolved. After supper was (part,) over, we all went home. After the king had died (part,), his son ascended the throne. When I ivas informed of this accident, I at once departed for Paris. After (después de . , , ,) having satisfied his curio- sity, he repented of what he had done. 2. The town having been conquered, the daring defenders were put in prison. Though we are forsaken by all onr fiiends, we shall nevertheless do our duty. Tormented by remorse, the criminal at last confessed his guilt. It is diffi- cult to reconcile people oflFended (hurt) in their vanity. Ill- bred children are the hardest punishment of their parents. After (the) peace had been re-established, the troops returned to their homes. Scarcely had the word been spoken when the whole assembly broke forth into an enormous uproar. Have you spoken to the judge? I spoke (have spoken) to him to-day, but he gave me little hope for the prisoner. After having paid the bill, I told the waiter to send my trunk to the station. After these preparations had been made, we went to (meet) the company. 3. He has been very pleased, but she is not pleased. Is it true that she has become a widow? Yes, she is a widow. Come near the fire, the day has turned cooler. No, thanks; I got warm walking, and I am warm now. How thin she has becomel She is thin, because she does not eat. Do you not think she is very timid? Timid? She has behaved very daringly on many occasions. I have been told that they have caught the murderer. Yes, he is in prison; but the man is not dead. Oh! I thought he had killed him. I am speaking of a special case, but undoubtedly (partic. used adverbially) you do not understand me. Digitized by VaOOQlC Past Participle. 36í7 Reading Exercise. Cartas de mi Sobrino, 22 de Marzo. Querido tío y venerado maestro: Hace cuatro días que llegué con toda felicidad á este lugar de mi nacimiento, donde he hallado bien de salud á mi padre, al sefíor vicario j á los amigos j parientes. El contento de verlos y de hablar con ellos, después de tantos afíos de ausencia, me ha embargado el ánimo y me ha robado el tiempo, de suerte que hasta ahora no he podido escribir á usted. Usted me lo perdonará. Como salí de aquí tan niño y he vuelto hecho un hombre, es singular la impresión que me causan todos estos objetos que guardaba en la memoria. Todo me parece más chico, mucho más chico, pero también más bonito que el recuerdo que tenia. La casa de mi padre, que en mi imaginación era inmensa, es sin duda una gran casa de un rico labrador, pero más pequeña que el Seminario. Lo que ahora comprendo y estimo mejor es el campo de por aquí. Las huertas, sobre todo, son deliciosas. ¡Qué sendas tan lindas hay entre ellas I A un lado, y tal vez á ambos, corre el agua cristalina con grato marmullo. Las orillas de las acequias están cubiertas de hierbas olorosas y de flores de mil clases. En un instante puede uno coger un ramo de violetas. [J. Valera.— «Pcpiía Jimenez.:»] Conversación. ¿Qué fecha tiene la carta? ¿Á quién la escribe? ¿Cuánto tiempo hace que llegó? ¿Qué le ha embargado el ánimo y le ha robado el tiempo? ¿Cuál es la razón de sus singulares impresiones? ¿Qué le parece todo? Cítese un ejemplo. ¿Qué es lo que comprende y estima mejor? ¿Describase el campo? Digitized by VjOOQIC 868 Poesías. Oda moral. ¡Qué descansada vida la del que huye el mundanal ruido, j sigue la escondida senda por donde han ido los pocos sabios que en el mundo han sido! Que no le enturbia el pecho de los soberbios grandes el estado, ni del dorado techo se admira, fabricado del sabio moro, en jaspes sustentado. No cura si la fama canta con voz su nombre pregonera, ni cura si encarama la lengua lisonjera lo que condena la verdad sincera. ¿Qué presta á mi contento si soy del vano dedo señalado? si en busca de este viento ando desalentado, con ansias vivas, con mortal cuidado? I Oh monte, oh fuente, oh río, oh secreto seguro, deleitoso! roto casi el navio, á vuestro almo reposo huyo de aqueste mar tempestuoso. Un no rompido sueño, un día puro, alegre, libre quiero; no quiero ver el ceño vanamente severo de á quien la sangre ensalza ó el dinero. Digitized by VaOOQlC Poesías. ^G9 Despiértenme las aves n su cantar sabroso no aprendido; no los cuidados graves, de que es siempre seguido el que al ajeno arbitrio está atenido. Vivir quiero conmigo, gozar quiero del bien que debo al cielo, á solas, sin testigo, libre de amor, de ceJo, de odio, de esperanzas, de recelo. Del monte en la ladera por mi mano plantado tengo un huerto, que con la primavera de bella flor cubierto, ja muestra en esperanza el fruto cierto. Y como codiciosa, por ver y acrecentar su hermosura, desde la cumbre airosa una fontana pura hasta llegar corriendo se apresura. ' Y luego, sosegada, el paso entre los árboles torciendo, el suelo de pasada de verdura vistiendo, j con diversas flores va esparciendo. El aire el huerto orea, j ofrece mil olores al sentido, los árboles menea eon un manso ruido, que del oro y del cetro pone olvido. Ténganse su tesoro los que de un falso lefio se confían; no es mío ver el lloro de los que desconfían <;uando el cierzo y el ábrego porfían. La combatida antena ■cruje, y en ciega noche el claro día se torna, al cielo suena -confusa vocería, y la mar enriquecen á porfía. Á mí una pobrecilla mesa, de amable paz bien abastada, me basta, y la vajilla Spanish Con v. -Grammar. 24 Digitized by Google 870 Poesías. de fino oro labrada sea de quien la mar no teme airada. Y mientras miserable- mente se están los otros abrasando con sed insaciable del peligroso mando, tendido yo á la sombra esté cantando. k la sombra tendido, de hiedra y lauro eterno coronado, puesto el atento oído al son dulce, acordado, del plectro sabiamente meneado. [Fr. Luis de León} Epístola Moral. Fabio, las esperanzas cortesanas prisiones son do el ambicioso muere, y donde al más astuto nacen canas; y el que no las limare ó las rompiere, ni el nombre de varón ha merecido, ni subir al honor que pretendiere. El ánimo plebeyo y abatido elija en sus intentos temeroso, primero estar suspenso que caído: Que el corazón entero y generoso al caso adverso inclinará la frente, antes que la rodilla al poderoso. Más triunfos, más coronas dio al prudente,, que supo retirarse, la fortuna, que al que esperó obstinada y locamente. Esta invasión terrible é importuna de contrarios sucesos nos espera desde el primer sollozo de la cuna. Dejémosla pasar, como á la fiera corriente del gran Bétis, cuando airado dilata hasta los montes su ribera. Aquel entre los héroes es contado que el premio mereció, no quien le alcanza^ por vanas consecuencias del Estado. Peculio propio es ya de la privanza, cuanto de Astrea fué, cuanto regía con su temida espada y su balanza. Digitized by VjOOQIC Poesías. 371 El oro, la maldad, la tiranía del inicuo procede, j pasa al bueno: ¿qué espera la virtud, ó en qué conña? Vén y reposa en el materno seno de la antigua Bomúlea, cuyo clima t-e será más humano y más sereno. Adonde por lo menos, cuando oprima nuestro cuerpo la tierra, dirá algnno: blanda le sea, al derramarla encima: Donde no dejarás la mesa ayuno cuando te falte en ella el pece raro, ó cuando su pavón nos niegue Juno. Busca, pues, el sosiego dulce y caro, como en la oscura noche del Egeo busca el piloto el eminente faro: Que si acortas y ciñes tu deseo, dirás, lo que desprecio he conseguido, ' que la opinión vulgar es devaneo. Más precia el ruiseñor su pobre nido, de pluma y leves pajas, más sus quejas en el bosque repuesto y escondido. Que agradar lisonjero las orejas de algún príncipe insigne, aprisionado en el metal de las doradas rejas. ¡Triste de aquel que vive destinado á esa antigua colonia de los vicios, augur de los semblantes del privado! Cese el ansia y la sed de los oficios; que acepta el don, y burla del intento el ídolo á quien haces sacrificios. Iguala con la vida el pensamiento, y no le pasarás de hoy á mañana, ni quizá de un momento á otro momento. Casi no tienes ni una sombra vana de nuestra antigua Itálica: ¿y esperas? ¡Oh error perpetuo de la suerte humanal Las enseñas grecianas, las banderas del senado, y romana monarquía murieron, y pasaron sus carreras. 24* Digitized by VjOOQIC 872 Poesías. ¿Qaé es nuestra vida más que un breve día do apena sale el sol, cuando se pierde en las tinieblas de la noche fría? ¿Qué es más que el heno, á la mañana verde, seco á la tarde? ¡Oh ciego desvario! ¿será que de este sueño me recuerde? ¿Será que pueda ver que me desvío de la vida viviendo, j que está unida la cauta muerte al simple vivir mío? Como los ríos en veloz corrida se llevan á la mar, tal soy llevado al último suspiro de mi vida. De la pasada edad ¿qué me ha quedado? ¿O qué tengo yo, á dicha, en la que espero, sin ninguna noticia de mi hado? ;0h si acabase, viendo como muero, de aprender á morir, antes que llegue aquel forzoso término postrero! ¡Antes que aquesta mies inútil siegue de la severa muerte dura mano, y á la común materia se la entregue! Pasáronse las flores del verano, el otoño pasó son sus racimos, pasó el invierno con sus nieves cano: Las hojas que en las altas selvas vimos, cayeron: ¡y nosotros á porfía en nuestro engaño inmóviles vivimos! Temamos al Señor que nos en via las espigas del año y la hartura, y la temprana pluvia y la tardía. No imitemos la tierra siempre dura á las aguas del cielo y al arado, ni la vid cuyo fruto no madura. ¿Piensas acaso tú que fué criado el varón para el rayo de la guerra, para sulcar el piélago salado, para medir el orbe de la tierra, y el cerco donde el sol siempre camina? ¡Oh, quien así lo entiende, cuánto yerra! Esta nuestra porción, alta y divina, á mayores acciones es llamada, y en más nobles objetos se termina. Digitized by VjOOQIC Poesías. 373 Así aquella, que al hombre sólo es dada, sacra razón y pura me despierta, de esplendor y de rayos coronada; y en la fría región dura y desierta de aqueste pecho enciende nueva llama, y la luz vuelve á arder que estaba muerta. Quiero, Fabio, seguir á quien me llama, y callado pasar entre la gente, que no afecto los nombres ni la fama. El soberbio tirano del Oriente, que maciza las torres de cien codos del candido metal, puro y luciente, apenas puede ya comprar los modos de pecar; la virtud es más barata, ella consigo mesma ruega á todos. Pobre de aquel que corre y se dilata por cuantos son los climas y los mares, perseguidor del oro y de la plata. Un ángulo me basta entre mis lares, un libro y un amigo, un sueño breve que no perturben deudas ni pesares. Esto tan solamente es cuanto debe naturaleza al parco y al discreto y algún manjar común, honesto y leve. No, porque así te escribo, hagas conecto que pongo la virtud en ejercicio: que aun esto fué diñcil á Epíteto. Basta, al que empieza, aborrecer el vicio, y el ánimo enseñar á ser modesto, después le será el cielo más propicio. Despreciar el deleite no es supuesto de sólida virtud, que aun el vicioso en sí propio le nota de molesto. Mas no podrás negarme cuan forzoso este camino sea al alto asiento, morada de la paz y del reposo. No sazona la fruta en un momento aquella inteligencia, que mensura la duración de todo á su talento: Flor la vimos primero hermosa y pura, luego materia acerba y desabrida, y perfecta después, dulce y madura. Digitized by VjOOQIC 874 Poesías. Tal la humana pmdenoia es bien que mida, 7 dispense j comparta las acciones que han de ser compafieras de la vida. No quiera Dios que imite estos varones que moran nuestras plazas macilentos, de la yirtud infames histriones: Esos inmundos trágicos, atentos al aplauso común, cuyas entrañas son infaustos y oscuros monumentos. I Cuan callada que pasa las montañas el aura respirando mansamente! ¡Qué gárrula y sonante por las cañas! I Qué muda la virtud por el prudente! I Qué redundante y llena de ruido por el vano, ambicioso y aparente! Quiero imitar al pueblo en el vestido, en las costumbres sólo á los mejores, sin presumir de roto y mal ceñido. No resplandezca el oro y los colores en nuestro traje, ni tampoco sea igual al de los dóricos cantores. Una mediana vida yo posea, un estilo común y moderado, que no lo note nadie que lo vea. En el plebeyo barro mal tostado hubo ya quien bebió tan ambicioso como en el vaso múrico preciado: Y alguno tan ilustre y generoso que usó, como si fuera plata neta, del cristal trasparente y luminoso. ¿Sin la templanza viste tú perfeta alguna cosa? ¡Oh muerte, vén callada como sueles venir en la saeta! No en la tonante máquina preñada de fuego y de rumor; que no es mi puerta de doblados metales fabricada. Asi, Fabio, me muestra descubierta su esencia la virtud, y mi albedrio con ella se compone y se concierta. No te burles de ver cuánto confío, ni al arte de decir vana y pomposa el ardor atribuyas de este brio. Digitized by VaOOQlC Poesías. 875 ¿Es por ventora menos poderosa <[ue el vicio la virtud? ¿Es menos fuerte? no la arguyas de flaca y temerosa. La codicia en las manos de la suerte «e arroja al mar: la ira á las espadas, j la ambición se ríe de la muerte: ¿Y no serán siquiera tan osadas las opuestas acciones, si las miro er, to fall 173. calentar, to warm 148. carecer, to want, to lack 159. cegar, to blind, to dazzle 148. ceñir, to gird 163, 164. cerner, to bolt (meal) 148. cerrar, to shut 148. cimentar, to cement, to lay the foundation 148. ^ circuir, to surround 168. clarecer, to dawn 125, 159. clocar, to cluck 153. cocer, to cook 153, 156, 159*. colar, to filter, to bestow 153. colegir, to gather (infer) 163. colgar, to hang, to suspend 153. comedirse, to moderate oneself 163. coinenzar, to begin 148. compadecer, to pity 159. comparecer, to appear 159. competir, to emulate 163. complacer, to please 159. compl^ñir, to take pity 164. componer, to compose 178, 187. comprobar, to prove 153. concebir, to conceive 163. concernir, to concern 167, 192***. concertar, to arrange; — ««, to concert 148. concluir, to finish 168. concordar, to accord, to agree 153. condescender, to condescend 148. condoler, to condole, to pity 158. conducir, to lead 160. conferir, to confer 167. confesar, to confess 148. confluir, to meet (of rivers) 168. conmover, to touch, to stir 153. conocer, to know 159. conseguir, to succeed 163. consentir, to consent 167. consolar, to console 153. consonar, to accord 153. constituir, to constitute 168. constreñir, to constrain 163, 164. construir, to build 168. contar, to count, to tell 153. contender, to fight 148. contener, to contain 35. contorcer, to distort 153. contradecir, to contradict 173. contraer, to contract, to incur 179. confra/iacer, to counterfeit 177. contraponer, to compare (op- pose) 178. contravenir, to transgress (violate) 180. contribuir, to contribute 168. controvertir, to quarrel 167. convalecer, to be convalescent convenir, to agree 180. [159. convertir, to convert 167. corregir, to correct 163. corroer, to corrode 193. costar, to cost 153. crecer, to grow 159. cubrir, to cover 187. Digitized by VjOOQIC 400 Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs. D. Dar, to give 173. decaer^ to decay 173. decentar^ to cut 148. decir, to tell 173. decrecer^ to diminish 159. deducir, to deduct 160. defender, to defend 148. deferir, to defer 167. degollar, to behead 153. demoler, to demolish, to destroy 153. demostrar, to prove 153. denegar, to deny 148. denostar, to offend, to injure 153. dentar, to indent, to cut teeth 148. deponer, to depose 178, 187. derrenegar, to detest 148. derrengar, to lame 148. derretir, to melt 163. derrocar, to fling down, to render downcast 153 derruir, to demolish 168. desacertar, to cheat 148. desacordar, to disagree, to put out of tune 153. desaforar, to deprive of a right 153. desalentar, to discourage 148. desamoblar, to unfurnish 153. desandar, to go back the same road 172. desaparecer, to disappear 159. desapretar, to loosen 148. desaprobar, to disapprove 153. desarrendar, to unbridle 148. desasir, to let go 172. desasosegar, to trouble 153. desatender, to disregard 148. desatentar, to disconcert 148. desavenir (se), to disagree 180. descabullirse, to sneak off 164. descender, to descend 148. desceñir, to ungird 163, 164. descolgar, to take down 153. descollar, to overtop 153. descomedirse, to behave unman- nerly 163. desconcertar, to disconcert 153. desconocer, not to know 159. desconsolar, to render disconso- late 153. descontar, to discount 153. desconvenir(se), to disagree 180. descornar, to break off horns 153. desdar, to untwist a rope 17S. desdecir, to countermand 173. desembravecer, to tame 159. desembrutecer, to lose one's roughness 159. desempedrar, to unpave (a street^ etc.) 148. desencerrar, to free, to set at liberty 148. desencordar, to unstring 153. desengrosar, to diminish (thin) 153. desenmohecer, to free from rust 159. desentenderse, to feign ignorance 148. desenterrar, to unbury, to dig out 148. desenvolver, to unroll 153, 187. deservir, to be disobliging 163. desfallecer, to faint 159. desflocar, to unravel 153. deshacer, to undo 177. deshelar, to thaw 125^ 148. desherrar, to unfetter, to take off a horse-shoe 148. desleír, to dissolve 163. deslucir, to tarnish 159. des^nembrar, to dismember 148. desmentir, to give the lie, to deny 167. desmerecer, to demerit 159. desnevar, to thaw 125, 148. desobedecer, to disobey 159. desobstruir, to clear away 168. desoír, not to listen to (disobey) 173. desolar, to desolate (devastate) 153. desoldar, to unsolder 153. desollar, to flay, to strip off 153. desosar, to take the bone out (of meat) 153. desovar, to lay eggs, to spawn 153. desparecer, to disappear 159. despedir, to discharge (a servant) 163. despedirse, to take leave, to say goodbye 163. Digitized by VaOOQlC Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs. 401 despernar^ to cut off a leg, to lame a leg 148. despertar, to awake 148, 189. desplacer, to displease 159, 193. desplegar J to unfold 148, 150^. despoblar, to depopulate 153. desteñir, to lose colour 163, 164. desterrar, to banish 148. destituir, to deprive, to dismiss 168. destrocar, to break off a bargain 153. destruir, to destroy 168. desvanecer, to vanish 159. desvergonzarse, to behave in a shameless manner 153. €let€ner, to stop 35. ^etmer, to detract 179. devolver, to give back 153, 187. dezmar^ to pay tithe 148. diferir, to defer 167. digerir, to digest 167. diluir, to dissolve 168. discerner, to discern 148. discernir, to distinguish 167. disconvenir y to disagree 180. discordar y to be discordant 153. disentir, to dissent 167. disminuir^ to diminish 168. disolver, to dissolve 153, 187. disonar, to be dissonant 153. dispertar, to awake 148, 189. disponer, to dispose 178, 187. distender, to distend 148. distraer, to distract, to amuse 179. distribuir, to distribute 168. divertir, to divert, to amuse 167. doler, to ache, to give pain 153. dormir, to sleep 176. E. Elegir, to select 163. embebecer, to astonish 159. embellecer y to embellish 159. embestir, to attack 163. embravecer, to become furious 159. enibrtctecer, to become brutal 159. emendar (enmendar), to correct, to mend 148. emparentar, to be related by marriage 148. empedrar, to pave 148. Spanish Cony.-Giammar. empequeñecer, to lessen 159. empezar, to begin 148. empobrecer, to become poor 159. emporcar, to soil 153. enaltecer, to elevate, to praise 159. enardecer, to inflame 159. encalvecer, to grow bald 159. • encandecer, to heat to a white heat 159. encanecer, to become grey 159. encarecer, to render dear 159. encender, to light, to set on fire 148. encensar, to perfume 148. encerrar, to imprison, to shut in 148. enclocar, to fish; to cluck 153. encoclar see enclocar, encomendar, to recommend 148. encontrar, to encounter, to meet 153. encorar, to cover with leather 1 53. encordar, to string, to chord 153. encovar, to put in the cellar 153, encruelecerse, to become cruel 159. enctibertar, to cover 148. endentar, to join with amortise 148. endentecer, to cut the teeth 159. endurecer, to harden 159. enflaquecer, to get thin 159. enfurecerse, to get enraged 159. engrandecer, to enlarge 159. engreir, to intrude 163. engrosar, to become stout 153. engullir, to gobble 164. enhambrentar, to starve 148. enhestar, to raise, to put upright 148. enloquecer, to madden 159. enmendar, to mend, to reform 148. ennegrecer, to blacken 159. ennoblecer, to make noble 159. enorgullecer, to make proud 159. enriquecer, to enrich 159. enrodar, to break upon or under the wheel 153. enrojecer, to redden 159. enronquecer, to become hoarse 159. ensalmorar, to mingle with salt 153. Digitized by VaOOQlC 402 Alphabetical List of the Irregular V^erba. ensangrentar, to stain with blood 148. ensoberbecer y to make proud 159. ensoñar, to dream 153. ensordecery to deafeu, to become deaf 159. entallecer, to sprout 159. entender, to understand 148. entenebrecerse, to grow dark 125, enternecer, to soften 159. [159. enterrar, to inter, to bury 148. entontecer, to grow foolish 159. entorpecer, to benumb, to stupefy, to hinder 159. entortar, to render tortuous 153. entredecir, to interdict 173. entregerir, to intermix 167. entrelucir, to glimmer 159. entremorir, to die away gra- dually 177. entreoir, to hear indistinctly 173. entreparecerse, to be transparent 159. entrepernar, to put one's legs between someone^s as in sitting 148. entreponer, to interpose 178. entretener, to delay, amuse 35. entrever, to have a glimpse 180. entristecer, to sadden 159. entumecerse, to inflame 159. envanecer, to make vain 159. envejecer, to get old 159. enverdecer, to grow green 159. envestir, (pbsol^ to invest 163. envilecer, to degrade 159. envolver, to wrap up, to envelop, to involve 153, 187. equivaler, to be equivalent 179. erguir, to erect, to raise up haughtily (pres. y ergo) 167. errar, to be mistaken, to wander (pres. yerro) 148. escabullirse, to disappear 164. escarmentar, to sharpen one's wit, to take warning 148. escarnecer, to scoff 159. esclarecer, to lighten 125, 159. escocer, to smart 153. escribir, to write 187. esforzar, to encourage 153. establecer, to establish 159. estar, to be 43. estatuir, to establish (enact) 168. estercar, to manure 148. estregar, to rub 148. estremecer, to shake 159. estreñir, to obstruct, to constipate 163, 164. excluir, to exclude 168. expedir, to forward 163, 189. exponer, to expose, to explain 178, 187. extender, to stretch out 148, 189. extraer, to extract 179. extremecer, to tremble 159. F. Fallecer, to die 159. favorecer, to favour 159. florecer, to bloom, to flourish 159. fluir, to flow 168. foliar, to blow with the bellows 153. fortalecer, to fortify 159. forzar, to force, to compel 153. fregar, to rub, to wash up 148. freir, to fry 167, 189. G. Gañir, to howl 164. gemir, to lament 163. gobernar, to govern 148. gruir, to crank 168. gruñir, to grunt, to grumble 164. guañir, to grunt 164. guarecerse, to shelter 159. guarnecer, to garnish, trim 159. U. Haber, to have 32. ha^^r, to do 177. heder, to stink 148. helar, to freeze 125, 148. henchir, to fill 163, 164. hender, to split 148. heñir, to knead 163, 164. herir, to wound 167. herrar, to shoe a horse 148. hervir, to boil, to seethe 167. holgar, to repose 153. hollar, to tread upon, to trample on 153. huir, to flee 168. humedecer, to moisten 159. Digitized by vaOOQlC Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs. 403 Imbuir f to imbue 168. impedir, to prevent 163. imponer J to impose, to deposit 178, 187. imprimir^ to print 187. improbar, to disapprove 153. incensarj to incense, to perfume 148. incluir y to include, to enclose 168. incoar, to begin 192. indi^aner, to make ill dis- posed 178, 187. inducir, to induce 160. inferir, to follow infer 167. infernar, to vex, to make angry 148. influir, to influence 168. ingerir, to intrude, to inject, to insert, to graft 167. inquirir, to inquire 148. inscribir, to inscribe 187. inseguir, to follow 163. instituir, to institute 168. instruir, to instruct, to teach 168. interdecir, to interdict 173. interponer, to interpose 178, 187. intervenir, to intervene, to mediate 180. introducir, to introduce 160. invernar, to spend the winter 148. invertir, to turn round 167. investir, to invest 163. ir, to go 177. J» Jimenzar, to ripple flax 148. jugar, to play 148. L. Languidecer, to languish 159. liquefacer, to liquefy 177. loar, to praise 193. lobreguecer, to grow or make dark 125, 159. lucir, to shine 159. hiir, to free from taxes 168. LI. Llover, to rain 125, 153. M. Maldecir, to curse 173, 174. malherir, to wound badly 167. malquerer, to dislike, to hate 178. malsonar, to offend (one's ears) 153. maltraer, to treat ill 179. mancornar^ to tie by the horns 153. manifestar, to manifest 148. mantener, to maintain, to keep 35. medir, to measure 163. melar, to make honey 148. mentar, to mention 148. mentir, to lie 167. merecer, to merit, to deserve 159. merendar, to take one's afternoon collation 148. moblar, to furnish 153. mohecer, to mould 159. moler, to grind 153. morder, to bite 153. morir, to die 177, 187. mostrar, to show 153. mover, to move 153. muir, to milk 168. mullir, to beat up, to soften 164. muñir, to call to a meeting 164. N. Nacer, to be born 159. negar, to deny 148. negrecer, to blacken 159. nevar, to snow 125, 148. 0. Obedecer, to obey 159. obscurecer, to darken, to grow dark 125, 159. obstruir, to obstruct 168. obtener, to obtain, get 35. ofrecer, to offer 159. oir, to hear 173. oler, to smell (pres. huelo etc., olemos etc.) 153. oscurecer, to darken, to grow dark 125, 153. P. Facer, to pasture 159, 193. padecer, to suffer 159. 'palidecer, to become pale 159. jparecer, to seem 159. pedir, to ask for, to order 163. Digitized by VaOOQlC 404 Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs. pensar, to think 148. perder f to lose 148. perecer, to perish 159. permanecer, to remaio 169. pemiqu^rarj to break (the) legs 148. pergtttrtr, to search for 148. perseguir, to persecute 163. pertenecer^ to belong 159. pervertir J to pervert 167. pesar, to repent, to weigh 193. pimpollecer, to bud 159. placer, to please 159, 193. plañir, to lament 164. plastecer, to size 159. plegar, to fold 148. poblar, to populate 153. poder, to be able, can 177. podrir, to rot 178. poner, to put, to place 178, 187. posponer, to postpone 178, 187. predecir, to predict 173. predisponer, to predispose 178, 187. preferir, to prefer 167. premarir, to die before another 177, 187. presentir, to forebode 167. presuponer, to presuppose 178, 187. prevaler, to prevail 179. prevalecer, to prevail 159. prevenir, to warn, to order 180. prever, to foresee 180. probar, to prove, to try 153. producir, to produce 160. proferir, to proffer 167. promover, to promote 153. proponer, to propose 178, 187. proscribir, to proscribe 187. proseguir, to continue 163. prostituir, to prostitute 168. pudrir, to rot 178. Q. Quebrar, to break 148. qiierer, to like, want, will, wish 178. B. Baer, to scrape, to grate 193. rarefacer, to rarify 177. readvertir, to warn again 167. reaparecer, to reappear 159. reblandecer, to soften 159. rebullir, to stir 164. recasr, to fall back, to relapse 173. recalentar, to warm again 148. recentar, to leaven 148. receñir, to gird tight 163, 164. recluir, to seclade 168. recocer, to boil again 153, 156. recolar, to strain a second time 153. recomendar, to recommend 148. recomponer, to mend again 178, 187. reconducir, to renew a lease 160. reconocer, to recognise 159. reconstituir, to re-establish 168. reconstruir, to rebuild 168. recontar, to count again 153. reconvalecer, to be convalescent 159. reconvenir, to recriminate 180. recordar, to remind, to awake; — «e, to recollect 153. recostarse, to lie down on one side 153. recrudecer, to increase severely (an illness, etc.) 159. redargüir, to retort 168. reducir, to reduce 160. reelegir, to re-elect 163. referir, to refer 167. reflorecer, to blossom again 159. refluir, to flow back 168. reforzar, to reinforce 153. refregar, to rub hard 148. refreir, to fry well 163. regañir, to howl again 164. regar, to water 14§. rcigftmcniar, to organise 148. regir, to govern 163. regoldar, to eruct 153. regruñir, to grunt again 164. rehcuier, to do anew 177. rehenchir, to fill up again 163, 164. reherir, to wound a second time 167. reherrar, to shoe a second time 148. rehervir, to boil again 167. rehollar, to tread upon 153. Digitized by vaOOQlC Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs. 405 rehuir, to withdraw 168. rehumedecer, to moisten again 159. reir, to laugh 163. rejuvenecer, to grow young again 159. relucir, to glitter 159. remendar^ to mend 148. remesar^ to pull out hair 148. remolar, to load dice 153. remoler, to grind 153. remover, to remove 153. remullir, to mollify 164. renacer^ to be born again, to regenerate 159. rendir, to render 163. renegar, to forswear 148. renovar, to renew 153. reñir, to fight, to scold 163, 164. reoir, to hear again 173. repacer, to graze up 159, 193. repadecer, to suffer extremely 159. repedir, to ask repeatedly 163. repensar, to think over 148. repetir, to repeat 163. replegar, to fold often, to fall back 148. repoblar, to repeople 153. repodrir, to rot excessively 178. reponer, to answer 178, 187. reprobar, to reprobate, to scold 153. reproducir, to reproduce 160. repudrir, to rot excessively 178. requebrar, to break into little pieces, to flirt 148. requerer, to love intensely 178. requerir, to request 167. resaber, to know very well 179. resdlir, to jut out 179. rescontrar, to balance an (ac- count), to compare 153. resegar, to reap again 148. resembrar, to resow 148. resentirse, to resent 167. resollar, to breathe, to fan 153. resolver, to resolve 153, 187. resonar, to resound 153. resplandecer, to shine 159. resquebrar, to begin to break 148. restablecer, to re-establish 159. restituir, to restore 168. restregar, to rub, to scrub 148. restriñir, to bind 164. retallecer, to sprout again 159. retener, to retain 35. retemblar, to tremble again 148. retentar, to threaten with a new fit (of illness, etc.) 148. reteñir, to dye again 163, 164. retoñecer, to shoot again 159. retorcer, to twist, etc. (pres. retuerzo) 153. retostar, to toast again, to toast brown 153. retraer, to retract 179. retribuir, to reward 168. retronar, to thunder again 153. retrotraer, to bring back (past facts, etc.) 179. revejecer, to get prematurely old 159. revenir, to come back 180. reventar, to burst 148. rever, to see again 180. reverdecer, to grow green again, to regain vigour 159. reverter, to pour 148. revestir, to clothe anew 163. revolar, to fly, to flee again 153. revolcarse, to welter, to roll, to wallow 153. revolver, to stir, to disarrange 153, 187. robustecer, to invigorate 159. rodar, to roll 153. roer, to nibble 193. rogar, to beg 153. Saber, to know 179. salir, to go out 179. salpimentar, to season with salt and pepper 148. salpullir, to break out in pimples 164. sarpullir^ see salpullir, sarmentar, to gather cut-off vine-shoots 148. satisfacer, to satisfy 177. seducir, to seduce 160. segar, to cut, to mow 148. seguir, to follow 163. sembrar, to sow 148. sementar, to sow 148. sentar, to put ; — se, to sit down 148. Digitized by VaOOQlC 406 Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs. sentir, to feel 167. ser, to be 40. serrar, to saw 148. servir, to serve 163. sobrecrecer, to outgrow 159. sobreentender, to understand something not actually ex- pressed 148. sobreponer, to exalt 178, 187. sobresembrar, to sow over again 148. sobresolar, to pave anew 153. sobresalir, to surpass, to excel 179. sobrevenir, to happen 180. sobreventar, to gain the weather gauge of another ship 148. sobreverterse, to overflow 148. sobrevestir, to put on 163. sofreír, to fry slightly 163. solar, to sole 153. soldar, to solder 153. soler, to use 153. sollar, to blow (with bellows) 153. soltar, to loosen 153, 187. solver, to loosen 187. somover, to remove (earth) 153. sonar, to sound; — 5C, to blow one's nose 153. sonreír, to smile 163. soñar, to dream 153. sonrodarse, to stick in the mud (a carriage) 153. sorregar, to water in another direction 148. sosegar, to tranquilize 148. sostener, to hold, maintain, keep 35. soterrar, to bury 148. subarrender, to sub-let 148. subentender, to understand what is tacitly meant 148. subseguir, to immediately follow 163. substituir (sustituir^tto substitute 168. substraer, to substract, to steal 179. subtender, to subtend 148. subvenir, to provide 108. subvertir, to subvert 167. sugerir, to suggest 167. superponer 178, 187. supervenir 180. suponer 178, 187. sustituir see substituir 168. sustraer see substraer 179. T. Tallecer, to shoot, sprout 159. tañer, to play 164. temblar, to tremble 148. tender, to tend, to extend 148. tener, to hold, to have 35. tentar, to touch, to try 148. teñir, to dye 163, 164. torcer, to turn, to wring (pres. tuerzo) 153, 191. tostar, to toast 153. traducir, to translate 160. traer, to bring 179. transcender, to transcend, to transpire 148. transferir, to transfer 167. transfregar, to rub 148. translucir, to be transparent, to conjecture 159. transponer, to transpose, to set (of the sun) 178, 187. trascender, to mount over, to pass 148. trascolar, to strain 153. trascordarse, to forget 153. trasegar, to pour over, to trans- fuse 148. trasferir, to transfer 167. trasfregar see transfregar 159. traslucirse, to shine through 159. trusoir, to misunderstand 173. trasoñar, to form a visionary scheme, to dream 153. trasponer see transponer 178, 187. trastrocar, to invert the order of things 153. trasverter, to overflow 148. trasvolar, to fly across 153. trocar, to exchange 153. tronar, to thunder 153. tropezar, to stumble 148. tullir, to cripple 164. tumefacerse, to swell 177, 192*. T. Valer, to be worth 179. venir, to come 180. Digitized by VaOOQlC Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, 407 ventar, to get wind of 148. Y. ver, to see 180, 187. Yacer, to lie 193. verdecer, to grow green 159. ytiactaponer, to put close by verter f to shed 148. 178, 187. vestir, to clothe 163. volar, to fly 153. Z. volcar, to upset (a carriage); Zabullir, to plunge 164. —se, to wallow, to welter 153. zaherir, to scold 167. volver, to turn back, to do once zambullir see zabullir 164. more 153, 187. Digitized by VjOOQIC 408 Vocabulary. Spanish-English. á, at, in; to, for. — orinas, at the side (brink, border, edge, etc.). aborrecer f to abhor, to detest; pag. 161. ' abrigo^ n?., coat. abuelo, grandfather. acabar, to finish, to terminate. acasOy perhaps. aceite, m., oil. aceituna, f. olive. aceptar, to accept. acertar, to succeed in^ to guess ; page 148. acomodarse á, to conform one- self to ... . actor, tn.y actor. acusar, to accuse. adivinar, to guess. admirable, admirable, wonder- ful. adornar, to adorn. afable, kind, friendly. afamado, -a, famous. afligir, to afflict; page 92, 4. agradar, to please. agradecido, -a, thankful, grate- ful. ahora, now. al, contr. for á el, to the. — rededor, round, round about. alabar, to praise. alcanzar, to obtain, to get, page 92, 3. aldea, f, village. alegre, merry. alentar, to encourage; page 149. alfonso (d), the alphonse (a gold coin) = 25 pesetas = 20 sh. algo, something. alma, (el), f, the soul. almacén, m., shop (store). almendra, f., almond. alto, -a, high. ama, (he, she) loves. amable, amiable. amado, loved. aman, (they) love. América, f, America, amigo, m., friend. amistad, f., friendship. amo, master. ancho, -a, broad, large. andar, to walk, to have inter- course with, to associate with; page 172. — con cuidado, to take care. ánimo, m., courage. anunciar, to announce, to im- part. año, m., year. apartarse, to stand away, to keep back. apenas, scarcely. apreciar, to appreciate, to es- teem. aprender, to learn. apuesta, f., wager. apuro, m., want, necessity. aqui, here. — está, here is. — están, here are. árbol, m., tree. arquitectura, /"., architecture. Digitized by vaOOQlC Spanish-English. 409 arrabal, iw., suburb. arriesgar, to be at stake, to risk^ page 91, 2. asegurar, to assure. asesinar, to murder. asuntOj m., object, matter. atreverse, to dare. ausencia, f,, absence. Austria^ Austria. aulor, author. ave, (él)y f,, bird. avergonzar(se), to be ashamed, p¿. 92, 5; 154. ayer, yesterday. azúcar, m., sugar. B. laile, m., ball. bajo, a, low. balcón, m., balcony. barato, -a, cheap. barco, m., ship. barquero, tn., boatman. bebe, drinks. bd>edero, m., the trough, bird's trough. bien, well, all right. — (el), the good. bienes (los), Üie fortune. billete de banco, m., bank note. bolsa, f., purse, the Exchange. bolsillo, m., pocket, purse. bondad, f,, the goodness. borrasca, f., thunderstorm. bota, f,, boot, cask. buey, m., (pi. bueyes) ox. Burdeos, Bordeaux. buscar, to seek, to look for, to search; page 91, 1, C. cabal juicio, él, the good sense. caballero, gentleman, Mr., Sir. caballo, m., horse. cadena, f., chain. café, «I., coffee, coffee-house. cojdj /•, hox. — de cerillas (de fósforos), f,, box of matches. — de cigarros, f., cigar-box. cajetilla de cigarrillos, f, packet of cigarettes. calor, m,, heat. collar, to be silent. calle, /I, street. camino, m., road, way. — real, m., (or carretera, f,) main-road. campestre, rural. campo, m., camp. canción, f., song. cansado, -a, tired. cansar, to tire; cansarse, to get tired. capa, /"., the (Spanish) doak. capaz, capable. capital, f., the capital, metro- polis. capital, m., the capital (money), fund. capitán, captain. carga, f., burden, weight. carne, f., meat. carnicero, m., butcher. carpintero, joiner. carretera, f,, main-road. carta, f., letter. cartas, pL, playing-cards. ca^a, f., house. Casa Ayuntamiento, the Town- hall. casado, -a, married. casi, almost. castillo, HI., castle. Cataluña, Catalonia. caudal, m., capital, fund. causa, f., cause. célebre, famous, renowned. céntimo, m., centime. cercanias(las) , the neighbour- hood. cerdo, m., pig. cerilla, f., match. cerveza, f., beer. cetro, m., sceptre. ciencia, f,, science. cierto, -a, certain. cigarro (coUoq. puro), m,, cigar. cigarrillo (coUoq. un pitillo), m,, a cigarette. cinco, five. circunstancia, f,, the circum- stance. ciudad, f., town. cobre, m,, copper. colmado, -a, filled. Digitized by VjOOQIC 410 Vocabulary. coloTy m., coloar. comenzar, to begin; pp. 92, 3\ 148. corner^ to eat. comerciante, m., merchant comida, /*., dinner, food. compañero, m., companion. compañía, f., company. comprado, bought. comprar, to buy. comprender, to understand. como, as, as well as. cómo, how. ¿cómo? y how? con, with. conceder, to allow, to concede. concierto, m., concert. conciudadano, m., citizen. concluir, to conclude, to finish ; page 168. conoce V., you know; page 159. conocer, to know; page 159. conocido, m., acquaintance. conozco, I know; page 159. conquistar, to conquer. consejo, m., advice. conservar, to preserve. constante, constant. continuar, to continue. contar, to count, to number, to tell (a story, etc.) ; page 153. contorno, m., outskirts; circum- ference. coronar, to crown. corre, runs. corregir, to correct, to mend, pp. 92, 4; 163. correo, m., post, mail. corrompen, they corrupt, they taint. cosa, f,, thing. costa, f., coast. costumbre, /*., custom, habit, man- ner. creer, to believe, to think. criado, m,, footman, servant. Criador (él), Creator (the). criatura, /*., creature. crió (3rd s. def.), (he) created. cruz, f., cross. cuadro, m., picture. cuantioso, -a, considerable. cuarto, m., room. cuatro, four. cuchillo, m., knife. cuenta, f., account. cuerdo, -a, reasonable, prudent. cuero, m., leather. cuidar, to care. cumplimiento, m., compliment^s). chimenea, f., fireplace. D. dar, to give; page 173. dado, given. de, of, from; by. — paso, for the time being, ac- tually. dehe, he (she) owes, must. debemos, we must. deber, to owe, must. decir, to tell; pp. 173, 187. dedicado, -a, dedicated. defecto, m., fault. degradar, to degrade. delicioso, -a, delicious. demás, other. demasiado, too, too much. déme V., give me; page 173. derrotar, to put to flight, to rout (an array). descansar, to repose. desconfiar, to distrust. [187. descubierto, -a, discovered; page descuido, m., negligence. desdichado, {el) unhappy man (the). desear, to wish, to desire. deseo, m., wish, desire. desgracia, f., misfortune. desordenado, -a, disorderly. despacho, m., counting-house, office. destinado, -a, destined. deudor, m., debtor. di, tell (thou); pag. 173. diario, m., newspaper. dicha, f,, fortune. dicho, said p.p.; pp. 173, 187. dichoso, happy. diente, m., tooth; pi. dientes. diferencia, f., difíerence. difunto (el), the dead (man), the late . . . digno, -a, worthy. diligencia, f., diligence. Digitized by vaOOQlC Spanish-English. 411 diligente, diligent. dinero^ w., money. [173. dio (3rd sing, def.), gave; page DÍ08, God. dirigir, to direct; page 92, 4. discípulo, m., pupil, scholar. divertirse, to amuse oneself; page 167. doce, twelve. dócily obedient. Don, Mr. Doña, Mrs., Miss. dormir, to sleep; page 176. dos, two. dttdar, to hesitate. dudar de, to doubt about. dueño, master. dulce, sweet. duque, duke; f., duquesa, duro, m., dollar (=5 pesetas = 4 shillings). E. edad, /"., age. edificio, m., building, edifice. educación, /*., education. el, m., the. él, he. elección, f., choice, election. elevar, to elevate. ella, she. ellas, they, /". ellos, they, w. S, } '0»' *^«y »^«- fZZos tienen, they have, iw. eWas tienen, they have, /*. embajador, m., ambassador. embustero, m., liar, hypocrite, cheat. [148. empezar, to begin; pp. 92, 5; en, in. — casa de, in, at the house of. — medio, in the middle, amidst. encumbrar, to raise. enfadado, -a, cross. engañarse, to be mistaken. enojarse, to become angry. Enrique, Henry. enseñar, to teach, to show. entre, between, amongst. entregar, to deliver, to give. enviado, sent. eres, thou art; page 40. error, m., fault, mistake, es, he (she, it) is; page 40. — is; page 40. — excusado, it is superflous. — preciso, it is necessary, one must; we (te, le) es preciso, I (he, we, etc.) must escoba, f., broom. escoger, to choose; page 92, 4. escribir, to write i ^„„^ 107 escrito, written / P^^^ ^^^- escritorio, m., counting-house, oflSice. espacio m., space. España, f,, Spain. espejo, m., looking-glass. esperar, to expect, to wait for. está, is; page 43. — , he (she, it) is; page 43. estación, /*. , season; (railway) station. estado, m., state, condition. estáis, you are; page 43 estamos, we are; page 43, estampa, f , engraving. están, are, they are; page 43. estanco, m., tabacconist-shop. estar, to be, page 43. — enterado, to be acquainted. estás, thou art; page 43. estimada, -a, esteemed. estoy, I am; page 43. estrecho, -a, narrow. estudia, studies. estudiar, to study. estudios (los); (the) studies. Exposición (la), (the) Exhibition. extranjero (el), \ ^^^ foreigner extranjera (la), ( ^ extranjero (el), the foreign coun- try; al extranjero, abroad. F. falta, f., fault. falleció, he (she) died. familia, /*., family. famoso, -sa, famous. farol^ m., (street) lamp ; lantern. favor, m., favour, kindness, ser- vice. favorable, favourable. fecha (la), the date. Digitized by VjOOQIC 412 Vocabulary. felieidcuí, f., happiness. feo, -o, ugly. feroz, ferodooB, wild. firmar, to sign. firmeza, f., the firmness. flor, f, flower. florero, m., flower-pot floreciente, flourishing; page 159. flotar, to float. fluctúan, they fluctoate. fortuna, /., fortnne. fósforo, m,, match. fruta, f,, fruit fueron, were (3rd pers. plur.); pp. 40, 177. fuerza, f, force, strength. fumar, to smoke. fusil, n^., gun. 0. gana fla), a mind (to do some- thing); the appetite. ganar, to earn, to gain, to win. gastar, to spoil, to spend, to waste. género, m., the kind, species. generoso, -a, generous. gente, f., sing., (the) people. girar, to turn round. gloria, f,, glory. glorioso, illustrious. gozo, m., pleasure. grande, great. guante, m,, glove. Guillermo, William. H. ha, he (she, it) has. habéis, you have. haber, to have (auxil.); page 32. hábil, able, clever. habla, he (she) speaks. hablan, they speak. hablo, I speak. hace, makes, does; page 177. hacer, to make, do; page 177. —■frio (calor), to be cold (warm). hacienda, f, fortune, estate. hallado, found. hallar, to find. hambre (el), f, (the) hunger. han, they have; page 32. page hay, there is, there are; 34, 5. has, thou hast; page 32. hazaña, f, heroic deed. he, (I) have; page 82. hecho, done, made; page 177. hembra, female. hemos, we have; page 32. heredero, heir. herido, -a, wounded; page 167. hermano, brother. hermoso, beautiful. hierro, m., iron. holgazán, m., idler. honradez, f., honesty, decency. honrado, -a, honoured; honest. hora, f, hoar. hoy, to-day. huerto, m.. orchard. huir, to flee, to fly; page 168. I. iglesia, f., church. ignorancúi, f, ignorance. ignorar, not to be aware. ilusión, f, illusion. impaciencia, f., impatience. imperio, m., empire. incomodar, to molest, incom- mode. incomodarse, to take pains, to trouble oneself. incuria, f., carelessness. influencia, f., inflijo, m., in- fluence. Inglaterra, f,, England. injuria, /"., offence. inventor, in., inventor. invierno, m., winter. invitar, to invite. ir, to go; page 177. , (to come to see, to - ^ ^^' / call, to visit isla, /*., island, isle. J. jabón, m., soap. jardín, m., garden. jaula, f, cage. jefe, m., chief. joven, m,, young man, youth- — adj., young. juego, m., game (French jeu)^ Digitized by VjOOQIC Spanish-English. 418 jueZy m,y judge. jugar (á los naipes or á las cartas) y to play (cards); page 153. junto, -a, together. Júpiter^ Jupiter. jusio, -a, just. K. Jcüógramo, m,, kilogramme. lacayo, footman. ladrón, m., thief, robber. lamentar, to lament. lámina, f,, engraving, picture. lana^ f,, wool. lápiz, m., pencil. lastimoso, -a, sorry, sad. legua, /*., league. lejos, far. leña, f., (fire) wood. levantarse, to get up. libertad, f., liberty, freedom. li^ra, f,, pound. libro, m., book. limón, m., lemon, citron. Undo, lovely, sweet. lino, m., flax, linen. lisonjear, to flatter. literato, literary man. locamente, in a foolish way. logrado, got, obtained. lograr, to obtain, to earn, to gain, to win. luego, adv., soon. — que, as soon as. lugar, m., village. lujo, m., luxury, magnificence. luna, /"., moon. LL llama, calls. llamado, called. llegar, to arrive; page 91, <2. llenar, to fill, to comply with (a wish). Ueva, wears (said of garments). llevar, to carry, to wear. M. madera, /"., wood. madre, mother. maestro, master. majestuoso, -a, majestic. maltratar, to ill-treat. manera, f., manner. mantenimiento, m,, the mainte- nance, livelihood. mantiene, maintains; page 35. mañana, to-morrow. marcha, /"., march. nujLS, but. más, more. matar, to kill, slaughter. materia, f., matter. me, me, to me. — falta I want médico, m., physician. medio, -a, half. mediodía, m., noon. memoria, f., (a) report (the) memoir, memory. menos, less. mercancía, f,, merchandise. Mercurio, Mercury. mes, m., month. mesa, f., table. meter, to put. mi, my. miedo, m., fear. ministro, minister. mirar, to look at. mire V., look! (3rd sing. Imper.) modestia, f., modesty. morir, to die; page 177. motivo, in., reason, motive. muchacho, m,, boy. mincho, -a, much. — tiempo ha, it is a good while. mudar, to change. muerte, f., death. muerto, died (p.p.), dead; page 177. íwt*€síra, shows, proves; page 153. mundo, w., world. muy, very. — de mañana, very early (early in the morning). N. nación, f., nation. naipes, m., cards (playing). Ñapóles, Naples. naranja, f., orange. natural, native, born in. Digitized by VaOOQlC 414 Vocabulary. navegación, ^., navigation. necesidad, f., necessity. necesito, I want. negociante, w., merchant. negocio, m., business. niño, m., child, boy. no, no, not. — tener ningún inconveniente, to have no objection. nombre, m., name. nosotros, m., nosotras, /"., we. nosotros (-as) somos, we are. nosotros (-as) tenemos, we have. noticia, f., news. numeroso, -a, numerous. 0. obispo, bishop. obra, f., work. obrar, to work. obrero, m., workman. ofender, to oflfend. oficial, m., officer. oler, to smell; page 156. olor, w., the smell. olvidar, to forget. onza, f, ounce. orador, m,, orator. orden, m,, order (succession). orden, f., order, command. ordenar, to order. orgidlo, m., pride. otro, -a, another (see Less. 18). P. paciencia, f., patience. padecer, to suffer; page 159. padecido, suffered. padre, father. padres, m. pi, collect, parents. pagado, paid. pais, m., country, land. pájaro, m., bird. palacio, m., palace. pan, m., bread; un —, a loaf. paño, w., cloth. pañuelo, m., handkerchief, papel, m., paper. parecer, to seem; page 159. pariente, m., relation. partir, to leave (for), to set out. pasa, spends (time). paseo, m., the public walk, pro ménade. paz, f.y peace. pedir, to ask, to demand; page 168. pegar, to beat; page 91, 2. pensar, to think; page 148. pérdida, f,, loss. perdió, he (she) lost; page 148. perdona, pardons. perdonar, to pardon. periódico (or diario), m., the news- paper. peinicioso, dangerous. pequeño, little, small, short. pero, but. perro, m., dog. perseguir, to persecute ; pp. 91, ^; 163. pesado, -a, heavy. peseta (una), = 4 reals or 9^8 d» piadoso, -a, pious, charitable. piedra, f., stone. piensa, thinks; page 148. pintor, m., painter. plata, f., silver. plaza, f., square. pluma, f., pen. pobreza, f,, poverty. poco, -a, a little. podemos, we can; page 177. poder, to be able, can ; page 177. poder, m., power, might. poético, -a, poetical. por, by, through. — desgracia, unfortunately. ¿por qué . . .? why? porque, because. portero, m., porter. potencia, f., power. precio, m., price. precioso, -a, precious. preguntar por, to ask for. preliminares {los), (the) preli- minaries. premiar, to reward. presumir dc . . ., to overrate. prima, f., cousin. primavera, f., the Spring. primo, m., cousin. primorosamente, first-rate, very well. principe, m., prince. Digitized by VaOOQlC Spanish-English. 415 produce^ produces; page 160. producir^ to produce, cause; page 160. promesa, f., promise. prometer, to promise. pronto, quick, swift, prompt. propio -a, proper. prosperidad^ f., happiness, pros- perity. protector, protector. provincia, f., province. próocima, -a, near, next. prudencia, /*., prudence. prudente, reasonable, prudent. prudentemente, prudently. pudor, m., shame. pueblo, m,, the people. puente, m., bridge. puerta, f., door. puesto, w., place, situation. puro, m., cigar. qtie, than; that; to. ¿ qué ? what? quejarse, to complain. querer, to wish, like, love; page 178. quería, loved, wished; page 178. quien, s., quienes, pi., who. ¿quién? s., ¿quiénes? pi., who? quiere, he (she) likes; page 178. quieren, (they) like; page 178. quieres, thou wilt, page 178. quiero, I want, I will ; page 178. K. raro, -a, rare, seldom. rajíón, f., reason. real, m., a real (= 25 cent. = 2^4 pence). recibido, received. [148. recomendar, to recommend ; page recompensar, to reward. región, f,, region, country. reina, queen. reino, m,, kingdom. rejilla, /"., grating. reloj, m., watch, clock. reluce, shines; page 159. remedio, m., remedy. repasad, repeat (2nd plur. Im- perat.). retirar, to draw (or go) back, retire. revolución, /"., revolution. rey, king. rico, rich. rio, m., river. riqueza, f., (the) riches, wealth. S. saber, to know; page 179; 321, í 5. sabido, learned. sabiduria, f., wisdom. sabroso, -a, savoury, delicious. sabio, -bia, wise. sacar, to take out, pull out; pag. 91, 1. Saturno, Saturne. se, one, one'self, himself, her- self, itself, yourself, them- selves. — juega, one plays, they play, etc. — llama, is named. — lleva, is worn. sed, f., thirst. seda, f., silk. seguridad, /"., safety, security. semana, f., week. sencillez, f., simplicity. sentarse, to sit down ; page 148. señas (las), the address. Señor, gentleman, Mr., Sir. Señora, lady, Mrs., Madam. señora, f., (a) lady. Señorita, Miss. ser, to be; page 40. — deudor, to be indebted, to owe. — muy solicitado , to be in (great) demand. serio, -a, serious. severo, severe, strict. si, if. si, yes; indeed. siempre, always. siga, subj. pres. of seguir, to follow; pp. 91, 2; 163. siglo, m., century. silla, f,, chair. sincero, -a, sincere. situación, f., situation. soberbio, -a, proud. sois, you (ye) are; page 40. sombrero, m,, hat. son, are; pp. 40. Digitized by VjOOQIC 416 Vocabulary. sonorOy -a, sonorous. soportar, to bear. sostener, to maintain, to sustain; page 35. soy» 1 am; page 40. su, his, her, its, their. su . . . de usted, your . . . suave, soft, lovely. subdito, HI., subject; sucedió, succeeded, followed. sueño, «n., the sleep, dream. suerte, f., fate. sufrido, suffered. sujeto, adj,, subject. sus, his, her, its, their. tabaco, m,, tobacco. tarde, late. — (la), (the) afternoon, evening. té, thee, to thee. té, m,, tea. tenter, to fear. temor y m., fear. tener, to have (hold), possess; page 85. — (or no tener) hambre, to be (or not to be) hungry. — (or no tener) inconveniente, to have any (or to have no) objection. — (or no tener) razón, to be {or not to be) right — (or no tener) sed, to be (or not to be) thirsty. ternero, m., calf. tia, aunt. tienda, f., shop. tiene, he (she, it) has; page 35. tienes, thou hast; page 35. tierra, f,, earth. tinta, f., ink. tintero, w., inkstand. tio, uncle. tocar, to touch; page 91, Í. todavía, yet; no . . . todavía (or todavía no), not yet. íoáo, -a, all, whole, íoáo cZ, toda la, the whole, íoáos, -as, all (plural), ¿orno, wi., volume. [gent. trabajador, -a, laborious, dili- trabajar, to work. trabajo, m., labour, work. tratar, to treat. — con, to deal with, to treat ires, three. trigo, m, corn. Ü. único, -a, sole, only. u«¿cíí, you (polite form). ustedes (pi.), you. T. valentía, f., valour, bravery. valiente, brave, gallant. valor, m., bravery, valour. valle, m., valley. vano, -a, vain. vara, f., the (Spanish) yard. varón, male. vasallo, w., vassal. €C, sees; page 180. vecindad, f., neighbourhood. vecino, m., neighbour; inhabi- tant. vela, f., sail. velar, to watch. vencedor, m., conqueror, vencer, to conquer; page 92, B. venir, to come; page 180. — bien, to fit. — á las manos, to come to blows. — á ver, to come to see, to call, to visit. ventana, f., window. ventanillo, m., grating. Venus, Venus. ver (irr.), to see; page 180. * verano, m., summer. vergonzoso, -a, shameful. vestido, m., dress. vestir, to clothe, to dress; page 163. viajar, to travel. viaje, m., journey. viajero, m., traveller. vicio, m., vice. vida, f., life. [man. viejo, vieja, old ; un — , an old Viena, Vienna. viene, comes; page 180. vienen, they come; page 180. vienes, thou comest. vino (el), (the) wine. Digitized by VaOOQlC English-Spanish . 417 vino, he (she, it) came (fr. venir). virtud, /"., virtue. visto, seen; pp. 180, 187. viuda, widow. viudo, widower. vive, lives. víveres, m. pi., victuals. vivir, to live, to dwell. vivo, lively. volámen, m., volume, circum- ference, extent. voluntad, f., will, wish. volver, to return, come back; pp. 153, 187. vosotros, -OS, you (pi., non polite form). vosotros (-as) tenéis, you have. voy, I go; page 177. vudve, returns, comes back; pp. 153, 187. vuelto, p. p. volver; pp. 153, 187. Y. y, and. yo, I. — tengo, I have. Z. zapatero, m., shoemaker. zapato, m., shoe. English-Spanish. A. abhor (to), aborrecer, page 161. abhorred, aborrecido. able, hábil. abroad, al extranjero. absence, la ausencia, accept (to), aceptar. account, la cuenta. accuse (to), acusar, acquaintance, el conocido. actor, actor. actually, de paso. address (the), las señas. admirable, admirable. adorn (to), adornar. advice, el consejo. afflict (to), afligir, page 92, 4. afternoon, la tarde. age, la edad. all, todo, toda; pi. todos, todas. allow (to), conceder. almond, la almendra. almost, casi. alphonse (the), el alfonso = 25 pesetas = 20 sh. always, siempre. ambassador, el embajador. America, América. amiable, amable. amidst, en medio. Spanish Conv.-Orammar. amongst, entre. amuse oneself (to), divertirse, page 167. and, y (sometimes é, see Con- jnnctions). announce (to), anunciar. another, otro, otra. appetite, el apetito, la gana. appreciate (to), apreciar. architecture, la arquitectura. are; son; están; we—, somos, estamos; you — , sois, estáis; see pp. 40, 43. army, el ejército. arrive (to), llegar. arrival Í ^^^ arribo) arrival, ^ ^^ ¡Ugada. art (thou), eres, page 40. as, como. — well as, como, asi como. — soon as, luego que. ask (to), pedir, page 163. — for (to), preguntar por. ass, el asno. associate with (to), andar con, page 172. assure (to), asegurar. at, á. — the side (brink, border, edge), á orillas. attention, la atención. 27 Digitized by VaOOQlC 418 Vocabulary. aunt, tía. author, el autor. B. balcony, el halcón. baU, el haile. banknote, d biUete de banco. be (to), ser, page 40. — able (to), poder, page 177. — acquainted (to), estar enterado. — ashamed (to), avergongarse, pp. 92, 3; 154. — at stake (to), arriesgar, page 91, 2. — aware (to), saber, pag. 179; not to — aware, ignorar. — cold (warm), to; hacer frío (calor). — (not to — ) hungry, or thirsty, to; tener (or no tener) hambre ó sed. — in great demand, ser muj^ soli- citado. — indebted, ser deudor. — mistaken, equivocarse, en- gañarse. — necessary, ser necesario. — right (to), tener razón. — silent (to), callar. — wrong (to), no tener razón. — (to), estar, page 43. bear (to), soportar. beat (to), pegar, page 91, ^. beautiful, hermoso, -sa. because, porque. become angry (to), enojarse. beef, la (carne de) vaca. beer, la cerveza. beggar, él mendigo. begin (to), comenzar, empezar; pp. 92, 3; 148. behaviour, la conducta. believe (to), creer. bet, la apuesta. between, entre. bill of exchange, la letra de cambio. bird, el ave (f.), el pájaro. — 's trough, él bebedero. bishop, obispo. blow, el golpe. blunt, embotado, -da, or boto, -ta. boatman, barquero. book, el libro. boot, la bota. Bordeaux, Burdeos. born in, natural de. bought, comprado. box, la caja, see cigar-box. — of matches, la caja de ceri- llas (or de fósforos). boy, el ftttio, el muchacho. brave, valiente. bravery, la valentía, el wilor. bread, el pan. broad, ancho^ ancha. bridge, el puente. broom, la escoba. brother, hermano. building, el edificio. burden, la carga. business, el negocio. but, pero, mas. butcher, el carnicero. buy (to), comprar. by, de, por. cage, la jaula. calf, el ternero, la ternera. cali (to), llamar. — on (to), ir á ver, venir á ver. came, vino {fromvenir, page 180). camp, él campo. can, poder, page 177. capable, capaz. capital, la capital (metropolis); el capital (money), capital (fund), el caudal. captain, capitán. cards (playing — ), los naipes, las cartas. care (to), cuidar. carelessness, la incuria. carry (to), llevar. cask, la bota. castle, el castillo. Catalonia, Cataluña. cause, la causa. — (to), causar; producir, page 160. centime, el céntimo. century, el siglo. certain, cierto, cierta. chain, la cadena. chair, la silla. Digitized by VjOOQIC English-Spanish. 419 change (to), mudar. charitable, piadoso^ sa, chase, la caza. cheap, barato, barata. cheat, el embustero. chief, el jefe. child, el niño, choice, la elección. choose (to), escoger, page 92, 4. church, la iglesia. cigar, el cigarro, (coll.) el puro. — box, la caja de cigarros, cigarette, el cigarrillo (colloq. el pitillo). circumference, el contorno, la circunferencia. circumstance, la circunstancia. citizen, el conciudadano. citron, el limón. clever, hábil, listo, lista, cloak (the Spanish — ), la capa, clock, el reloj. cloth, el paño. clothe (to), vestir (se), page 163. coast, la costa, coat, the, el abrigo. coffee, d café. — house, el café, colour, el color. come (to), venir, page 180. — back (to), volver, pp. 153, 187. — to blows (to), venir á las manos. — to see (to), ir (or venir) á ver. command, la orden. — (to), mandar, ordenar, companion, el compañero. company, la compañía. complain (to), quejarse. compliments, los cumplimientos, comply with (a wish) (to), llenar, concede (to), conceder. concert, el concierto. conclude (to), concluir, page 168. condition, la condición, el estado. conform oneself to (to), aco- modarse á, conquer (to), conquistar; veneer, page 92, 3. conqueror, el vencedor. considerable, considerable, cuan- tioso. constant, constante, continue (to), continuar. cook (f), la cocinera, copper, el cobre. corn, el trigo, correct (to), corregir, pp. 92, 4; 163. corrupt (to), corromper. count (to), contar, page 153. counting-house, el despacho, es- critorio. country, el pais, courage, el ánimo. cousin, primo (m.), prima (f.). cow, la vaca, create (to), crear, criar. Creator (the), el Criador, creature, la criatura, cross, enfadado, -da. cross, la cruz. crown (to), coronar. custom, la costumbre. D. dangerous, pernicioso, -sa. dare (to), atreverse, date, la fecha. dead, p.p., muerto, page 187. dead (man, woman), the, el muerto, la muerta; el difunto, la difunta. deal with (to), tratar con. death, la muerte. debtor, el deudor, decency, la decencia, honradez. dedicate (to), dedicar, dedicated, dedicado. deed (heroic — ), la hazaña. degrade (to), degradar. delicious, delicioso, -sa; sabro- so, -sa. deliver (to), entregar, page 91, 2, demand (to), pedir, page 163. descend (to), bajar. desire, el deseo. •— (to), desear. despicable, despreciable. destined, destinado, -da. detest (to), aborrecer, page 161. detested, aborrecido. die (to), morir, pp. 177, 187; fallecer, pag. 159. difference, la diferencia. Digitized by ^ joogle 420 Vocabulary. diligence, la diligencia. diligent, diligente ^ trabajador, trabajadora, dine (to), comer. dinner, la comida. direct (to), dirigir, page 92, é. discover (to), descubrir, page 187. — ed, descubierto, -ta. disorderly, desordenad, -da. distribute (to), distribuir, page 168. distrust (to), desconfiar. do (to), hacer, page 177. dog, el perro. dollar, (un) duro [= 5 pesetas, or 4 shillings], done, hecho (see hacer). donkey, el burro. door, la puerta. doubt (to), dudar. — about (to), dudar de. draw back (to), retirar(se), dream, el sueño. dress, el vestido. — (to), vestir(se), page 163. drink (to), beber. duke, duque (/., duquesa). dwell (to), vivir. £. ear, la oreja. earn (to), ganar, lograr. earth, la tierra. eat (to), comer. edifice, d edificio. education, la educación. election, la elección. elevate (to), elevar. empire, el imperio. encourage (to), alentar, page 148. England, Inglaterra. engraving, \ la estampa, (copperplate)/ la lámina. escape (to), escapar. estate, la hacienda. esteem (to), apreciar, estimar. «steemed, estimado, -da. ovening, la tarde. ewer, él cubo. Exchange, the, la Bolsa. Exhibition, la Exposición. expect (to), esperar. expense, el gasto, el desembolso. extent, el volumen. eye, el ojo. family, la familia. famous, famoso, -sa, afamado, -áa; célebre. far, lejos. farrier, el herrador. fate, la suerte, el hado. father, padre. fault, el error, la falta. favour, el favor. favourable, favorable. fear, el temor, el miedo. — (to), temer. feeble, débil. female, hembra. ferocious, feroz. fill (to), llenar. filled, colmado, da; lleno, -na. find (to), hallar. finish (to), acabar. fire-place, la chimenea. firmness, la firmeza. first rate, primorosamente. fit (to), venir bien. five, cinco. flatter (to), lisonjear. flax, el lino. flee (to), huir, pag. 168. float (to), flotar. flourishing, floreciente. flower, la flor. — pot, el florero. fluctuate (to), fluctuar. fly (to), huir, page 168. [163. follow (to), suceder; seguir, page food, la comida, el alimento. foot, el pié (pi. los pies). footman, el criado, el lacayo. for, por, para. — the time being, de paso. force, la fuerza. foreign country (the), el extran- jero. foreigner, el extranjero, la ex- tranjera. forget (to), olvidar. fortune, la dicha.^ la fortuna, la hacienda, los bienes. found, hallado. four, cuatro. Digitized by VjOOQIC £nglish-Spanish. 421 freedom, la libertad. friend, amigOy amiga. friendly, amable, afable. friendship, la amistad. frivolity, la ligereza. from, de. fruit, la fruta. fulfil (to), cumplir^ con. fund, el caudal. furious, enfurecido. G. gain (to), ganar, lograr. gallant, valiente. gallon, el galón, el cubo. game, el juego. garden, eljardin. gave, dio, page 173. generous, generoso. gentleman, caballero, señor. get (to), alcanzar, peg. 92, 3. — tired (to), cansarse. — up (to), levantarse. give (to), dar, pag. 173; entregar. given, dado. glass, el vaso. glory, la gloria. glove, el guante. go (to), ir, page 177. — back (to), retirarfse). God, Dios. good, bueno, na. good sense, el cabal juicio. goodness, la bondad. got, logrado. grand-father, abuelo. — -mother, abuela. grateful, agradecido. grating, la rejilla, el ventanillo. great, grande. guess (to), acertar, page 148; adivinar. gun, el fusil. H. habit, el hábito, la costumbre. hair, el cabello, el pelo. half, medio, -dia. hand, la mano. handkerchief, el pañuelo. happiness, la felicidad, la di- cha, la prosperidad. happy, dichoso, -sa. hat, el sombrero. have (to), haber (auxil. p. 32); tener, p. 35; poseer. — intercourse with (to), andar (con), page 172. — no objection (to), no tener ningún inconveniente. head, la cabeza. heavy, pesado, -da. he, él. — is, (él) es. heat, el calor. heir, heredero. Henry, Enrique. her, su, sus. here, aquí. — is, aqui está. — are, aquí están. herself, se. hesitate (to), dudar. high, alto, alta. himself, se. his, su, sus. honest, honrado, -da. honesty, la honradez, decencia. honoured, honrado, -da. horse, el caballo. hour, la hora. house, la casa. how, como. how?, ¿cómo? hunger, el hambre (f.). hungry [See to be — ]. hunting, la caza. hypocrite, el embustero, el hipó- crita. I. I, yo. idler, el holgazán. if, si. ignorance, la ignorancia. ill, adj., enfermo, -ma. ill-treat (to), maltratar. illusion, la ilusión. illustrious, glorioso, -sa. impart (to), anunciar. impatience, la impaciencia. in, en, á. — a foolish way, locamente. — the middle, en medio. incommode (to), incomodar, mo- lestar. indeed, si; ciertamente. Digitized by VaOOQlC 422 Vocabulary. infamoas, infame, inflaeDce, la influencia, el in- flujo. inhabitant, el vedno. ink, la tinta. — stand, el tintero. intention, la intención. inventor, el inventor. invite (to), invitar, convidar. iron, él hierro. i8, e«, page 40. — , estay page 43. — mistaken, se engaña, se equivoca. — named, se Hama. — worn, se lleva. island, (una) isla. isle, la isla (de). it, 7o, la. — is, es, lo es. a good while, mucho tiem- po há. cold, hace frió. necessary, es preciso. its, su, sus. itself, se. J« joiner, le carpintero. journey, el viaje. judge, el juez. just, justo, 'ta. K. keep (to), guardar; cumplir con. — back (to), apartarse. kilogramme, el kilogramo. kill (to), matar. kind, el género. kind, amable, afable. kindness, el favor, la bondad. king, rey. kingdom, el reino, knife, el cuchillo. know (things) to, saber, page 179. — (persons), to, conocer, page 159. knowledge, d conocimiento. L. labour, el trabajo. laborious, trabajador, -dora. lament (to), lamentar. ten, } «' f-rol. land, eUpais, el terreno, la tierra. large, ancho, ancha. late, adv., tarde. — (the), el difunto, la difunta. league, la legua. learn (to), aprender. learned, sabido. leather, el cuero. leave for (to), partir (or salir) para. lemon, el limón, less, menos. letter, la carta. levity, la ligereza, liar, el embustero, el mentiroso, liberty, la libertad. lie, la mentira. life, la vida. like (to), querer, pp. 148, 178. likewise, también, igualmente. line, el lino. literary man, el literato. little, pequeño, -ña. — (a), poco, poca. live (to), vivir. lively, vivo; lindo. livelihood, el mantenimiento. look at (to), mirar. — for (to), buscar, page 91, 1. looking-glass, el espejo. loose (to), perder, page 148. loss, la pérdida. love (to), amar; querer, pp. 148, 178. loved, amado. low, bajo, baja, luxury, el lujo, M. Madam, Señora. made, hecho (see hacer). magnificence, el lujo. mail, el correo. main-road, el camino real, la carretera. maintain (to), sostener, mantener, pag. 85. maintenance, el mantenimiento, majestic, majestuoso, -sa. male, varón. manner, la costumbre, la manera^ Digitized by vaOOQlC English-Spanish. 423 march, la marcha. — carefully (to), andar con cui- dado, married, casado, -da. master, el dtieño, el amo. — (teacher), maestro. match, la certUa, el fósforo, matter, el asuntOy la materia. me, to — ; me. meat, la came. memoir, \ , memorj^, / ^ ^^mona. mend (to), corregir y pp. 92, 4; 163. merchandise, la mercancía. merchant, el comerciante, el ne- gociante. merry, alegre. might, el poder. mind (to do something), a, la gana. minister, el ministro. misfortune, la desgracia. Miss, señorita, doña. mistake, la falta^ el error. modesty, la modestia, molest (to), incomodar, molestar. money, el dinero. month, el mes. moon, la luna. more, má^. — than, más que^ (with nume- rals and sentences) más de» mother, madre. motive, él motivo, la razón. mouth, la boca. movement, el ejercicio. Mr., Señor, don. Mrs., Señora, doña. much, mucho; mucho, -cha. murder (to), asesinar. must, ser preciso, deber. mutton, el carnero. my, mi. N. name, el nombre. narrow, estrecho, -cha. nation, la nación. native, natural. navigation, la navegación. near, próximo, -ma. — , adv., cerca. necessity, la necesidad, el apuro. negligence, el descuido. neighbour, el vecino. — hood, las cercanías, la vecindad. news, la noticia. — paper, el diario, el periódico. next, próximo, -ma. no, no. noise, el ruido. noon, (el) mediodía. nose, la nariz. not, no. — yet, no . . . todavía, or to- davía no. now, ahora. noxious, dañoso, nocivo. number (to), contar, page 153. numerous, numeroso, -sa. O. obedient, obediente, dócil. object, el asunto. obtain (to)^ obtener, page 35; lograr', alanzar, page 92, 3. obtained, logrado, obtenido. of, de. oflfence, la injuria, la ofensa. offend (to), ofender. office, el despacho, la oficina, el escritorio. officer, el official. oil, el aceite. old, viejo, vieja. olive, la aceituna. one (impers.), se. — must, es preciso. oneself, se. only, único, única. — (adv.), únicamente. opportunity, la ocasión. or, ó (sometimes ú; see Coii- Janctions). orange, la naranja. orator, el orador. orchard, el huerto. order, el orden (succession). — , la orden (^command>. — (to), mandar, ordenar. other, otro, otra. other(s), the, lo(s) demás. ounce, la onza. outskirts, el contomo. overrate (to), presumir de. Digitized by VaOOQlC 424 Vocabulary. owe (to), deber, ser deudor, ser preciso. ox, el buey (pl. los bueyes). packet of cigarettes, la cajetilla de cigariUos. paid, pagado. pains, el trabajo, painter, el pintor. palace, el palacio. paper, el papel. pardon (to), perdonar. parents, los padres. patience, la paciencia. pay (to), pagar, page 91, 2. — a visit (to), ir á ver, venir á ver. payment, el pago, salario. peace, la paz. pen, la pluma. pencil, el lápiz. people^ la gente (eiug.\ el pueblo. perhaps, acaso, taUvez, quizá. persecute (to), perseguir, pp. 91, 2; 163. peseta, la peseta = 100 cents, or 9Vs d. physician, él médico. picture, él cuadro. pig, el cerdo. pious, piadoso, -sa. pipe, la pipa. pitiful, piadoso, 'Sa. place, el lugar; el puesto. play (to), jugar, page 91, ;^; 158. — cards (to), jugar á las cartas (or á los naipes). please (to), agradar. pleasure, el gozo placer. pocket, él bolsillo. poetical, poético, poética. policeman, el municipal. poor,. pobre. porter, portero. position, la posición. post, él correo. pound, la libra. poverty, la pob eza. power, el poder; la potencia. praise (to), alabar. precious, precioso, -sa. preliminaries, los preliminares. preserve (to), conservar. price, el precio. pride, él orgullo. prince, él principe. produce (to), producir ^ page 160. projectile, él proyectil. promenade, el paseo. promise, la promesa. — (to), prometer. prompt, pronto. proper, propio, -a. property, la propiedad. prosperity, la prosperidad. protector, el protector. proud, soberbio, -bia. proof, la prueba. — (to), mostrar, probar, page 153. province, la provincia. prudence, la prudencia. prudent, prudente, cuerdo. prudently, prudentemente. pull out (to), sacar, page 91, 1. punishment, él castigo. pupil, el discípulo. purse, la b(^a, el bolsillo. put (to), meter: poner, pp. 178, 187. — to flight (to), derrotar. quarrel (to), reñir, page 163, 164 note; regañar. queen, reina. quickly, ligero, deprisa; pronto. B. raise (to), encumbrar. rampart, la valla. rare, raro, rara. read (to), leer. reason, la razón, él motive. reasonable, razonable, cuerdo, prudente. receive (to), recibir. received, recibido. recommend (to), recomendar, page 148. region, la región. relation (a), el pariente. remedy, d remedio. renowned, famoso, -sa; célebre. repeat (to), repasar; repetir, page 153. Digitized by VjOOQIC English-Spanish. 425 report, la memoria. repose (to), reposar, descansar. respectable, respetable, honrado. retire (to), retirar (se). return (to), volver, pp. 153, 187. revolution, la revoltmón. reward (to), premiar, recom- pensar. rich, rico, rica. riches, laCs) riquezafs). risk (to), arriesgar, page 91, 2. river, el rio. road, el camino. robber, el ladrón. room, el cuarto. -"ab¿ut, } «^ re^euor. rout (an army) (to), derrotar. run (to), correr. rural, campestre, rural. S. sad, lastimoso, triste. safety, la seguridad. sage, sabio, sabia. said, dicho, pp. 173, 187. sail, la vela. savoury, sabroso, -sa. say (to), decir, page 173, 187. scarcely, apenas. sceptre, el cetro. scholar, el discípulo. science, la cienda. scold (to), reñir, page 163, 164 note; regañar. sea, el mar. search (to), buscar, page 91, 1. season, la estación. security, la seguridad. see (to), ver, page 180. seem (to), parecer, page 159. seen, visto (fr. ver), pp. 180, 187. seldom, raro, raramente. send (to), enviar. sent, enviado. serious, serio, seria. servant, la criada; (man) — , el criado. service, el favor, el servicio. set out (to), partir. severe, severo, -ra. shame, el pudor; la vergüenza. shameful, vergonzoso, -sa. she, ella. — is, (ella) es. shine (to), relucir, page 159. ship, el barco, el buque. shoe, el zapato. shop, la tienda, (store) el al- macén. short, pequeño, -ña; corto, -ta. show (to), mostrar, page 153. sick, adj. enfermo, -ma. sign (to), firmar. silk, la seda. silver, la plata. simplicity, la sencillez. sincere, sincero, -ra. Sir, caballero. sit down (to), sentarse, page 148. situation, la situación, el puesto. slaughter (to), matar. sleep, el sueño. — - (to), dormir, page 177. slowly, lentamente, despacio. small, pequeño, -ña. smell, el olor. — (to), oler, pag. 156. smoke (to), fumar. soap, el jabón. soft, suave. sole, único, única. something, algo. song, la canción. sonorous, sonoro, -ra. soon, luego. sorry, lastimoso, triste. soul, el alma (f.). southern, meridional. space, el espacio. Spain, España. speak (to), hablar. species, el género, la especie. spend (to), gastar. — (time), (to), pasar el (tiempo). spoil (to), gastar, echar (se) á perder. spring, la primavera. square, la plaza. stand away (to), apartarse. state, el estado. stomach, el estómago. stone, la piedra. store, el amacén, straw, la paja. street, la calle. 27** Digitized by VaOOQlC 426 Vocabulary. streetlamp, d farol. streDgth, la fuerza, strict, severo, -ra; estricto, -ta, study, el estudio. — (to), estudiar. subject, el subdito; el sujeto. suburb, el arrabal. succeed (to), suceder. — in (to), acertar, page 148. suffer, sufrir, padecer, page 159. — ed, padecido, sufrido. sugar, el azúcar. summer, el verano. superfluous, excusado, supérfluo. superior (tbe), el jefe. sustain (to), sostener, mantener, page 35. sweet, dulce, (pretty) Undo. swift, pronto. sword, la espada. T. table, la mesa. taint (to), corromper, take (to), tomar. — care (to), tener cuidado, cui- dar (se). — out (to), sacar, page 91, J. — pains (to), incomodarse. tea, el té. terminate (to), terminar, acabar. tell (to), decir, pp. 173, 187. — me, dime, dígame V. tell (a story, etc.), (to), contar, page 153. than, que, (with numerals and sentences) de. thankful, agradecido. *• thanks, gracias. that (conj.), que. — (pron.), ese, esa, eso; aquel, aquella, aquéllo. the, el, la, los, las; — (m. sing.) al. — whole . . . todo el . . ., toda la . . . thee (to), te. their, su, sus. themselves, se. there, allí. — is, — are, hay. — was, — were, había. these, estos, estas. they, ellos (m.), ellas (f.). thief, el ladrón. thing, (una) cosa. think (to), pensar, page 148; creer. thirst, la sed. thirsty [see to be—]. this, este, esta, esto. those, esos, esas; aquellos, aquelU^. three, tres. through, por; á través. thunderbolt, el trueno. thunderstorm, la tronada, la borrasca, la tempestad. tire (to), cansar. tired, cansado. to, ó, para; que. tobacco, el tabaco. tobacconist-shop, el estanco. to-day, hoy. together, junto, juntos. tomorrow, mañana. too, demasiado, además, también, — much, demasiado. tooth, el diente (pl. los dientes). touch (to), tocar, page 91, 1. town, la ciudad. Town hall (the), la Casa Ayun- tamiento. traveller, el viajero. treat (to), tratar. tree, él árbol. trouble oneself (to), incomodarse. trough, el bebedero. turn round (to), girar. twelve, doce. two, dos. U. ugly, feo, fea. uncle, tío. understand (to), comprender. unfortunately, por desgracia. unhappy man (the), el desdichado. V. vain, vano, vatia. valley, el valle. valour, la valentía, el valor. vassal, el vasallo. very, muy. — early in the morning, mu¡/ de mañana. Digitized by Google English-Spanish. 427 very well, primorosamente. vice, el vicio. victuals, los víveres, village, la aldeas él lugar, virtue, la virtud, visit (to), visitar^ or ir (or venir) á ver. volume, el volumen^ el tomo. W. wager, la apuesta. wait for (to), esperar (á), walk, public — , él paseo, — (to), andar y page 172. want, el apuro, la necesidad, — (to), f altar, necesitar] I want, me falta, necesito, — (to), querer, pp. 148, 178. waste (to), gastar. watch, el reloj, — (to), velar. way, el camino. we, nosotros (m.), nosotras (f.). wealth, la riqueza. wear (to), llevar. weddinff / ^^ hoda. ^' \ las nupcias, week, la semana. weight, la carga, el peso. what?, ¿qué? why?, ¿por qué? who, quien (sing.), quienes (pl.). who ?, ¿ quién ? (sing.), ¿ quiénes ? (pl.) whole, todo, toda (see the — ). widow, -rer, viuda, viudo. wild, feroz, will (the), la voluntad, —, querer, pp. 148, 178. William, Guillermo. willingly, con mucho gusto. win (to), ganar, lograr, wind, él viento. window, la ventana, wine, el vino. winter, el invierno. wisdom, la sabiduría, wise, 8CLl)iOy 'hia. wish, el deseo^ la voluntad. — (to), desear, querer, pp. 148, 178. with, con. — pleasure, con mucho gusto. wonderful, admirable, „^^A i ^(^ leña, ^^^^> \ la madera. wool, la lana, word, la palabra, work, el trabajo, la obra, — (to), trabajar, obrar. workman, el obrero, el trabajador, world, él mundo, worthy, digno, digna. wounded, herido, page 167. write (to), escribir, page 187. written, escrito, page 187. yard (Spanish — ), la vara. year, el año, yes, si, yesterday, ayer. you (polite form), usted; (pl.) ustedes. — (non-polite form.), tú; (pl.) vosotros, -as, young, joven. — man, el joven, your, su , , . de V. yourself, \ yourselves, / youth (young man), el joven. -*^:§— Ce^O— §3-0- Digitized by VjOOQIC I ! Digitized by VaOOQlC .ami «^..tp^ Educational Works and Glass-Books Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauek FOR THE STUDY OF MODERN LANGUAGES. PUBLISHBJD BT JULIUS GrOOS, HfilBELBERa. «With each newly-learnt language one wins a new soul.» Charles V. «At the end of the 19* century the world is ruled by the interest for trade and traffic; it breaks through the barriers which separate the peoples and ties up new relations between the nations.» William II. ,yjuliu8 GfooBy Fuhlisher, has for the last fifty years been devoting his special attention to educational tvorlcs on modern languages, and has published a large number of class-booUs for the study of those modern languages most generally spoken. In this particular department he is in our opinion unsur- passed by any other German publisher. The series consists of_ 290 volumes of different sizes which are all arranged on the same system, as is easily seen by a glance at the grammars tvhich so closely resemble one another, that an acquaintance with one greatly facilitates the study of the others. This is no small advantage in these exacting times when the knowledge of one language alone is hardly deemed sufficient. The textbooks of the Gaspey - Otto "Sauer method have, within the last ten years, acquired an universal reputation, increasing in pro- portion as a knowledge of living languages has become a necessity of modern life. The chief advantages, by which they compare favorably with thousands of similar books, are Jmoness of price and good appearance, the happy union of theory and practice, the clear scientific basis of the grammar proper com- bined with practical conversational exercises, and the system, here conceived for the first time and consistently carried out, by which the pupil is really taught to speak and write the foreign language. The grammars are all divided into two parts, commencing with a systematic explanation of the rules for pronunciation, and are again sub- divided into a number of Lessons* Each Part treats of the Parts of Speech in succession, the first giving a rapid sketch of the fundamental rules, which are explained more fully in the second. The rules appear to us to be clearly given, they are explained by examples, and the exercises are quite sufficient. To this method is entirely due the enormous success unth which the Gaspey-OttO'-Sauer textbooks have met; most other grammars either content themselves toith giving the theoretical exposition of the grammatical forms and trouble the pupil with a confused mass of the most far-fetched irregularities and eacceptions withotit ever applying thetn, or go to the other extreme, and simply teoA^h him to repeat in a parrot- like manner a few colloquial phrases unthout letting him grasp the real genius of the foreign language. The system referred to is easily discoverable: 1. in the arrangement of the grammar: 2. in the endeavour to enable the pupu to understand a regular text as soon as possible, and above all to teach him to speak the foreign hinguage; this latter point toas considered by the authors so particu- larly characteristic of their toorks, that they have styled them — to distinguish them from other tvorlts of a similar kind — Conversational €h*ammars» digitized by VjOO^IC Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer for the study of Modern laogoages. The first series comprises manuals for the use of Englishmen and consists of 54 volumes. Our admiration for this rich collection of worUiSy for the method dis- played and the fertile genius of certain of the authors, is increorsed token we examine the other serieSf which are intended for the use of foreigners. In these works the chief difficulty under which several of the authors have laboured, has been the necessity of teaching a language in a foreign idiom; not to inention the peculiar difficulties which the German idiom offers in writing school-hooks for the study of that language. We must confess that for those persons ufho, from a pmcticaZ point of view, wish to learn a foreign language sufficiently well to enable them to twite and speak it with ease, the authors have set down the gram^natical rules in «wcA a way, that it is equally easy to understand and to learn them. Moreover, we cannot but commend the elegance and neatness of the type and binding of the bodies. It is doubtless on this account too that these volumes have been received mth so much favour and that several Imve rea^^ied such a large circulation. We willingly testify that the whole collection gives proof of much care and industry, both with regard to the aims it has in view and the ivay. in whdch these have been carried out, and, moreover, reflects great credit on the editor, this collection being in reality quite an exceptional thing of its Mnd." . . . . Í. (Eoctract fronh the Literary Review.) All books bound. EpglishL Editions^ Elementary Modern Armenian Qrammar by Gnlian ... Arabic Grammar by Thatcher . . . . j . . Key to the Arabic Grammar by Thatcher Arabic Chrestomathy by Harder Danish CoDversation- Grammar by Thomas Key to the Danish Gonversatiou- Grammar by Thomas Dntelft Conversation-Grammar by Valette. 2. Ed Key to the Dutch Convers.-Grammar by Valette Dutch Reader by Valette. 2. Ed JB^renelft Conversation-Grammar by Otto-Onions. 13. Ed. . . net Key to the French Convers.-Grammar by Otto-Onions. 8. Ed Elementary French Grammar by Wright. 4. Ed French Reader by Onions Materials for French Prose Composition by Otto-Onions. 5. Ed. . . French Dialogues by Otto-Corkran Cl^erntan Conversation-Grammar by Otto. 29. Ed net Key to the Gkrman Convers.-Grammar by Otto. 21. Ed Elementary German Grammar by Otto. 9. Ed First German Book by Otto. 9. Ed German Reader. I. 8. Ed.; H. 5. Ed.; III. 2. Ed. by Otto . . each Materials for translating English into German by Otto- Wright. 7. Ed. Key to the Mater, f. tr. Engl. 1. Germ, by Otto. 8. Ed. German Dialogues by Otto. 5. Ed Accidence of the German language by Otto-Wright. 2. Ed. . . . Handbook of English and German Idioms by Lange German Verbs with their appropriate prepositions etc. by Tebbitt . Julius Oroos, London. Paris. Borne. St. Petersburgh. Heidelberg. 1 05 3 50 1 3 50, 2 \0\ 70 75 60 li- so 70 05 85 65 50 70 45 85 85 60 50 45 60 35 Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer for the stady of modern laogaages. English Editions^ The Haussa language (Die Haussasprache ; la langue haoussa) by Seidel Hindustani Conversation -Grammar by Clair -Tisdall Key to the Hindustani Convers.- Grammar by Clair -Tisdall Italian Conversation-Grammar by Saner -de Arteaga. 9. Ed. net Key to the Italian €k)nvers.-6rammar by Saner -de Arteaga. 8. Ed Elementary Italian Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed Italian Reader by Cattaneo. 2. Ed Italian Dialogues by Motti Japanese Conversation-Grammar by Plant Key to the Japanese Oony.-Grammar by Plant Modem Persian Conversation-Grammar by St. Clair-Tisdall Key to the Mod. Persian Convers.-Grammar by St. Glair-TisdaU Portns^nese Conversation-Grammar bj Eordgien and Eunow Key to the Portuguese Clonvers.-Grainmar by Kordgien and Kanow . . . Unssian Conversation-Grammar by Motti. 3. Ed Key to the Bnssian Conyers.-Grammar by Motti. 8. Bd Elementary Russian Grammar by Motti. 2. Ed Key to the Klementary Bnssian Grammar by Motti. 2. £d Russian Reader by Werkbaupt and Roller ISpanish Conversation-Grammar by Saner -de Arteaga. 7. Ed. net Key to the Spanish €k)nver8.-Grammar by Saner -de Arteaga. 6. £d. . . . Elementary Spanish Grammar by Favia. 2. Ed Spanish Reader by Arteaga Spanish Dialogues by Sauer-Corkran Elementary Swedish Grammar by Port. 2. Ed Turkish Conversation -Grammar by Hagopian Key to the Turkish Convers.-Grammar by Hagopian Ara.'bic Edition* Eleine deutsehe Sprachlehre for Araber von Hartmann .... Ai*meiiia>n Edition* Elementary ISnglish Grammar for Armenians by Gulian .... Bulgarian Editions, Eleine deutsehe Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky. 2. Aufl. Eleine en^^lisehe Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky . . Eleine firanzSsisehe Sprachlehre fur Bulgaren von Gawriysky . Qeirman Editions, Arabisehe Eonversations-Grammatik v. Harder. 2. Aufl. . . . Schlüssel daza v. Harder. 8. Anfl Arabisehe Chrfestomathie v. Harder JBuIs^arische Eonversations-Grammatik v. Gawriysky .... Schlüssel dazu v. (Jawriysky Chinesisehe Eonversations-Grammatik v. Seidel Schlüssel daza v. Seidel ^ Eleine chinesische Sprachlehre v. Seidel Schlüssel daza v. Seidel Dftnische Eonversations-Grammatik v. Wied. 2. Aufl Schlüssel daza v. Wied. 2. Aufl Duala Sprachlehre und WSrterbuch v, Seidel . ojgtiz^dbyGop^lc. Jalias Oroos, London. Paris. Borne. 8t Peteribargh. Heidelberg. Method Gaspey-OttoSauer for the stady of Modern langnages. Grei*ina.ii £2clitions« Aufl. liiifflische Eonversationfi-Grammatik y. G^spey-Runge. 25. Schlossel daza v. Range Englisclies Eony^rsations-Lesebucli v. Gkwpey-Runge. 6. Aufl. . . Kleine englische Sprachlehre v. Otto-Runge. 7. Aufl Schlüssel dasa v. Bange Englische Gespr&olie v. Runge. 2. Aun Materialien z. Übersetzen ins Englische v. Otto-Runge. 4. Aufl. . . Englische Chrestomathie v. Süpfle- Wright. 9. Aufl Handbuch englischer und deutscher Idiome v. Lange E^e SpracUehre und WOrterbach v. Seidel Eleine finnisehe Sprachlehre y. Neuhaus Franzdsisehe Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Otto-Runge. 28. Aufl. 8chlü886l dazu y. Range Franz. Eony.-Lesebuch I. 10. Aufl., II. 5. Aufl. y. Otto-Runge. h . . Franz. Eony.-Leseb. f. Madchsch. y. Otto-Runge I. 5. Aufl., IL 3. Aufl. k Eleine franzdsische Sprachlehre y. Otto-Runge. 9. Aufl Schlñssel daza v. Range Materialien z. Übersetzen ins FranzOsische y. Runge FranzOsische Ge8pr3,che y. Otto-Runge. 8. Aufl Franzdsisches Lesebuch y. Süpfle. 11. Aufl Italieniselie Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Sauer. 12. Aufl. . . Schlttssel daza v. Cattaneo Italienisches Eonyersations-Lesebuch y. Sauer. 5. Aufl Italienische Chrestomathie y. Cattaneo. 3. Aufl Eleine italienische Sprachlehre y. Sauer. 10. Aufl Sohlússel dazu v. Cattaneo. 2. Aufl Italienische Gespnlche y. Sauer-Motti. 5. Aufl Übungsstücke zum Übers. a. d. Déutschen i. Ital. y. Lardelli. 5. Aufl. Japanische Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Plant Schlüssel dazu v. Plant . , Marokkanische Sprachlehre y. Seidel JVeiigriechische Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Fetraris .... Schlüssel daza y. Fetraris ^ Lehrbuch der neugriechischen Volksspraohe v. Petraris BiiederlM.ndisc]ie Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Valette. 2. Aufl. Schlüssel daza y. Valette Niederlándisches Eony.-Lesebuch v. Valette. 2. Aufl Eleine niederlándische Sprachlehre v. Valette. 3. Aufl Polniscke Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Wicherkiewicz. 3. Aufl. . Schlüssel daza y. Wicherkiewicz. 3. Aufl Portuffiesisclie Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Ey Schlüssel aazu v. Ey Eleine portugiesische Sprachlehre y. Eordgien-Ey. 4. Aufl. . . . Bnssische Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Fuchs. 5. Aufl Schlüssel daza v. Fachs. 5. Aufl Russisches Eonyersations-Lesebuch y. Werkhaupt Eleine russische Sprachlehre y. Motti. 2. Aufl Schlüssel daza v. Motti. 2. Aufl ISckwedisdie Eonyersations-Grammatik v. Walter. 2. Aufl. . Schlüssel dazu v. Walter. 2. Aufl Eleine schwedische Spradilehre y. Fort. 2. Aufl. ....!! . ISpanisdie Eonyersations-Grammatik y. Sauer-Ruppert.r^^ Aufl. Schlüssel daza v. Ruppert. 3. Aufl nigi^^ed.by V»00. T JoliuB GroOB. London. Paris. Rome. St. Petersbargh. Heidelberg. Method Gaspey-Otto-Saner for the stody of modern laAgaages. Spanisches Lesebuch v. Arteaga . . ETieine spanische Spracblehre v. Saner. 7. Aufl Schliissel dasu v. Buuge. 2. Aufl Spanisclie Ge8pr9.che v. Sauer. 3. Aufl Spanische Rektionsliste v. Sauer-Kordgien 8aahili Eonversations-Qrammatik v. Seidel . . . . Schlüssel daza v. Seidel Suahili WOrterbuch v. Seidel Tsdiechische Eonyersations-Grammatik v. Maschner. Sohlñssel daza v. Maschner Tfirkisehe Eonversations-Grammatik v. Jehlitsclika . Schlüssel daza v. Jehlitschka Eleine mis^ariselie Sprachlehre v. Nagy. 2. Aufl. . Schlüssel daza v. Nagy Ungarische Chrestomathie v. Eont 7. Éd. each Frencli Edltioiis, Grammaire allemande par Otto-Nicolas. 18. Éd. . Corrige des themes de la Grammaire allemande par Otto-Nicplas. Petite grammaire allemande par Otto-Vcrrier. 10. Éd. . . . Lectures allemandes par Otto. I. 7. Éd., II. 5. Éd., III. 2. Éd. Erates deutsches Lesebuch von Verrier Conversations allemandes par Otto-Verrier. 5. Éd Grammaire an^^laise par Mauron- Verrier. 10. Éd Corrige des themes de la Grammaire aoglaise par Maaron- Verrier. 6. Éd. . . Petite grammaire anglaise par Mauron. 7. Éd Lectures anglaises par Mauron. 3. Éd Conversations anglaises par Corkran. 2. Éd Grammaire árabe par Armez Corrige des themes de la Grammaire árabe par Armez Chrestomathie árabe par Harder La langue cong^olaise par Seidel-Struyf Grammaire ^recqiie par Capos Corrige des themes de la Grammaire grecqae par Capos Petite grammaire hongroine par Eont Corrige des themes de la petite grammaire hongroise par Kont Chrestomathie hongroise par Eont Grammaire italienne par Sauer. 11. Éd Corrige des themes de la Grammaire itaUenne par Sauer. 7.Éd Petite grammaire italienne par Motti. 4. £d Chrestomathie italienne par Cattoneo. 2. Éd Conversations italiennes par Motti. 2. Éd Grammaire Japonaise par Plaut Corrige des themes de la Grammaire japouaise par Plaut Grammaire néerlandaise par Valette. 2. Éd Corrige des themes de la Grammaire néerlandaise par Valette Lectures néerlandaises par Valette. 2. Éd Grammaire portüs^aise par Armez Corrige de la Grammaire portugaise par Armez Grammaire russe par Puchs-Nicolas. 4. Éd Corrige des themes de la Grammaire rasse par Fuchs-Kioolas. 4. Éd. . . . Petite grammaire russe par Motti. 2. Éd Corrige des themes de la petite grammaire ruase par Motti. 2. Édr^. . t . Lectures russea par Werkhaupt et Roller . , . ^qtzed by v^pO^lC , 30 70 30 65 60 75 60 85 75 60 80 05 70 30 30 30 60 70 70 85 -60 1 30 — «o - 170 I — 60 50 50 3 1 3 1 40 2 10 - I 70 - i 70 - I 35 1 130 1 30 - 60 - 70 - 70 - i 65 2! 10 - ! 70 1 70 - 60 1 ~ 1 ,60 _ ' tío 1 75 - 70 - 70 - 30 -170 Jalins Oróos, London. Paris. Rome. St. Fetersbnrsli Hoidolbersr. Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer for the study of moAttn langiages. JFVench Kiditioii». — ^ Qrammaire espaJj^nole par 8auer-Serrano. 6. Éd ii I Ck>iTi^ ám thémM de la gimmm. eipa^ pt^ Saner-Serrano. 5. Éd. . . . , — Petite gprammaire espagnole par Tanty. 2. Ed — Leotores espagnoles par Arteaga |' 1 Petite grammaire Sliédoise par Fort | — Qreelg Editions, Kleine deniselie Spraohlehre fOr Griechen yon Maltes . , . Deutsche Oesprftclie mr Grieohen von Maltes Kleine englisehe Sprachlelire für Griechen von Deffner . . . Ita.lia>ii ISditioiiLS, Grammatica firancese di Motti. 3. £d Chiave d«Ua grammatica firancese di Motti. 2. Ed Grammatica elementare francese di Sauer-Motti. 4. Ed. . . . Letture francesi di Le Boucher Grammatica del Greco volgare di Palumbo Grammatica inglese di Pavia. 6. Ed. Cbiave della grammatica inglese di Pavia. 3. Ed Grammatica elementare inglese di Pavia. 3. Ed Letture inglesi di Le Boucher Grammatica elementare portog^hese di Palumbo Grammatica mssa di Motti Chiave della grammatica masa di Motti Grammatica Bpag:niiola di Pavia. 3. Ed Chiave della Grammatica spagnnola di Pavia. 2. Ed Grammatica elementare spagnuola di Pavia. 3. Ed. Grammatica elementare «védese di Pereira Grammatica tedesca di Sauer-Ferrari. 8. Ed Chiave della Grammatica tedesca di Sauer-Ferrari. 4. Ed Grammatica elementare tedesca di Otto. 6. Ed Letture tedesche di Otto. 5. Ed Antología tedesca di Verdaro Conversazioni tedesche di Motti. 2. Ed Avviamento al trad, dal ted. in ital. di Lardelli. 5. Ed. . . . JOntcli Editions, Kleine fingelselie Spraakkunst door Coster Kleine Fransche Spraakkunst door Welbergen Kleine filoogdllitselie Grammatica door Schwippei-t. 2. Dr. . Kleine ISpaanselie Spraakkunst door van Haaff Sleutel bij de kleine Spaansche Spraakkunst door van Haaff FoUshi Edition, Kleine dentselie Sprachlehre für Polen von Paulus .... Foytng-nese Editions. 1 70 05 85 75 70 I ,60 — 60 — 70 -'70 1,30 — 1 60 -70 -,70 105 Grammatica alienta por Otto-Prév6t. 3. Ed Chave da Grammatica allemá por Otto-Prév6t. 2. Ed Grammatica elementar allema por Prévót-Pereira. 3. Ed. •bó^Ie — ,65 160 '70 — :70 — '70 - 170 ,30 — |70 1 40 60 70 Julius Oróos. London. Paris. Rome. St. Petersburgli. Heidelberg. Method Gaspey-Otto-Sauer for the study of modern languages. Portuguese Editiong» Livro de leitura inglesa por Le Boucher Grammatioa francesa por Tanty-Yasconcellos. 2. Ed. ... Chave da OrammatiGa francesa por Tanty-Yasconoellos. 2. Ed Livro de leitura francesa por Le Boucher Grammatica elementar sueca por Pereira R>oixiiia.ii Ed-itions, Gramática irermana de Leist Cheea gramancií germane de Leist Elemente de gramaticS germana de Leist. 2. Ed Gonversatíun! germane de Leist. 2. Ed Gramática francesa de Leist Cheea gramaticil francese de Leist Elemente de gramática francesS. de Leist. 2. Ed Gonversa^iiml francese de Leist. 3. Ed Itiissia.li Editions* £n^lish Grammar for Russians by Hauff Key to the English Grammar for Russians hy Hauff French Grammar for Russians by Malkiel Key to the French Grammar for Russians by Malkiel German Grammar for Russians by Hauff Key to the German Grammar for Russians by Hauff Italian Grammar for Russians by Mo2ejko Key to the Italian Grammar for Russians by Mozejko Japanese Grammar for Russians by Plaut-Issacovitch . . . Key to the Japanese Grammar for Russians by Plaut-Issacovitch .... Seyvia.li EkJitions^ Elementary English Grammar for Servians by Petrovitch . . Petite grammaire firan^aise pour Serbes par Petrovitch . . . Svredislr Edition, Kleine dentsclie Sprachlehre fur Schweden von Walter . . . Spaiiodsh. Editions, Gramática alemana por Ruppert. 3. Ed Clave de la Gram&tica alemana por Ruppert. 3. Ed Gramática elemental alemana por Otto-Ruppert. 7. Ed Gramática in|^lesa por Pavia. 2. Ed Clave de la Gram&tica Inglesa por Pavia. 2. Ed Gramática sucinta de la lengua inglesa por Pavia. 5. Ed. . . . Libro de lectura inglesa por Le Boucher Gramática francesa por Tanty-Arteaga. 2. Ed Clave de la Gramática francesa por Tanty-Arteaga. 2. Ed Gramática sucinta de la lengua francesa por Otto. 5. Ed. . . . Libro de lectura francesa por Le Boucher Gramática sucinta de la lengua italiana por Pavia. 4. Ed. . Gramática sucinta de la lengua rusa por d'Arcais OlaYe de la Gramática sucinta rusa por d' Arcáis Tchecli Eclition, Kleine deutsche Sprachlehre fílr Tschechen von*¿8étee9^^ . Jnlius 8rooa, London. París. Koiue. 8t. Potorshnrch. Holdellwn-. Method Oaspey-Otto-Sauer for the stnij of nodera languages. Tixrfeish EkJitions, KleÍDe deutsehe Spraclilehre fur Türken yion Wely Bey-BoUand Deutflches Lesebnoh fllr Türken von Wely Bey-Bolland Conyersation-Books by Connor in two languages: English-German. 2. Ed. English-French. 2. Ed. English-Italian. 2. Ed. English-Rnssian . . . English-Spanish . . . English-Swedish . . . Deiitsch-D9,nÍ8ch . . . Deutsch-PranzSsisch. 2. Ed. . — Dentsch-Italienisch . . Deut8ch-Niederl9,ndisch Deutsch-Portugiesisch . in three languages: English-German-French. 14. Ed in four languages: English-German-French-Italian. 2. Ed. . . — 6011 -1601, 60 1 05 — 60 — 70 70 — 70 ¡~ 70 — 70 — 7011 Dentsoh-Eom&nisch Dentsch-Rossisch . Deutsch-Schwedisch Dentsoh-Spanisch . Deutsch-Türkisch . Fran^ais-Italien . Fran9aÍ8-E8pagnol Fran9aÍ8-PortngaÍ8 Fran9ais-Ra8se . Italiano-Spagnuolo Oerman Language by Becker • I§(paiii8h Commercial Correspondence by Arteaga y Pereira D&nisclier Sprachführer von Forchhammer Bichtige Aussprache d. Mosterdeutschen v. Dr. E. Dannheisser, br* £iigli8Che Handelskorrespondenz v. Arendt. 2. Anfl • Karze franzdsische Grammatik von H. Range Franz. SprachL f. Handelssch. v. Dannheisser, Küffher u. Offenmüller Italienische kaufm. Eorresp.-Gramm. v. Dannheisser u. Sauer. 2. Anfl. Schlttssel dazu v. DanDheisser II correttore italiano von Mayo-Gelati Anleitun^ z. deutselieii, franz., eiia:!. u. ital. GeschEffcs- bnefen von Oberholzer u. Osmond, br IS^paniselie Handelskorrespondenz von Arteaga y Pereira . . . Kleines spanisches Lesebuch f. Handelsschalen v. Ferrades-Langeheldt Langue allemande par Becker Le danois parlé par Forchhammer Correspondance commerciale espaa^nole par Arteaga y Pereira . Lengua alemana de Becker The Publisher is untiringly engaged in extending the range of educa- tional works issuing from his Press. A number of new books are now in course of preparation. The new editions are constantly improved and kept up to date. Digitized by VjOO^IC Julius ftrooi, London. Parlg. Borne. St. Peteraburgh. Heidellrarg. I THE BORROWER WILL BE CHARGED AN OVERDUE FEE IF THIS BOOK IS NOT RETURNED TO THE LIBRARY ON OR BEFORE THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW. NON-RECEIPT OF OVERDUE NOTICES^ DOES NOT EXEMPT THE BORROWER FROM OJ^DUE FEES. ^ 1^ %' '>'.*^^ -